***ATIR***

STRAP
for

Windows
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
PROGRAM

USER’S MANUAL

Version 12.0

December 2005

Version 12.0 i 12/05

STRAP

Disclaimer
The STRAP programs have been written by a team of highly qualified engineers and programmers and have
been extensively tested. Nevertheless, the authors of the software do not assume responsibility for the validity
of the results obtained from the programs or for the accuracy of this documentation.

The user must verify his own results

The authors remind the user that the programs are to be used as a tool for
structural analysis, and that the engineering judgement of the user is the final
arbiter in the development of a suitable model and the interpretation of the
results.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc.

Version 12.0 ii 12/05

STRAP

Table of Contents
1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1.1 Selection of the Computer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 Inputting the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.2 Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.2.1 Global Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.2 Local Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.2.1 Beam Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.2.2 Quadrilateral Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.2.3 Triangular Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.3 Sign Conventions - Forces and Moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.3 Display - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

1.3.1 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.3.2 Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.3.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.3.4 Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.3.4.1 Dimension and elevation lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.3.4.2 Grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.3.5 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.3.6 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

1.4 General options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

1.4.1 Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.4.2 Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.4.3 Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1.4.4 Side Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.4.5 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.4.6 Icon bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.4.7 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.4.8 Print tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.4.9 Print drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.4.9.1 Regular drawing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.4.9.2 Rendered drawing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.4.10 Print order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.4.11 Print/edit drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.4.11.1 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.4.11.2 Zoom menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1.4.11.3 Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1.4.11.4 Text menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1.4.11.5 Line menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1.4.11.6 Select text/lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

1.5 Entities Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

1.5.1 Node Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1.5.2 Beam/Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

1.6 Command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

1.6.1 Enter a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1.6.2 Revise a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1.6.3 Retrieve a command (from the Clipboard ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1.6.4 Command Format - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58

Version 12.0 iii 12/05

STRAP
1.7 Batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1.7.1 Batch mode - Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1.7.2 Batch mode - Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
1.7.3 Batch mode - Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

1.8 STRAP main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

1.8.1 Define a new model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
1.8.2 Amend/rerun an existing model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64

1.9 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

1.9.1 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
1.9.2 File management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1.9.2.1 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1.9.2.2 Make a copy of a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
1.9.2.3 Copy to another directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
1.9.2.4 Copy from another directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
1.9.2.5 Change current directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
1.9.2.6 Copy to a ZIP file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
1.9.2.7 UnZIP a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
1.9.2.8 Display model file names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
1.9.2.9 Add a file to model list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
1.9.2.10 Recover model geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73

1.10 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74

1.10.1 Setup – Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
1.10.1.1 General, Miscellaneous, Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
1.10.1.2 Setup - Color for steel capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1.10.2 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1.10.2.1 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
1.10.2.2 Setup - Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1.10.2.3 Setup - Miscellaneous - Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
1.10.3 Setup - Print parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
1.10.3.1 Print styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
1.10.3.2 Setup – print drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81
1.10.4 Setup - Icon bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

1.11 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83

1.11.1 Footing design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
1.11.2 User steel section table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
1.11.2.1 File options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
1.11.2.2 Edit options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
1.11.3 Compute section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
1.11.4 Combine results of two projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
1.11.5 Recreate the model list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
1.11.6 STAAD File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90

1.12 DXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92

1.12.1 Convert metafile to DXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
1.12.2 Convert STRAP file to DXF (DXF export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
1.12.3 Create a new model from DXF file (DXF Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
1.12.3.1 Program capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
1.12.3.2 Layer assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
1.12.3.3 Import options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94

Version 12.0 iv 12/05

STRAP

2 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Geometry - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 New Model - title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Geometry - preliminary menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.3 Model Wizard - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.4 Geometry - Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.2 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2.1 Single Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2 Line of Nodes - Equal Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2.1 Line Equal - Arc of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.3 Line of Nodes - Unequal Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.3.1 Line general - Arc of nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.4 Nodes - Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2.4.1 Grid - cylindrical coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.2.5 Nodes - Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.2.5.1 User-defined formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.2.5.2 Program equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.6 Nodes - Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.2.7 Nodes - Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.2.8 Nodes - Renumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.2.9 Nodes - Coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

2.3 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

2.3.1 Restraints - Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.3.2 Rotate Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2.4 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

2.4.1 Beam - Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.4.1.1 Single beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.4.1.2 Beams - Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4.1.3 Arc of Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4.1.4 Chain of beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.4.2 Beams - Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.4.2.1 Grid - Line of Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.4.2.2 Grid - Arc of Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.4.2.3 Grid - Chain of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.4.3 Beams - bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.4.4 Beams - delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.5 Beams- section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.4.5.1 Properties - constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.5.2 Beam Properties - steel table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.4.5.3 Beam properties - dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.4.5.4 Tapered section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.4.5.5 Cable element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.4.5.6 Beam properties - combined sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.4.5.7 Property - paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.4.5.8 Composite beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.4.5.9 Additional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2.4.6 Beams - End releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2.4.7 Beam - Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2.4.8 Beams - Renumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.4.9 Beams - Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.4.10 Beams - Local axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Version 12.0 v 12/05

STRAP

2.5 Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

2.5.1 Single triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.5.2 Single quadrilateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.5.3 Chain of triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.5.4 Chain of quads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.5.5 Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.5.5.1 3D Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.5.5.2 Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.5.6 Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
2.5.6.1 Mesh type options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2.5.6.2 Element mesh contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.5.6.3 Element mesh parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.5.6.4 Modify mesh lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
2.5.6.5 Mesh example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.5.6.6 Mesh example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.5.7 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
2.5.8 Renumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
2.5.9 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.5.9.1 Element properties - define/revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.5.9.2 Elements - assign a property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.5.9.3 Delete a property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.5.9.4 Dummy Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.5.9.5 User defined material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.5.10 Local axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.5.11 Elements - Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90

2.6 Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

2.6.1 Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.6.2 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.6.3 Show Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.6.4 Unidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
2.6.5 Springs - Area/line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
2.6.6 Springs - local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95

2.7 Copy ...................................................................... 2-96

2.7.1 Copy - Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2.7.2 Copy - Translate and rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2.7.3 Copy - Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99

2.8 Solid elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

2.8.1 Solid elements - lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.8.2 Solid elements - rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
2.8.3 Solid elements - delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
2.8.4 Solid elements - renumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
2.8.5 Solid elements - material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

2.9 Wall Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107

2.9.1 Walls - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.9.2 Wall options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2.9.4 Wall - section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
2.9.4.1Edit/add section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
2.9.4.2Assign a section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.9.5 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.9.6 Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.9.7 Renumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.9.8 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.9.9 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115

Version 12.0 vi 12/05

STRAP

2.10 Sub-model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118

2.10.1 Sub-model - Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.10.2 Add to main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.10.3 Sub-model - "File" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121

2.11 Geometry - "Output" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122

2.12 Geometry "File" options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128

3 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Define a load case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2 Revise a load case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.3 Joint loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3.1 Joint loads - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.2 Joint loads - Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.3 Delete Joint Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.4 Joint loads - self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.5 Copy loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.4 Beam loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.4.1 Beam loads -define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4.1.1 Beam loads - uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.4.1.2 Beam loads - linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.4.1.3 Beam loads - concentrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4.1.4 Linear - line Beam Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.1.5 Beam loads - temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.4.1.6 Beam loads - self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.4.1.7 Beam loads - prestress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.4.1.8 Beam loads - lack-of-fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.4.1.9 Beam loads - Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.4.2 Revise Beam Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.4.3 Delete Beam Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4.4 Beam loads - copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.5 Element loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.5.1 Element loads - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5.1.1 Element loads - uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5.1.2 Element loads - uniform on group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.1.3 Element loads - bilinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.5.1.4 Element loads - temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.5.1.5 Element loads - self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5.2 Revise element loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5.3 Delete element loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5.4 Element loads - copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

3.6 Support displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

3.7 Combine load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Version 12.0 vii 12/05

STRAP

3.8 Global loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3.8.1 Global load types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.8.1.1 Point Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.8.1.2 Area loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.8.1.3 Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.8.2 Global loads - additional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

3.9 Solids loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.9.1 Solid loads - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.9.1.1 Solids loads - self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.9.1.2 Solids loads - temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.9.2 Revise element loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.9.3 Delete element loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.9.4 Element loads - copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

3.10 Delete Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

3.11 Deactivate loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

3.12 Moving loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.13 Chess (Staggered) Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

3.13.1 Generated Patterns (File CHESS.DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

3.14 P-Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

3.14.1 P-Delta - method of calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

3.15 Sway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

3.16 Copy a load case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

3.17 Wind loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

3.17.1 Wind loads - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.17.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.17.3 Define/revise wind load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.17.3.1 Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.17.3.2 Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.17.4 Wind design codes - Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.17.5 Wind design codes - lattice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.17.6 WINDUSER.DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

3.18 Loads - file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

3.19 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

3.20 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Version 12.0 viii 12/05

STRAP

4 Solve the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Solve - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Solution method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3 Singularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4 Problems - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.5 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.1.1 Combinations - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.2 Define/Revise Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.3 Add/revise a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.4 Combination Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.1.5 Display/Print Combination List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.1.6 Disable all combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.1.7 Deactivate selected combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.1.8 Definition options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

5.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.2.1 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.2 Output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.3 Axial Stress Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.3.1 Revise buckling length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.3.2 Define Steel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2.3.3 Display/Print Buckling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.4 Element Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.4.2 Revise results coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.4.3 Change reinforcement skew angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.4.4 Display result axes and skew angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.5 BS8007 – Crack widths and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.5.2 How to use this module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.5.3 BS8007 - Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.5.4 BS8007 - Results - Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.2.5.5 BS8007 - Detailed results-Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.2.5.6 BS8007 - Display parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.2.5.7 BS8007 - Results summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.2.5.8 Detailed results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5.3 Punching / Average moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5.3.1 Select nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.3.2 Punching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.3.2.1General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.3.2.2 Punching - single column data/results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.3.2.3 Punching default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.3.2.4 Punching parameters - selected nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.3.2.5 Punching - results and data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.3.3 Average moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.3.3.1 Rectangle size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.3.3.2 Average moments - Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.3.3.3 Average moments - Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Version 12.0 ix 12/05

STRAP

5.4 Graphic results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

5.4.1 Graphic Results - Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.4.2 Graphic Results - Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.4.2.1 Display types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.4.2.2 Result Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.4.2.3 Load cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.4.2.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.4.3 Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.4.4 Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.4.5 Write beam results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.4.6 Graphic results - BS8007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.4.7 Solid elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

5.5 Results - Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

5.5.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.5.2 Beam results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.5.3 Element results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.5.4 Node Deflections and Rotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.5.5 Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.5.6 Spring reaction stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.5.7 Wall results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.5.8 Tables - Sign Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.5.8.1 Sign Conventions - Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.5.8.2 Sign Conventions - Quadrilateral and Triangular Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

5.6 Single beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

5.7 Menu bar - Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

5.7.1 Footing postprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

5.8 Wood and Armer moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

6 Dynamic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Dynamic analysis - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 Nodal Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2.1 Nodal weights - Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Nodal weights - Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.3 Nodal weights - Self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.4 Nodal weights - Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.5 Nodal weight - static loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.6 Nodal weights - Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.7 Nodal weights - Display (tables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.3 Solve the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.4 Dynamic analysis - Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

6.4.1 Results - Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.4.1.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.4.1.2 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.4.2 Results - Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Version 12.0 x 12/05

STRAP

6.5 Seismic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

6.5.1 Seismic analysis - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.5.2 Seismic analysis - Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.5.3 Method of combining modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.5.4 Edit spectra file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5.5 Seismic analysis - parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.5.5.1 Response Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.5.6 Story calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.5.7 Weak stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.5.8 Seismic Analysis - Update results files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.5.9 Spectra file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

6.6 Forced vibrations and transient response (Time history response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6.1 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6.2 Time history response - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6.3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.6.4 Define/Revise a Load Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.6.4.1 Joint Loads - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.6.4.2 Joint loads - revise/delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.6.4.3 Base acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.6.4.4 Add static load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.6.4.5 Add time load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.6.4.6 Time History Function - Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.6.4.7 Time History Function - Sine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.6.5 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.6 Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.6.1 Combinations - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.6.2 Combinations - revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.6.6.3 Display combinations list: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.6.6.4 Disable all combinations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.6.7 Time Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.6.7.1 Define computed time table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.6.7.2 Define times for display/print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.6.8 Results - Tabular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.6.9 Graphic results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.6.10 Display/Print loads/History Time table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.6.10.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.6.10.2 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.6.11 Result files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

7 Structural Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Steel Design - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1.1 Steel section tables and selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 Creating a Steel Structure from the STRAP Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.2 Steel design - main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7.3 Section Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7.3.1 Define a new section group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3.2 Define a combined sections group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.3 Edit an Existing Section Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.4 Define/Revise Built-up Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.5 Display/Print Built-up Sections Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.6 Replace sections file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Version 12.0 xi 12/05

STRAP

7.4 Default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7.4.1 Default parameters - Cold Formed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.2 Default parameters - composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4.3 Default - composite - additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.4.4 Default - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.4.5 Default - steel grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.4.6 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.4.7 End conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

7.5 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7.6 Same section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

7.7 Major / Minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

7.7.1 Major/minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.7.2 Major/minor- flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7.8 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7.8.1 Parameters - AISC/AASHTO/CSA/SABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.8.2 Parameters - BS5950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.8.3 Parameters - Eurocode 3/IS800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.8.4 Parameters - GBJ 17 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

7.9 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

7.9.1 Intermediate supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.9.2 Supports at concentrated load points / Continuous supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.9.3 Revise/delete supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

7.10 End Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

7.10.1 End conditions - AISC/AASHTO/CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.10.2 End conditions - BS 5950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.10.3 End conditions - Eurocode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.10.4 End Conditions – IS:800-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

7.11 Combine Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

7.12 Compute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

7.13 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

7.13.1 Input data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.13.2 General arrangement drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

7.14 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

7.14.1 Display/Print Result Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.14.2 Detailed Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.14.2.1 Hot-rolled, built-up, cold-formed sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.14.2.2 Steel joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.14.3 Results - Section Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.14.4 Results - display selected sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.14.5 Results - Display capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Version 12.0 xii 12/05

STRAP

7.15 Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

7.15.1 Display / Print data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7.15.2 Display / print supports table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.15.3 Display/print Built-up section table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.15.4 Data table – topping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.15.5 Data table - torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.15.6 Display data and supports for a specific beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

7.16 Sway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61

7.16.1 Recommended procedure for using the sway option: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
7.16.2 Parameters: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.16.3 Additional information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.16.4 Sway menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.16.4.1 Sway - display current sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.16.4.2 Sway - select sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.16.4.3 Make selected sway sections current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
7.16.4.4 Display selected sway sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

7.17 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

7.18 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

7.19 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70

8 Concrete Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1.1 Creating a concrete structure from a STRAP model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Seismic design - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2.1Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2.2Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.3 Design Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.4 Design procedure - seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.4.1General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.4.2Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

8.2 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.3 Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8.3.1 Beam default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.3.1.2 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3.1.3 Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3.1.4 Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3.1.5 Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.3.1.6 Modify reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3.2 Column default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.3.2.2 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.3.2.3 Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.3.2.4 Detailing & drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.3.3 Wall default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3.3.2 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.3.3 Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Version 12.0 xiii 12/05

STRAP

8.4 Define beams and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

8.4.1 Define/display beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.4.1.1 Define a beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.4.1.2 Display/Revise a beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4.1.4 Delete beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8.4.1.5 Create supports at perpendicular beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.4.2 Define / display columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.4.2.1 Define a column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.4.2.2 Display/Revise a column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.2.3 Delete column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.2.4 Column names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

8.5 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

8.6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

8.6.1 Parameters - Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.6.1.2 Modify reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.6.2 Parameters - Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.6.2.1 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.6.2.2 Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.6.3 Parameters - walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.6.3.1 Wall parameters - reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.6.3.2 Wall parameters - design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

8.7 Identical columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

8.7.1 Identical levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.7.1.1 Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8.7.1.2 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.7.1.3 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.7.2 Identical columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.7.2.1 Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.7.2.2 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

8.8 Compute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

8.9 Draw columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

8.9.1 Draw columns - edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.9.1.1 Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.9.1.2 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.9.1.3 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.9.1.4 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.9.2 Column table - edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.9.2.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8.9.2.2 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.9.2.3 Add column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

8.10 Detail column - parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

8.11 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

Version 12.0 xiv 12/05

STRAP

8.12 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

8.12.1 Result summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8.12.2 Column shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.12.3 Detailed results: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8.12.3.1 Beams - detailed results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8.12.3.2 Column - detailed results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8.12.3.3 Wall detailed results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
8.12.4 Specify Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
8.12.5 Create BEAMD detailing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69

8.13 Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70

8.13.1 Beam data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
8.13.2 Column data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
8.13.3 Wall data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.13.4 Data table – deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.13.5 Data table - reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
8.13.6 Data table - seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
8.13.7 Data table - column shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73

8.14 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74

8.14.1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8.14.1.1 Setup - colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8.14.1.2 ACI strength reduction factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8.14.1.3 Column drawing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
8.14.1.4 Column table parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
8.14.1.5 Line width for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
8.14.1.6 Drawing paper types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
8.14.1.7 Bar diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
8.14.1.8 Concrete types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
8.14.1.9 Save defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
8.14.1.10 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78

9 Bridge Postprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Bridge postprocessor - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1.1 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1.2 Solution Method and Program Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2 How to use the Bridge Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.3 Bridge Module data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.4 Bridge - Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.2 Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9.2.1 Lanes - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.1.1 Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.1.2 Vertical tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.2 Lanes - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.2.3 Lanes - revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.2.3.1 Revise segment properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3.2 Add segments at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3.3 Delete segments at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3.4 Add segments at end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3.5 Delete segments at end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3.6 Split/join segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3.7 Revise lane numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.2.4 Lanes - delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Version 12.0 xv 12/05

STRAP

9.3 Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

9.3.1 Vehicles - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.3.1.1 Vehicle - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.3.1.2 Vehicle group - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.3.2 Vehicles - revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.3.3 Vehicles - delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.3.4 Vehicles.DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

9.4 Lane loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

9.4.1 Lane loads - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.4.1.1 Uniform load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.4.1.2 Vehicle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.4.1.3 Knife-edge load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.4.2 Lane loads - revise/delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

9.5 Load case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

9.5.1 Load case - define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.5.1.1 Assignment of loads to lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.1.2 Permutations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.5.1.3 Load case activation/deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.5.2 Load case - revise/delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.5.3 Load case - deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.5.4 Lane loads & Load cases - Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

9.6 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

9.6.1 Solve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.6.2 STRAP results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.6.3 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.6.4 STRAP models list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.6.5 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

9.7 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

9.7.1 Load distribution method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.7.2 Load direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.7.3 Drawing of influence lines - parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.7.3.1 Display only values greater than: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.7.3.2 Maximum result will be scaled as: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

9.8 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

9.8.1 Display lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.2 Display vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.3 Display vehicle groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.4 Display load factor tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.5 Display lane loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.6 Display load cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.7 Print input data tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.8 Print drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

9.9 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

9.9.1 Results - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.9.2 Influence lines (draw, display, print table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.9.3 Applied loads (draw, display, print table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.9.4 Erase displayed result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Version 12.0 xvi 12/05

STRAP

9.9.5 Update STRAP result files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

9.9.5.1 Beam results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.9.5.2 Element results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.9.5.3 Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.9.5.4 Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.9.5.5 Element not on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.9.5.6 Delete all existing “Bridge “ results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

9.10 Display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

9.11 Design codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

9.11.1 South African Code - TMH7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
9.11.2 BD 37/88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

A1 Appendix - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-1

A2 Appendix - Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1

A2.1 JC Node and Beta Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1

A2.1.1 JC node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1
A2.1.2 BETA angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-2

A2.2 Model Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3

A2.2.1 Model Wizard - Plane Frame: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3
A2.2.1.1 Plane Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3
A2.2.1.2 Vierendael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-4
A2.2.1.3 Truss on Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-4
A2.2.1.4 North light truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-5
A2.2.1.5 Continuous beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-6
A2.2.2 Model Wizard - Plane Grid: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-7
A2.2.2.1 Grid (beams only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-7
A2.2.2.2 Grid with diagonals (beams only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-8
A2.2.2.3 Continuous beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-8
A2.2.2.4 Grid / joist bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-8
A2.2.3 Model Wizard - Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-9
A2.2.3.1 Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-9
A2.2.3.2 Triangular truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-10
A2.2.3.3 Parallelogram truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-10
A2.2.3.4 Trapezoidal truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-11
A2.2.3.5 Frame truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-12
A2.2.3.6 Triangular rafter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-12
A2.2.3.7 Double-deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-13
A2.2.3.8 Triple-deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-14
A2.2.3.9 Cross diagonal truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-14
A2.2.3.10 Fink truss - 3 bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-15
A2.2.3.11 Fink truss - 5 bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-15
A2.2.3.12 Bowstring truss (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-15
A2.2.3.13 Bowstring truss (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-16
A2.2.3.14 Flat Warren truss (a), (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-16
A2.2.3.15 Howe truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-17
A2.2.4 Preprocessor - Space Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-17
A2.2.4.1 Circular Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-18
A2.2.4.2 Rectangular Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-18

Version 12.0 xvii 12/05

STRAP

A2.2.5 Model Wizard - Adding New Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-19

A2.2.5.1 Model title lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-20
A2.2.5.2 "INIT" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-21
A2.2.5.3 "MENU" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-22
A2.2.5.4 "DIMENSION" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-22
A2.2.5.5 "CHECK" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-23
A2.2.5.6 "PROP" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-23
A2.2.5.7 "LOAD COMMANDS" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-24
A2.2.5.8 "COMMAND" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-25
A2.2.5.9 "LOADS MENU" block commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-25
A2.2.5.10 Plane frame example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-27

A2.3 Nodes - Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-30

A2.3.1 Ellipse - Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-30
A2.3.2 Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-30
A2.3.3 Ellipsoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-31
A2.3.4 Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-31
A2.3.5 Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-31
A2.3.6 Clothoid from straight line to radius R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-32
A2.3.7 Hyperbolic Paraboloid - Straight Generatrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-32
A2.3.8 Hyperbolic Paraboloid - Parabolic Generatrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-33
A2.3.9 Parabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-33

A3 Appendix - Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-1

A3.1 Global loads - Method of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-1

A3.1.1 Global Loads Applied as Joint Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-1
A3.1.2 Global Loads Applied as Beam Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-2
A3.1.3 Global Loads Applied as Element Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-3

A4 Appendix - Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-1

A5 Appendix - Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-1

A5.1 BCF.DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-1

A5.2 Reinforcement - Method of Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-3

A5.2.1 ACI 318-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-3
A5.2.1.1 Moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-3
A5.2.1.2 Axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-3
A5.2.1.3 Combined moment and axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-4
A5.2.1.4 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-4
A5.2.2 BS8110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-5
A5.2.2.1 Moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-5
A5.2.2.2 Axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-5
A5.2.2.3 Combined moment and axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-6
A5.2.2.4 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-6
A5.2.3 Eurocode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-7
A5.2.3.1 Moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-7
A5.2.3.2 Axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-7
A5.2.3.3 Combined moment and axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-8
A5.2.3.4 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-8
A5.2.4 CSA A.23.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-10
A5.2.4.1 Moments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-10
A5.2.4.2 Axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-10
A5.2.4.3 Combined moment and axial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-10
A5.2.4.4 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-11

Version 12.0 xviii 12/05

STRAP

A6 Appendix - Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6-1

A7 Appendix - Steel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-1

A7.1 Torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-1

A7.2 Steel Joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7-3

A7.12 Eurocode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.12-1

A7.13 AISC - LRFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.13-1

A7.14 AISC - ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.14-1

A7.15 AASHTO - LRFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.15-1

A7.16 AASHTO - ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.16-1

A7.17 CSA S16-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.17-1

A7.18 IS:800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.18-1

A7.19 GBJ 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.19-1

A7.31 AISI - LRFD & ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.31-1

A7.32 CSA S136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A7.16-1

A8 Appendix - Concrete Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8-1

A8.1 BS8110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8.1-1

A8.2 Eurocode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8.2-1

A8.3 ACI 318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8.3-1

A8.4 CSA A23.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8.4-1

A8.5 IS:456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A8.5-1

Version 12.0 xix 12/05

STRAP

*** This page is blank ***

Version 12.0 xx 12/05

STRAP

1 General
1.1 Getting Started
This section is intended mainly for engineers who have no previous experience in the use of computers for
structural analysis or who are unfamiliar with the finite element method.

The engineer must prepare a computer model of the structure. The model consists of a series of elements
joined at points called nodes (or joints).

STRAP uses two types of elements:

• Beam elements :
Beams are one dimensional elements that are used to model structural members that can be modeled by
a line - beams, columns, bars, etc.

Beam elements always give accurate results, i.e., if a model naturally consisting of beam elements (e.g.,
a skeletal frame structure) is analyzed by STRAP, the results will be identical to those calculated manually
using any exact method. Similarly, the method of creating the STRAP model for such structures is usually
obvious - each beam or column is represented by a single beam element.

• Finite Elements:
Finite elements are two-dimensional elements that are used to model surfaces such as plates, shells and
walls. They may be either triangular or quadrilateral in shape.

Finite elements, on the other hand, give inherently inaccurate results (the degree of inaccuracy is usually
acceptable by most engineering standards), for the following reasons:

- The elements should be connected along their common boundaries, but in the finite element model they
are connected only at their common nodes. Thus there is a relaxation of continuity along the boundary
(although the mathematical development of the elements ensures satisfaction of some, but not all, of the
boundary continuity requirements).
- The mathematical development of the elements assumes a linear stress distribution through the element.
In reality, the distribution is usually more parabolic.

In a continuum structure such as a flat plate there is no natural subdivision of elements, so the structure has
to be artificially divided. It is obvious that as the continuum is divided into a finer mesh (smaller elements),
the degree of discontinuity is lessened, the stress distribution approaches linearity and the overall accuracy
of the solution improves.

On the other hand, increasing the number of elements in the model increases the solution time and
increases the size of the files required to store the input data and results.

1.1.1 Selection of the Computer Model

The preparation of the model for two-dimensional frames, grids or trusses is usually very simple, as each beam
and column is represented by a single line element.

More complicated structures - space frames or structures with area elements - require more thought and good
engineering judgment in the preparation of the model. Typically, structural members can be represented by
either area elements or by line elements and the engineer must choose between them based on his experience.

Version 12.0 1-1 12/05

STRAP
Remember:
STRAP calculates numerically accurate results for the defined model.
It is the engineer's responsibility to:
• define a model that correctly represents the structure
• thoroughly check for illogical or inconsistent results.

Example 1:

A square concrete plate of uniform thickness, simply supported on all edges. The plate should obviously be
modeled by a regular pattern of quadrilateral elements. How many elements are required for a sufficiently
accurate solution?

The following table gives results for the center deflection of the plate : (10x10, 0.2 thick, concrete):

Vertical deflection
No. of elements % error
100 (10x10) 0.30
64 (8x8) 0.50
36 (6x6) 0.90
16 (4x4) 2.00
4 (2x2) 6.20

There is no obvious advantage gained from defining the model with more than 36 elements.

Example 2:
Consider the three shear wall structures in Figures (a) to (c). The walls are identical except for the size of the
openings.

Figures (d) to (f) show three possible computer

models for the corresponding shear walls (a
rough mesh has been used for clarity):
• model (a) has relatively narrow walls and
beams and so can be modeled entirely by
beam elements as shown in (d). Note the
'rigid offsets' in the lintel beams.
• model (b) has wide walls and shallow
beams and so can be modeled by the
combination of finite elements and beam
elements as shown in (e). The lintel beams
are extended into the wall for continuity.
• model (c)has wide walls and deep beams
and should be modeled entirely by finite
elements as shown in (f).

It is important to stress the following points:

• all of the models are inaccurate to some degree : Model (a) uses beam elements to model the wall. Model
(b) and (c) use finite elements and so the degree of accuracy is dependent on the number of elements used
(see below).
• there is no sharp boundary between beams that are considered 'deep' or 'shallow', i.e., it will not always be
obvious which model is the most appropriate.
• As opposed to example (a), there are no exact solutions available that the computer results can be
compared to. Therefore, good engineering judgment is required to select the correct model.

Version 12.0 1-2 12/05

STRAP
In summary:
• the model selected must represent the actual structural behavior of the structure.
• accuracy increases as the number of elements increases but both solution time and file size also increase.

Thus, the selection of the model and the division of the model into elements is often a tradeoff between:
• more exact modeling of the structure vs. general simplicity of the model
• increased accuracy vs. reduced solution time and file size.

The following are guidelines for constructing an accurate finite element model:

• Use quadrilateral elements:

In general, try to use quadrilateral elements instead of triangular elements as they give more accurate
results.

Remember that the four corners of a quadrilateral element should all lie on the same plane. If this is not
possible, use two triangular elements in place of each quadrilateral.

• Element shape:
- Quadrilateral Elements:
The greatest accuracy is achieved with a square - 1:1 - element. Elements with a base/height ratio up
to 1:2 give good results, but elements with a ratio of 1:5 will be unreliable.

Try to use rectangular shaped elements whenever possible, If not, the internal angles should not vary
greatly from 90°. Angles of 30° or 150° will greatly reduce accuracy. Elements with convex angles should
never be used.

- Triangular Elements:
Equilateral triangles will produce the most accurate results.

• Mesh Density:
The mesh density need not be constant throughout the model. The program assumes a linear result
distribution through the element. If the actual result through the elements is not linear but parabolic, for
example, it is obvious that there will be a decrease in the accuracy. In a fine mesh, the result diagram
through any one element will always be approximately linear.

Increase the number of elements where there is a greater rate of change in the internal forces. For example,
around supports (where bending moments increase sharply), openings and large concentrated loads.

To decrease the number of elements:

Use a rough mesh in areas where relatively low results are expected. Remember that the connection to
adjacent elements is through the element end nodes only and so nodes located along an edge of an
element between end nodes are ineffective. Use triangular or trapezoidal shaped elements to step between
rough and fine quadrilateral meshes.

If you have doubts as to the accuracy of the results in a particular area of the model, rerun the problem with
a finer mesh in that area and compare results. The results converge to the exact solution as the mesh
becomes more refined.

• Models with axes of symmetry:

Large symmetric structures can be modeled by defining only one half (or a quarter) of the model. Note that
the symmetry must be present in both the geometry and loading diagrams.

Care must be taken to define the correct boundary restraints along the line of symmetry. An error in defining
the proper restraints will lead to incorrect results.

Version 12.0 1-3 12/05

STRAP
1.1.2 Inputting the Model

The program continuously displays the model graphically and updates the display automatically after every
input command, thus enabling the user to instantaneously check the accuracy of the input.

STRAP allows you to use one of three input modes:

• Graphic Mode:

The model is defined by moving the crosshair using the mouse/arrow keys to identify node locations, define
elements, assign properties, loads, etc. All parameters such as current crosshair coordinate are displayed
at the bottom of the screen and are updated continuously. Only a limited number of parameters need be
typed in.

Nodes and elements are numbered automatically by the program when generated. Numbering is always
consecutive, unless specified otherwise. The numbering may be revised by the user. The final numbering
pattern should be one that will cause the results to be printed in a logical sequence.

• Command Mode:

The model is defined by typing commands in standard format. The geometry is displayed simultaneously
on the screen and is updated after every command.

The numbers of all nodes and elements are specified by the user. The system of numbering should be such
that a minimum number of input commands are required. This varies from structure to structure, and is
learned mainly from experience. In general, an ordered numbering pattern is recommended.

When numbering the model, note the following points:

- The program contains powerful commands for generating the definition of large groups of nodes and
elements; these commands require an orderly numbering pattern.
- Numbering does not have to be consecutive.
- Nodes which are not connected to the model are ignored.
- Nodes may be located anywhere along a beam element.
- Node numbering and element numbering are independent. The structure may contain nodes 1,2,3,4....
as well as elements 1,2,3,4....
- If a structure consists of both beam and area elements, the same element number may not be given to
an element of each type.
- Solution time is not dependent on the numbering.

In all cases, it is recommended that the user prepare a sketch showing all numbering before defining the
model.

• Batch Mode:
Similar to Command Mode, except that the data is entered in a data file external to STRAP using any editor
program.

Version 12.0 1-4 12/05

STRAP

1.2 Coordinate systems

Coordinate reference frames are required to uniquely describe the position of a structure in space, the direction
of applied loads and the direction of computed reactions, displacements, forces etc. In addition, the coordinate
systems are required to reference other structural information such as element properties.

STRAP uses Cartesian reference frames. A cylindrical system may be used for node coordinate definition.

Two types of reference systems are used in STRAP. They are:

• the global coordinate system, denoted by X1, X2, X3 (uppercase).
• the local element coordinate system, denoted by x1, x2, x3 (lowercase).

STRAP uses right-handed, Cartesian reference frames.

The X1, X2 and X3 axes (or x1, x2 and x3 axes) are perpendicular to
each other and the positive direction of the axes are specified by the
'right-hand rule'. It is obvious that if the directions of any two of the
axes are known, then the direction of the third axis is easily determined.

In the following figure a beam element is located in space between nodes JA and JB. The location of the nodes
are defined according to the global coordinates, i.e. their coordinates relative to the global axes X1,X2,X3.

It is apparent the horizontal load P at node JB and the

support reaction R at node JA should be referenced to
the global coordinate system. But it is difficult to define
the distributed load w on the beam relative to the
global axes and obviously a method is required to
define the section orientation. It is also apparent that
results such as bending moments must be referenced
to different directions for each beam.

Consequently, the beam is provided with a local axis

system x1,x2,x3; section orientation, direction of loads
and results are always relative to this local system.

Note that each element has its own unique local system independent of the local systems of the other elements
in the model.

The X1, X2 and X3 axes (or x1, x2 and x3 axes) are always perpendicular to each other and the positive
direction of the axes are specified by the right-hand rule. It is obvious that if the directions of any two of the
axes are known, then the direction of the third axis is easily determined.

The directions of loads, forces, moments and stresses are referenced to the global or local axes by standard
sign conventions.

Version 12.0 1-5 12/05

STRAP
• Global coordinate system - refer to 1.2.1
• Local coordinate system - refer to 1.2.2
• Sign conventions - refer to 1.2.3

1.2.1 Global Coordinate System

The geometry of the structure, joint loads and displacements, reactions and certain loads are referenced to the
global coordinate system. The orientation of the structure with respect to the system is arbitrary and is implied
by the engineer by node coordinate input. Generally, one or more global axes are selected to be parallel to one
or more characteristic directions of the structure.

The default convention is:

• X1 = horizontal axis on screen.
• X2 = vertical axis on screen.
• X3 = axis perpendicular to the screen and pointing towards the
user.

Plane structures are always defined on the X1-X2 plane.

1.2.2 Local Coordinate System

Each element of a structure modeled by STRAP has a local reference frame associated with it. Element
properties, certain loads, member end and internal forces are referred to this local coordinate system.

The local axes directions are automatically specified by the program according to default conventions when
the elements are defined, but may be revised by the user.
• Beam elements - refer to 1.2.2.1
• Quadrilateral finite elements - refer to 1.2.2.2
• Triangular finite elements - refer to 1.2.2.3
• Wall elements - refer to 1.2.2.4

1.2.2.1 Beam Elements

The directions of the local axes determine:

• the orientation of the sections major and minor axes, which are always aligned with the x2, x3 axes.
• the direction of beam loads, which are always parallel to the x2, x3 axes.

Default Convention:

Plane models:
Axis Direction
x1 Always coincides with the centroidal axis of the beam; the positive direction is from the start
node (JA in the geometry tables) to the end node (JB), as specified during the definition of the
beam.
x2 As x1 and x3 are known, x2 is determined from the right-hand rule
x3 Always parallel to the global X3 axis

Version 12.0 1-6 12/05

STRAP
Examples:

Space models:
Direction
Axis General case: x1 not parallel to X3 Special case: x1 parallel to X3
x1 Always coincides with the centroidal axis of the As in general case
beam; the positive direction is from the start node
(JA in the geometry tables) to the end node (JB)
x2 As x1 and x3 are known, x2 is determined from Always parallel to the global X2 axis
the right-hand rule
x3 Always parallel to the global X3 axis As x1 and x2 are known, x3is determined
from the right-hand rule

If the angle between the local x1 and the global X3 axes is greater than 0.006°, the axes are assumed NOT
parallel. As angle of this magnitude can result from computer inaccuracy, the local x3 axis direction of all
beams parallel to X3 should be specifically defined.

Examples:

User-defined local axis directions:

As explained above, the program automatically defines default local axis directions for each beam.

STRAP always assumes that the major/minor beam axes are parallel to the local x2/x3 axes, i.e. the properties
of all beams are defined relative to the local coordinate system.

It is apparent from the example in the figure below that the beam section can be oriented in an infinite number
of angles about the x1 beam axis and so the default local axes directions may not be correct.

The beam in Figure (a) below lies on the X1-X2 global plane; by default its local x3 lies parallel to the global
X3 and the local x2 axis lies on the global X1-X2 plane. If the beam is a component of a sloped roof, for
example, and must be aligned as shown in Figure (b), then the local x2/x3 axes must be rotated to coincide
with the major/minor axes.

Version 12.0 1-7 12/05

STRAP

Options are available for aligning the local x2 or x3 axes with an existing node or any user-defined plane.

Refer to 2.4.12 - Beams-local axes

Example:

define the local axes of beams 1 to 5 as shown.

• beams 1 and 2: specify that the local x2 axis is parallel to the global X1-X3 plane.
• beams 3,4 and 5: specify the local x2 axes as pointing in the direction of node 29.

The x3 axes are determined by the program according to the right-hand rule.

1.2.2.2 Quadrilateral Finite Elements

Each two-dimensional finite element has a local coordinate system associated with it.

The local x1 and x2 axes always lie in the plane of the element and x3 is always perpendicular to the element.

The directions of the local axes are determined by the location of the element corner nodes.

• the local x1 axis lies along the edge of the element formed
by nodes JA and JB and is positive in the direction of JB,
where JA and JB are the first two corner nodes defined by
the user.
• x2 is perpendicular to x1 and points in the general direction
of JC, the third node defined.
• the x3 axis direction is determined by the right-hand rule.

Version 12.0 1-8 12/05

STRAP

The following figure shows a situation that can easily occur; the x1 axes of the adjacent elements point in
opposite directions while the x2 axes point in the same direction; therefore the x3 axes of these elements point
in opposite directions. In such a case, the sign of the results will be opposite.

When elements are defined in the Graphic Mode, the program automatically ensures uniformity in the local x3
axis direction for adjacent elements in order to prevent confusion in the results. The +x3 direction will always
point in the general positive direction of the global +X3 axis (except for the special cases listed below).
The program reverses the x1 direction if necessary by interchanging the order of first two nodes.

To summarize the local axis selection in the Graphic Mode:

• the local x1 axis lies along the edge of the element formed by nodes JA and JB, where:
- if a single element is defined, JA and JB are the first two nodes selected by the user.
- if a grid/line of elements is defined, JA-JB are the nodes on the edge most parallel and closest to the
base line.
• the +x2 axis lies in the element plane perpendicular to x1 and points in the direction of the other nodes.
• the direction of x1 is from JA to JB. The program determines the direction of the +x3 axis using the right-
hand rule. If +x3 does not point in the direction closest to the global +X3 axis, the program interchanges the
JA and JB nodes.

Special cases:
i. the element plane is parallel to the X3 axis: +x3 points in the direction closest to the global +X2 axis.
ii. the element lies parallel to the X2-X3 plane: +x3 points in the direction closest to the global +X1 axis.

1.2.2.3 Triangular Finite Elements

The definition of local axes is similar to that for quadrilateral elements.

Version 12.0 1-9 12/05

STRAP
1.2.2.4 Wall elements

The default local coordinate system for wall element segments is identical to the default system for beams.
The program assumes that the wall local x1 axis is parallel to the "height axis" specified when defining the wall
and points in the positive direction of the height axis:

The default local axes cannot be revised.

1.2.3 Sign Conventions - Forces and Moments

Forces and moments are referenced to a local or global coordinate axis:

• Forces: positive forces point in the positive
direction of the relevant coordinate
axis.
• Moments: Moments act about a local or
global coordinate axis. The sign of
the moment is determined by the
following right-hand rule:

Examples:
• Loads
Joint loads are always defined relative to the global coordinate system. Beam loads may be defined relative
to either the global coordinate system or to the beam local coordinate system.. For more information, refer
to 3.0 - Loads

Version 12.0 1-10 12/05

STRAP
• Beam Results (Tabular)
Moment, shear and axial force results for beam elements are always displayed relative to the beam local
coordinate system. The sign conventions are:

• Finite Element Results (Tabular)

Moments, forces and stresses for finite elements are displayed relative to the element local coordinate
system. Forces and stresses are positive if acting in the positive direction of the parallel local axis.

Referring to the equations in 5.4.7.2 - Element results sign conventions, a positive moment creates tension
on the +x3 surface of the element.

Note that STRAP 's graphic postprocessors will often unify and reverse the signs to display the results
according to accepted engineering sign conventions. Refer to 5.3.2.1 - Element result types for more
details.

• Wall elements

Moment, shear and axial force results for wall elements are always displayed relative to the wall local
coordinate system. The sign conventions are:

Version 12.0 1-11 12/05

STRAP

1.3 Display - General

The program displays screens in the standard "Windows" format. The graphic display shows all data entered
up to the previous command. By default, the program displays the entire model as projected on the X1-X2
plane. In order to check the model, it is usually necessary to zoom in on part of it, rotate it, isolate individual
planes, add numbering, etc.

The menu bar display options are:

• Edit (1.3.6)
- Copy commands to the clipboard
- Retrieve commands from the clipboard
- Copy drawing to clipboard (metafile format)
• Zoom (1.3.1)
- Create a window
- Zoom in/out
- Revise screen dimensions
• Rotate and Dynamic rotate (1.3.2)
- Rotate model
- Select viewing plane
• Display (1.3, 1.3.3)
Add/remove to the display:
- Node/element/property numbers
- Local axes, Restraints, Loads (during Load Definition only), etc.

• Draw
- Draw dimension lines
- Draw grid lines and elevation marks
• Remove (1.3.5)
- Remove selected beams/elements from the display
- Limit display to selected plane
- Limit display to coordinate range

Refer to General options (1.4) - Step, Undo, Shortcut menus, Dialog boxes, Help, etc.

1.3.1 Zoom

Version 12.0 1-12 12/05

STRAP

Zoom - Create a window

Create a window by defining the lower-left and upper-right corners; the contents of the window will be displayed
over the entire screen.

Zoom - Move window center

Relocate the center of the current window to a new location. The relocated window will be drawn with current
options and scale.

Zoom - Full drawing

Display the entire model according to the current display options.

Zoom in/out by factor

Zoom in on the current display; the center remains in the same location but the scale is changed. The degree
of zoom is defined by entering the percentage scale change (a factor between 0 and 100%). Note that the
percentage is the ratio between the change in scale to the final scale.
For example, to reduce the scale by half, select 100%.

Zoom - Stretch
Use this option to stretch the current display over the entire screen. Although the model will be distorted,
numbering verification will be facilitated for many models (e.g. tall and narrow) as the nodes/elements will be
moved away from each other.

Zoom - Revise screen dimensions

Create a window or expand the display area by entering the minimum and maximum global coordinates
defining the display limits:

Previous zoom
To restore the previous display, i.e. the display before the current zoom.
Note:
• the program stores up to 20 previous displays
• the stored 'zooms' include those created using the "Create a window" and "Move window center" options.
• the zoom will be restored with the CURRENT Numbering, Rotate and Remove options; only the window
dimension limits are restored.

Zoom - Restore a saved view

Select a saved "view" from the list; the model will be redrawn immediately.

Note that the program automatically saves the initial display (X1-X2
axis, no rotate, zoom or numbering) with the title "Standard view".

Version 12.0 1-13 12/05

STRAP

Zoom - Save view

To save the current display, including:
• zoom, rotate, numbering, remove, etc.
• section line locations, for finite element graphic results

Enter a title for the view.

• To save a new view, enter a title for the view and click
• To resave an existing view with the new display parameters, click
Replace a view and select a view title from the list.

Up to 500 views may be saved per model.

Zoom - Delete a saved view

Select a saved "view" from the list; it will be deleted from the View list.

Zoom - View list management

Select one of the following options:

• Delete a saved view

Select a saved "view" from the list; it will be deleted from the View list.

• Rename a saved view

Select a saved "view" from the list; type in a new name.

• Change view order

Change the order of the titles in the View list box:

- Click and highlight a line in the box; click the Up or
Down button to change its position by one line.
- Click again to continue moving the same line.
repeat for other lines

Version 12.0 1-14 12/05

STRAP

Zoom - Number of windows

The display screen can be divided into two, three or
four display windows, all showing the current
model.
• the model is defined in any one of the windows,
referred to as the "active" window; double click
any part of a window to set it to the active one.
• each window may have different display
parameters (zoom, remove, numbering, etc.).
• all windows are updated simultaneously as the
model is defined.
• the size of the windows may be modified by
dragging the frame.
• the active window may be changed during a
definition sequence. For example, when
defining a single beam, the two end nodes may
be selected in different windows.
• in graphic results, the result type selected is
displayed in the active window only. By changing the active window display moment in one window, then
shear in another window, etc.

1.3.2 Rotate & Dynamic rotate

1.3.2.1 Rotate

Rotation by steps
The model may be rotated in steps about any of the three screen axes.

Each time one of the keys is pressed, the model will be rotated by the value displayed at
the bottom of the dialog box (default = 10°) from its previous position. The step value may
be revised in the Rotation Step = option.

Rotation about X / Y / Z axes

Rotate the model about the three axes to view from any direction. Enter the angle of
rotation in degrees. A positive angle is measured counter-clockwise about the positive
direction of the axis.

Note that the rotation is about the current View plane axes:
• If the current View plane is X1-X2, then X refers to X1, Y to X2 and Z to X3. If the View
plane is revised to X2-X3, then X refers to X2, etc.
• The angles typed in always refer to the unrotated View plane and not to the current
rotated display!

View plane

Select the initial viewing plane: X1-X2 , X2-X3 , or X3-X1.

The default plane is X1-X2.

Note that the first axis of the pair will be the horizontal axis on the screen.

Version 12.0 1-15 12/05

STRAP
1.3.2.2 Dynamic rotate

Click in the toolbar.

Select one of the options in the side menu and click the left mouse button:

X,Y axes Z axis

Rotate - global plane

Click one of these buttons to display the model as projected on one of the three global
planes.

Rotate - isometric
Click one of these buttons to rotate the model to one of the three pre-defined isometric
views. The rotation angles for each view are defined in Setup - Miscellaneous.

Rotate - 90 degrees
Click one of the buttons to rotate ALL axes by 90 degrees.

1.3.3 Display

Display - Node/beam/element numbers

Node, beam and/or element numbers may be added to the current display:
• Move the to the option and click the mouse; a will appear beside the
option and the numbering will be added to the current display window.
• To remove the numbering select the same option again.

Display - properties
The current property group data may be displayed by any of three methods:
• Property number - the number of the property group is written adjacent to each
element.
• Property by colors - each element is drawn with a color representing the
property group
• Property name - the property name is written adjacent to the element.

Examples:
- beams - steel table: UB127/76
- beams - dimensions: 300/650
- beams - properties: The property group number is written
- elements: the property group number is written

Version 12.0 1-16 12/05

STRAP
Display - Loads
• Beam Loads
The program arranges the loads as follows:
- all loads are displayed separately.
- all loads are displayed in the order of definition.
- concentrated loads are displayed above all other
loads.
- arrow size is proportional to the load magnitude.
- loads are always plotted to the left/above the beam; if
the sign of the load changes, only the direction of the
arrow is reversed (Figure a).
- loads acting in the plane of the screen are displayed
with solid lines; loads acting perpendicular to the plane
of the screen are displayed with dashed lines (Figure b).
- If the angle between the direction of the load and the plane of the
screen is less than 45°, the loads are displayed as if they are acting
in the plane of the screen, i.e. with solid lines. Loads with an angle
to the plane of the screen greater than 45° are displayed with dashed
lines.
- arrow conventions are the same for distributed loads and
concentrated loads.
- for Local / Global loads, the arrows always point in the direction of the
loads. Global Projected loads are plotted as Global loads.

Note:
The display of loads on elements in rotated models may be confusing. It is recommended that loads be
displayed only for elements in planes that are oriented parallel to the screen.

• Joint Loads
- The summation of the loads at a node are displayed
- The arrow size is proportional to the magnitude of the load.
- Loads acting perpendicular to the plane of the screen are
drawn at a 45° angle. This is convenient for grids but may be
confusing for space frames.

• Element loads
- The surface pressure is displayed as a linear load along a
line through the element center.
- Arrow size is proportional to the magnitude of the load.

Examples:

- loads acting in the plane of the screen are displayed with

dashed lines; loads acting perpendicular to the plane of the
screen are displayed with solid lines.
- If the angle between the direction of the load and the plane
of the screen is less than 45°, the loads are displayed as if
they are acting in the plane of the screen, i.e. with dashed
lines. Loads with an angle to the plane of the screen
greater than 45° are displayed with solid lines.

Display - Springs
Select this option to display the location of Springs.
The program displays the location only. To display the spring constants, select the Display value option in
Springs (Geometry main menu).

Version 12.0 1-17 12/05

STRAP
Display - Offsets
Display a thick line at the beam ends where rigid offsets have been defined.

Section Orientation
Select this option to draw a schematic representation of the beam section shape and major/minor axis
orientation. For example:

Display - Local axes

"Local axes" displays beam and finite element local axes directions.

Select the local axes to be displayed. Note that the x2 and x3 axes cannot
be displayed simultaneously.
The following conventions are used when displaying the local axes
directions:
• Beam Elements - x2 or x3 axis:
- Angle between the local axis and the plane of the screen < 45°:
The arrow representing the local axis is drawn with a solid line,
projected onto the plane of the screen.
- Angle between the local axis and the plane of the screen > 45°:
The arrow is drawn with a dashed line. If the arrow points toward the beam, the local axis direction is
into the screen; if the arrow points away from the beam, the axis direction is away from the screen.

• Quad and Triangular Finite Elements:

The program displays only the x1 and x3 axis directions:
- x1 always lies in the plane of the element. The arrow is drawn from JA in the direction of JB.
- x2 is not displayed. It always lies in the plane of the element, is perpendicular to x1 and points from JA
in the direction of the other corner node(s).
- x3 is always perpendicular to the element. If its positive direction points out of the screen, an "o" is
displayed at the center of the element; if it points into the screen, an "x" is displayed.

Display - Mesh contours

Display a thick line along the perimeter contour of all meshes defined with the Element - Mesh option.

Version 12.0 1-18 12/05

STRAP

Display - Restraints / Selected restraints

Restraints in all degrees-of-freedom may be displayed on the model.

All restraints will be superimposed onto the current drawing. The restraints are drawn schematically as shown
below. Note that X4, X5 and X6 are the rotation degrees-of-freedom about X1, X2 and X3, respectively.

• Selected restraints:
Select the support types to be displayed. For example, if fixed, pinned and sliding supports were defined
for a plane frame, the following menu is displayed :

Select a restraint type; the matching restraints will be

superimposed on the current display.

Display – restraint coordinate systems

Display the axes of the local support coordinate systems at
the nodes assigned with local supports. For example:

Display - rigid links

Display groups of nodes connected by "rigid links". Select the
type of rigid link (as defined in Restraints):

The program displays "Rnnn" alongside nodes defined as part of a rigid link group, where
"nnn" = the lowest node number in the group.

Display - DXF drawing

Add a DXF drawing to the background display of the current model. The DXF drawing is NOT added to the
model. The program allows the ends of all DXF drawing lines to be defined as 'nodes' in the Node options.

Version 12.0 1-19 12/05

STRAP
• Load DXF drawing
• DXF drawing parameters
The DXF background drawing parameters are defined when the drawing is loaded into the display and may
be revised at any time.

- DXF units:
The DXF drawing will be scaled according to the STRAP geometry units. Two options are available:
DXF units:
Select a unit from the list box
1 STRAP = x DXF units
Select the ratio between the units (the DXF dimensions will be divided by the value entered here).
For example, STRAP units are meter, the DXF units are feet, but you want to double the size of the
drawing in the background: Enter 3.281/2 = 1.6405
- DXF origin & orientation:
Specify:
• the location of the DXF (0,0,0) coordinate on the STRAP drawing
• the STRAP global axes parallel to the DXF X and Y axes. Note that the DXF drawing may be inverted
by selecting -Xn as the global axis.

- DXF layers:
Only the selected layers (YES) will be drawn in the background.

• Display DXF
The DXF drawing may be temporarily removed from the background and later restored by clicking on the
option.

Version 12.0 1-20 12/05

STRAP
Display - render
The rendering option enables you to display the current model with perspective, to remove hidden lines, to draw
the beams and elements with their natural shape and to simulate shading effects caused by a light source.

The rendered model is displayed according to the values specified in the Rendering parameters option. The
default values in this option have been selected after extensive testing and give good results for most models.
The default values may be restored at any time by clicking the Restore defaults button.

• Rendering - colors:
Define the base color for each of the element types or property groups. Click the Select color button to
select the color from the palette or specify the red/green/blue factors (0-255).

Note:
The color selected will apply only to the element/property group currently displayed in the first line. Colors
may be specified for each property group or for all beams and elements.
- the property group colors will be used only if Property by color is set to in the Display menu.
- otherwise the color specified for Beams will be used for all beams in the model and the color specified
for Elements will be used for all elements.
- The opacity (transparency) can be defined for each colour, where opacity = 1 indicates zero
transparency. Defining a degree of transparency for elements enables the structure behind them to be
viewed. For example:

Version 12.0 1-21 12/05

STRAP
• Rendering - color factors:
The color displayed by the program on a surface is the defined base color for the element type/property
group modified by factors that define the way light from the sources is reflected from the surface. For
example, consider a dome built from single material of uniform color with light shining on it from a single
source. To a person viewing the dome the side facing the light source will be perceived as being lighter,
i.e,.the dome will not actually appear to have a uniform color.

There are four factors that modify the base color:

Ambient - a light that provides constant illumination on every surface and is not dependent on the
location of the light sources. If ambient light is the only light reflected then all surfaces
would have the identical color.
Diffuse - light that is a function of the angle between the light source and the surface.
Specular - A parameter that defines the reflection properties of the surface. Increasing the value
makes the surface look wetter or shinier.
Shining - Similar to "specular"; decreasing the value makes the surface look wetter or shinier.

• Rendering - lights:
Up to six different light sources may be defined. All "used" sources will shine simultaneously on the model.
Select a light source from the list box and specify its parameters:
Not used
The light source will not be applied to the model
Model coordinate system
The light source will rotate with the model. The origin of the system is defined as follows: X=0 at X1min,
Y=0 at X2min, Z=0 at X3min.
Screen coordinate system
The light source will remain at a constant screen location when the model is rotated. The origin of the
system is defined as follows: X=0, Y=0 at screen centre; Z=0 behind the model.
X/Y/Z = define the coordinates of the light source.
Distant light the light shines from infinity along the vector defined by X/Y/Z

• Render - elements

• Render - beam edges

Version 12.0 1-22 12/05

STRAP

Display - show data

Display all input data for a selected node/beam/element:

• specify the data type option in the box at the right side of the screen:
• highlight the node/beam/element by placing the adjacent to it and click the mouse
• the following data will be displayed:
Nodes: coordinates, restraints, attached beams/elements, springs, distance from
previous selected node
Beams: length, end nodes, JC node, property group number, section
properties/name/dimensions, material, releases, offsets.
Elements: end nodes, thickness, material, area, releases.

Version 12.0 1-23 12/05

STRAP
1.3.4 Draw

1.3.4.1 Dimension and elevation lines

Add dimension lines or elevation marks (e.g. ) to the drawing:
• arrow style, text style and number of digits may be specified. Refer to Parameters
• dimension lines defined with this option are saved in Views

Note:
• the dimension and elevation lines will be erased if the display is rotated or a different plane is selected. To
retain the lines, save the current View.

Define
Select one of the following options:
Parallel to X1/X2/X3
• Select one of these options to plot the dimension line parallel to a global axis.
• click
• select the nodes defining the dimension lines using the standard node selection option and then move
the cursor to the dimension line location.
• move the cursor to the line location and click the mouse
Defined by 2 nodes:
• click
• select two nodes defining the dimension line direction; the dimension line will be drawn parallel to a line
connecting two selected nodes.
• select the nodes defining the dimension lines using the standard node selection option and then move
the cursor to the dimension line location.
• move the cursor to the line location and click the mouse
Angular dimension
Display the angle between two connecting lines.
The lines are defined by selecting nodes - one at the
vertex, and one on each of the arms. Note that the
arc is drawn through the 'location' point.

There are two possible angles that can be drawn for

each selection. The user must specify the line
location. For example:

Version 12.0 1-24 12/05

STRAP
Elevation
Display elevation marks along any of the global axes at selected levels. For example:

• Select the model height axis and specify the elevation at the model 0.0 coordinate of
that axis
• click
• Select the nodes at the levels that require a section mark using the standard node
selection options
• move the cursor to the elevation mark location (perpendicular to the height axis) and
click the mouse

Note that the arrow and text dimensions can be revised in the Parameters option.

Move/delete
Move/delete a dimension line or elevation line from the model
• Highlight a dimension line or elevation line and click the mouse
• for "Move", move the to the new location and click the mouse.

Parameters
Specify the parameters for dimension lines and elevation lines. Note that any changes to the parameters will
also revise existing dimension lines.
Specify the following parameters:
• Extensions

Note:
- "arrow size" is revised for the print options only and
will remain constant on the screen.
- "arrow size" dimension affects all extension types.

• Arrowheads
Select one of the following arrowhead types:

• Text
- Size:
Specify the size (refer to the note above)
- Round off:
Round off all dimensions and elevations to the value specified here
- Digits after point
Specify the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point. Note that this number of digits will
always be displayed, even if the Round off value requires more digits.

Version 12.0 1-25 12/05

STRAP
• Elevation
Specify the elevation mark parameters and the units for the elevation value:

• Screen
Select the method for displaying the dimension text on the screen:
Use a fixed screen font
draw the text using the screen font used for all other text, e.g. beam numbers, etc.
Draw the text to scale
Draw the text graphically according to the scale specified here. This is a preview of the printed output
where the text is always printed with the Size specified at the top of the dialog box. Note that the text
will not actually be displayed with the specified Size because the scaled drawing is 'squeezed' into the
screen.

Steel postprocessor:
• The dimension line text is displayed 'drawn to scale' if General arrangement drawing is selected in
the Display menu; otherwise it is displayed using a fixed screen font.
• when the text is 'drawn to scale' it is a preview of the printed output where the text is always printed with
the Size selected in the General arrangement parameters option. Note that the text will not actually be
displayed with the specified Size because the scaled drawing is 'squeezed' into the screen.
• the text will be printed with the specified Size only if the scale selected when printing is identical to the
scale selected in the General arrangement parameters option; otherwise sizes will be modified according
to the ratio of the scales. For example, a scale of 1:50 is specified here but a scale of 1:100 is specified
when printing: the actual text/arrow sizes will be one-half (50/100) of the sizes selected in this option.

Display
All dimension lines/elevations defined for this model may be temporarily deleted from the display.

1.3.4.2 Grid lines

Display “grid lines” on the drawing. For example:

Note:
• Grid lines can be saved in a “View”
• the grid lines will be erased if the display is rotated or a different plane is selected. To retain the lines, save
the current View.

Version 12.0 1-26 12/05

STRAP

Define
Define a set of grid lines. A set can be parallel to one of the global axes or
may be parallel to a line defined by two nodes. Each grid line symbols are
drawn according to the relevant coordinate of selected nodes.

To define a grid line:

• specify the grid line parameters
• specify the default names
• select the direction and click
• select the nodes using the standard node selection option
• move the to the grid line location and click the mouse
note that the side of the frame closest to the model will be placed at the location

• Revise the grid line names, remove individual lines, invert the order, etc.

Click on a name in the right-hand column and enter a new

name, or select one of the following options:

- Insert name
Insert a name at the current cursor location; the
following names will be pushed down. For example,
highlight the line with node 21 and click Insert; type in
a new name (e.g. 2A) in the empty cell. The list be
now be 1,2, 2A, 3,4

- Remove name Remove a name from the list; the following name will be pushed up and a new name
will be automatically written in the last line. For example, highlight the line with node
21 and click Remove. The list be now be 1,2, 4, 5, 6
- Invert order Invert the order of the current names in the list. In the above example, the list will be
5, 4, 3, 2, 1 if this option is selected.

Version 12.0 1-27 12/05

STRAP
Copy
Grid lines saved in a view can be copied to the current display:
• select a View from the list displayed
• select the grid lines by toggling the lines to Yes

Default names
Default names are assigned automatically to the program when the grid lines are created, but may be revised
afterwards.
Select numbers (1,2,3,4 ...) or upper-case letters (A,B,C, ....). The names are assigned in ascending order.

Move/delete
• highlight the grid line (the will appear at the midpoint of the line connecting the two extreme grid marks)
and click the mouse
• for Move, place the at the new grid line location and click the mouse. Note that the side of the frame
closest to the model will be placed at the location

Add/remove
Add/remove nodes to the grid line or revise names of the grids:

• Add/remove nodes - select nodes using the standard node selection

option
• End selection - select to continue (to revise names)

Revise the grid line names, remove individual lines, invert the order, etc. Refer to ‘Define’.

Remove single line

Erase a single grid line from a grid line set:
• highlight the grid line (the will appear at the midpoint of the line connecting the two extreme grid marks)
and click the mouse
• highlight the relevant line in the table and click

Display
All grid lines defined for this model may be temporarily deleted from the display.

Version 12.0 1-28 12/05

STRAP
Parameters
Specify the parameters for grid lines. Note that any changes to the parameters will also revise existing grid
lines.

• Size
The text will be printed with this size only if the scale specified when printing is the same as the scale
specified in the General arrangement parameters option; otherwise the text size will be modified according
to the ratio of the scales. For example, a scale of 1:50 is specified here but a scale of 1:100 is specified
when printing: the actual text size will be one-half (50/100) of the size selected in this option.

• Frame
Select one of the following frame types:

• Extensions
Grid lines are drawn from the specified
location to the selected node and are
extended beyond the node by the
dimension specified here. If more than
one node is selected, all of the lines
may be drawn with the same length
(equal to the longest).

• Screen
Select the method for displaying the dimension text on the screen:
Use a fixed screen font
Draw the text using the screen font used for all other text, e.g. beam numbers, etc.
Draw the text to scale
Draw the text graphically according to the scale specified here. This is a preview of the printed output
where the text is always printed with the Size specified at the top of the dialog box. Note that the text
will not actually be displayed with the specified Size because the scaled drawing is 'squeezed' into the
screen.

Version 12.0 1-29 12/05

STRAP

Steel postprocessor:
• The grid line text is displayed 'drawn to scale' if General arrangement drawing is selected in the
Display menu; otherwise it is displayed using a fixed screen font.
• when the text is 'drawn to scale' it is a preview of the printed output where the text is always printed with
the Size selected in the General arrangement parameters option. Note that the text will not actually be
displayed with the specified Size because the scaled drawing is 'squeezed' into the screen.
• the text will be printed with the specified Size only if the scale selected when printing is identical to the
scale selected in the General arrangement parameters option; otherwise sizes will be modified according
to the ratio of the scales. For example, a scale of 1:50 is specified here but a scale of 1:100 is specified
when printing: the actual text/arrow sizes will be one-half (50/100) of the sizes selected in this option.

1.3.4.3 Draw columns

Draw the section of any beam elements that lie perpendicular to the plane of the screen (not necessarily
'columns'. For example:

Version 12.0 1-30 12/05

STRAP
1.3.5 Remove

For clarity, specified nodes, beams or elements may be temporarily removed from the display.

Remove nodes without elements

The default option is NO, i.e. nodes which have no beams or elements connected to them are displayed. If, for
example, such a node is used as a JC node, revise the option to to delete it from the display.

Limit display area by coordinates

This option enables the definition of "slices" through the model. In space structures, use this option to view
individual planes.

Limit the minimum/maximum coordinates to be displayed for each global axis:

Example:

By default, he initial display of the X1-X2 plane will

superimpose the results of the planes at X3 = 0. and
X3 = 5.

To view the results on beams at X3 = 5.0 only, define

Lower limit for X3 = 4.9

Version 12.0 1-31 12/05

STRAP

Limit display to a plane

Define a plane in any direction through the model by selecting three nodes. Only beams located on the plane
formed by these three nodes (extending to infinity in all directions) will be displayed. Note that the plane may
be defined as a 'slice' extending through the model by specifying a 'tolerance' distance; see below.

For the model above, to view the results on beams at X3 = 0.0, select nodes 1, 2, 3.

If the display has already been limited to a plane and this option is selected again, the following menu is
displayed:

• Change tolerance
The program by default displays only nodes located within 0.01 units from the defined plane. Use this option
to specify a different tolerance value in order to display nodes that are offset from the defined plane.

Restore all elements/beams

To restore all removed beams and elements to the display.

Remove selected elements / Remove selected beam

Select beams / elements using the standard element selection option; these beams / elements will be deleted
from the display.

Remove beams parallel to a beam

Select a beam; this beam and all those parallel to it will be deleted from the display.

Display only selected elements

Select beams / elements using the standard element selection option; only these beams / elements will be
displayed.

Version 12.0 1-32 12/05

STRAP
1.3.6 Edit

Copy commands:
Use this option to copy STRAP commands to the "Clipboard":
• Enlarge the Command Box so that the entire block of commands to be copied is displayed on the screen.
• Move the cursor to the first command in the block; press the mouse key - do not release.
• Drag the mouse to the last command in the block; all of the commands will be highlighted. Release the
mouse key.
• Select the Copy commands option in the Edit menu; the highlighted commands are copied to the
Clipboard.

The commands may then be retrieved by any Editor program (Windows) with a Paste option (or equivalent).

Paste commands:
Commands located in any ASCII file may be retrieved via the Windows "Clipboard".

This option is similar to the Batch Mode feature, but allows selected commands to be retrieved rather than the
entire file. Refer to 1.6.3.

Copy drawing
Use this option to copy the current display to the Windows "Clipboard". The display will be identical to that
produced by Print drawing, i.e. it will include a frame and a header. The file is transferred to the Clipboard in
"Metafile" format.

Select one of the following metafile formats:

Metafile: WMF format
Enhanced Metafile: EMF format
Your graphics program, word processor, etc, may recognize only one
of the above formats.

Undo
Clicking the Undo option in the menu bar automatically cancels the last definition; the graphic display is
immediately redrawn. Note that Undo may be pressed repeatedly, but will only cancel commands from the
current session.

Version 12.0 1-33 12/05

STRAP
Redo
Clicking the Redo option in the Edit pull-down menu automatically cancels the previous Undo; the graphic
display is immediately redrawn.

Note:
• Redo must follow the Undo immediately.
• Redo may be selected repeatedly following a consecutive series of Undo.

Title / Unit / Model type

Refer to 2.1.2

Check elements
This option checks the legality of all beams and elements in the model.

The program checks the following:

Beams:
• two or more beams defined between the same end nodes
• beams with zero length
• beams connected to undefined nodes
Quad/triangular elements:
• two or more elements defined between the same end nodes
• elements connected to undefined nodes
• elements with zero area
• non-planar elements
Solid elements:
• elements connected to undefined nodes
• elements with zero volume
• end nodes defined in correct order

Warning messages are printed when problems are found. For example:

Version 12.0 1-34 12/05

STRAP

1.4 General options

1.4.1 Step

The speed is called the Step and is the distance the moves on the screen each time the mouse is moved
the minimum distance or an arrow key is pressed. The current Step value is continuously displayed in the Data
Options Area.

There are three methods available for revising the Step:

• Move the into the Step= text box. Type in the correct value.
• Press to increase the Step or to decrease the Step.

• Click the buttons.

For node definition only:

Click the button to display a grid of dots on the screen; the dots will be spaced at the current Step
interval in both screen directions. The jumps from dot to dot when the mouse is moved or when an arrow
key is pressed.
• To display the Grid automatically every time a node definition option is selected, refer to 1.10.2.3 - Setup -
Miscellaneous.
• The grid is automatically updated every time the Step value is revised.
• If the step value is small relative to the screen dimensions, the density of the dots will be too great. In such
cases the program will display the dots with a spacing equal to a multiple of the Step value; several clicks
of the arrow key will be required to move from a dot to the adjacent dot.
• A cylindrical grid will be displayed when a cylindrical coordinate system is in effect (note that the mouse can
be used for a cylindrical coordinate system only when the Grid is displayed).

1.4.2 Dialog boxes

STRAP uses Windows "Dialog Boxes" to request data and to provide information. Most dialog boxes contain
options, each one asking for different information. After all required information is supplied, a "Command
Button" is pressed to carry out the command and return the program to the previous menu or dialog box.

Dialog boxes also provide information, warnings and error messages.

Version 12.0 1-35 12/05

STRAP
A typical "Windows" dialog box contains several types of standard option styles. For example:

List box:
A list box displays a column of available choices. A "drop-down" list box displays only the current option along
with an arrow at the end of the line.

For example, the "Result type" option in the above dialog box is displayed as:

When the arrow button is pressed, the list box opens up to:

The current option is highlighted.

Option button:
Option buttons represent a list of mutually exclusive options, i.e. only one of them can be selected. In our dialog
box example, we can select to display the results for either a load case, load combination or an envelope of
cases/combinations.

The selected option is highlighted by a black dot in the button . In our example, the program will display the
result for a load case.

To select a new option, place the arrow on the option you want and click the mouse button.

Version 12.0 1-36 12/05

STRAP
Check box:
Check boxes represent options that can be turned on or off.
When the option in the check box is turned on a cross is displayed in the box . In our example, the result
diagrams will be hatched.

To revise the option, place the arrow on the check box and click the mouse button.

Text box:
A text box is a rectangle into which you can type information.

In the dialog box above, the number of contour lines is defined in a text box as .

To revise text in a text box:

• use the mouse to move the arrow to the text box and click the left mouse button
• edit the text in the box.

Command button:
Command buttons initiate an immediate action. In the dialog box above,
• displays the graphic results according to all other options selected in the dialog box.
• closes the dialog box; the option is canceled and all options are returned to the values present
when the dialog box was entered.

1.4.3 Shortcut Menus

A Shortcut Menu is a useful pop-up menu that provides options specific to a certain object in the model. Right-
click an object (such as a node or element) to display the Shortcut Menu for that particular object.

• Geometry:

Right click on nodes, beams or elements. For example, a right-click on a node

displays a Shortcut Menu that lets you select all node related options or display
data for the selected node.

• Loads:
a right-click on a beam displays a Shortcut Menu with beam load definition options, etc.
• Results:

a right-click on a node/beam/element displays a Shortcut Menu with

options for displaying tabular results for the selected item.

Version 12.0 1-37 12/05

STRAP
1.4.4 Side Menus

Menu tabs are found at the bottom of all geometry 'side menus'. Clicking a tab
moves you directly to the side menu of the option selected without going
through the main menu. For example:

1.4.5 Help

Select Help at any time from the menu bar at the top of the screen to display
the section of the user's manual pertaining to the current option.

The Help is arranged in the standard "Windows" help format; you may jump to any other part of the manual by
selecting the Contents, Search or Glossary options.

1.4.6 Icon bar

The icon bar provides a shortcut method for accessing STRAP options. Each icon on the bar represents a
different option. Click the icon once to run the option.

Hold the on the icon for several seconds to display the option name. For example:

Note that you can create new icon bars or customize existing bars. Refer to 1.10.4 - Setup - icon bars.

1.4.7 Undo

Clicking the Undo option in the menu bar automatically cancels the last definition; the graphic display is
immediately redrawn. Note that Undo may be pressed repeatedly, but will only cancel commands from the
current session.

1.4.8 Print tables

The following menu appears when you request to

print tables directly to the printer or to a file.
General options:
Refer to 1.4.9 - Print drawing.

Word format file

The tables may be saved in RTF (Rich Text
Format) and may be imported into any
wordprocessor or program that recognizes this
format.
Specify a name for the file. The default extension
is .RTF.

Note:
• a company ‘logo’ may be printed at the top of
every page; refer to Setup - Print parameters.

Version 12.0 1-38 12/05

STRAP
1.4.9 Print drawing

Use this option to print the current display directly to the printer or to a file. The printed display will be enclosed
in a frame and will include a header.

1.4.9.1 Regular drawing:

Send output to:

Select the output unit, e.g. printer, plotter, etc.

The devices must be installed by the "Printers"

option in the Windows "Control panel"

Note:
• Graphic output: to create a DXF file, select
MetaFiles (WMF format) or Enhanced Meta
files (EMF format) in this option, then select
Convert Metafile to DXF in the Files option of
the STRAP main menu.
• Tabular output: to create a 'delimited file' (data
items separated by a delimiter character and
not by spaces) suitable for import by most
spreadsheet programs, select Delimited file in
this option. To specify the delimiter character,
refer to 1.10.2.3 - Setup - Miscellaneous
• Customized delimited files can be generated
using the STBatch utility.

Setup:
Specify general information for the output device selected:
• paper size
• graphic resolution, etc.

Title/Text size:
• enter the name of a title that will be printed at the top of the drawing.
• specify the text size in mm. The size is used for beam numbers, node numbers, load and result values, etc.

Margin
Specify the left margin width. The value is added to the default margin for the printer/page size.
The program will recalculate the default scale or the number of pages required whenever a new margin value
is entered.

Drawing - size
Specify the drawing scale. The program initially assumes that the drawing will fit exactly on one page (based
on the paper size in the Setup option), calculates the corresponding scale and displays it as the default scale.
There are two methods for changing the drawing size:
• specify the scale
• specify the percentage of paper width/height to be used. Note that the program always maintains the
vertical/horizontal drawing ratio, so it is sufficient to revise only one of the percentages.

If a scale larger than the default scale is specified, the drawing will be automatically printed on several pages,
which can then be pasted together.

Version 12.0 1-39 12/05

STRAP
Drawing frame

Send output to file:

to send the drawing to a file (not required if Metafile is selected in Send output to:)

Print options
Print now
lxrint the current drawing immediately
Print to file
Send the drawing to a file (not required if Metafile is selected in Send output to:). The program will prompt
for a file name. Note that these drawings cannot be edited using the Print/edit saved drawing option.
Save for "Print/edit drawing" option
Save the drawing so that it can be edited and printed using the Print/edit saved drawing option. These
drawings can only be printed by STRAP and not by other programs or utilities.

Click the button to start printing.

1.4.9.2 Rendered drawing:

Use this option to print the current rendered display directly to the printer or to a file. The printed display will
be enclosed in a frame and will include a header.

Width / Height
Select the height and width of the printed drawing.

Note that Windows will distort the image if you do not maintain the original proportions.

Version 12.0 1-40 12/05

STRAP
Select one of the following options for width and/or height:
Size Specify the actual dimension in millimeters.
Full The drawing will fit exactly into the page width height.
Fit size The program will automatically calculate the dimension required to maintain the original drawing
proportion.

Note: to maintain the original proportions, adjust either the width or the height while specifying Fit size to
content for the other dimension.

All other options

Refer to 1.4.9.1.

1.4.10 Print order

When a print option displays Include saved drawings in the printout, a drawing may be inserted at any
location between the tables and the order of the tables may be revised. Initially, all tables selected in the
previous dialog box are displayed in the right list ("Print list"); all drawings are displayed in the left list ("Drawing
List") and must be added to the Print List.

To add drawings:
• revise the size of a drawing by entering a "factor" value; the width/height values will be revised.
• Click on a drawing in the Drawing List and highlight it
• Click on the line in the Print List where you want to insert the drawing; click the button.
• Repeat for additional drawings

To change the order of the Print List::

• click and highlight a table or drawing. Click the buttons to move the table/drawing
up or down in the list.
• click the button to remove a drawing from the list.

Click the button to start printing.

Version 12.0 1-41 12/05

STRAP
1.4.11 Print/edit drawing

The drawing editor module contains options for modifying and adding text to the graphic displays in STRAP.
All drawings may be printed/plotted.

The main features of the program are:

• The module can differentiate between the different types of text - node numbers, beam numbers, titles, etc.
Hence a property (size, color, etc) can be modified at the same time for all texts in a type.
• The module recognizes the paper size of the selected printer/plotter and allows several drawings to be
arranged on the page

File menu - Refer to 1.4.11.1

Zoom menu - Refer to 1.4.11.2
Edit menu - Refer to 1.4.11.3
Text menu - Refer to 1.4.11.4
Line menu - Refer to 1.4.11.5

1.4.11.1 File menu

Save
Save the changes to the current drawing

File - select a drawing

Select another drawing to revise from the list displayed.
• click and highlight the relevant line
• click OK
Note that the drawing title may be modified.

File - delete a drawing

Select a drawing to delete from the list displayed.

Print drawings
Select the printer type and parameters:

Change drawing size

The drawing scale was specified when the drawing was
saved in one of the STRAP modules. The scale may be
revised before printing. Select one of the following
options:
Print as defined
Do not change the scale
Fit to page
Modify the scale so that the critical drawing
dimension fits exactly onto a single page
Scale by factor
Enter a factor to modify the scale, e.g. a factor = 0.5
reduces the drawing to half of the original saved size.

Version 12.0 1-42 12/05

STRAP
Margins

Note:
• the margins are relative to the maximum print area
available for your printer (i.e. margins may be present
when zero values are entered in the above menu).
Refer to your printer manual.

If you selected the Print several drawings option, you may now arrange the drawings on the page:
• select a drawing from the list displayed
• move the drawing to its location on the drawing as shown below

• Select one of the following options to continue:

Add more - Select another drawing from the list
and place it on the page
Draw - Start printing
Move - Move one of the drawings already
placed on the page
Cancel - Return to the previous menu

• Printer parameters
- Printer: Select the output unit, e.g. printer, plotter, etc. The device must be installed by the
"Printers" option in the Windows "Control panel".
- Print - setup: Specify general information for the output device selected: Paper size, graphic
resolution, etc.
- Print to file: Specify to send the drawing to a file.

Create a DXF file

Copy the current drawing to a file in DXF format. Enter the file name.

Open an additional model

Use this option to copy & paste from another model:
• select the folder and the model. Note that two instances of the programs are open simultaneously.
• Copy the model (or part of it)
• Toggle [Alt-Tab] back to the current model or Exit the additional model
• Paste the drawing into the current drawing

Exit
Return to STRAP.

Version 12.0 1-43 12/05

STRAP
1.4.11.2 Zoom menu

Zoom - window
Create a window by defining the lower-left and upper-right corners; the contents of the window will be displayed
over the entire screen.

Zoom - full drawing

Restore the full drawing to the screen

Redraw
Refresh the current display.

1.4.11.3 Edit menu

Move, delete, copy & paste lines and associated text.

To revise the attributes of lines, refer to the Lines menu.

Move
Move any portion of the drawing (text and lines).
• select Move and select the drawing elements to move (1.4.11.6).
• move the elements to the new location; click the mouse.

Delete
Delete any portion of the drawing (text and lines).
• select Delete and select the drawing elements to delete (1.4.11.6).

Copy & Paste

Copy and Paste this drawing or any portion of it (text and lines) into the current drawing or any other drawing
created by STRAP for the "Print/Edit a saved drawing" option.
• select Copy and select the drawing elements to be copied (1.4.11.6)
• to Copy to another drawing, use File - New/open to display the drawing.
• select Paste and move the copied segment to the proper location in the destination drawing; click the
mouse.
To copy from a drawing in another model, use the File - Open an additional model option

Undo
This option cancels the previous action and restores the drawing to the previous state.
Click repeatedly to undo a sequence of actions; all actions from the start of the current session (or the last
"Save") may be undone.

Version 12.0 1-44 12/05

STRAP
1.4.11.4 Text menu

New text/multyline text/revise text

• Type and define the location of a single line of text or multyline text on the drawing and specify the text
parameters.
• Edit an existing text or modify the parameters (see below)

Size, angle, width color, frame, justify

Revise the properties of selected text:s:
• select texts using the standard text selection options (1.4.11.6)
• revise one of the properties:

The properties are:

• Size - text height, measured in millimeters
• Pen width - specify in millimeters
• Angle - specify in degrees; measured counterclockwise from the horizontal
• Color - select a color from the dialog box.

Version 12.0 1-45 12/05

STRAP
• Frame - Select one of the following frame types:

• Justify
Text is placed on the drawing according to the location of the
. The arrow location can point to the start/center/end,
top/center/bottom of the text string.

Specify the horizontal and vertical justification of the text

according to the table.

Text - move
Move existing text:
• select text using the standard text selection options (1.4.11.6)

Text - delete
Delete existing text:
• select text using the standard text selection options (1.4.11.6)

1.4.11.5 Line menu

Width/color/type
Revise the properties of selected lines in the drawing:
• select the lines (1.4.11.6)
• Specify the new width/color/type

New lines
Add a new line to the drawing:
• specify the location of the line start and the line attributes:

Version 12.0 1-46 12/05

STRAP

• Move the to the location of the line start (or highlight an existing line start/end) and click the mouse.
• Specify the location of the line end. Note that the start and end of the line may be defined using different
options in the menu above.
• Continue to define segments using the end of the previous line as the start of the next line, or double-click
the mouse to stop.

Grid of lines
Create a rectangular grid of recently spaced grid lines. For example:
• Specify the number of spaces and pen attributes:

• Click the mouse at the lower-left and upper-right corners of the grid rectangle.

Move
Move selected lines on the drawing:
• select the lines (1.4.11.6) and drag them to the new location

Delete
Delete selected lines on the drawing:
• select the lines (1.4.11.6)

1.4.11.6 Select text/lines

Select one or more text/lines using any of the following options:

Individual
Select an individual text/line by moving the alongside so that it is highlighted by the rectangular blip; click
the mouse. Repeat for additional texts/lines. When all have been selected, press or click the mouse without
moving the .

Version 12.0 1-47 12/05

STRAP
Select text - window
Define a rectangular window by pointing to its lower-left and upper-right corners with the . The program will
automatically identify all texts/lines located in the window.

Select text - polygon

Define a polygon by pointing to its corners with the . The program will automatically identify all texts/lines
located in the polygon.

The polygon is constructed as a 'rubber-band' stretched around the defined corners:

- At least three corners must be selected.
- the program automatically connects the last corner defined to the first corner defined.
- press [Esc] (right mouse button) to delete the previous corner.
- to end the polygon definition, click the mouse without moving the .

Example:
Select node numbers 1,2,4,5 and 7 1,2,4,7,8 and 9

All text/lines
All text in the drawing will be selected.
Note:
- text/lines not displayed because of the Zoom option will be selected.

Multiple selection
Turn on the checkbox if you want to define several windows, polygons, etc to select texts/lines. After every
window, etc., the following menu is displayed:

End selection - Continue without selecting more text/lines

Select more - Define another window, polygon, etc.

Remove selections - Delete text/lines from those already selected.

Limit by type
The program differentiates between the different line/text
"types" on the drawing and allows the user to select texts of
a certain type(s) only.

For example, if you want to change the color of all beam

numbers:
Set Nodes and Frames/titles to No and click .

Select lines partially in window

lines with only one end in the window/polygon are selected
only lines with both ends in the window/polygon are selected

Version 12.0 1-48 12/05

STRAP

1.5 Entities Selection

1.5.1 Node Selection

Many options include instructions to select one or more nodes.

Individual Nodes
Select individual nodes by moving the alongside each node until it is highlighted by the rectangular blip ;
click the mouse.

The number of the highlighted node is always displayed at the left-hand side of the Dialog box:

You may also type in the number of the node to be selected, in the form of a "list".

When all the nodes have been selected, press or click the mouse without moving the .

In space models, more than one node may be at the same screen location and so will be "hidden" from the
viewer (the coordinate perpendicular to the screen of these nodes is not identical). In such a case, the program
will display a list of nodes at that location and request the user to select one.

Move the cursor to the line with the correct node and click the mouse.

Select by window
Define a rectangular window by pointing to its lower-left and upper-right corners with the . The program will
automatically identify all nodes located in the window.

In space models, more than one node may be at the same screen location and so will be "hidden" from the
viewer. In such a case, the program will select all of the nodes at that location.

Version 12.0 1-49 12/05

STRAP
Select by polygon
Define a polygon by pointing to its corners with the . The program will automatically identify all nodes located
in the polygon.

The polygon is constructed as a 'rubber-band' stretched around the defined corners:

• At least three corners must be selected.
• the program automatically connects the last corner defined to the first corner defined.
• press [Esc] (right mouse button) to delete the previous corner.
• to end the polygon definition, click the mouse without moving the .
• In space models, if more than one node is at the same screen location, the program will select all of the
nodes at that location.

Example:

Select nodes 1,2,4,5 and 7 1,2,4,7,8 and 9

By levels
Select all nodes at selected levels (coordinates with nodes).

• The program displays a list of the levels parallel to one of the global axes (A). A different global axis may
be selected in the Height direction list box (B).
• Select levels by clicking and highlighting them (A)
• Equally spaced levels may be selected by entering the coordinate of the start level, end level and increment
in edit boxes (D). Click (E) to highlight these levels in the list or (E) to remove the
highlight.
• Click ; the program will identify all nodes at the selected levels

Note:
All nodes within the ± tolerance distance (C) will be selected.

Version 12.0 1-50 12/05

STRAP
Select all nodes
All nodes in the model will be selected.

Note:
• nodes not displayed because of the Zoom option will be selected.
• nodes not displayed because of the Remove elements option (all beams/elements attached to these nodes
are removed) will not be selected.

Multiple selection
Turn on the checkbox if you want to define several windows, polygons or lists for the same command. After
every window, etc., the following menu is displayed:

End selection - Continue without selecting more nodes

Add more nodes - Define another window, polygon, etc. for the same command.
Remove nodes - Delete members from the list, window, etc. already defined for this command.

Version 12.0 1-51 12/05

STRAP
1.5.2 Beam/Element Selection

Many options include instructions to select one or more elements.

When selecting an element, the element nearest to the is highlighted with a rectangular blip . The number
of the highlighted element is always displayed at the left-hand side of the Dialog box.

You may also type in the number of the element to be selected.

Individual elements
Select a single element only by moving the alongside the element until it is highlighted by a rectangular blip
; click the mouse.

The number of the highlighted beam is always displayed at the left-hand side of the Dialog box:

You may also type in the number of the beam to be selected, in the form of a "list".

When all the beams have been selected, press or click the mouse without moving the .

In space models, more than one element may be at the same screen location (only the coordinate
perpendicular to the screen is not identical). In such a case, the program will display a list of elements at that
location and request the user to select one:

Highlight the line with the correct node and click the mouse.

Version 12.0 1-52 12/05

STRAP
Select by window
Define a rectangular window by pointing to its lower-left and upper-right corners with the . The program will
automatically identify all elements with either one or all nodes located in the window (refer to “Select beams
with....” below)

In space models, more than one element may be at the same screen location (only the coordinate
perpendicular to the screen is not identical). In such cases, the program will select all elements at that location.

Select by polygon
Define a polygon by pointing to its corners with the . The program will automatically identify all elements
located in the polygon. The program will automatically identify all elements with either one or all nodes located
in the window (refer to Select beams with)

The polygon is constructed as a 'rubber-band' stretched around the defined corners:

• At least three corners must be selected.
• the program automatically connects the last corner defined to the first corner defined.
• press [Esc] (right mouse button) to delete the previous corner.
• to end the polygon definition, click the mouse without moving the

In space models, more than one element may be at the same screen location (only the coordinate
perpendicular to the screen is not identical). In such cases, the program will select all elements at that location.

Select all beams/elements

All beams/elements in the model will be selected.
Note:
• beams/elements not displayed because of the Zoom option will be selected.
• beams/elements not displayed because of the Remove beams/elements option will not be selected.

Select beams with:

One node in the window/polygon:
all elements with at least one end/corner node in the window/polygon will be selected.
Both nodes in the window/polygon:
only elements with all end/corner nodes in the window/polygon will be selected.

Examples:

Select only beams/elements parallel to a beam/element

You may impose a further limit that the beams/elements selected will be only those parallel to a specified one.
This option allows you, for example, to define a window around an entire frame but to select only the beams
or columns.

Version 12.0 1-53 12/05

STRAP
Multiple selection
Turn on the checkbox if you want to define several windows, polygons or lists for the same command. After
every window, etc., the following menu is displayed:

End selection - Continue without selecting more elements.

Add more beams - Define another window, polygon, etc. for the same command.
Delete beams - Delete members from the list, window, etc. already defined for this command

Limit by properties
Further limit the beam/element selection according to property groups:

YES: Beams/elements in the property group will be selected

NO: Beams/elements in the property group will NOT be selected

Note:
• Dummy beams/elements may be selected

Select meshes
Select all elements in a mesh created by the geometry Element - Mesh option. Move the alongside any
element in the mesh until it is highlighted by a rectangular blip ; click the mouse.

Note that all contours of all defined meshes will be highlighted with a thick line during the selection.

Elements on a plane
For finite elements only, you may impose a further limit that the elements selected will be only those lying on
a specified plane. This option allows you, for example, to define a window around an entire model while
selecting only a certain level.

The plane is identified by pointing to an existing element; only those elements lying on the same plane as this
element will be selected.

Version 12.0 1-54 12/05

STRAP
1.5.3 Wall selection

Many options include instructions to select one or more walls.

Wall selection is similar to beam selection. Each section between the "attachment" nodes specified when
adding the wall to the model is considered a separate wall For example:

The wall nearest to the is highlighted with a rectangular blip .

The number of the highlighted wall is always displayed at the left-
hand side of the Dialog box. You may also type in the number of the
wall to be selected.

Individual walls
Select by window
Select by polygon
Select all walls
Refer to beam/element selection

Select with one node/both nodes

One node in the window/polygon:
all walls with at least one end node in the window/polygon will be
selected.
Both nodes in the window/polygon:
only walls with both end nodes in the window/polygon will be
selected.

Note that the program only considers the nodes where the wall "reference point" was attached to the model:

Multiple selection
Refer to beam/element selection

Limit selection by section

Further limit the wall selection according to section type:

Yes: walls in the section group will be selected
No: walls in the wall group will NOT be selected

Version 12.0 1-55 12/05

STRAP

1.6 Command mode

The following section explains in general how to define the model using the Command Mode. For a complete
explanation, refer to the Command Mode Manual.

The commands are typed in by the user in the Command Mode Box at the bottom of the screen; the program
automatically updates the graphic display of the model.

It is important to note the following:

• the Graphic Mode and the Command Mode may be used concurrently.
• every time a part of the model is defined in the Graphic Mode, the program automatically writes the
equivalent command in the Graphic Mode Box. Therefore, the Command Mode Box contains a complete
record of all that was defined in the current session.

1.6.1 Enter a Command

When you enter a definition type, the program automatically writes a header in the Command Mode Box. For
example, when you select Nodes, the Command Mode Box appears as:

To type in a command, move the below the last line in the box so that the I cursor appears; click the mouse.

Type in the command in the correct format and press [Enter]; the Graphic Display will be updated.

1.6.2 Revise a Command

All commands are entered in the command box as the model is defined. The box displays only two rows and
so the commands are scrolled up and disappear (the box can be enlarged as any "Windows" box). To recall
scrolled commands, click the up/down arrow buttons at the right side of the box.

Example: revise the definition for beam 116.

• move the to the command and click the mouse; the command is rewritten at the bottom of the Command
Box and the I cursor is displayed at the beginning of the command.
• Correct the command and press [Enter]; the graphic display will be updated.

1.6.3 Retrieve a command (from the Clipboard )

Commands located in any ASCII file may be retrieved via the Windows "Clipboard".

This option is similar to the Batch Mode, but allows selected commands to be retrieved rather than the entire
file.

To write the commands to the clipboard:

• run the program "Wordpad"/"Notepad"/Write", a "Windows" line editor.
• either type in the commands or retrieve an existing file using the File option.
• move the to the start of the block of commands; click the mouse.

Version 12.0 1-56 12/05

STRAP

• without releasing the mouse key drag the to the end of the last command in the block; release the mouse
key (the block should be highlighted).

• Select the Edit option from the top menu bar.

• Select the Copy option from the pull-down menu.
• The block of text is now in the clipboard; exit the "Write" program.

To retrieve the commands from the Clipboard into STRAP :

• Select the Edit option from the STRAP top menu bar.
• Select Paste commands from the pull-down menu.
• The program reads the commands, adds them to the Command Box and updates the graphic display.

If the program encounters commands with format errors or commands that generate warnings (i.e. redefinition
of existing nodes), it pauses and display the following menu:

Edit command:
The command is displayed in the Command Box at the bottom of the screen; edit the command as explained
in "Revise a command". The program will then continue to the next command in the clipboard.

Ignore command:
The program will ignore the current command and continue to the next command in the clipboard.

Quit copy:
The program will ignore the current command and all following commands in the clipboard.

Version 12.0 1-57 12/05

STRAP
1.6.4 Command Format - General

All data is input in free format. There must be at least one blank space between one data value and another
(including words, numerical values, and special symbols - without exception).

The answer must be in the format specified by this manual. For example, to define the self-weight of beams
as a load on the structure, the manual specifies the command:

The words in capital letters are keywords which must be entered exactly as they appear in the format statement.

The program normally requires only the first one or two letters of a keyword in order to identify it. Underlined
letters indicate the letters that the program reads. Simplify the input by typing these letters only. For example:
S instead of SELF
B instead of BEAM

Lower-case letters indicate numerical data. In general, parameters beginning with i,j,k,l,m,n indicate integer
values, and all other letters indicate decimal values.

examples:
n, n1, ... are symbols for node numbers (integers)
p, p1, ... are symbols for section dimensions (decimals)

Decimal values may also be entered exponentially. For example:

• 510 may be entered as 5.1E2 or 5.1E+2
• 0.0037 may be entered as .37E-2 or 3.7E-3
Do not leave any blank spaces between the numbers and the letter E.

Parameters in brackets ( ) indicate optional input. In the self-weight example above, f may be omitted.

Keywords in brackets | | indicate a choice of one of the keywords listed. In the above example, type one of
X1,X2,X3 to specify the direction the loads act.

"list" indicates a list of nodes or elements in the List Format. For example:
1 9 17 20
1 3 TO 6 12 15 18 TO 30
3 TO 11 BY 2 20 TO 24 34

The last example is equivalent to entering:

3 5 7 9 11 20 21 22 23 24 34

A list can consist of up to 50 items, where " 1 TO 6 " is one item.

Typical input for the self-weight example are:

SELF X1 B 10 11 12
S X3 -1.4 B 1 TO 90

The program checks the validity of every character entered; an illegal entry will cause the computer to beep
and the character will not be displayed on the screen.

Version 12.0 1-58 12/05

STRAP

1.7 Batch mode

"BATCH" processing is a method where the model files are created external to the program.

STRAP has facilities for processing geometry, loads and load combinations, solving the model and generating
input/output data files without using the interactive graphic interface.
• geometry, loads and/or combinations may be defined by the user by typing commands in an ASCII file using
any editor program
• models created in batch mode can be added to the model list using the Add a file to model list option in
the File pulldown menu, and can then be solved, etc.
• alternatively, the model can be solved using the STBatch utility (refer to the STBatch manual)
• for all models, input/output ASCII data files in user specified format can be generated by the STBatch utility

1.7.1 Batch mode - Geometry

There are two methods for defining STRAP geometry via external files:
• Using the Clipboard (refer to 1.6.3)
• Creating and importing an ASCII file

The file format is as follows:

1st line:
| REPLACE |
| ADD |

where:
REPLACE = the program will use this file instead of the existing geometry file.
ADD = the program adds the commands in this file to the data in the existing binary geometry file
(GEOMnnn.DAT).
(Do not write IGNORE in this line)

Command Lines:

All commands are in the regular format. Before the first line of each command type, a header must be entered
on a separate line. The headers are:
/ JOINT COORDINATES
/ RESTRAINTS
/ PROPERTY NUMBER
/ BEAM END RELEASES
/ MEMBER INCIDENCES
/ MATERIAL
/ PROPERTY DEFINITION
/ SPRINGS
/ DUPLICATE A BLOCK
/ UNITS force length

Notes:
• There must be a space after the "/".
• Lines beginning with " ; " are comment lines and are ignored by the program.
• No blank lines are allowed.
• The order is not important; the commands of any type may appear in scattered groups as long as each
group begins with the header.

If REPLACE is used, the program does not read the binary geometry file and hence does not know what the
model is 'plane' or 'space'. It assumes that the model is 'space' and expects three coordinates in every node
definition command. Type the command COORD 2 on a separarte lone (after / JOINT COORDINATES ) if
the following commands contain only two coordinates..

Version 12.0 1-59 12/05

STRAP
If the program discovers a format error in a command when reading the geometry file, it exits and displays a
message. The error/warning messages are written to a file "ERR1.LST" that may be displayed or printed.

Refer also to GEOINnnn.DAT. (after the following example)

For the following example, the ASCII file would be:

REPLACE
/ JOINT COORDINATES
COORD 2
1 0 0 TO 6 0 15 EQ
7 10 0 TO 12 10 15 EQ
/ RESTRAINTS
X1 X2 X6 1 7
/ PROPERTY NUMBERS
1 1 TO 10
2 11 TO 15
/ MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 TO 5 1 2
6 TO 10 7 8
11 TO 15 7 8
/ MATERIALS
CONC
/ PROPERTY DEFINITION
1 A 0.1 I 0.002
2 A 0.2 I 0.02

GEOINnnn.DAT
The current geometry for each model is stored in a binary file named GEOMnnn.DAT, where "nnn" can be
verified by selecting the Display all model files option in the Files pull-down menu on the main menu bar.

However, STRAP simultaneously creates for each model an ASCII data file that contains all of the geometry
data that was defined interactively in the form of commands. The command formats are explained in detail in
the Command Mode manual.

The file name is: GEOINnnn.DAT

This file may be edited or updated external to the program using a screen editor; STRAP can then be instructed
to use this file instead of the existing geometry file (GEOMnnn.DAT) as the source for the model geometry.

When you choose the Geometry option in the Main Menu bar, the program reads the first line of the
GEOINnnn.DAT file. If the first line is:

IGNORE : the program will ignore this file and use the GEOMnnn.DAT file only. This is the normal case
because when the model is entered interactively, the program automatically writes IGNORE
in the first line of the GEOINnnn.DAT file
REPLACE : the program will use this file instead of the existing geometry file, i.e it ignores the
GEOMnnn.DAT file
ADD : the program adds the commands in this file to existing geometry in the GEOMnnn.DAT file.
If data is defined in both files the GEOINnnn.DAT data will overwrite the GEONnnn.DAT data.

If a format error is discovered in a command, the program exits with a warning. All warning and error messages
are entered in a file "ERR1.LST" which may be displayed or printed.

After reading all of the command lines in the file, the program changes the first line back to IGNORE.

Version 12.0 1-60 12/05

STRAP
1.7.2 Batch mode - Loads

There are two methods for defining STRAP loads via external files:
• Using the Clipboard
• Creating a STATnnn.DAT file

An ASCII file containing all of the load commands for a model may be created and updated external to STRAP.

The file name must be STATnnn.DAT, where "nnn" can be verified by selecting the Display all model files
option in the Files pull-down menu on the main menu bar.

The file format is as follows:

1st line: ASCII

for each load case - 1st line: load case title

All loads must be in the command format as explained in detail in the Command Mode manual. Before the first
line of each load type, a header must be entered on a separate line. The headers are:
/ BEAM LOADS
/ JOINT LOADS
/ DISPLACEMENTS
/ ELEMENT PRESSURE
/ LOAD COMBINATIONS
/ GLOBAL LOADS

end of load case: / END

end of file: / END STATIC

Notes:
• In all command lines, there must be a space after the "/".
• No blank lines are allowed.
• The order is not important; the commands of any type may appear in scattered groups as long as each
group begins with the header.
• The last loading case should not have a "/ END" command prior to the "/ END STATIC" command.

Example: For the following space frame example, the STATnnn.DAT file is:

ASCII
SELF-WEIGHT AND ROOF LOADS
/ BEAM LOADS
SELF X3 B 2 TO 16
U GLOB FX3 -2.0 B 2 TO 6
/ END
WIND LOADS
/ JOINT LOADS
FX1 1.0 N 2
FX1 2.0 N 3
FX1 3.0 N 4
FX1 4.0 N 5
FX1 5.0 N 6
/ END STATIC

Version 12.0 1-61 12/05

STRAP
1.7.3 Batch mode - Combinations

A file containing load combination commands can be imported into STRAP by "cutting and pasting" the
commands in the Results "Define/revise combinations" option:

• type the combination commands in a Windows editor program such as "Wordpad" in the format:

TITLE tit (optional)

lc1 f1 lc2 f2 ........lcn fn..G1 fg1 ...... Gn fgn
where:
tit = combination title string. The program will create a default title if this line is omitted
lcn = load case number
fn = factor for load case 'n'
fgn = factor for group 'n'

Example:
for a combination 1.4*load case 1 + 1.6 * load case 3 + 1.2 * group 2, titled "Dead + Live + Group 2", type:
TITLE Dead + Live & Group 2
1 1.4 3 1.6 G2 1.2

• Highlight the commands (click and hold the mouse, drag the cursor), then select "Edit", "Copy" in the menu
bar
• Press [Alt][Tab] to return to STRAP

• place the anywhere on the line where the command is to be written and click the mouse (if you select a
line with an existing combination, then the command will be inserted above the line).

• click the button

Note that multiple commands may be "cut and pasted" at the same time.

Version 12.0 1-62 12/05

STRAP

1.8 STRAP main menu

The program Main Menu is displayed when the STRAP icon is selected in the Windows screen or when the
tab is clicked in any of the program modules:
• the program lists the existing models in the current directory, sorted alphabetically, by date or by model
number.
• clicking on any line highlights the model title; the program displays the latest view of the model and its
statistics at the bottom of the screen.
• clicking on a tab below the toolbar will initiate the relevant option for the highlighted model.
• multiple models may be selected for the delete and copy model options.

The list of model titles is displayed sorted according to any of the four columns in the table:
• model title
• date revised
• date solved
• model number
To sort the models according to one of the columns, click on the column header; a will be displayed
alongside the column header, indicating that the column is sorted in ascending order (e.g. sorted by model title -
models starting with 'A' are displayed first; sorted by date - the oldest model is displayed first). Click again to
sort in descending order - the symbol in the header will be revised to .

The small icon displays the current status of the model:

The program stores data for each model in a series of files. All file names for a particular model include a
number assigned by the program when the model is created. For example, if the number displayed is "017",
then the model files are:
• GEOM017.DAT (geometry)
• STAT017.DAT (loads)
• RESLT017.DAT (results), etc.
Note that file management is handled by the program and this number is displayed for information only.

Version 12.0 1-63 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• corrupted model lists may be restored by using the Files - Utilities - Recreate a models list option. Refer
to 1.11.5

Refer to:
• Define a new model - refer to 1.8.1
• Amend/rerun an existing model - refer to 1.8.2
• "Files" pull-down menu - refer to 1.9

1.8.1 Define a new model

• select Files in the menu bar

• select New model in the pull-down menu.
or - click the icon in the icon bar.

• define the model title:

The program then displays the Geometry preliminary menu (2.10.2).

1.8.2 Amend/rerun an existing model

To revise a model that appears on the list:

• To revise the geometry:
move the cursor to the model name in the list and double-click the mouse
• To directly access any other part of the program (loads, results, etc):
- move the cursor to the model name in the list and click the mouse once; the model name will be
highlighted.
- click one of the options in the 'tab bar' below the toolbar:

Solve
There are two options available:

Version 12.0 1-64 12/05

STRAP
• Solve current model
Start the solution for the highlighted model. Refer to 4.0 - Solution for a detailed explanation on the solution
method.
• Several models
Solve several models in series:
- click and highlight the models in the current directory to be
solved (only models with geometry and loads will be
displayed):
set the if you want to save the stiffness matrix for all the
selected models.

- click the button to start the solution.

Version 12.0 1-65 12/05

STRAP

1.9 File menu

Geometry, loads, stiffness matrix, results, etc. are stored in separate files. The program automatically creates
and names all of the data files for a model. The user is not required to be familiar with the names and types of
files available. For all options, the appropriate model is selected from the model list displayed.

If you select the option Files in the menu bar, the following pull-down menu is displayed:

The "File management" operations should always

be carried out by using the options in this section
and never by using Windows File Manager
program s(e.g. “Explorer”) or the DOS “DEL”,
“COPY”, etc. commands.

The last five folders selected in the Change current directory option
are displayed at the bottom of the of the File menu. Clicking one of
these lines will make that directory the new current directory.

• New model - Refer to 1.8.1.

• Print - Refer to 1.9.1.
• Delete - Refer to 1.9.2.
Copy to another directory
Copy from another directory
Make a copy of a model
• Change current directory - Refer to 1.9.2.
• Copy to a ZIP file - Refer to 1.9.2.6.
• Unzip a model - Refer to 1.9.2.7.
• Display all model files - Refer to 1.9.2.8.
• Add a file to the model list - Refer to 1.9.2.9.
• Recover model geometry - Refer to 1.3.8

Version 12.0 1-66 12/05

STRAP
1.9.1 Print

Use this option to print all or selected input, results and saved drawings (in any order) for any model in the list
without running the model.
• Specify the tables to be printed by clicking on the Beam results, element results,...tabs.
• Specify the load cases/combinations to be printed in the Loads - general tab
• Print input/output data for specific elements/nodes only by specifying one or more views in the Views tab
• Include saved drawings to add drawings created with the Save for “print/edit” drawing option

The current selections are displayed in the Overview tab. Click to start printing

• If you selected Include saved drawings, you can arrange the order of the drawings and the tables.
Refer to 1.4.10.
• If you selected Print to file, the geometry, loads and output will be printed in separate file.
Enter a file name:

Version 12.0 1-67 12/05

STRAP
1.9.2 File management

1.9.2.1 Delete

This option deletes an entire model from the list or erases selected files only, e.g. loads, results, etc.. Note that
multiple models may be selected.

To delete models or files:

• click and highlight model names in the list; to select more than one model, press the [Ctrl] key when clicking
on the additional models
• if you selected multiple models:

Delete models one-by-one

the following menu will be displayed for each model selected
Delete all models without prompting
the following menu will be displayed only once and the
selection will be used for all models

• select the files to be deleted:

• only files that are marked with a

will be copied. Click on the file
description to toggle the status.

• click the button.

Note:
• only the relevant files will be displayed in the menu
• if you delete geometry files, the program will delete the entire model.
• if you delete loads, the program will also delete all result files.
• If BEAMD files were created for the model, the files may also be deleted:

To delete a model from a floppy diskette:

• select Change current directory and specify A:
• proceed as explained above.

Version 12.0 1-68 12/05

STRAP
1.9.2.2 Make a copy of a model

Use this option to create a copy of the highlighted model in the current directory:

• Revise the Title (optional).

• only files that are marked with a will
be copied. Click on the file description to
toggle the status.
• press the button to begin
copying.

1.9.2.3 Copy to another directory

Use these options to copy a model to another directory, another directory or to backup a model to a floppy
diskette. Note that multiple models may be selected:

To copy models:
• click and highlight model names in the list; to select more than one model, press the [Ctrl] key when clicking
on the additional models
• if you selected multiple models:

Copy models one-by-one

the following menu will be displayed for each model
selected
Copy all models without prompting
the following menu will be displayed only once and the
selection will be used for all models

• select the files to be copied:

• type the drive/directory in the Copy to box, select a directory using the option, or click the to
choose a recently selected directory; press [Enter] or click the button.
• Revise the Title (optional).
• only files that are marked with a will be copied. Click on the file description to toggle the status.
• press the button to begin copying.

Version 12.0 1-69 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• when copying multiple or large models to a diskette, the program displays a message with the number of
additional diskettes required and notifies when to change diskettes. All diskettes must be formatted prior to
the backup.
• To create a copy of a model in the Current directory, refer to 1.3.2.2 Make a copy of a model

1.9.2.4 Copy from another directory

Use this option to copy a model from another directory or to restore a model from a floppy diskette. Note that
multiple models may be selected.

To copy the models:

• type the drive/directory in the Copy from directory box, select a directory using the option, or click
the to choose a recently selected directory; press [Enter] or click the button.
• select the model or models to be copied:

to select more than one model, press the [Ctrl] key when clicking on the additional models
• for each model selected, specify the files to be copied from the list displayed; only files that are marked with
a will be copied. Click on the file description to toggle the status.
• click the button to begin copying.

Note:
• if the model was copied to two or more diskettes, the program will instruct you change diskettes.
• to create a copy of a model in the current directory, refer to Make a copy of a model. (1.9.2.3)

1.9.2.5 Change current directory

The current directory is displayed at the top of the screen.

• to select an existing disk directory on any drive, type in the name

of the path or click the Tree button and select the path in the
standard Windows "Select a directory" dialog box.
• To create a new directory, click the Tree button and define a
new path by clicking the icon ("Create New Folder")in the
standard Windows "Select a directory" dialog box.

Note:
• the last five directories selected in this option are displayed at the bottom of the File menu and may be
selected by clicking on them
• do not select a “Read-only” directory

Version 12.0 1-70 12/05

STRAP
1.9.2.6 Copy to a ZIP file

Model files may be condensed to a single ZIP format file and may be imported back into the model list from a
ZIP file.

To copy to a ZIP file:

• enter the name of a new ZIP file or select an existing one; specify which of the data files to condense:

• for an existing ZIP file, select one of the following options:

where:
Add the model
the selected models are added to the file
Replace the file
the exiting file is erased and a new one is created with
the selected models
Select another ZIP file name
Cancel the option and enter a different file name
before continuing.

1.9.2.7 UnZIP a model

Models may be retrieved from ZIP files; note that the ZIP files do not have to be created by STRAP but they
must contain the directory file ZZMODEL.DIR.

To retrieve a model from a ZIP file:

• select the ZIP file
• click and highlight one or more of the models in the list:

Version 12.0 1-71 12/05

STRAP

• click Copy
• select the files to extract:

• click Copy .

1.9.2.8 Display model file names

The program automatically assigns file names to all files created for a model. Use this option to display the file
names for the highlighted model. For example:

1.9.2.9 Add a file to model list

The model list is maintained by the program and displays all models in the current directory, both those created
by the user by running STRAP in the directory or those copied to the directory using the program "Copy to" and
"Copy from" options. Note that the model list is stored in the file ZZMODEL.DIR; this file is found in every
working directory and backup diskette.

Models whose files are manually copied (e.g. using DOS "Copy" command) to the current directory will not be
displayed in the model list because the ZZMODEL.DIR file cannot be edited by the user.

This situation may occur in several ways. For example:

• the user defines the model by writing a geometry ASCII file and a loading ASCII file
• the GEOMnnn.DAT file is corrupted and the user wants to recreate the model from the GEOINnnn.DAT file
(a list of geometry commands maintained by the program when the user defines the model)
• the model files are available (e.g. on a backup diskette) but the ZZMODEL.DIR file is not present or
corrupted; the program "Copy to" and "Copy from" options will not locate the models.

Use this option to add such models to the list.

Version 12.0 1-72 12/05

STRAP

Note:
• the files may have any name
• the geometry file must start with the command REPLACE
or ADD (refer to 1.7.1 – Batch mode - geometry).
• the loading file must start with the command ASCII (refer
to 1.7.2 – Batch mode - loads)
The geometry file may be in one of two formats:
ASCII (STRAP batch mode commands)
the user created a geometry ASCII file (refer to 1.7.1 -
Batch mode-geometry for more details on file format).
STRAP internal format
the geometry file was created by STRAP , i.e. binary
format. This type of file cannot be edited by the user.
Note:
• a drive name (e.g. A:) or a directory path may be entered.
- click the button to display a list of files in the current directory.

1.9.2.10 Recover model geometry

The current geometry for each model is stored in a binary file named GEOMnnn.DAT, (where "nnn" indicates
the model number). However, STRAP simultaneously creates an ASCII data file for each model named
GEOINnnn.DAT that contains the geometry data in the form of commands. When the STRAP geometry file
is corrupted, the program may be able to recreate all or part of the file by reading the commands in the
GEOINnnn.DAT file.

Always backup the model before recovering the geometry. In the event that the Recover is not successful,
please contact your STRAP dealer.

Version 12.0 1-73 12/05

STRAP

1.10 Setup
Use this option to specify default values for colours, units, standard material properties, output format, etc.
Default values for STRAP program parameters are initially stored in the file
STRAP.INI, located in the program directory. Note that there is only one
STRAP.INI file for all users.

When a user revises a Setup parameter, the program writes the new value in the
Windows "Registry". Each user is allocated a separate section in the Registry, so
each user can create his own personal set of Setup parameters. Note that the
STRAP installation program does not write any Setup values in the "Registry"

The program initially searches for default values in the Registry; if it does not find a value (i.e. the user has not
revised the parameter in Setup) it takes the default value from STRAP.INI.

1.10.1 Setup – Colors

You may specify the permanent screen colors for:

• background
• graphic lines, e.g. beams, elements, various loads, etc.
• text associated with each graphic line
• colors for contour map fills

1.10.1.1 General, Miscellaneous, Bridge

The program displays the following screen :

To revise the color of:

• Geometry, load, result item/text:

- click the of the relevant
item
- select the new color from the
palette.

• Background:
- click
- select one of the basic colors
from the following screen and
then click the button.

Version 12.0 1-74 12/05

STRAP
• Contour fill colors:

- click the button

- the program displays a list of the positive and negative values
fill colors (note the color of the zero value):
- click the colors square to be revised and select a new basic
color as explained in Background.

1.10.1.2 Setup - Color for steel capacity

This option allows you to color code the display of "% of capacity results" in the Steel Postprocessor; specify
a display color for a range of result percentages:

Select a range and then select a color from the

palette below the table.

Note that the limits of the ranges may be revised in the

Steel Postprocessor

1.10.2 Miscellaneous

1.10.2.1 Units

Set the default input and result force and

length units for all new models.
If the default units are revised at the start
of the geometry definition, the revision will
apply only for that particular model.

Version 12.0 1-75 12/05

STRAP
1.10.2.2 Setup - Materials

The properties of 10 materials are permanently stored in the program. Four of these materials are user-defined
materials. These 10 properties will be displayed when the Materials option is selected in beam or element
property definition.

The properties of all 10 materials may be edited:

• Modulus of elasticity
• Poisson's ratio
• Density
• Thermal expansion coefficient (1/°Celsius or 1/°Fahrenheit)

The program displays the material table; select a material and revise/define its properties.

Note:
• Specify the units for modulus-of-elasticity and density in the list boxes at the top of the screen.
• The thermal coefficient may be defined according to either unit. However the temperature difference value
entered when a temperature load is applied must be according to the same units.
• maximum name length = 4 characters
• properties may be defined in exponential format
• addition user-defined materials may be defined in each model for that particular model only.
• revising the program materials will not affect the material properties of existing models.

Version 12.0 1-76 12/05

STRAP
1.10.2.3 Setup - Miscellaneous - Miscellaneous

Print time
Set this option to to print the time in the printout header.

Language
The text in the OUTPUT options (graphic and tabular) in all modules may be displayed and printed in different
languages.

Select a language from the list box.

Matrix backup
The solved stiffness matrix is automatically copied to the hard disk at an interval specified here by the user.
If the solution is interrupted by the user, a power failure, hardware failure, etc. the calculation may be resumed
from the location of the last backup.

Refer to 4.0 - Solution for more details.

Double precision
Set the checkbox to to save the stiffness matrix in double precision format.

Note:
• single precision is the default option and is recommended.
• double precision files are considerably larger
• double precision files are required only for models with relatively thick elements supported on
springs. Reaction values may be inaccurate for these models if single precision is used; all other
result values are accurate with single precision.

Version 12.0 1-77 12/05

STRAP
Memory allocation
Specify the memory location for the solver program according to the memory in your computer. In general,
Increasing the memory allocation will speed up the solution.
• up to 4 mb: The program sometimes crashes when solving large models in computers with 4 mb memory.
In such cases, set the maximum temporary allocation to 8 mb.
• 8 to 32 mb: set the maximum temporary allocation to 24 mb. This is the default value.
• 64+ mb: set the maximum temporary allocation to [memory-32]. For example, if you have installed 128
mb memory, allocate 96 mb. However, the optimum memory allocation varies according to the
resident programs present.

Grid
For node definition:
the Step "Grid" is displayed automatically when a Node definition option is selected
The "Grid" is not displayed automatically.

Display results
This option applies to graphic results only.

For clarity, part of the numerical values may be deleted from screen (the entire geometry and result diagram
will be plotted). All values less than a given fraction of the maximum result will not be displayed.

Example:
Maximum bending moment = 12 kN m and fraction = 0.5 : Only numbers greater than 6 kN m will be displayed
on the screen.

Specify the default ratio; the value may be revised when displaying the results.

Multiple user support

"Multiple user support" may cause problems in computers running under Windows 3.1; multiple user support
should be canceled in such cases only
- a single user may run more than one copy (instance) of the program simultaneously.
- all Setup parameter revisions are written to the computer "Registry", per user
- only one copy (instance) of the program may be started by a single user.
- all Setup parameter revisions are written to the STRAP.INI (one file per installation)

To revise a default parameter for all users (who have not revised the option in Setup) when Multiple user
support is in effect:
• set this option to
• revise the Setup parameter; it will be written to STRAP.INI
• set this option to

Refer also to 1.10 - STRAP.INI / Registry.

Working directory
The current working directory is displayed at the top of the screen. This option determines the current directory
at program startup:
the working directory the last time the program was run.
the program directory

Backup directory
Specify the default backup directory and volume. The value will be used by File management options.

Version 12.0 1-78 12/05

STRAP
Setup - spreadsheets
• Delimiter
Spreadsheet files are ASCII format text files in which the numerical values are separated by a character
called a "delimiter".
The default delimiter is a comma (ASCII character 44). A different character may be specified by entering
its ASCII number.
• Titles
Set the box to to add the table title rows to the delimited file.

Setup - isometric view

For space models only, specify the angles of the three standard isometric view of the model. The isometric
view is displayed by clicking the or icons in the toolbar.

Define the angles assuming that the model is displayed on the X1-X2 plane. If the model is displayed on
another global plane, the program will rotate to equivalent angles.

Setup - Element results

Select the default result type that is displayed in the Display type listbox.

1.10.2.4 Setup - miscellaneous - additional

Setup - default height axis

Many options ask the user to identify the height axis of the model; the program then
assumes that columns are parallel to this axis and floor levels are perpendicular.

Specify the default height axis for all space models.

Setup - default working plane

For the geometry Nodes option, specify the default global working plane. Plane models generated by the
Model Wizard option will be created on the plane specified here.

Setup - DXF units

For the geometry toolbar option - Display - Load DXF drawing, specify the default unit for the DXF drawing.

1.10.2.5 Setup - miscellaneous - rendering

Refer to Display - Rendering

Version 12.0 1-79 12/05

STRAP
1.10.3 Setup - Print parameters

1.10.3.1 Print styles

The format for STRAP tabular output may be specified by the user.

A series of "styles" may be defined using this option; each style contains
information on the fonts, margins, lines and spacing to be used when
printing the table. When printing tables when in any geometry, loading,
result or postprocessor modules, the user may select one of the
predefined styles and the tables will be printed in the specified format.
Select one of the defined styles from the displayed list:
Note:
• "Draft" style prints all data in Courier 10 cpi font without any vertical or
horizontal lines. This style cannot be edited.

Style name
Define a name for the style; the name will appear in the tabular printing dialog box “style list”.

Version 12.0 1-80 12/05

STRAP
Printer
Select a default printer for the style. The printer may be changed when actually printing the tables.

Fonts
Specify the font and text size for the following items:

1.10.3.2 Setup – print drawing

Note:
• setting Use color to will suppress color (print all graphics in black) on color printers
• the margins are relative to the maximum print area available for your printer (i.e. margins may be present
when zero values are entered in the above menu). Refer to your printer manual.

Line/text width for graphic print

For graphic printing only (print drawing and print/edit a saved drawing), define the width of lines associated with
each drawing element and text.

Note:
• the line/text widths are defined in millimeters.
• a line defined with zero width will be drawn with a width of one dot, e.g. for a printer resolution of 300 dpi,
the line width will be 1/300 inch.
• geometry line/text widths also apply to the geometry in loads and results.

Version 12.0 1-81 12/05

STRAP
1.10.3.3 Company logo

Print the company logo at the top of every page of tables (not Print drawing or Print/edit saved drawing).

• the logo must be in the standard Windows Bitmap (.BMP) format and must not be removed from the
specified path at a later date.
• enter the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the logo:
Maintain aspect ratio: the program will distort the image if the dimensions entered here are not
proportional to the bitmap dimensions.
Maintain aspect ratio: the program maintains the drawing proportions by using only one of the
dimensions entered here.
• enter the offset from the left margin; the value is measured from the left margin value specified in the Style.

Refer to 'Print styles' for an example.

1.10.4 Setup - Icon bars

Icon bars are displayed above the graphic display during geometry and load definition. Clicking an icon on the
bar operates the option that it represents directly. For example:

Use this option to customize the icon bars.

Up to 10 different icon bars may be defined (7 "default" bars are present when the program is installed). The
program automatically displays icon bar no.1 on the screen Clicking the icons at the end of the bar
displays the following/previous bars.

To revise an icon bar or add a new icon bar:

• select an icon bar from the list (Bar no. 1 to Bar no. 10)
• the program displays all of the available icons in a large dialog box at the center of the screen and the icons
currently in the bar in a row at the top of the screen.
• add an icon: click the icon in the dialog box; it will be added to the end of the row at the top of the screen.
• to delete an icon: click the icon in the dialog box; it will be deleted from the row at the top of the screen.

• click the button.

Version 12.0 1-82 12/05

STRAP

1.11 Utilities
The following utility modules are available:

Note that you can add options to this menu. This is convenient if you
want to run a STRAP batch operation according to the STBatch utility, but
any Windows "Target" command can be initiated (i.e. run any program).
Refer to 1.13.7.

The STBatch utility can be used for running STRAP in batch mode or for generating ASCII files with geometry,
load and/or result data in user specified format. Refer to the STBatch manual or STRAP Help for more details.

1.11.1 Footing design

Design reinforced concrete spread footings. Refer to ?.

1.11.2 User steel section table

This utility module allows you to:

• build a customized "user" steel section table for the STRAP geometry and the Steel postprocessor. Sections
may be copied from any of the standard steel tables (British, European or American) or new sections may
be defined by entering their dimensions; the program will calculate all the section constants.
• add cold-formed sections to the standard steel tables.

Note:
• the "user" steel table is always stored in PROPTABS.DAT and must be in the program directory.
• note that new section types may also be defined for convenience.
• if a user steel table has been created, the option The user steel table is displayed in the Section table
menu.

The utility’s main screen is:

Version 12.0 1-83 12/05

STRAP
Select from the menu bar at the top of the screen:

Files:
• to specify the table to which to add the sections - "User table" or "Cold-formed".
• to Create a file in ASCII format containing all of the section data in the table.
• to Retrieve section date from an ASCII format file
• to print the section dimensions and constants for the highlighted type.
• to exit from the module and return to the STRAP main screen.

Edit:
• to add a new section to the table.
• to add a new section type to the table.
• to revise the dimensions or the constants of a section.
• to delete sections from the table.
• to delete a section type from the table.

1.11.2.1 File options

Select table
Edit user table file
Add new sections - hot-rolled, cold-formed, or built-up - to the user steel table (PROPTABS.DAT).
Edit cold form table file
Add new cold-formed sections to the standard steel tables (British, American, European, etc.).

Create an ASCII file

This option allows you to create an ASCII file containing all of the section data that can be edited using any
standard editor program.

This option allows you to edit the section dimensions and data externally to this program, as follows:

• select Create ASCII file

• specify the name and directory of the ASCII file:
• use any standard text editor to revise the dimensions and data.
• select Retrieve sections from file and select ASCII file to transform the file back to internal format.

Note that section data can be revised interactively in this program by selecting Revise section in the Edit pull-
down menu.

The ASCII file the data for each section consists of the section title (16 characters) and 36 numbers:
• the data item corresponding to each of the 36 numbers is listed in the header before each section type.
• each data item MUST contain a decimal point.
• you may change the number of digits after the decimal point, but the number must always be in the 10
columns allotted to it.

Version 12.0 1-84 12/05

STRAP
ASCII file format:

The following is an example of the format of the user table ASCII file:

• For each section type:

Header row:
column 1: #
column 2-9: type name (8 characters)
column 14: section type:
Hot-rolled: 1=I 2=U 3=RHS 4=L 5=T 6=Pipe 7=2L 8=2[ 9=I+[
Cold-formed: 21=C 22=C+lips 23=hat 24=Z 25=Z+lips 26=L

Footer row: column 1-3: END

• For each section:

six rows containing the tile and 36 data items:

1st row:
- column 2-17: title.
- columns 18-27 , 28-37 , 38-47 , 48-57 , 58-67 , 68-77:data items 1-6

rows 2-6:
- columns 18-27 , 28-37 , 38-47 , 48-57 , 58-67 , 68-77:data items 7-36

The thirty-six data items are explained in the following table. Note that the units are "cm" or "in", depending
on the default STRAP units.
User table - ASCII file format
Item Description for types Units
1 Weight per meter * 10. Kg/m*10.
2 Section height cm
3 Section width - for all, except - 2L, 2 [ cm
Total height - cold-formed
4 Web thickness cm
5 Flange thickness All types, except - cm
Internal bend radius cold-formed
6 Net section height between fillets - I, [, T cm
Width of single section - 2L, 2[
Lip length - Cold-formed
7 Major axis moment-of-inertia (Ix) cm4
8 Minor axis moment-of-inertia (Iy) cm4

Version 12.0 1-85 12/05

STRAP

Item Description for types Units

9 Major axis plastic modulus (Zx) All types, except - cm3
Major principal axis moment-of-inertia (Iu) -L cm4
Major axis elastic modulus (Sx) - 2L cm3
10 Minor axis plastic modulus (Zy) All types, except - cm3
Minor principal axis moment-of-inertia (Iv) -L cm4
Minor axis elastic modulus (Sy) - 2L cm3
11 Buckling parameter (u) -I, [, T
Major axis elastic modulus (Sx) -L cm3
Major principal axis moment-of-inertia (Iu) - Component L of 2L cm4
12 Torsional index (x) -I, [, T
Minor axis elastic modulus (Sy) -L cm3
Minor principal axis moment-of-inertia (Iv) - Component L of 2L cm4
13 Warping constant (H) Hot-rolled: units = dm6
Cold-formed: units = cm6
14 Torsional constant (J) cm4
15 Gross section area cm²
16 Plastic modulus - major axis: K2 I, [ only cm3
17 Lower values of n: n
Sxr - Sx - K2 * n2
18 Higher values of n: K3 cm3
19 Sxr = K3 (1 - n) (K4 + n) K4
20 Plastic modulus - minor axis: K2 -I cm3
I-section: as major K2 - [ - low n ; same stress cm3
21 [-section: n -I
Same stress induced in web by K3 - [ - low n ; same stress
moment, axial:
22 Syr = Sy + K2*n (k3 - n) K3 -I cm3
Different stress: K1 - [ - low n ; same stress cm3
23 Syr = Sy - K2*n (k3 + n) K4 -I
K2 - [ - low n ; same stress cm3
24 [ - section: K3 [ - high n ; same stress
Same stress induced in web by
25 moment, axial: n
26 Syr = Sy + K2*n (k3 - n) K2 [ - high n ; same stress cm3
Different stress:
27 Syr = Sy - K2*n (k3 + n) K3 [ - high n ; same stress
28 - Not used -
29 Minor axis elastic modulus (Sy) -[ cm3
Major axis elastic modulus (Sx) -T cm3
30 Centre-of-gravity (ey) - smaller value [ only cm
31 Distance between sections 2[ only cm
32 - Not used -
33 Section group no. for Fy calculation AISC and CSA only
34- - Not used -
36

Retrieve sections
Add sections to the user steel table (PROPTABS.DAT). The program will create a new file if one does not exist
in the program directory. Copy sections from one of the existing master tables or an ASCII file.

Select: British table

European table
American table
ASCII file

• British / European / American table

A list of the section types in the existing file is displayed. First select a section type and then select
individual sections to be copied to the new table.

Version 12.0 1-86 12/05

STRAP

Note that a section type with the same name is automatically added to the user table.

• ASCII file
This option converts an ASCII file containing the section data to the steel postprocessor internal format.

The ASCII file must be created using the option Create ASCII file.

This option allow you to edit the section dimensions and data externally to this program, as follows:
- select Create ASCII file
- use any standard text editor to revise the dimensions and data.
- select Retrieve sections from file and select ASCII file to transform the file back to internal format.
- specify the name and directory of the ASCII file.

Note:
• section data can be revised interactively by using the Revise section option.
• when Edit user table file has been selected, both hot rolled and cold formed sections found in the ASCII
file are added to the use table.
• when Edit cold form table file has been selected, the cold formed sections in the ASCII file are added to
the standard tables (not the User table); hot rolled sections in the ASCII file are ignored.
• I+[ sections cannot be added to the file.

Print section type

To print the section type currently highlighted.
Continue for more details on the standard "Print tables" menu and Print "Setup”.

1.11.2.2 Edit options

Version 12.0 1-87 12/05

STRAP
Add Section Type
Define a new section type which can include only user defined sections. To define sections for a new type, use
the Add Sections options.

Add user-defined sections to the type as explained in Add sections.

• Section shape:
The new type must be classified as one of the standard section shapes; all sections included in this type will
be assumed by the Steel Postprocessor to have that shape. Note that sections such as double angles, etc.
are not allowed. Select a shape from the list box
• Section type name:
Enter a name for new section type - 16 characters maximum.

Add sections
Add sections to the user steel table (PROPTABS.DAT). The program will create a new file if one does not exist
in the program directory.

Create new sections by entering dimensions. A user defined section can be added to any existing section type,
including user-defined types. Note that a section type may contain a maximum of 640 different sections.

The program displays a list of existing sections types; select one.

Note:
• all hot-rolled user defined sections are assumed to be "rolled", not "welded".
• Hot rolled sections: the program does not prompt for bend radius and ignores rounded corners or fillets
when calculating the section properties. The user should revise the calculated data accordingly.
• Cold formed sections: the program prompts for the internal bend radius and calculates the section constants
accordingly.

The program will prompt for all section dimensions required, according to the section shape of the type
selected.

Units: STRAP default units =

• feet or inch - values are displayed in inch, inch², etc.
• metric units - values are displayed in cm, cm², etc., except for "H", which is displayed in decimeters^6.

For more information on each of the constants, refer to ASCII file format.

Revise sections
To revise the dimensions of any section.

First select the section type, then the section to be revised.

The section dimensions and calculated data for the section are displayed on the screen. Edit the data as
explained in Add sections.

Version 12.0 1-88 12/05

STRAP
Delete section type
Highlight a type in the left-hand list box.
Select the Delete section type option from the Edit pull-down menu.

Delete sections
• Highlight the type in the left-hand list box.
• Highlight the sections to be deleted in the right-hand list box
• Select the Delete sections option from the Edit pull-down menu.

1.11.3 Compute section properties

A module that calculates the properties of geometric sections (area, moment-of-inertia, center-of-gravity, etc).
Also available as a stand-alone program - CROSEC.

The program can calculate all properties that are required for the design of cold-formed (light gauge) sections.
All line sections (with any arbitrary shape) defined in this program may be transferred to the STRAP steel
postprocessor and can be calculated as cold-formed sections.

Two general types of sections may be defined:

• Line sections:
Sections composed of a series of connected lines, each with a specified thickness.
- Segments may be defined in any direction (diagonal).
- Several 'subsections' may be defined to form a section.
- The properties may be copied to STRAP geometry
- Tables of cold-formed sections may be added to the STRAP property tables
- Properties calculated include: Shear center, warping constant, torsional moment-of-inertia and torsional-
flexural buckling constant

• Solid sections:
Sections formed by a closed contour.
- Several separate contours may be defined; additional contours may be specified as "holes".
- The properties may be copied to STRAP geometry.
- Properties calculated include: Torsional moment-of-inertia (exact)

1.11.4 Combine results of two projects

Use this utility to combine the result files from several models.

This option is essential in models where the geometry changes for different loading cases (e.g. supports,
properties, etc.) and the structure must be run as two or more separate models, but where it is necessary to
search all loading cases from all of the models in the various design post-processors.

The number of nodes or elements in the two models that are combined do not have to be identical but the
node/element at the same location in both models must have the identical numbering.

Note that the program combines three files:

• RESLTnnn.DAT
• FORCEnnn.DAT
• STATnnn.DAT

By combining STATnnn.DAT, the program adds the load commands from the load cases of the second model
to those of the first. If you later decide to rerun the first model, remember to erase the unnecessary load cases
(the load commands are required by the various post-processors to calculate the span moment diagrams).

Version 12.0 1-89 12/05

STRAP
To run the program,:
• The program displays a list of the models that have been solved; select the larger of the two models (if you
are combining a series of models, the initial selection should be the largest of all of the models).
• The program will display the list of models again; select the model whose results will be added to those of
the first model selected.

The process may be repeated to add additional models to the combined ones; the models must be added in
order of decreasing size (largest to smallest).

Note:
• Only the first model selected is revised

1.11.5 Recreate the model list

Use this option to recreate a corrupted model list. The model list is stored in the file ZZMODEL.DIR (each
working directory has a different ZZMODEL.DIR file).

This option scans the current directory to locate all model files (GEOMnnn.DAT, STATnnn.DAT, etc) and
rebuilds the model list.

Note:
• the new file is named ZZMODEL.NEW. The program does not erase the corrupted ZZMODEL.DIR file.
• to use the new file, copy it to ZZMODEL.DIR.

1.11.6 STAAD File Conversion

This is a DOS utility module that converts STAAD input files to STRAP format. Geometry, loading and load
combination commands are translated.
• select Files in the Menu bar on the STRAP initial screen
• select Utilities in the pull-down menu.
• select Convert a STAAD input file to STRAP.
• type in the name of the STAAD file

Note:
• The program creates the STRAP GEOMnnn.DAT, STATnnn.DAT, and COMBnnn.DAT files.
• STAAD commands with syntax errors are not translated. Error messages are listed on the screen and
written in an ASCII file ERRS.LST.
• The program does not check that entire geometry has been defined (e.g. restraints).

Commands not Translated by STRAP:

a. STAAD Options not available in STRAP:
• elements with variable thickness
• partial end release and shear release at beam end nodes
• CABLE MEMBER
• MASTER/SLAVE
• WIND LOAD
• PRESTRESS LOAD
• partial load or linear loads on individual finite elements
b. STAAD input options that are in STRAP result/postprocessor modules:
• All DESIGN commands
• All commands related to printout options
• All commands relating to Mode Shape and Natural Frequency Analysis
• UBC LOAD - generated by Seismic Response Analysis
• All DRAW commands
• Commands related to solution options

Version 12.0 1-90 12/05

STRAP
c. Commands not translated
• SEPARATOR command - ";" must be used
• MESH command with 8 corners
• A UNITS command may not be defined within a load case
• SUBST commands will be ignored
• PERFORM ROTATION commands will be ignored
• The following sections will be ignored:
sections in user tables
sections in steel tables other than American
][ , COMPOSITE, section with slab, TUBE
• Beam load with offset from shear center: load is applied but additional moment due to offset is ignored
• AREA and FLOOR commands will be ignored
• STRAIN commands will be ignored
• FIXED END commands will be ignored
• SET Z UP commands will be ignored

1.11.7 Create a STAAD geometry input file

Create a STAAD format geometry file for the current model.

1.11.8 Create steel detailing files

Create a structural steel detailing file in one of the following formats:

• STRUCAD
• SDNF
Note:
• the program writes the model geometry and the beam end results to the files. The steel section written to
the file is the current one in STRAP geometry; different sections selected in the Steel Postprocessor must
be transferred to the geometry using the Exit and update geometry option in the postprocessor.
• the height axis must be X3 for an STRUCAD format file.

1.11.9 Add new options

To add new options to the Utilities menu:

• Edit the file STRAP.INI in the program directory
• Add a section [UTILITIES]
• Add the line NumMenus=n , where n = the number of options that are added
• For each option, add the lines:
Namen=menu_text
Commandn=target_command
Note that the default directory for the commands is the STRAP program directory.

Example:
Add two commands to the menu:
• Run the STBatch file Report1 in the program directory; the entry in the menu will be "Beam results"
• Start the program abcxyz.exe in directory D:\abc; the entry in the menu will be "Font manager"
Add the following lines to STRAP.INI:
[UTILITIES]
NumMenus=2
Name1=Beam results
Command1=stbatch report1
Name2=Font manager
Command2=d:\abc\abcxyz.exe

The Utilities menu will now be displayed as:

Version 12.0 1-91 12/05

STRAP

1.12 DXF Options

1.12.1 Convert metafile to DXF

Use this option to create a two-dimensional DXF file of any STRAP graphic display.

The metafile is created by selecting Print drawing in the Output pull-down menu (on the menu bar) and then
selecting Metafile in the Send output to: box.

When this option is selected, the program displays a list of the Metafiles (extension .MET) in the current
directory. Select the file to convert.

1.12.2 Convert STRAP file to DXF (DXF export)

This module converts the STRAP geometry file to three-dimensional DXF files.

This option differs from the STRAP Print drawing option (and subsequent Convert Metafile to DXF) in that
it creates a full 3D model instead of a 2D image of the current screen display.

• the program works on the current STRAP model

• plane models generate a 2D DXF drawing
space models generate a 3D DXF drawing
• Beams generate a DXF "LINE" command.
Elements generate a DXF "3DFACE" command.
• Each STRAP property is assigned to a different layer and drawn with a different color in the DXF file.
• Dummy beams and elements are drawn in a separate layer.
• The following is not transferred to the DXF file:
Dimension lines, sections, materials, text (numbering, etc.).

1.12.3 Create a new model from DXF file (DXF Import)

This module converts a DXF format file to a STRAP geometry file. It identifies the LINE and mesh commands
and converts them to beams or elements, as requested by the user.

Note:
• that each AutoCAD "layer" may be specified as containing beams or elements.
• STRAP property group numbers may be assigned to the generated beams/elements according to AutoCAD
layer.
• STRAP property group numbers may be assigned to the generated beams/elements according to AutoCAD
line color

The program handles the different AutoCAD entities as follows:

• Beam layer:
- each line in AutoCAD is converted to a STRAP beam.
- each AutoCAD mesh element (3DFACE) is exploded to a series of lines which are converted to beams.

• Element layer:
- areas enclosed by three or four lines and creates triangular or quad finite elements.
- each 3DFACE or surface of a mesh generates a single STRAP quad or triangular element.

The program also handles intersections between lines, between elements and between lines and elements.

Version 12.0 1-92 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• DXF space models create STRAP space models.
DXF plane models (all Z coordinates = 0) create STRAP plane frames.
• The program defines element local axes according to the STRAP defaults.
• The program creates quad finite elements wherever possible; non-planar quads are divided into two
triangles.
• Each "3DFACE" element, polygon mesh or polyface mesh surface generates one STRAP finite element.
• Double lines are treated as single lines.
• Concave elements defined by lines, 3DFACE, polygon mesh or polyface mesh are ignored.
• When creating finite elements the program accepts only quads or triangles. Nodes will be created at
intersection points, even if no elements are generated:

For example:

1.12.3.1 Program capacity

• the program will not generate models that contain more nodes or elements than the STRAP program
capacity.
• the program cannot handle DXF files that exceed the following limits:
maximum number of line end points = 32,000
maximum number of lines = 32,000
maximum number of blocks = 600
maximum number of line end points in all blocks = 16,000
maximum number of lines in all blocks = 16,000
maximum number of vertices in any polyface mesh = 600
• the program cannot handle DXF files with coordinates greater than 1000 meters (rounding off errors would
occur); a warning message is displayed and the program terminates. Move the drawing to the (0,0)
coordinates in your drafting program and import again.

Note that if one end of a LINE is at the same location as an end of the previous LINE, only one end point
is considered for the above limits.
• The program recognizes the following AutoCAD commands and entity types:
LINE - (or 3DLINE in old AutoCAD versions)
TRACE - transforms it to a central line
3DFACE
POLYLINE - (2D and 3D)
polygon mesh
polyface mesh
blocks - but only the above elements will be converted.
• The program ignores the following AUTOCAD entities:
circle, arc, text, dimension lines, solids and hatching

Version 12.0 1-93 12/05

STRAP
1.12.3.2 Layer assignment

The lines in each layer in the AUTOCAD drawing may be -

• ignored
• converted to beam elements
• converted to finite elements
•

Note:
• if 3DFACE, polygon mesh or polygon face elements are
converted to beams, the program 'explodes' them and
generates beams from all visible borders.
• if a layer was "Freezed" or turned "Off" at the time the DXF
file was created, "Do not use" will be the default for that
layer.

1.12.3.3 Import options

Length units
Specify the length of unit assumed in the DXF drawing
and the default length unit in STRAP.

The program will then convert the DXF drawing

dimensions to STRAP length units.

Note:
It is important that the correct DXF length unit be
specified. For example, if the DXF drawing is defined
in meters, but Centimeter is erroneously selected in
the menu, a dimension of 5.00 meter in the DXF
drawing will be assumed to be 5 centimeters. If meters
is specified as the STRAP default length unit this
dimension will then be converted to 0.05 meters.

Assign STRAP properties:

Same for all elements:
All elements (beam and finite elements) will be assigned with property group 1.
According to layers in the DXF file:

Different STRAP property group numbers may be assigned

to different elements if the different element types are drawn
in different layers.

• Select a layer (or layers) in the list box.

• Type in a property number in the STRAP property no. text
box
• Click the Assign property to selected layers button
The property numbers at the right side of the list box are then
updated by the program.

Version 12.0 1-94 12/05

STRAP

According to colors in the DXF file:

Different STRAP property group numbers may be assigned to

different elements if the different element types are drawn with
different colors.
• Select a color (or colors) in the list box.
• Type in a property number in the STRAP property no. text
box
• Click the Assign property to selected colors button

The property numbers at the right side of the list box are then
updated by the program.

None that the search is carried our over all layers; beams and
elements will be assigned with the same property number if they
are draw with the same colors.

Intersection points
The program searches for intersection points of any two entities in the DXF drawing over all layers.

If the option is set to:

STRAP nodes will be created at the intersection points and in finite element layers, the 3DFACES are
exploded to lines. (In beam layers they are exploded automatically).
STRAP nodes will not be created at the intersection points. This is the faster option but must be used
carefully, i.e. only when there are no intersection points that are not the end/corner points of entities.

The following are examples of node, beam and element generation according to the "intersection" option
selected.

• Beam layer

If the intersection option is set to:

the program creates a new STRAP node at the intersection point 5 and creates four beams -1-5, 2-5, 3-5,
4-5.
node 5 is not created and only two beams are generated.

Version 12.0 1-95 12/05

STRAP
• Finite element layer

Example 1:
In Figure (a) there are 6 DXF lines; line 1-2 intersects line 3-4:

If the node intersection option is set to -

the program creates 4 triangular elements as shown in Figure (b).
the program creates node 5 and 4 triangular elements as shown in Figure (c).

Example 2:

In Figure (a) there are 3 DXF lines (2-4, 3-5, 4-5) and one 3DFACE entity (1-2-3-4):

If the node intersection option is set to -

the program creates 1 quad element as shown in Figure (b) and ignores the lines as the program does
not close lines with an 3DFACE to form an element.
the 3DFACE is exploded to lines and the program creates 3 triangular elements as shown in Figure (c).

Version 12.0 1-96 12/05

STRAP

2 Geometry
2.1 Geometry - general

2.1.1 New Model - title

• select Files in the menu bar

• select New model in the pull-down menu.
• define the model title:

The program then displays the Geometry preliminary menu.

2.1.2 Geometry - preliminary menu

There are two methods for defining a new model:

Select a model from the STRAP library

of standard structure types. Define the
geometry, loads and load
combinations. The basic model
created by the wizard may be revised
later using any of the STRAP geometry
and loading definition options.

The program displays a blank screen.

Define the geometry and loads from
scratch using any of the STRAP
geometry and loading definition
options.

Units
By default, data is input and results are displayed according to the default force and length units selected here.
The units may be temporarily revised elsewhere without changing the default units:
• Section and material properties may be defined according to different units.
• Results may be displayed according to any user specified units.

Version 12.0 2-1 12/05

STRAP
Select:

Note:
• If the default units are revised for an existing model, the program only adjusts the geometry values to the
new units; loads are not revised. The program will request authorization to revise the coordinates (material
and property values are always revised).
• The program always uses the default units to calculate the scale of a drawing to be sent to the plotter/printer.
• If Foot is selected as the default length unit, the program will automatically assume Inch as the default unit
for Material and Property definition, and Kip/in² for stress results output.

Title
Update the model title.

The title defined here will appear in the model list in the STRAP main menu

Display width/height
Enter the approximate dimensions of the model in the current units. This information is required for the initial
graphic display. Note that the screen dimensions may be revised at any time.

Model type
Although STRAP solves general three dimensional models, this option allows you to specify two-dimensional
models or trusses as such. The program then restrains unnecessary degrees-of-freedom, allows only loads
in relevant directions, etc. and displays only the relevant options in the program menus.

Select one of the following model types:

Plane Frame
• two-dimensional frame; all loads act in the plane of the model.
• plane stress finite elements.
Plane Grid
• two dimensional grid; all loads act perpendicular to the model.
• plate bending finite elements.
Space Frame
• general three-dimensional space model
• combined plane stress and bending elements.
Truss
• general three-dimensional space truss; all beam elements are assumed pinned at both ends. Finite
elements cannot be defined.

2.1.3 Model Wizard - General

The program contain a library of standard structure types such as plane frames, grids, and various truss
shapes. The basic geometry and loads of these structures can be defined by inputting a limited number of
parameters such as number of bays, storey height, etc. The geometry and loads defined in the wizard are then
transferred to the regular geometry and load modules where the model may be completed and revised.

Version 12.0 2-2 12/05

STRAP
The program automatically assigns property groups to the beams and elements and defines supports.

After the parameters have been defined, the wizard creates and displays the model graphically. Options are
available at this stage for revising all parameters and dimensions. Note that revising the dimensions at this
stage will not change the basic shape of the model. For example, if the length of a single panel is revised in
a "Triangular truss", the top chord will remain a straight line.

Example:
• Geometry:
The model geometry is created by defining a limited number of parameters. For example, the nodes and
beams of the Plane frame can all be defined by specifying four parameters: the number of bays, the number
of storeys, typical bay width and typical storey height.

Enter the parameters and click the button.

Note:
• the program creates the models on the X1-X2 global plane. To
create the model on the X1-X3 plane, select this plane in the
Setup - Miscellaneous - Additional option in the STRAP
model list screen.

• Properties:
The following menu is displayed only if property commands were included in the wizard file for the model
wizard that you selected. A different menu is displayed for each property group.

All STRAP property definition options are available; refer to 2.4.5.

Skip - do not define the properties for the current

group
Skip all - do not define the properties for all remaining
groups; skip to loads.

• Loads:
The following menus are displayed only if load commands were included in the wizard file for the model
wizard that you selected

The menus prompt for various load values and load combination factors. The program then automatically
generates a series of load cases based on the values (the loads can be viewed only in the Loading module).

Version 12.0 2-3 12/05

STRAP
For example, "Plane frame":

Dead/Live load -
uniform load per unit length (in
current units)
Self weight factor- enter '0' if you do not want to apply
self-weight as a dead load
Skip - do not define the loads for the current case
Skip all - do not define the loads for all remaining cases.

Two additional similar dialog boxes are then displayed:

Dialog box title Data requested

Uniform wind loads: Wind on left column
Wind on right column
Combination factors: Factors for: Dead+Live
Dead+Live+Wind
Dead + Wind

The program generates the following 9 load cases:

Load case Description

1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Wind load Wind load X 1.0
4 Alternate dead and live - 1 Staggered loads on alternate spans:
- Dead*max. factor + Live *factor
- Dead * min. factor
5 Alternate dead and live - 2 Similar to 4
6 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor - all spans
7 Dead + live + wind Loads x 2nd set of factors (above)
8 Alternate dead + wind - 1 1.0*Dead + Wind * 3rd set factor
9 Alternate dead + wind - 2 Dead * max. factor + wind * 3rd set factor

Loads may be defined for the following Wizard models:

• Plane frame • Triangular truss • Triangular rafter • Howe truss
• Vierendael • Parallelogram truss • Cross diagonal truss • Continuous beam
• Truss • Trapezoidal truss • Flat Warren truss (a)
• Truss on columns • Frame truss • Flat Warren truss (b)
Refer to 3.0 - Loads for more information on load input.

Version 12.0 2-4 12/05

STRAP
The program creates the model according to the parameters, displays it on the screen and allows limited
revisions to the geometry via a Dialog Box at the bottom of the screen. For example, the plane frame wizard:

No. of bays
No. of storeys
Select this option to revise the parameters displayed on the bottom line. The cursor jumps to the bottom of the

screen. When is selected, the model will be redrawn according to the revised parameters.
Dimensions in gray are for information only and cannot be revised.

Dimensions
Use this option to revise dimensions displayed on the dimension lines:

Move the near the dimension that you want to revise until it is highlighted by the small rectangular blip ;
click the mouse and type in the new dimension.

Select the first option to revise the selected dimension only. To revise all identical dimensions on the line,
select the second option.

Select another dimension to be revised or press [Esc] to end the corrections; the program will redraw the model
with the new dimensions.

To continue to the regular geometry module and complete the definition (supports, properties etc.)
To leave the pre-processor WITHOUT saving the model and return to the preliminary geometry
menu .

For details on the models in the Wizard library, refer to Appendix 2.

To add more models to the preprocessor library, refer to Appendix 2.

Version 12.0 2-5 12/05

STRAP
2.1.4 Geometry - Main Menu

The program displays the geometry definition screen (including the current model if an existing model was
selected). The geometry definition options are displayed at the right-hand side of the screen:

To define node coordinates. Refer to 2.2.

To define restrained supports and rigid links. Refer to 2.3.

To define beam elements, including: location of the beam (between two nodes), properties,
materials, pinned connections, rigid offsets, local axes directions. Refer to 2.4.

To define quadrilateral and triangular finite elements, including location of the element, properties,
materials (including orthotropic). Refer to 2.5.

To define elastic supports. Refer to 2.6.

To duplicate a portion of the model at another location, including nodes, elements and properties.
The copied portion of the model may be rotated or a mirror image may be created. Refer to 2.7

To define general solid elements, including material location and shape of the elements. Note that
the elements may have 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 corner nodes. Refer to 2.8.

To define wall elements sections and location. Refer to 2.8.

To create part of the current model in a temporary working area called a "sub-model". The sub-
model may then be inserted in the main model. Refer to 2.10.

Menu bar options:

File - Refer to 2.12

Edit - Refer to 1.3.5
Zoom - Refer to 1.3.1
Rotate - Refer to 1.3.2
Display - Refer to 1.3.3
Draw - Refer to
Remove - Refer to 1.3.4
Output - Refer to 2.11

Note:
• the options can also be accessed by clicking on the small tabs below the main icons:

• refer also to the Command Mode manual for details on defining geometry by typing in commands.

Version 12.0 2-6 12/05

STRAP

2.2 Nodes
Define the location of each node in space by specifying its coordinates in the global coordinate system.

When Nodes are selected in the geometry Main Menu, the program displays the following options:

Define one node only. Refer to 2.2.1.

Define a series of nodes all lying on a straight line, with equal spacing between them. When
defining the nodes using a cylindrical coordinate system, the nodes are equally spaced along an arc.
Refer to 2.2.2.
Define a series of nodes all lying on a straight line, with varying spacing between them. When
defining the nodes using a cylindrical coordinate system, the nodes are located along an arc. Refer
to 2.2.3.

Define a parallelogram grid of nodes. Define a 'base' line and a 'height' line of nodes (similar to the
previous two options) by specifying the location of three corner nodes. When defining nodes using
a cylindrical coordinate system, this command creates a series of parallel arcs or concentric arcs.
Refer to 2.2.4.

Define a series of nodes using an equation, e.g. parabola, sphere, etc. The equation may be one
supplied with the program or may be user defined. The option may also generate beams and/or
elements. Refer to 2.2.5.

Move an existing node to a new location. Refer to 2.2.6.

Delete an existing node. Refer to 2.2.7.

Assign a new node number to an existing node. Refer to 2.2.8.

Select a coordinate system for node definition:

• a Cartesian plane, either one of the global planes or any arbitrary plane in space.
• a Cylindrical coordinate system.
Refer to 2.2.9.

Search for locations where more than one node has been defined and delete all nodes except one,
thereby 'unifying' the model at those locations. Refer to 2.2.10.

2.2.1 Single Node

Create a single node at any location in the model.

The standard node definition dialog box is displayed:

X1,X2,X3 = global coordinates of next node to be defined

dX1,dX2,dX3 = distance to the previous defined node
Node no. = number of next node to be defined

Version 12.0 2-7 12/05

STRAP
The program numbers the nodes automatically by assigning the next available number to the node being
defined. The user can override the program and specify the number of the next node by moving the into the
Node no. text box and typing in a new number.

Click:
• Screen to return the crosshair to the graphic display without leaving the current option and without
creating the node/beam/etc.
• to abort the current option.

• to create a node at the coordinates currently displayed.

Plane model:
There are two methods available:
• move the mouse so that the is located at the correct X1, X2 coordinates as displayed in the Dialog Box
(adjust the Step if necessary); click the mouse.
• move the into the X1 text box in the Dialog Box. Either type in the correct value or click the buttons
until the correct value is displayed.

Repeat for X2 and press to complete the definition.

Note that if you click and hold the left mouse button until the is in the Dialog box, then the initial coordinates
in the box will be at the location when the mouse was clicked.

A node numbered with the Node no. is created and displayed.

Space model:
The X3 coordinate must be defined in the Dialog box:
• move the into the X3 text box in the Dialog Box. Either type in the correct value or click the button until
the correct value is displayed.

Note that if you click and hold the left mouse button until the is in the Dialog box, then the X1 and X2
coordinates in the box will be those at the location when the mouse was clicked.

• Define the X1, X2 coordinates as explained in the Plane Model example above.

Note that the mouse can move along any plane, referred to as the Working plane. By default the program
selects the Global X1-X2 plane as the working plane. However the user may select any of the other global
planes as the working plane or define any plane in space by specifying three nodes.

Version 12.0 2-8 12/05

STRAP
Additional options:
• Define with same coordinates as existing node:
Specify that one or more of the global coordinates is identical to the same coordinates
of an existing node:
- select the identical global coordinates by turning on their checkboxes

- click the button

- select an existing node:

Move the to an existing node (the will move only in the allowable directions) and
click the mouse or type in the node number in the dialog box and press [Enter].

• Define a node at intersection of lines:

Intersection by nodes
Using the , define two lines by pointing to their start and end
nodes; the new node will be created at the point of intersection
of the two lines.

For example, create the node at the centre of the bay: 1st line: 5-16;2nd line: 6-15
Intersection by coordinates
Using the , define two lines by pointing to their start and end coordinates; the new node will be created
at the point of intersection of the two lines.

• Define a node at the center of a line

Create a new node at the centre point of the imaginary line connecting two existing nodes.
- select the start and end nodes of the line

• Define a node perpendicular to a node/line

A node (single node, start/end node of a line, etc) may be defined at:
- the intersection of a line (defined by two nodes) and the perpendicular to the line from a third node
- offset from a node and perpendicular to the line starting at that node; the node is at a specified distance
or the intersection of the perpendicular with another line or arc.
from node
select nodes 1, 2 and 3; the new node is created at the
perpendicular from node 3 to the line joining nodes 1 and 2.
from line
select nodes 1 and 2; the new node is on the line
perpendicular to line 1-2, drawn from node 1, according to
one of the following options:

- at a specified distance from node 1. Note that a

positive value is to the left when standing at 1 and
looking towards 2 (the example above shows a
negative value)
- at the intersection with another line (defined by two
additional nodes - 3 and 4 in the example above)
- at the intersection with an arc (defined by three
additional nodes)

Version 12.0 2-9 12/05

STRAP
• DXF points
This option is displayed only if a DXF drawing has been added to the display background
ONLY the end points of DXF lines may be selected as node locations
the DXF end points will not be highlighted with the

• More

- Intersection of plane & line

• Select any three existing nodes that define the plane

• Select any two existing nodes that define the line

The five nodes cannot lie on the same plane.

- Intersection of cylinder & line

The new node is created at the intersection of a cylinder and a line:

• Select any three existing nodes that define the a circle on the cylinder (the
program assumes that the cylinder extends infinitely in both directions)
• Select any two existing nodes that define the line.

Note:
• There are two intersection points; the new node will be created at the
point closest to the line end node.

- Node - 3 existing nodes

Select three nodes:

• X1 of the first node = X1 of the new node
• X2 of the second node = X2 of the new node
• X3 of the third node = X3 of the new node

Version 12.0 2-10 12/05

STRAP
2.2.2 Line of Nodes - Equal Spacing

Use this option to define a line of nodes where the spacing between them is equal.
To define the line:
• define the start node of the line as explained in 2.2.1 - Single node
• define the end node location:
The dialog box at the bottom of the screen is:

where:
X1,X2,X3 = location on the screen (global coordinates).
dX1, dX2, dX3 = distance from the start node.
Move the until the correct coordinates are displayed or type in the correct values in the text boxes.

• Specify the number of segments. For 'n' nodes (including the end nodes), there are 'n-1' segments.

Example:

• move to: X1 = 0.0 X2 = 0.0 ; click the mouse.

• move to: X1 = 6.0 X2 = 0.0 ; click the mouse.
• specify four segments

Additional options:
• Define with same coordinates as existing node. Refer to 2.2.1.
• Define end node at intersection of lines. Refer to 2.2.1.
• Define a node perpendicular to a line/node. Refer to 2.2.1.

2.2.2.1 Line Equal - Arc of Nodes

Define nodes equally spaced along an arc.

• Set up the cylindrical system as explained in 2.2.9 - System-Cylindrical.
• Select the start and end nodes as explained in 2.2.2 - Line-Equal, except that the Dialog box is:

Note:
- movement is relative to the cylindrical system. Remember that moving the mouse vertically revises the
radius, while moving the mouse horizontally revises the angle.
- you may type in either the cylindrical coordinates or the global coordinates (X1,X2,X3) in the dialog box.

• Enter the number of segments.

Version 12.0 2-11 12/05

STRAP

• Define the arc direction about the non-cylindrical axis:

Example:

• define start node at: R = 1.0 Ang = -60.0 H = 0.25

• define end node at: R = 1.8 Ang = 35.0 H = 0.75
• specify three segments.
• select Counterclockwise

2.2.3 Line of Nodes - Unequal Spacing

Use this option to define a line of nodes where the spacing between them is not equal.
• Define the start and end nodes of the line as explained in 2.2.2 - Line - Equal.
• Point to the intermediate nodes along the line, as follows:
The moves along the line joining the start and end nodes.

The dialog box at the bottom of the screen is:

where:
dD = distance from the last node defined on the line as measured along the line.
dX1,dX2,dX3 = distance from the last node defined on the line (global coordinates).
D = distance from start node as measured along the line.

Note that dX1 or dX2 (the closest to the line) and not dD is updated at the Step rate, a feature that is very
convenient when only the projected spacings of a diagonal line on a global axis are known.

In many cases it may be more convenient to type the spacing directly in the text boxes rather than by
continuously adjusting the Step for each node.

Version 12.0 2-12 12/05

STRAP
Example:

• move the to the location of Node 1 and click the mouse.

• move the to the location of node 4 - dX1 = 8.0, dX2 = 2.0 and click the mouse.
• move the along the line until dX1 = 3.0 is displayed; click the mouse; node 2 is created.
• move the along the line until dX1 = 2.5 is displayed; click the mouse; node 3 is created.
• move the outside the line and click the mouse.

Additional options:
• Define with same coordinates as existing node. Refer to 2.2.1.
• Define end node at intersection of lines. Refer to 2.2.1.
• Define a node perpendicular to a line/node. Refer to 2.2.1.

2.2.3.1 Line general - Arc of nodes

• Set up the cylindrical system as explained in 2.2.9 - System - Cylindrical.

• Select the start and end nodes as explained for a straight line.
• Define the intermediate nodes as explained for a straight line, except that the dialog box is:

where:
R, Ang, H = location relative the the cylindrical system origin.
dR, dAng, dH = location from the last node defined on the line.

Example: define the arc 1 to 9:

• define the start node:
move the to: R = 5.0 Ang = 180.0 ; click the mouse
• define the end node:
move the to: R = 5.0 Ang = 0.0 ; click the mouse
• select Clockwise

The will move only along the arc:

• define the intermediate nodes:
move to R = 5.0 Ang = 150.0 ; click the mouse.
or type in the values in the text boxes.
• etc.

Version 12.0 2-13 12/05

STRAP
2.2.4 Nodes - Grid

A parallelogram grid of nodes may be defined more efficiently by specifying:

• the nodes on the "base" line of the parallelogram
• the nodes on the "height" line of the parallelogram

Since the end node of the base line is the start node of the height line, three nodes define the general shape
of the grid. Once the distribution of the nodes along the two lines is defined the program automatically
calculates the location of all of the remaining nodes in the grid and creates them.

The distribution of the nodes along the lines is specified with options similar to 2.2.2 - Line - equal and 2.2.3 -
Line - Unequal, or may be specified as a line of existing nodes.
Example:

base line:
• specify Equally spaced
• move to: X1 = 0.0 X2 = 0.0 ; click the mouse
• move to: X1 = 16.0 X2 = 0.0 ; click the mouse
• specify four segments

height line:
• specify Unequally spaced
• move to: X1 = 16.0 X2 = 12.0 ; click the mouse
• move to: dX2 = 3.0 ; click the mouse
• move to: dX2 = 3.0 ; click the mouse
• move to: dX2 = 4.0 ; click the mouse

Additional options:
• Define with same coordinates as existing node. Refer to 2.2.1.
• Define end node at intersection of lines. Refer to 2.2.1.
• Define a node perpendicular to a line/node. Refer to 2.2.1.

Version 12.0 2-14 12/05

STRAP
2.2.4.1 Grid - cylindrical coordinate system

The Grid option will generate a series of parallel arcs; the arcs may all lie in the same plane or may be in
parallel planes (Space models).

Example 1: base line:

• specify Equally spaced
• move to: R = 4.0 Ang = 180.0 ; click the mouse
• move to: R = 4.0 Ang = 0.0 ; click the mouse
• specify nine segments
• select Clockwise

height line:
• specify Unequally spaced
• move to: R = 1.0 Ang = 0.0 ; click the mouse
• move along the line to:
• R = 3.0 Ang = 0.
• R = 1.5 Ang = 0 . ... etc.

Example 2:
base line:
• specify Equally spaced
• move to: R = 3.2 Ang = 180.0 H = 5.0 ; click the mouse
• move to: R = 3.2 Ang = 0.0 H = 5.0 ; click the mouse
• specify four segments
• select Clockwise

height line:
• specify Equally spaced
• move to: R = 3.2 Ang = 0.0 H = 0.0 ; click the mouse
• specify three segments

2.2.5 Nodes - Equations

This option allows nodes to be defined along lines specified by an equation. The equations may represent
plane shapes, e.g. an ellipse, or complex three dimensional shapes, such as spheres, cones, etc. The user
may also define beams or elements connecting the nodes.

The user may define an equation or use pre-defined program equations.

The equations are stored in a general form with constants and variables; after selecting the equation the user
must enter values for the constants and variables in order to specify the actual size of the shape.

Constants : A, B, C, D, E, R
• normally represent dimensions of the shape.

Variables: U, V
• represent variables defined for a range of values. Nodes are generated in the range specified for U and V.

Version 12.0 2-15 12/05

STRAP
For example, a half-ellipse is defined by the equation x5/A5+ y5/B5 = 1;

Required values are:

• A - 0.5 * ellipse width
• B - 0.5 * ellipse height
• U - a variable in the range 0.0 to 1.0
specifying the angle of rotation
between the horizontal axis and any
point on the ellipse, where 0
represents 0° and 1 represents 180°.
To define an ellipse from 45° to 135°,
specify U from 0.25 (45/180) to 0.75
(135/180). To define a full ellipse,
specify U from 0.0 to 2.0.
In addition the user must specify:
• the location of the reference point of the shape
• the number of node increments along the line(s)
• whether beams and elements should also be automatically generated.

The following menu is displayed:

• Refer to "User defined formula" for an explanation on how to define a new formula
• Refer to any of the program formulae for more details on their parameters. Note that only "Ellipse - line"
contains an explanation on the program menus.

2.2.5.1 User-defined formula

Define your own formula and add it to the equation list.

All equations must be defined in terms of constants A,B, .. , R and variables U and V. In all program formulas,
the range U = 0 to 1 and V = 0 to 1 represents the complete shape.

For example, define the equations for a full circle lying on the X1, X2 plane. The equations for any point on the
perimeter of a circle are:

Assume that U represents the angle q measured counter-clockwise from the X1 axis and the angle varies in
the range from 0 to 2π radians. (All angles are measured in radians). Therefore, U = 0. represents 0 radians
and U = 1.0 represents 2π radians = 360°.

Version 12.0 2-16 12/05

STRAP
The program prompts for the equations for the equations defining X1, X2 and X3:

• type: R*cos(6.283185*U)
• Similarly, for X2:, type: R*sin(6.283185*U)
• and for X3: Press [Enter].

The formula may be added to the equation list (saved in the ASCII file FORM.DAT):
Define a title that will be displayed in the list and the prompts that will be displayed when you define the
constants for this equation:

For our example, define the prompt as Enter circle radius.

If you press [Enter] without defining a prompt, "Enter value"
will be displayed when defining the nodes.

Similarly, define prompts for the definition of U. For

example, "U = 0. to 1. generates a full circle".

The equation definition is now complete. The program will

now begin prompting for values and generate the nodes as
explained in Ellipse.

2.2.5.2 Program equations

The equation for an ellipse is explained in detail here. For all other equations in the list, refer to Appendix 2.

The general shape for an ellipse is:

Version 12.0 2-17 12/05

STRAP
The program prompts for the dimension constants A and B:

and the range constant U:

U - referring to the figure above, U from 0. to 1. represents half of a full ellipse (180°). To generate
an ellipse from 30°, define U with "Start value" = 0.1667 (30/180) and "End value" = 1.25
(225/180).
Intervals - to specify the number of node spacings in the range of U. For example, 12 intervals were specified
in the example above.
Another - to continue from the "End" point of the previous range with a different interval size. For more
complex equations, this option can be used to vary the spacing of an element mesh.

Specify the number of the first node and define the coordinate of the reference point (the point with coordinates
<0,0,0> ). Note that an ellipse is always generated on the X1-X2 axis.

Finally, you may instruct the program to link the nodes with beams (or elements, for equations that generate
appropriate models):

Select "Cancel" to abort the equation option.

Version 12.0 2-18 12/05

STRAP
2.2.6 Nodes - Move

Use this option to move nodes from their current location to a new location.

Move nodes
Select one or more nodes using the standard node selection option.
• move one node: move the to the new location and press [Enter].
• move several nodes: select a reference node and its new location; all selected nodes will be moved by the
same dimension.

If the current coordinate system is cylindrical, the radius, angle or height values may be revised for the selected
nodes (relative to the origin of the cylindrical system).
Example:
For the grid below, increase the width of the first bay (between nodes 1 and 2) to 5.0 m.

• Select all nodes except those on line 1-21 by defining a rectangular window around them.
• Select node 2 as the reference node.
• Move the so that X1 = 5.0 and dX1 = 1.0.
• Click the mouse; the model will be redrawn.

Note that if the window is defined around the nodes on line 2-22 only, the distance from line 1-21 to line 2-22
will be revised to 5.0 but the distance from 2-22 to 3-23 will be revised to 3.0.

Additional options:
• select only specified coordinates (X1, X2 and/or X3) of the reference node. For example:
Select the X3 coordinate only of the reference node in the side menu that is displayed
when the reference node is selected. Refer to 2.2.1.

• define the reference location at the intersection of lines joining existing nodes or coordinates
• select the end points of lines in a DXF background drawing

Version 12.0 2-19 12/05

STRAP
Move and rotate nodes
Use this option to both move and
rotate nodes selected using the
standard node selection option.

The rotation and translation is defined

by specifying the new location of
reference nodes; the new location of
each node can be either at any existing
node or at a coordinate. The nodes
form a plane and the translation and
the rotation of the plane is applied to all
of the selected nodes.

There are four options available:

2 options maintain the shape of the
selected geometry and the other 2
stretch/squeeze the block
proportionally according to the new
distances between the reference
nodes:

The option is best illustrated by examples:

Example 1:

Move and rotate all of the nodes on plane 1-2-3 to plane 1-2-3'.
A. Rotate the plane to 1-2-3" without changing its dimensions:
• Select Select 2 nodes and a global axis = X2
• Select node 1 and its new location at node 1 (same location)
• Select node 3 and its new location at node 3'
The plane is rotated about X2 to plane 1-3' but the plane is not stretched or squeezed,
i.e. node 3 moves to 3" and not to 3' and any node n moves to n" and not n1

B. Rotate the plane to 1-2-3' , i.e. stretch the plane:

• Select Select 3 nodes
• Select node 1 and its new location at node 1 (same location)
• Select node 2 and its new location at node 2 (same location)
• Select node 3 and its new location at node 3'
The plane is rotated about X2 to plane 1-3' and the plane is stretched node 3 moves to 3' and not to 3" and
any node n on the plane moves to n' and not n".

Example 2:
Rotate the base of the space frame 1-2-3 to 1'-2'-3' and increase the height from 4 to 4'
• Select Select 4 nodes
• Select node 1 and its new location at node 1' (same location)
• Select node 2 and its new location at node 2'
• Select node 3 and its new location at node 3'
(the program will stretch/squeeze the base if the lengths 1'-2',
2'-3' are not equal to 1-2, 2-3)
• Select node 4 and its new location at node 4'
Note that all intermediate nodes on the height axis of the
frame will be stretched/squeezed proportionally.

Version 12.0 2-20 12/05

STRAP
Revise spacing in a grid of nodes
Similar to Line of Nodes.

The program requests you to define the grid by pointing to the three corner nodes defining it and then requests
revisions for the base line and the height line spacings, as outlined in the previous option.

Note that the program will ignore nodes not lying on the lines drawn through and parallel to the nodes on the
base and height lines of the grid.

For example:

Nodes 17 and 18 will not be moved.

Revise spacing on a line of nodes

This option allows you to revise all of the spacing on a line of nodes in one step.

Example: Revise the spacings from 4 x 1.5m. to 1.6, 1.5, 1.2 and 1.7.

• Select nodes 1 and 5 to define the start and end of the line.
• The program highlights the distance between nodes 1 and 2 and displays the following dialog box:

The program will identify lines where spacings are identical and may revise all to a new equal spacing:

For the current example, select the first option and revise each
of the following spacings individually.

2.2.7 Nodes - Delete

Use this option to delete nodes from the model. Only nodes without elements attached to them may be deleted.

Note:
• Nodes that have no beams or elements attached to them are ignored by the program; these unused nodes
may be deleted from the model, but it is not strictly necessary.

Select one or more nodes using the standard Node Selection option.

Version 12.0 2-21 12/05

STRAP
2.2.8 Nodes - Renumber

Use this option to renumber existing nodes:

Renumber - Individual Nodes

Select the nodes using the standard Node selection option. Note that the order of selection is important; nodes
will be renumbered in the order that they are selected.

Type the new number of the first node selected; all of the nodes
selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that
a number has already been assigned to another node, the program will
assign the original number of the selected node to the other node.

Example:
• nodes 41, 42 and 43 are selected (in that order).
• 75 is specified as the new number for 41
• the nodes will be renumbered 75,76 and 77 respectively
• if, for example, node 76 is an existing node, it will be renumbered 42.

Renumber - Grid of Nodes

Similar to Line of Nodes.
The program requests you to define the grid by pointing to the three corner nodes defining it and then requests
the new number of the node at the start of the base line.

Renumber - Line of Nodes

Use this option to renumber all the nodes in a line:
• Select the two nodes defining the start and end of the line:
• Type the new number of the first node in the line; all of the nodes selected will be renumbered sequentially.
If the program discovers that a number has already been assigned to another node, the program will assign
the original number of the selected node to the other node.

Renumber - arc of nodes

Use this option to renumber all the nodes lying on an arc:
• Select the two nodes defining the start and end of the arc
• Select any other node lying on the arc
• Type the new number of the first node on the arc

Version 12.0 2-22 12/05

STRAP
The program will identify all nodes on the defined arc and will renumber all them.

All of the nodes selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has already
been assigned to another node the program will assign the original number of the selected node to that node.

Renumber a plane of nodes

Renumber all nodes on selected planes. This option is handy for renumbering an entire model or parts of a
model consisting of more than one plane. Note that the planes do not have to be parallel.
• select the nodes to be renumbered using the standard node selection option
• define a plane that specifies the renumbering order; the plane is defined by selecting three existing nodes.
• specify the new number of the first node

The renumbering order is determined as follows:

• the first two nodes define the x1r axis of the renumbering plane; the third node defines the x2r axis of the
plane; the x3r axis is determined by the right-hand rule
• the program sorts the nodes according to their x3r coordinate, starting with the nodes closest to the
renumbering plane. Note that if there are nodes on both sides of the plane, the program will first select all
nodes on one side, then all nodes on the other side.
• for nodes with identical x3r coordinates, the program then sorts according to the x2r coordinate, beginning
with the smallest value.
• for nodes with identical x3r and x2r coordinates, the program then sorts according to the x1r coordinate,
beginning with the smallest value.

All of the nodes selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has already
been assigned to another node, the program will assign the original number of the selected node to that node.

Example:

Renumber the following space frame; the renumbering

is to start on the planes perpendicular to X1 global
• select nodes n1, n2 and n3 to define the
renumbering plane
• specify 1 as the new number of the first node

• the nodes on the x1r-x2r plane are renumbered first

(1-6); the bottom nodes have the smallest x2r values
and the left node has the smallest x1r value, i.e. it is
renumbered first.
• then the nodes on the parallel planes are
renumbered (7-12) and (13-18) are renumbered in
the same order.

Version 12.0 2-23 12/05

STRAP
2.2.9 Nodes - Coordinate system

By default the moves on the X1-X2 plane (even if the display is rotated) and node coordinates are defined
relative to this Cartesian global system.

This option allows you to define coordinate relative to a another system.

A different Cartesian system or a cylindrical system may be defined:

• the will move along the plane of the Cartesian system (referred to as the "Working Plane") or along the
arc of the cylindrical system.
• node coordinates are defined relative to the axes of the new system.

There are two options available:

• Working Plane
Define the working plane as a different global plane, or as an plane
formed by any three nodes in the model. Refer to 2.2.9.1.
• Cylindrical System
Define a cylindrical coordinate system. The crosshair movement is
controlled by defining the angle, radius and height from an arbitrary
origin. Refer to 2.2.9.2.

2.2.9.1 System - Working Plane

The working plane is a plane in space along which the moves. By default, X1-X2 is the working plane. Any
of the three global planes or any arbitrary plane may be defined as the current working plane.

If the working plane is an arbitrary plane not parallel to one of the global
planes (defined by three nodes), the coordinates displayed in the Data
Options Area are "U, V and W", where:

The origin is located at the first node selected to define the working plane.
• U is measured from the first node in the direction of the second node.
The value of U is revised by moving the mouse horizontally.
• V is measured perpendicular to U in the general direction of the third node.
The value of V is revised by moving the mouse vertically.
• W is the dimension perpendicular to the plane. Its positive direction is determined by the right-hand rule.
• The value of W is revised in the Dialog Box at the bottom of the screen.

Note:
• the Working Plane option is in effect only for node definition.
• the program will automatically rotate the model if the working plane is perpendicular (or nearly
perpendicular) to the screen when you enter the node definition option.

Version 12.0 2-24 12/05

STRAP
Example:
Use a working plane to define node 41 on the sloped roof below. The node location relative to the plane of the
roof is known (as detailed in the figure) but not relative to the global coordinate system.

• define a Working plane as Defined by 3 nodes.

• select nodes 10, 20 and 30 in that order to create the Working
Plane U-V-W as shown.
• select Single node; move the until U = 5.0 and V = 3.0 are
displayed in the Data Options Dialog Box (note that the
moves along the working plane only).

2.2.9.2 Cylindrical Coordinate System

Coordinates may also be defined relative to a cylindrical coordinate system.If a cylindrical system is specified,
the coordinates used to define node locations are:
• radius (R) instead of X1
• angle (Ang) instead of X2
• height (H) instead of X3.

A cylindrical coordinate system has a central non-cylindrical axis which must be parallel to a global axis. This
axis may be defined at any location.

To cancel a Cylindrical System, define a Working Plane.

Select the global non-cylindrical axis and its location:

For example, if X3 is chosen as the "height axis" and the origin is set at
any arbitrary location, the cylindrical coordinate system is:

The options Line equal, Line general and Grid may all be used while
a cylindrical coordinate system is in effect.

For examples:
Line equal - define an arc (refer to 2.2.2.1)
Line general- define an arc (refer to 2.2.3.1)
Grid - cylindrical coordinate system (refer to 2.2.4.1)

Version 12.0 2-25 12/05

STRAP
2.2.10 Nodes - Unify

In certain cases, it may be convenient to define two different nodes at the same location. This usually occurs
in models which have separate planes connected along a common line. Each plane is defined with independent
numbering to take advantage of the Node and Beam Grid commands. As a result, the elements adjacent to
the common line are not connected to the same nodes and so the two planes are physically not connected.

The Unify command searches for nodes with identical coordinates. If it locates such nodes, it connects all
elements attached to them to the node with the lowest number (i.e. revises the JA, JB, JC or JD node of the
element). The higher numbered nodes are deleted from the model.

Note: Unify is carried out on the entire model.

Example:

The two grids below were defined such that there are two nodes at every location on the common line.

The end nodes for four beams in the model are as follows:

Before the UNIFY option After the UNIFY option

Beam JA JB Beam JA JB
53 63 64 53 63 64
55 73 74 55 73 74
84 97 98 84 64 98
86 107 108 86 74 108
• Before:
Beams 53 - 84 are not connected
Beams 55 - 86 are not connected

• After:
The beams are connected

Nodes 77, 87, 97, 107 are deleted

Version 12.0 2-26 12/05

STRAP
2.3 Restraints
Define the location of restrained nodes, i.e. support locations, by specifying which nodes have restrained
degrees-of-freedom. Each restrained degree-of-freedom prevents translation or rotation in a specific direction.
Models without any restrained nodes are unstable (i.e. the stiffness matrix is singular).

The restraints are normally defined in the Global Coordinate System directions. In the case of a sloped support,
etc., restraints may be defined relative to any arbitrary local axis.

Support locations are specified by moving the crosshair on the graphic display (using the mouse or the arrow
keys) to point to an existing node.

Select one of the following options:

All relevant translation and rotation global degrees-of-freedom are restrained. Refer to 2.3.1.

All relevant translation global degrees-of-freedom are restrained. Refer to 2.3.1

Any other combination of restrained global degrees-of-freedom. Refer to 2.3.1.

Define a 'local' support coordinate system (a system for supports not parallel to global axes) and to
assign supports to these systems. Refer to 2.3.2.

Connect selected nodes by means of "Rigid links" (Master-slave nodes). Refer to 2.3.3.

Delete supports. Refer to 2.3.4.

2.3.1 Restraints - Define

Select the support type:

Pinned - all relevant translation global degrees-of-freedom are restrained.
Fixed - all relevant translation and rotation global degrees-of-freedom are restrained.
Other - any other combination of restrained global degrees-of-freedom.

The relevant degrees-of-freedom are:

Translation Rotation degrees-of

degrees-of freedom:
freedom Rotation about -
Plane frame X1, X2 X3
Plane grid X3 X1, X2
Space frame X1, X2, X3 X1, X2, X3

Version 12.0 2-27 12/05

STRAP
if you select Other type, specify the degrees-of-freedom that are restrained. For example:

Select the nodes with the defined support using the standard Node Selection option.

2.3.2 Rotate Supports

Restraints may also be defined about any arbitrary non-global coordinate system, referred to as the "local
support system". Support systems may be either ‘Cartesian’ or ‘Radial’ ; Up to 63 different local support
systems may be defined.

For example, the following support requires a local system to accurately

define it::

A local support system is defined by three nodes JA, JB and JC, where:
• the system x1 lies along JA - JB and points towards JB.
• the system x2 is perpendicular to x1 and points towards JC.
• the system x3 is determined by the right-hand rule.

The system is defined and assigned to nodes in separate options:

Define a local support coordinate system

Use this option to define or revise a local system..

A list of local systems is displayed; select one. Select an Undefined system to define a new one.

Select the three nodes defining the system. In the

example in the previous screen, select nodes 1,4
and 2 (or 3) in that order.

Version 12.0 2-28 12/05

STRAP
Local coordinate systems may be either Cartesian or Cylindrical:

• Cartesian:
A local support system is defined by three nodes JA, JB and JC, where:
- the system x1 lies along JA - JB and points towards JB.
- the system x2 is perpendicular to x1 and points towards JC.
In the following example, nodes 1 and 2 define x1, while either 3 or 4 can be
selected to define x2.

• Cylindrical:
The system is defined simply by identifying its central axis; when nodes are
assigned to the system, the x1 axis is perpendicular to the line joining the
node to the axis. For example:
The central axis may be any of the global axes or may be defined by any 2
existing nodes.

Assign supports to a local coordinate system

The program displays the list of the local systems; select one.
Select the nodes that the system is to be assigned to using the standard Node Selection option.

Cancel local system at selected supports

“Canceling” the local system does not delete the support, but merely reassigns the support to the global system.
Select the nodes with the standard Node Selection option.

Delete a local system

Click on the line in the list box; the system will be deleted.

All restraints and springs assigned to this system will remain but will now be relative to the global coordinate
system.

Version 12.0 2-29 12/05

STRAP
2.3.3 Rigid links

The rigid link option species that the specified deflections and/or rotations of selected nodes shall be identical
(also referred to as "Master-Slave” nodes). Rigid links accurately model the behavior of many structures; they
may significantly reduce the size of the stiffness matrix and hence shorten the solution time.

For example, all nodes in a floor slab may be connected with rigid links so that the entire slab deflects uniformly
and rotates uniformly about the vertical axis. Only three degrees-of-freedom will be added to the stiffness
matrix for the entire floor slab.

Note:
• The lowest number node in the selected group is automatically designated as the Master node.
• All restraints defined at Slave nodes will be transferred to the Master node. This may lead to unexpected
results. Refer to supports at slave nodes for examples.

Three types of rigid links may be defined; in all directions, in a plane or in a single direction:

Rigid links - all directions:

The selected nodes will be rigidly linked in all degrees-of-freedom,
i.e. the three-dimensional block formed by the selected nodes will
maintain its original shape.

For any pair of nodes A and B:

δB = δA +θA XA-B
where: δA = the deflection at A in a global axis direction.
δB = the deflection at B in the same direction.
θA = the rotation at A about the axis of deflection.
XA-B = the distance from A to B projected on the global
axis.

Rigid links - plane:

The specified nodes will move as a rigid body in the specified plane and maintain its original shape. For
example:

For any pair of nodes A and B located in the plane:

δB = δA + θA XA-B
where: δA = the deflection at A
δB = the deflection at B
θA = the rotation at A
XA-B = the distance from A to B

Note that the deflection of each node PERPENDICULAR to the plane may be different.

This option is particularly useful for earthquake analysis; a model of a multi-storey building with only a relatively
few degrees-of-freedom may be created.

Version 12.0 2-30 12/05

STRAP
Rigid links - single direction:
The specified nodes will have the same deflection in the specified global direction.

Rigid links - remove:

Delete rigid links defined at the specified nodes.

Select the nodes to be connected to the same rigid link type:

• All selected nodes:

All selected nodes will be included in a single rigid link group.

• Nodes with same coordinates:

Nodes with the same specified coordinate will be included in a rigid link group.

For example, the following 9 nodes are selected:

The rigid link groups are created as follows according to the option selected:

Note that the groups are numbered according to the smallest node number of the nodes included in the
group.

Supports defined at slave nodes are automatically transferred to the master node (the lowest numbered
node in the rigid link group). The following two examples show how this may lead to unexpected results.

• Tolerance
Only the selected nodes with the same relevant coordinate as the 'Master node' are included in the rigid link
group. Specify a tolerance value for the coordinate of the Master node.

Version 12.0 2-31 12/05

STRAP
Example 1:
The simplified slab shown in Figure (a) should rotate about the support at the lower-left corner. If the master
node is at the support node as shown in Figure (b), then the model will behave as expected. However, if for
example, the lowest numbered node is at the top-left corner, then the model will rotate incorrectly as shown
in Figure (c).

Example 2:
Both bottom corners are restrained for X1,X2 deflection; the model should not rotate at all. However, the model
will rotate about the master node as shown in Figure (b).

The support at the lower-left corner must be restrained for rotation about X3 to prevent the rotation.

2.3.4 Delete Supports

Select the nodes with the defined support using the standard Node Selection option.

Version 12.0 2-32 12/05

STRAP
2.4 Beams
Define beam elements by specifying
location : designate the end nodes.
properties : define properties (A,I), dimensions or a steel shape
material : select a program material or define a new one
local axes : specify the local x2/x3 axis directions
orientation : specify major/minor axes orientation (relative to the local axes)
releases : define pinned connections
rigid offsets : define rigid segments at the beam ends

Select one of the following options:

• Define one beam element by identifying its end nodes. Refer to 2.4.1.
•
Define a series of beams all lying on a straight line. The beams are defined by identifying the
nodes at the start and the end of the line; the program automatically locates all intermediate
nodes and connects them with beams. Refer to 2.4.1.2.
• Define a continuous string of beams, where the start node of any beam is the same as the end node of the
previous beam. Refer to ?.

Define a parallelogram grid of beam elements. The grid is defined by identifying the three corner
nodes on the 'base' line and the 'height' line of the grid; the program automatically searches for all
intermediate nodes and creates a grid of beams. Refer to 2.4.2.

Define a series of beams that all start on a common line and end on a different common line. Refer
to 2.4.3.

Delete a beam already defined. Refer to 2.4.4.

Define section properties (including material) and assign them to beams. Refer to 2.4.5.

Define pinned end connections. Refer to 2.4.6.

Define rigid offsets at the ends of beam elements and assign them to the beams. Refer to 2.4.7.

Renumber a beam element already defined. Refer to 2.4.8.

Divide an existing beam into two or more beams if intermediate nodes is located along the length
of the beam. Refer to 2.4.9.

Specify or revise the direction of the local axes for beams. Refer to 2.4.10.

The following options are available when a stage other than Whole model is the current stage:
Define/select construction ‘stages’. Different properties may be defined for each stage and
beams/elements may be removed. New beams cannot be defined when a stage other than Whole
model is active

Version 12.0 2-33 12/05

STRAP

“Remove” a beam from the current stage. Select beams using the standard beam selection options
Inactive beams are not displayed.

Restore a beam to the current stage.

2.4.1 Beam - Define

Define:
• a single beam - refer to
• a line of beams - refer to
• an arc of beams - refer to
• a chain of beams - refer to

The option is selected by specifying the following options in the side menu:

2.4.1.1 Single beam

Point to the start node and the end node of the beam, the beam will be drawn immediately.

The beam is automatically assigned with:

• the Beam No. displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen. Revising the default group will not change
the property group assigned to beams previously
• the program default local axes.

Example: Create a beam between nodes 21 and 32

• select Single Beam

• move the adjacent to node 21 so that the node is highlighted with the blip and Node = 21 appears in
the Dialog box. Click the mouse.
• move the adjacent to node 32 so that the node is highlighted with the blip and Node = 32 appears in
the Dialog box. Note that the program draws a beam from node 21 to the highlighted node. Double-click
the mouse.
• the beam is created and assigned with the Bm.no. and Prop group number displayed in the Dialog box (this
number may be revised by moving the to the data box, clicking the mouse and entering a new number).

Note:
• set Split at intermediate nodes to define a single beam when there are intermediate nodes.

Version 12.0 2-34 12/05

STRAP
2.4.1.2 Beams - Line

Define a continuous line of beams, where

• the start node of any beam is the same as the end node of the previous beam
• all of the nodes defining the beams lie on a straight line, a chain of straight lines or on an arc

Point to the start node of the first beam on the line and to the end node of the last beam on the line; the program
automatically searches for any intermediate nodes and creates the beams.

All beams are automatically assigned with:

• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the program default local axes.
• The first beam is assigned the Beam no. displayed at the bottom of the screen and the remaining beams
are numbered consecutively.

Example: define beams 50 to 52 -

• set Split at intermediate nodes

• set Beam No. = 50 in the Dialog box.
• move the adjacent to node 10 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; click the mouse.
• move the adjacent to node 12 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; double-click the mouse..
• the program identifies nodes 11 and 39 as lying on line 10-12 and creates beams 50, 51 and 52; node 21
is not on the line and is ignored by the program.

Note:
• if Split at intermediate nodes, only one beam will be created between nodes 10-12.

2.4.1.3 Arc of Beams

Use this option to define a line of beams along a circular arc; identify the first and last nodes on the line (as in
the regular Line option) and one additional node lying along the arc.

Example: define beams 26 to 31:

•
set at the right side of the screen:
Split at intermediate nodes
Arc of beams
• set Beam no. = 26 in the Dialog box
• move the adjacent to node 37 so that the node is highlighted with
the blip; click the mouse.
• move the adjacent to node 43 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; click the mouse.
• move the adjacent to any of nodes 38 to 42 to identify the arc location. When the node is highlighted with
the blip; double-click the mouse.

Version 12.0 2-35 12/05

STRAP
2.4.1.4 Chain of beams

To define a continuous string of Lines where the start node of any line is the same as the end node of the
previous line:

Point to the start node of the first beam of the first line in the chain, to the end node of the first line and then to
the end nodes of all of the following lines in the chain.

All beams are automatically assigned with:

• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the program default local axes.
• the first beam is assigned the Beam no. displayed at the bottom of the screen and the remaining beams
are numbered consecutively.

Example: Define beams 41 to 49.

• set at the right side of the screen:

Split at intermediate nodes
Chain with previous beam.
• set Beam No. = 41 in the Dialog box.
• select the start node of the first line of beams:
move the adjacent to node 24 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; click the mouse.
• select the end node of the first line of beams:
move the adjacent to node 27 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; click the mouse.
• select the end node of the second line of beams:
• move the adjacent to node 56 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; click the mouse.
• select the end node of the third line of beams:
• move the adjacent to node 91 so that the node is highlighted with the blip; double-click the mouse.

Note:
• if Split at intermediate nodes, only the following three beams will be created:

2.4.2 Beams - Grid

Use this option to create a parallelogram grid of beam elements by defining the 'base' line and the 'height' line
of the grid, as follows:
• select the start node of the base line
• select the end node of the base line that is also the start node of the height line
• select the end node of the height line

The program automatically searches for all intermediate nodes and creates a grid of beam elements.

Version 12.0 2-36 12/05

STRAP

2.4.2.1 Grid - Line of Beams

Example:

Nodes 1, 4 and 16 are defined as the corner nodes of the grid:

• the program identified nodes 2 and 3 on line 1-4 and nodes 8 and 12
on line 4-16.
• all nodes were identified as lying on the grid of parallel lines, except
nodes 33 and 34. Node 27 lies on line 13-16 and this is sufficient to
include it in the grid.
• note the generated beams 11 and 12.

2.4.2.2 Grid - Arc of Beams

Use this option to define:

• a series of concentric arcs of beams all lying on the same plane.
• a series of parallel arcs concentric about the same axis.

First define the "base" arc as explained in Line - Arc of beams; then identify a third node defining the height line:
• if the third node lies on the same plane as the base
arc, then a series of concentric arcs will be created.
(Example 'a' below)
• if the third node does not lie on the same plane, then
a series of parallel arcs concentric about the same
axis will be created. (Example 'b' below).

The third node must lie on the plane formed by the

central axis of the base arc and the radius to the end
node of the base arc. The radius from the central axis
to the third node need not be equal to the base arc
radius. This useful feature is illustrated in example (b).

Example (a):
• select node 11 as the start node of the base arc
• select node 17 as the end node of the base arc
• select any of the nodes 12 to 16 to complete the
definition of the base arc
• select node 37 as the third node of the grid.
Beams 1 to 32 are created.

Version 12.0 2-37 12/05

STRAP
Example (b):
• select node 1 as the start node of the base arc
• select node 5 as the end node of the base arc
• select any of the nodes 2 to 4 to complete the definition of the base arc
• select node 15 as the third node of the grid.

Beams 1 to 22 are created.

2.4.2.3 Grid - Chain of Lines

To define a grid, where the base line consists of a chain of connected lines (each line containing several nodes)
where the lines are not necessarily parallel.

The base line is defined as explained in 2.4.1.4 - Line - Chain of Beams; the definition is completed by
identifying a third node defining the height line.

Example: Define beams 41 to 87:

• Select node 24 as the start node of the first line of beams on the base line
• Select node 27 as the end node of the first line.
• Select node 56 as the end node of the second line
• Select node 91 as the end node of the third line of beams on the base line.
• Press [Enter] without moving the crosshair to complete the base line definition.
• Select node 156 to define the height line of the grid.

Beams 41 to 87 are created automatically.

2.4.3 Beams - bracing

Use this option to define a series of beams which whose start nodes all lie on the same line and whose end
nodes all lie on another line. This option is useful for defining rows of diagonal bracing, etc.
For example:

Define all of the bracing beams by defining the first and last
beams only; the program automatically searches for
intermediate nodes on the lines connecting the two start nodes
and the two end nodes.

The option is best explained by an example. Referring to the

figure, define bracing 51, 52 and 53.

Program prompts:
• Select start node of first brace in line: Select node 10
• Select start node of last brace in line: Select node 12
• Select end node of first brace in line: Select node 38
• Select end node of last brace in line: Select node 40

Version 12.0 2-38 12/05

STRAP
The program searches for intermediate nodes along the lines 10-12 and 38-40, and identifies nodes 11, 62 and
39. If node 62 were not present, the program would draw the three beams immediately. In this case, there are
more nodes on one line than the other:

User selection
Select the nodes without bracing using the standard Node Selection option.

Program selection
The program will select the nodes so that the intermediate bracing is as parallel as possible to the end bracing
members. In the above example, the program would select node 39 and not node 62.

Additional Options are available:

The use of these options is best explained by an example. Referring to the following
example, the parallel diagonals 21 to 25 are connected to every second on the top and
bottom chords of the truss. In addition, the top chord is not a straight line.

To define the diagonals 21 to 25:

• bottom chord = start nodes
- set Select every second node on the line to
- select node 10 as the start node of the first brace
- select node 18 as the start node of the last brace

• top chord = end nodes

- set Define a chain of lines to
- select node 22 as the end node of the first brace
- select node 26 as the end node of the last brace in the first chain
- select node 30 as the end node of the last brace in the second chain
- click the mouse without moving the to end the definition.

In a similar manner, define bracings 26 to 30.

2.4.4 Beams - delete

Select beams to delete using the standard Beam Selection

option.

Note that nodes that are not connected to the model after the
beams are deleted may be deleted from the model at the same
time; set Yes, delete in the side menu.

Version 12.0 2-39 12/05

STRAP
2.4.5 Beams- section properties

All beams must be assigned to a property group. When a new beam is defined, it is automatically assigned
to the Property group listed in the Dialog box at the bottom of the screen. The property group number of an
existing beam may be revised at any time.

Note that a property group may be assigned to a beam although the section properties are still undefined.

The section properties required for analysis are area, moments-of-inertia and shear shape factors:
• properties may be entered directly, recalled from a steel section table, or alternatively the program may
calculate the properties of standard geometric shapes from section dimensions.
• a topping may be added to any section type.
• tapered beam sections may also be defined.
• A beam may be designated as Dummy. Dummy beams may be loaded but they do not affect the stiffness
of the model and will not appear in the output tables. For example, use a Dummy beam element if you have
to define a linear load in a model that consists entirely of finite elements.
• each property group includes a material. STRAP includes ten permanent materials. The properties of these
materials may be revised in the Setup option in the STRAP main menu. In addition, temporary materials
may be defined for the current model (User-defined materials).
• each property group definition includes the major/minor axis orientation with respect to the beam local axes.
• new properties cannot be defined when a stage other than Whole model is the current one; existing
properties may be assigned to any active beam.

Select a property to be defined / revised from the property list.

Assign a property group:

Select a property group that you want to assign to beams
• For types other than “tapered”:
Select the beams that this property is to be assigned to using the standard beam selection option. Note:an
-Undefined- property group may be assigned to beams; the section properties may be defined later.
• For “tapered” sections:

Version 12.0 2-40 12/05

STRAP
Assign sections to individual beams
Select the beams that this property is to be assigned to using the standard beam selection option.
Assign sections to lines of beams
Select the start and end nodes of a line of beams. The program will create a new property group for
each beam along the line, the start and end heights calculated proportionally to the distance along the
line.

Note:
• If the start/end properties were defined by Dimensions with the same section type, all new properties
will have the same section type (all dimensions will be tapered)
• If the start/end property is an I-section defined by Dimensions and the other property is a steel I-
section (from a Table), all new properties will be I-section defined by Dimensions (all dimensions will
be tapered)
• For all other cases, the new section groups will be defined by Properties (I,A)
For example, a tapered beam with end heights =100/60 is assigned to a line with three beams:

Three new properties are created.

Define/revise a property group:

• first highlight the property to be defined / revised from the property list.
• select the method to define the property:

• Select one of the following tables of structural steel sections (used when "Steel table" is selected):
British - UB, UC, etc.
European - IPE, HEA, etc.
American - W, M, etc.
User - a customized table of steel sections created by the user. Refer to 1.13.2 - User defined
section table.

• Select the section type:

“A=, I=” - Define the section properties. Refer to 2.4.5.1
Steel Table - Select a structural steel section from a library table. Refer to 2.4.5.2
Dimension - Define the section dimensions. Refer to 2.4.5.3
Tapered - Define a tapered beam (different sections at each end). Refer to 2.4.5.4
Cable - Define a cable element. Refer to 2.4.5.5
Combined - Define a section consisting of 2 or more structural steel shapes (2L, 2[, I+[, etc). Refer to
2.4.5.6
Paste - Copy a ‘solid’ section defined in the STRAP section generator. Refer to 2.4.5.7

Version 12.0 2-41 12/05

STRAP
Copy property groups
Copy beam properties to the clipboard; the properties can then be retrieved into the current model or any other
model.

• click and highlight the properties and click Copy selected

• to copy the entire table to the clipboard, click Copy all

To retrieve the properties into a model, select Beam properties Define/revise , then click on the
option.

2.4.5.1 Properties - constants

Units
Enter the properties in the units displayed. The units may be revised for each property without changing the
model default units. Note that large numbers may be entered in exponential format.

Material
Material type is selected from the current list of materials - the permanent program materials and any temporary
user-defined materials entered for this model.

• Program Material
Ten permanent materials are stored in the program:
- six predefined materials (steel, concrete, etc.)
- four additional materials that may be defined by the user

Version 12.0 2-42 12/05

STRAP
The properties (modules of elasticity, Poisson ratio, density and thermal coefficient) for all ten materials may
be defined or revised, as follows:
- Select Files in the STRAP main menu
- select Setup
- select Materials

• User defined materials

Refer to 2.4.7.9 - Additional options

A, I, J
A - The section area
I2, I3 - Moment-of-inertia about the x2, x3 axes, respectively.
J - The torsional moment-of-inertia.

SF2, SF3
SF2, SF3 are the beam shear shape factors about the beam x2,x3 axes, respectively.
• SF2 is the factor associated with I2, V2 and M2, i.e. SF2 is the factor defined for plane grids.
• SF3 is the factor associated with I3, V3 and M3, i.e. SF3 is the factor defined for plane frames.

Some recommended shear shape factors are:

Solid rectangular section - 0.85 Circular tube section - 0.53
Solid circular section - 0.89 Rectangular tube section - 0.44

H2, H3, E2, E3, Angle, perimeter

H2 = maximum dimension parallel to x2 (used for wind loads)

H3 = maximum dimension parallel to x3 (used for wind loads)
E2 = maximum dimension from c.of.g to perimeter, parallel to x2
(currently not used)
E3 = maximum dimension from c.of.g to perimeter, parallel to x3
(currently not used)
Angle = angle from x2 to major principal axis (u); positive =
counterclockwise

Composite
Add a concrete topping to the beam - Refer to 2.4.5.8.

Version 12.0 2-43 12/05

STRAP
2.4.5.2 Beam Properties - steel table

The standard steel section tables are stored in the program. First select a section type (UB, UC, etc.) - a list of
available sections for that type will be displayed; select one.

Define the material type and section orientation:

For all sections, except angles: For angles:

Note:
• The section orientation selected here is the default for this property group. The orientation may be revised
for individual beams using the Local axes - flange option

Steel table - major axis direction:

The steel section may be aligned so that its major axis resists either the M2 or M3 moments:

Composite
Add a concrete topping to the beam - Refer to 2.4.5.8.

L-Section orientation
This option may be selected for all unsymmetric steel sections, sections defined by properties and L-sections
defined by dimensions. Although not important for analysis (the moment-of-inertia does not change if the flange
location is inverted), the defined orientation will be displayed in the rendered drawing and will be used as the
default orientation by the steel postprocessor, etc.

The option is available for space models only

Version 12.0 2-44 12/05

STRAP
Principal axes
For doubly unsymmetric sections:
When the principal axes of a section are not aligned with the local (geometric) axes,
e.g. a single angle, a more refined analysis may be carried out by using the principal
axes properties (Ιu, Ιv, etc) instead of the local axes properties (Ιx, Ιy, etc).

When principal axis analysis is specified, a load applied in the direction of one local
axis causes the section to deflect in both local axes directions. The program
internally resolves the load to its principal axis components when solving the model.
Note that all results are displayed relative to the local axes.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
American steel table only:

The following steel joist types may be selected:

• K-Joist
• KCS
• LH/DLH
as specified by the Steel Joist Institute (1994)

Note:
• a topping may not be added to joists
• the program will automatically revise the end releases of a member assigned with a Joist to "Pinned". The
release will be revised only upon exiting the Geometry module or if "Save" is selected.
• the area displayed in the properties table for a Joist is used only to calculate self-weight. The area is
assumed zero when formulating the stiffness matrix and hence Joists cannot transmit axial force.
• The Steel postprocessor can select and design Joists in a manner identical to that used for regular steel
sections. Refer to Appendix A7.

Version 12.0 2-45 12/05

STRAP
2.4.5.3 Beam properties - dimensions

The program then prompts for the dimensions, material and section orientation. For example,

For all sections, except L-sections: For L-sections:

Note:
• The section orientation selected here is the default for this property group. The orientation may be revised
for individual beams using the Local axes - flange option

Units
Enter the properties in the units displayed. The units may be revised for each property without changing the
model default units. Note that large numbers may be entered in exponential format.

Material
Material type is selected from the current list of materials - the permanent program materials and any temporary
user-defined materials entered for this model.

Composite
Add a concrete topping to the beam - Refer to 2.4.5.8.

Version 12.0 2-46 12/05

STRAP
B, H, etc. (dimensions)
Enter the section dimensions in the current units, as follows: (the units may be revised for each property)

Major axis direction

The section may be aligned so that its major axis resists either the M2 or M3 moments, i.e the major axis is
aligned with the beam x2 or x3 axis (remember that the "major" axis is not necessarily the one with the larger
moment-of-inertia).

Define the major axis orientation with respect to the local x2 axis:

The user must specify whether:

Section orientation is easily checked by selecting Section orientation in the Display option on the Menu Bar.
• Plane Frame:
I3 resists the in-plane moments for all beams (the local x3 axis is always perpendicular to the plane of the
frame).

Example:

Version 12.0 2-47 12/05

STRAP
• Plane Grid:
I2 resists the in-plane moments for all beams (the local x2 axis is always parallel to the plane of the grid).

Example:

• Space Frame:
The local x2/x3 axis orientation must be checked carefully before defining the major axis direction especially
for beams parallel to the Global X3 axis (section 1-1 in the following example).

Example:

L-Section orientation
This option may be selected for all unsymmetric steel sections, sections defined by properties and L-sections
defined by dimensions. Although not important for analysis (the moment-of-inertia does not change if the flange
location is inverted), the defined orientation will be displayed in the rendered drawing and will be used as the
default orientation by the steel postprocessor, etc.

2.4.5.4 Tapered section

A tapered section is created by defining the section properties at the beam start and beam end using any of
the methods: by properties, steel sections or by specifying section dimensions.

Note that the Steel Postprocessor can "check" only tapered sections defined by section dimensions, i.e. enter
the dimensions of the flange/web of the section at both ends. Tapered "steel sections" cannot be checked by
the postprocessor.

The program assumes a linear variation of cross section along the beam:

Version 12.0 2-48 12/05

STRAP
the program assumes that the variation of A (area) and I (moment-of-inertia) are:

, where:

a,b= the exponents which satisfy

To define a tapered section:

• define the section properties at the beam start and beam end (if not already defined) using any of the
methods: by properties, steel sections or by specifying section dimensions.

• select a property and click the icon

• Select the properties at the beam start and beam end:

• Define the height at the ends. (if you defined the properties by section dimensions, the height dimensions
will appear as the default values).

Note:
• Tapered properties may be assigned to individual beams or a line of beams. Refer to 2.4.5.
• For the beam shown in the figure below, different property groups must be defined for the identical beams
1 and 3 because the "start" and "end" are interchanged.

• "height" values are used only to calculate the exponents "a" and "b". Therefore the end width dimensions
may be entered in the "height" dialog boxes for beams with a tapered width.

Version 12.0 2-49 12/05

STRAP
2.4.5.5 Cable element

This option models a cable as a linear element. The solution is approximate as a non-linear analysis is required
for a complete solution. There are several simplifying assumptions:
• The stiffness of the element is provided by the initial tension force, i.e. the program does not recalculate
the stiffness due to the change in the axial tension resulting from the applied loads.
• the straightening of the cable due to the axial force is linear
• the effect of transverse beam loads is ignored for the straightening and deflection of the cable (moments,
shear, etc. resulting from these loads are calculated as for regular beams).

Note that the program always applies the self-weight in the global X2 direction on the projected length of the
cable. Therefore, cable elements should be defined only in models where X2 is the height axis. The program
calculates the cable stiffness as:

where: w = self weight of the beam

E = modulus of elasticity
L = length of beam
A = section area
T = initial tension in the beam

The stiffness is always less than the axial stiffness of a regular beam element = EA/L. This reduced stiffness
implies that the applied tension force in the cable (from the frame action) serves two purposes:
• straightening of the sag in the cable
• elastic lengthening of the cable

If the initial tension in the cable is large, the initial sag is small and hence a smaller force is required to
straighten the cable. It is obvious that as the initial tension T increases, the stiffness approaches that of a
regular beam element, i.e. K=EA/L. The stiffness decreases as T decreases, resulting in larger deflections.

Define the cable element parameters:

F= (Initial tension force):

Specify the initial cable tension (defined in default force units)

Note that the tension force is not applied as a load; it is used only to calculate the effective stiffness.

Note:
• in cases where the member may be in compression, cable elements should be defined as Tension only
members.
• the material specified must have a value for density so that the program may calculate the self weight.
• the tension force is not applied as a load; it is used only to calculate the effective stiffness.
• for T = 0, the program assumes K = EAL

Version 12.0 2-50 12/05

STRAP
2.4.5.6 Beam properties - combined sections

Select steel sections that are made of two or more standard fabricated steel sections:

Select a section type:

For example , combined - channel + angle

Specify the section data:

• select a section from the list box
• specify dimensions, if required, e.g. spacing
between sections
• specify additional information, if required, e.g.
long or short legs back-to-back, etc.

Axis orientation
Specify the orientation of the section major axis relative to the beam local axes.

Section orientation
For doubly unsymmetric sections:

When the principal axes of a section are not aligned with the local (geometric) axes,
e.g. a single angle, a more refined analysis may be carried out by using the principal
axes properties (Ιu, Ιv, etc) instead of the local axes properties (Ιx, Ιy, etc).

When principal axis analysis is specified, a load applied in the direction of one local
axis causes the section to deflect in both local axes directions. The program
internally resolves the load to its principal axis components when solving the model.
Note that all results are displayed relative to the local axes.

Version 12.0 2-51 12/05

STRAP
Select:
Use geometric properties
use local axis properties, i.e. do not select principal axis analysis
All other options:
use principal axis properties. The exact orientation of the section must be specified; select one of the
orientations displayed

Note:
• this option may be selected for all unsymmetric steel sections, sections defined by properties and L-sections
defined by dimensions
• this option is available for space models only

2.4.5.7 Property - paste

Sections in the 'clipboard' may be pasted into a STRAP property group. To copy a section into the clipboard:
• display the model Property list and click Copy
or -
• Create and copy a section from the STRAP section generator:
- Select Section generator in the File menu
- Create the solid section
- Select Copy to Clipboard in the Output menu
- Select Exit in the File menu to return to the STRAP geometry (or press Alt-Tab to toggle back to STRAP
without closing the section generator

To paste the sections:

• click and highlight a section in the property list
• click Define/revise

• Click the icon

Note:
• All sections copied from the STRAP section generator are defined by properties, i.e. (I,A, etc are copied).
The exact section shape is copied and is displayed by the rendering option.
• If more than one section was copied to the clipboard (using the Copy option) -

Copy only the first one

The first section is pasted into the selected property
Copy all the sections according ...
The property numbers are maintained; for example, if sections 7,9,10 were copied to the clipboard from
another model, they are pasted into the same property groups in the current model.
Copy the sections onto the selected one and on
The first section is pasted into the selected property group and the other sections are pasted into the
following property groups or empty property groups. For example, sections 7,9,10 were copied to the
clipboard from another model and property group 5 is selected in the current model; the following options
are available:

Version 12.0 2-52 12/05

STRAP

• Replace ..
The sections are pasted into property groups 5,6,7
• Search ..
The first section is pasted into property groups 5
and the others into the first two -Undefined-
groups in the table

2.4.5.8 Composite beams

Define a "topping" for any beam section (steel, dimensions or properties). The topping may be of the following
shape:
• rectangular: for steel I and [ sections only. For [ sections, the rectangular topping may be about the major
or minor axes (see below)
• general: for all section types, except for hollow pipes and RHS sections
• fill/encase: for hollow pipes and RHS sections (steel sections or properties) and may be of any material.

The following data is defined by the user:

For [ sections (defined by dimensions or selected from the steel table), rectangular topping may be defined
about the major or minor axes:

Note that a gap between the section and the topping cannot be defined for "minor axis".

Note:
• I2 is associated with D3; I3 is associated with D2
• The area and moment-of-inertia displayed in the Output property tables are the composite properties.
• The program automatically modifies the topping area and moment-of-inertia (in both directions) by the
modular ratio n = Et/Eb when calculating the properties of the composite section.
• The program calculates J as follows:
- Rectangular topping: J = Jtop + Jbeam
- General topping: J = Jbeam (topping is ignored)
- Box section: J = max (Jtop, J of RHS formed by topping)

Version 12.0 2-53 12/05

STRAP
2.4.5.9 Additional options

User defined material

Define the properties of a 'user-defined' material. A material defined here is saved for the current model only.
To save a user-defined material as a permanent program material, select Setup in the STRAP main menu:

Enter:

• the material name; this name will be

displayed in the material list
whenever a material is selected in
the property definition. Type the
name of an existing user-defined
material to revise its properties.

• the material properties, according to the units displayed at the top of the dialog box. Large numbers may
be entered in exponential format.

Property Description Units

Modulus of Elasticity E force / length2
Poisson Ratio ν -
Density Specific gravity force / length3
Thermal Coefficient (1) α 1/°C or 1/°F
Shear Mod. of Elasticity G force / length2
(1)
The thermal coefficient may be defined according to either unit, no matter what the STRAP default units
are. However the temperature difference value entered when a temperature load is applied must be
according to the same units.

Note:
• if a zero value is entered for G, the shear modulus of elasticity, the program calculates G from the
equation: G = E / 2 ( 1 + ν), where ν = Poisson ratio.

Version 12.0 2-54 12/05

STRAP
Delete a user material

Click and highlight a material from the list displayed; click .

Switch major/minor
Use this option to interchange the major/minor axes of a section, i.e. to rotate it by 90°.

Select the beams with the sections to be rotated using the standard beam selection option.

Note:
• if all beams assigned to the property group are selected, the program revises the property group definition.
• if some of the beams assigned to the group are selected, the program creates a new section group with the
rotated properties and automatically assigns the selected beams to the new group.

Dummy Beams
A beam may be designated as "Dummy". Dummy beams may be loaded but they do not affect the stiffness
of the model and will not appear in the output tables. For example, use a Dummy beam if you have to define
a linear load in a model that consists entirely of finite elements.

Note: dummy beams should be connected to the MODEL at BOTH ends, i.e. dummy beams should not be
cantilevered or connected only to another dummy beam; the loads on the "unconnected" halves of the beam
are lost by the program.

For example, use a Dummy beam to define a linear load in a model that consists entirely of finite elements.

Specify beams as Dummy beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

If you select Property numbers in the Display option, the letter "D" will be displayed alongside the dummy
beams.

Version 12.0 2-55 12/05

STRAP
2.4.6 Beams - End releases

Release degrees-of-freedom at beam ends to simulate pinned connections, sliding connections, etc.
• axially loaded members may be defined as tension only or compression only.
• semi-rigid connections may be defined

Note:
• For members with section "Joist"property (American steel table only): the program will automatically revise
the end releases of a member assigned with a Joist to "Pinned". The release will be revised only upon
exiting the Geometry module or if "Save" is selected.
• Every unrestrained node must have at least one unreleased beam connected to it for every degree-of-
freedom of the node.. A "ZERO STIFFNESS" warning message will be generated during the solution for
every node having only released beams connected to it. Note that the single fixed beam will behave as if
pinned because the other beams connected to the node have no end moment to transfer to it.

For example, the restraint for X6 at a node may be supplied by not releasing the M2 (M3) moments of a
beam lying on the X1-X2 plane or not releasing the torsional moment of a beam parallel to the X3 axis.

Moment/Shear:
M2 release - moment release about local x2 axis (at either or both ends)
M3 release - moment release about local x3 axis (at either or both ends)
Torsion release - MT release (always at both ends)
V2 shear- sliding release parallel to the local x2 axis (at either or both ends)
V3 shear- sliding release parallel to the local x3 axis (at either or both ends)

Beams released for shear at both ends in the same direction must not be loaded.

The graphic deflection of beams with shear releases will be displayed incorrectly.

Release at:
Both ends - Select beams using the standard beam selection option.
Torsion and axial force are always released at both ends.
One end - Beams must be selected individually’ highlight the end of the beams to be released (the blip
can appear at both ends).

Version 12.0 2-56 12/05

STRAP
Remove releases:
ALL releases will be removed (the checkboxes are not relevant for this option).

Releases - Axial force:

No release - default status
Axial release - axial force is released
Tension only / - beams can take either axial compression forces or tension forces, but not both.
Compression only:

Note:
• these beams are non-linear elements and require several iterations of the solution.
• the rules of superposition do not apply for non-linear elements. Therefore, load combinations for models with
tension/compression only elements must be defined in loading ("Combine ld") and not after the solution.
• the stiffness matrix will be calculated separately for each load case.
• the moment stiffness is independent of the axial force stiffness.

Releases - semi-rigid

Define a semi-rigid beam end support by defining a spring

connecting the end of the beam to the support node

The end moment applied to the node is

proportional to the spring stiffness and will
vary between zero and full fixity.

Similar to regular releases, semi-rigid connections can be

defined separately for M2 and M3 moments and may be
defined at either or both ends of the beam.

2.4.7 Beam - Offsets

In some cases, the assumption that the ends of a beam element are located at the end nodes is inaccurate.
A typical example is a shear wall with openings forming horizontal beams; the span of the beams should be
measured from the face of the walls rather than from the wall centre where the end nodes are located. The
effect on the beam results can be significant when this "offset" length (one-half of the wall width in this example)
is large compared to the beam length.

Use this option to define rigid Offsets at the beam ends; the program assumes that the beam element is
infinitely rigid in the Offset length. The actual beam length is measured from the end of the Offsets and
program adds moments resulting from the eccentricity of the new beam end to the node.

New JA, JB locations are assumed to be at the end of the offsets. This can lead to a modification in the
directions of the local coordinate system axes. These modified local axes will be used throughout the
program:
• local axes displayed graphically or in tables will be the modified axes.
• load locations will be measured from the new JA.
• total load applied to a beam will be the distributed load multiplied by the modified length.
• All beam results will be relative to the modified axes.

Version 12.0 2-57 12/05

STRAP

Offset definition is similar to Property definition; an Offset is defined and assigned to selected beams in
separate options:

Define/revise offset groups:

Select an Offset group to be defined or revised; the program displays the Offset group table:

Define the Offset dimensions:

Beam local system

the dimensions are relative to the beam local coordinate system
Global coordinate system
the dimensions are relative to the global coordinate system

Offset at beam start: the length of the offset starting at JA

Offset at beam end: the length of the offset starting at JB

Version 12.0 2-58 12/05

STRAP
If an offset is defined for a beam element, new JA, JB locations are assumed to be at the end of the offsets.
Referring to example (b) below, this can lead to a modification in the directions of the local coordinate system
axes. These modified local axes will be used throughout the program:
• local axes displayed graphically or in tables will be the modified axes.
• load locations will be measured from the new JA.
• total load applied to a beam will be the distributed load multiplied by the modified length.
• All beam results will be relative to the modified axes.

Example (c) uses offsets to model a composite beam. When all beams and elements are defined in the same
plane (c-ii) the centre of the beam is at the centre of the slab (c-iii) and the enhanced properties of the
composite section are not utilized. The model is corrected by offsetting the beams by the distance from the
centre of the beam to the centre of the slab. This creates a model similar to a Virendael truss with the rigid
offsets forming the vertical links (c-iv). This model has properties similar to that of the composite beam (note
that the beam must be defined as a space model in order to specify X3 offsets).

Examples:

(a) Beams 75, 76:

set Global coordinate system
Beam start: X1 = 0.35
Beam end: X1 = -0.50

(b) Beams 23, 24:

set Global coordinate system
Beam end: X2 = -0.20

(c) All beams:

set Global coordinate system
Beam start: X3 = offset
Beam end: X3 = offset

Assign beams to an offset group:

Select beams that this Offset is to be assigned to using the standard Beam Selection option.

Note that you can assign an -Undefined- offset group to beams and define the properties of the Offset later.

Version 12.0 2-59 12/05

STRAP
2.4.8 Beams - Renumber

Use this option to renumber existing beams:

Renumber - Individual beams:

Select one or more beams using the standard Beam selection option.

Note that the order that the beams are selected is important; they will be renumbered in the same order.

Type the new number of the first beam selected; all of the beams selected will be renumbered sequentially.
If the program discovers that a number has already been assigned to another beam, the program will assign
the original number of the selected beam to that beam.

Example:
• beams 41, 42 and 43 are selected (in that order).
• 75 is specified as the new number for 41
• the beams will be renumbered 75,76 and 77 respectively
• beam 76 is an existing beam; it will be renumbered 42.

Renumber - Grid of beams:

Similar to Line of beams.

The program instructs you to define the grid by pointing to the three corner nodes defining it and then requests
the new number of the beam at the start of the base line.

All beams with both end nodes lying in the parallelogram defined by the three nodes will be renumbered, in
the following order:
a. all beams parallel to the base line
b. all beams parallel to the height line
c. all other beams

Version 12.0 2-60 12/05

STRAP
For the following example, the renumbering order is:

Renumber - Line of beams:

Use this option to renumber all the beams in a line:

• Select the two nodes defining the line
• Type the new number of the first beam in the line

All of the beams selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has already
been assigned to another beam, the program will assign the original number of the selected beam to that beam.
Renumber - Arc of beams
Use this option to renumber all the beams lying on an arc:
• Select the two nodes defining the start and end of the arc
• Select any other node lying on the arc
• Type the new number of the first beam on the arc

The program will identify all nodes on the defined arc and will renumber all beams connecting sequential nodes.
All of the beams selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has already
been assigned to another beam, the program will assign the original number of the selected beam to that beam.

Renumber a plane of beams

Renumber all beams on selected planes. This option is handy for renumbering an entire model or parts of a
model consisting of more than one plane. Note that the planes do not have to be parallel.
select the beams to be renumbered using the standard beam selection option
define a plane that specifies the renumbering order; the plane is defined by selecting three existing nodes.
specify the new number of the first beam

The renumbering order is determined as follows:

• the first two nodes define the x1r axis of the renumbering plane; the third node defines the x2r axis of the
plane; the x3r axis is determined by the right-hand rule.
• the program sorts the beams according to the angle between their x1 local axis and the x3r axis of
renumbering plane, starting with the beams closest to the renumbering plane. If there are beams on both
sides of the plane, the program will first select all beams on one side, then all beams on the other side.
• for beams on the same plane, the program then sorts according to the angle between the beam x1 local axis
and the renumbering plane x2r axis, beginning with the largest angle. Beams with identical angles are
sorted according to their renumbering plane coordinates, beginning with the smallest value.
• for beams with identical x1-x2r angles, the program then sorts according to the x1r coordinate, beginning
with the smallest value.

All of the beams selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has already
been assigned to another beam, the program will assign the original number of the selected beam to that beam.

Example:
Renumber the following space frame; the renumbering is to start on the planes perpendicular to X1 global
select nodes n1, n2 and n3 to define the renumbering plane
specify 1 as the new number of the first beam

Version 12.0 2-61 12/05

STRAP

• the beams on the x1r-x2r plane are selected first (1-6);

• the horizontal beams are perpendicular to x2r (i.e. angle = 90°) and are selected first. Beam 1 has the
smallest x2r coordinate and is renumbered first. Similarly, beam 3 will be renumbered first among the
vertical beams.
• then the beams on the parallel planes are renumbered (7-12) and (13-18)
• then the beam perpendicular to the x1r-x2r plane are renumbered.(19-26).
Diagonal beams will be renumbered according to the same algorithm.

2.4.9 Beams - Split

Use this option to divide a beam into two or more beams when existing nodes are located along the line of the
original beam.

Split selected beams or instruct the program to automatically search the entire model and split all beams .

The first new beam is assigned the same beam number as the original beam; the others are numbered
according to Beam no. =.

All beams are assigned the same property number as the original beam. If releases were defined for the
original beam they will be at the same nodes after the beam is split.

Example:

• Beam 31 is connected to nodes 20 and 23 and nodes 21, 22 are

located along the path of the beam.

• Select beam 31; the beam will be divided into three beams as
shown in the figure.

Version 12.0 2-62 12/05

STRAP
2.4.10 Beams - Local axes

The program creates a local coordinate system x1,x2,x3 for each beam; the major/minor axes of the section
are always aligned with the local x2/x3.

In certain cases the major/minor axes of the beam may not be parallel to the default local axes and the local
axes must be rotated. For example:

Use this option to align the x1,x2,x3 local axes in any direction other than the default. The x2(x3) axes may
be defined as lying parallel to any plane in space or as pointing to a specified node or may be rotated about
the local x1 axis by any angle “Beta”.

The x1 axis direction may also be reversed.

The current flange location may be displayed using the Rendering option or the Display - section orientation
option.

Define a plane:
The beam local x2 or x3 axis can be defined as parallel to any plane in the model:

Version 12.0 2-63 12/05

STRAP
Use one of the options for defining the plane, then select the beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

Define a node:
Select any existing node in the model; the x2 axis of the selected beams will point towards it.

Return to default local axis:

Restore the default local coordinates system for the selected beams.

Reverse local X1 axis direction:

The local x1 axis is always parallel to the axis of the beam.
Select this option to reverse the positive direction of the axis.

BETA Angle
Rotate the beam about its axis by a specified angle. The conventions are explained in the dialog box:

Refer to beam local axes for

additional details on the default
orientation of the local axes.

Define flange location

This options allows the exact flange location to be defined for the following non-symmetric sections. Although
not important for analysis, unless "principal axes" is selected for L-sections (the moment-of-inertia does not
change if the flange location is inverted), the defined orientation will be displayed in the rendered drawing and
will be used as the default orientation by the steel postprocessor, etc.

For all other non-symmetric sections, this option

defines the location of the shear center relative to the
centre-of-gravity of the section:

Invert flange location

Invert the current flange location about both local axes.

The current flange location may be displayed using the Rendering option or the Display - section orientation
option.

Version 12.0 2-64 12/05

STRAP
2.5 Elements
Define quadrilateral or triangular elements by specifying:
• location : designate the end nodes.
• properties : define the element thickness
• material : elements may be isotropic or orthotropic
• local axes : specify the local x3 axis direction

When "Elements" are selected in the geometry Main Menu, the following options are available:

Define one triangular element by identifying its end nodes. Refer to 2.5.1.

Define one quadrilateral element by identifying its end nodes. Refer to 2.5.2.

Define a chain of triangular elements where only the third node of successive elements need be
defined; the program uses two nodes of the previous element (common to both elements) to
complete the new triangle. Refer to 2.5.3.

Define a chain of quadrilateral elements where only the third and fourth nodes of successive
elements need be defined; the program uses two nodes of the previous element (common to both
elements) to complete the new quadrilateral. Refer to 2.5.4.
define a 'base' line consisting of a chain of nodes and a 'height' line, also a chain of nodes, that
starts at one end of the base line. The program copies the base line to every level on the height
line, generating nodes and connecting them with elements. If the base line is a semi-circle and the
height line is a perpendicular line, the program will generate a half cylinder; if the second base line
is a semi-circle with a smaller radius, the surface will be conical. This option can also generate
plane grids.
A powerful command for automatic element generation. Generate a grid of nodes along with the
corresponding grid of elements. The grid outline is defined by specifying a contour, and the size of
the generated elements is determined by user defined parameters. Refer to 2.5.6.

Delete elements already defined. Refer to 2.5.7.

Renumber elements already defined. Refer to 2.5.8, 2.5.9.

Define section properties (including material) and assign them to finite elements. Refer to 2.5.9.

Revise the direction of the local x3 axis. This option is used to reverse the direction of the local x3
axis as set by default by the program. Refer to 2.5.10.

to define the edges of bending elements as "pinned". Refer to 2.5.11.

The following options are available when a stage other than Whole model is the current stage:
Define/select construction ‘stages’. Different properties may be defined for each stage and
beams/elements may be removed. New beams cannot be defined when a stage other than Whole
model is active

Version 12.0 2-65 12/05

STRAP

“Remove” an element from the current stage. Select beams using the standard element selection
options. Inactive elements are not displayed.

Restore an element to the current stage.

Note:
• Models may contain both beam elements and finite elements.
• the end nodes of plane strain finite elements do not transfer bending moments to adjacent elements, i.e.
the corners of these elements are all 'released'. Referring to the shear wall in Figure (a), if the lintel beams
are modeled by beam elements as shown in Figure (b), no bending moments will be generated in them.
The beams should be extended into the wall as shown in Figure (c).

2.5.1 Single triangle

Point to the four corner nodes of the element; the element will be drawn immediately.

All elements are automatically assigned with:

• the El no. displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the program default local axes.

Refer to 2.5.2 - Single quad for a similar example.

2.5.2 Single quadrilateral

Point to the four corner nodes of the element; the element will be drawn immediately.
All elements are automatically assigned with:
• the El no. displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the program default local axes.

Example:create the following element -

• move the adjacent to node 31 so that the node is highlighted with the blip
and Node = 31 appears in the Dialog box. Click the mouse.

• Similarly select nodes 32, 47 and 46.

• the element is created and assigned with the El.no. and Prop group number
(these numbers may be revised by moving the to the data box, clicking the
mouse and entering a new number).

Default Property:
The default property is the property group number that will be automatically assigned to the next beam created.
Revising the default group will not change the property group assigned to beams previously defined.

Version 12.0 2-66 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The four selected nodes must be co-planar. If they are not, the program internally divides the quad into two
triangles and checks the angle α between them:

- if α > 0.5°, the program displays a warning but creates the

'warped' quad element (reduced accuracy).
- if α > 3.0°, the program displays a warning but does not
create the element.
-

2.5.3 Chain of triangles

To define a continuous string of triangular elements, where any two successive elements in the chain have two
common nodes.

First define the three corner nodes of the first element in the chain, then define the third node only of the
following element; the program will use two nodes of the previous element to complete the triangle.

All elements are automatically assigned with:

• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the program default local axes.

The first element is assigned the El no. displayed at the bottom of the screen and the remaining elements are
numbered consecutively.

Example:
Define elements 32, 33 and 34 using the chain option.

• Define element 32 by pointing to nodes 61, 62 and 81. (Figure a). Refer to 2.5.1 - Single triangle.
• define element 33 by pointing to node 86 only; the program automatically selects nodes 62 and 85 as the
other nodes of the triangle (Figure b).
• In a similar manner, select node 63 only to define element 34.

2.5.4 Chain of quads

To define a continuous string of quadrilateral elements, where any two successive elements in the chain have
two common nodes.

First define the four corner nodes of the first element in the chain, then define the third and fourth nodes only
of the following element; the program will use two nodes of the previous element to complete the quadrilateral.
The program will only accept nodes which form convex / coplanar quadrilaterals.

Refer to2.5.3 - Chain of triangles for a similar example.

All elements are automatically assigned with:

• the Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen
• the program default local axes.

The first element is assigned the El no. displayed at the bottom of the screen and the remaining elements are
numbered consecutively.

Version 12.0 2-67 12/05

STRAP
2.5.5 Surface

Automatically generate a surface of elements and nodes by specify a 'base line' and a 'height line' only. Two
options are available:
• generate a plane grid (rectangular or skew) between existing nodes
• define a 'base' line consisting of a chain of nodes and a 'height' line, also a chain of nodes, that starts at one
end of the base line. The program copies the base line to every level on the height line,.generating nodes
and connecting them with elements. If the base line is a semi-circle and the height line is a perpendicular
line, the program will generate a half cylinder; if the second base line is a semi-circle with a smaller radius,
the surface will be conical.

2.5.5.1 3D Surface

Similar to the plane grid option, the surface is created by defining the exterior lines of nodes; the program then
completes the surface and creates all of the necessary nodes and elements. Unlike the grid option, the exterior
lines do not have to be straight and the pair of opposite lines do not have to be identical.

In the general case:

The program 'drags' the 1st height line along the two base lines,
interpolating the coordinates of the nodes that it creates
• the number of nodes on the two base lines must be identical;
the number of nodes on the two height lines must be
identical
• the program will create rectangular elements if the four
nodes are planar; other wise two triangular elements will be
generated

Most models are more regular and the program has simplifying options:

Define:
One base line and one height line
The second base line is identical to the defined
one; the two height lines are also identical. For
example, if the base line is a semi-circle and the
height line is straight, the program will generate a
half-cylinder
Two base lines and one height line
The two height lines are identical. For example, if
the base lines are semi-circles with different radii
and the height line is straight, the program will
generate a truncated cone
Two base lines and one height line
This is the general case described above.

Version 12.0 2-68 12/05

STRAP
Example: Create the following space model:

Frame (A) and Frame (B) are the two base lines and line (2)-(3) is the height line.
• define the nodes in Frame (A) using any of the Nodes--Line/Chain options
• define the nodes in Frame (B); note that the number of nodes on Frames (A) and (B) must be identical.
• define the nodes along line (2)-(3)

• select the option

• select a 3D surface by selecting nodes along 2, 3 or 4 edges
• select Two base lines and one height line
• "Select the start node of the base line": click and highlight node (1)
• "Select the next node in the line or press [End selection]": click and highlight all of the nodes in Frame
(A) in sequence ; double click on node (2).
• "Select start node of the height line (one of the base ends)": click on node (2) again
• "Select the next node in the height line or press [End selection]": click and
highlight all of the nodes on line (2)-(3) in sequence; double click on node (3).
• "Select the next node in the base line or press [End selection]": click and
highlight all of the nodes on line Frame (B) in sequence; double click on node (4).

The program creates the following model (fewer elements have been drawn for
clarity):

2.5.5.2 Grid

To define a parallelogram grid of elements by identifying the three corner nodes defining the 'base' line and the
'height' line of the grid. The program automatically searches for intermediate nodes and creates a grid of
elements, as follows:
• the program searches for intermediate nodes on the base and height lines only.
• only the nodes lying on the lines parallel to the base line and running through the nodes on the height line
are used to generate the elements.
• all other nodes are ignored.
• the program creates quadrilateral elements, unless intermediate nodes require it to add triangular elements.

Three options are available for defining the base line:

Version 12.0 2-69 12/05

STRAP
Straight base line
Example:

Nodes 1, 4 and 28 were defined as the corner nodes of the grid:

- the program identifies nodes 12 and 20 on height line 4-28.
- all nodes are identified as lying on the grid of parallel lines running through these nodes, except nodes
66, 67 and 68.
- node 38 lies on line 25-28 and this is sufficient to include it in the grid.
- the program then creates the grid using only the identified nodes.

The example is also used to demonstrate the difference between the Grid and Mesh commands (2.5.6); The
mesh in Figure (b) is generated on the same pattern of nodes.

The mesh command searches for all nodes lying in the area formed by the grid (or contour) and uses all of
them when generating the elements. If several element patterns are possible, the program will generate
the optimal one, i.e. the pattern where the element shape is as near to rectangular as possible.

The Mesh option is most useful in cases where the node pattern is not regular, e.g. around openings where
more elements are usually required because of local stress concentrations.

Define an arc
Use this option to define:
- a series of concentric arcs of elements all lying on the same plane.
- a series of parallel arcs concentric about the same axis forming a shell.

For example:

First define the "base" arc, then identify a third

node defining the height line:
- if the third node lies on the same plane as the
base arc, then a series of concentric arcs will
be created. (Figure a)
- if the third node does not lie on the same
plane, then a series of parallel arcs
concentric about the same axis will be
created. (Figure b)

The third node must lie on the plane formed by

the central axis of the base arc and the radius to
the end node of the base arc. The radius from
the central axis to the third node need not be
equal to the base arc radius. This useful feature
is illustrated in the example of Figure (b).

Version 12.0 2-70 12/05

STRAP
Example (a):
- select node 11 as the start node of the base arc
- select node 17 as the end node of the base arc
- select any of the nodes 12 to 16 to complete the definition of the base arc
- select node 37 as the third node of the grid.

Example (b):
- select node 1 as the start node of the base arc
- select node 5 as the end node of the base arc
- select any of the nodes 2 to 4 to complete the definition of the base arc
- select node 15 as the third node of the grid.

Define a chain of elements

To define a grid, where the base line consists of a chain of connected lines (each line containing several
nodes) where the lines are not necessarily parallel.

The base line is defined as explained in 2.5.4 - Chain - Quadrilateral; the end node of each line is the start
node of the following line. The definition is completed by identifying a third node defining the height line.

Example:Define elements 41 to 58:

- Select node 24 as the start node of the first line of elements on the base line
- Select node 27 as the end node of the first line.
- Select node 56 as the end node of the second line
- Select node 91 as the end node of the third line of elements on the base line.
- Press [Enter] without moving the to complete the base line definition.
- Select node 156 to define the height line of the grid.
Elements 41 to 58 are created automatically.

2.5.6 Mesh

The Mesh option is a more powerful and extended version of the Grid option. The Mesh option generates both
the elements and the nodes within a user-defined area.

The mesh area is specified by defining a 'perimeter' which joins existing nodes. The perimeter consists of
straight lines connecting nodes or arcs. It may be of any shape and 'holes' may be defined inside it. Note that
the mesh definition may be revised at any time.

Two alternatives are available for defining the element size:

• generation of elements of a user-specified size within the perimeter. The program will generate new
nodes if required.
• automatic element generation, where the elements simply connects the existing nodes, similar to the Grid
option.

Three alternatives are available for specifying the shape and arrangement of elements within the mesh area:
• Rectangular: the program will generate as many rectangular elements as possible.
• Skew:the program will generate parallelogram elements whose sides are parallel to user-defined directions.
• Circle: the program generates parallel arcs of elements and tries to maintain a uniform element size.

Version 12.0 2-71 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The four generated nodes for each element must be co-planar. If they are not, the program internally
divides the quad into two triangles and checks the angle α between them:

- if α > 0.5°, the program displays a warning but creates the

'warped' quad element (reduced accuracy).
- if α > 3.0°, the program creates the two triangular elements
(no warning).

There are four steps for defining a mesh:

• select the mesh type (rectangular, skew, circle). Refer to 2.5.6.1.
• define the mesh contour perimeter. Refer to 2.5.6.2.
• specify the mesh parameters. Refer to 2.5.6.3.
• modify the mesh lines. Refer to 2.5.6.4.

For examples refer to:

• Example 1 : A typical concrete floor slab; an orthogonal mesh is generated. (refer to 2.5.6.5)
• Example 2: A wedge with an arc on the perimeter; a circular mesh is generated. (refer to 2.5.6.6)

To revise an existing mesh, refer to 2.5.6.7.

2.5.6.1 Mesh type options

Generate Nodes (planar contour)

The program automatically generates elements of a specified size within a user-defined perimeter and
generates new nodes if required.
• the perimeter circumference may consist of straight lines or arc joining nodes
• the element shape may be specified as orthogonal or skew, or a circular pattern may be generated.
• holes may be defined in the perimeter area.
• the generated elements will be properly connected to existing elements bordering the perimeter area.
• the grid will be adjusted to include existing nodes within the perimeter area.
• existing nodes in the perimeter area will be automatically erased.

Use Existing Nodes Only (planar contour)

Define a 'perimeter' which joins existing nodes, similar to Generate nodes. The program generates elements
by connecting the existing nodes only and does not generate any new nodes.
• All nodes (selected and used) must lie on the same plane.
• All internal nodes are used.

Version 12.0 2-72 12/05

STRAP
Example:

The perimeter was created by selecting nodes 1-4-28-25-1. (all nodes are 'existing').

Use 3D projection of existing nodes:

This option is available for space models, and is similar to Use existing nodes only.
Define a 'perimeter' which joins existing nodes as explained in Generate nodes. The program generates
elements by connecting the existing nodes only and does not generate any new nodes. All existing nodes are
used.

The program projects all of the nodes displayed onto one of the global planes and connects the adjacent
nodes; use the "Remove" option to temporarily delete nodes from the display.

Select the global plane:

Note that the model does not have to be rotated to the selected plane.

For example, in the shell roof below, the roof must be projected on the X1-X3 plane for the elements to be
generated correctly.

Version 12.0 2-73 12/05

STRAP

Note that if nodes on more than one plane are displayed simultaneously, the element generation may be
incorrect. The following model (a) is projected on a global plane as shown in (b) and the elements are
generated between adjacent nodes. The program creates the erroneous mesh displayed in (c). The mesh
should be generated separately for each plane.

Elements - mesh type:

Three alternatives are available for specifying the shape and arrangement of elements within the mesh area:

• Rectangular
the program will generate as many rectangular elements as possible. The grid
may be rotated to any angle; triangular elements may be generated along the
mesh perimeter or around existing nodes.

• Skew
the program will generate parallelogram elements whose sides are parallel to
user-defined directions.

• Circular
the program generates parallel arcs of elements and tries to maintain a uniform
element size. The program generates nodes on arcs. As the radius to the arcs
increases, the program increases the number of nodes on the arc, maintaining
a spacing between them approximately equal to the spacing between the arcs.

2.5.6.2 Element mesh contour

The mesh area is specified by defining a 'perimeter' contour which joins existing nodes. The perimeter consists
of combinations of straight lines and/or arcs defined between nodes. It may be of any shape and 'holes' may
be defined inside it.

Define a contour segment; select the segment type from the following side menu:

Note that Arc may be selected even if the mesh type is Rectangular or Skew; similarly
Straight may be specified for Circular meshes.

Version 12.0 2-74 12/05

STRAP
Select the nodes at the start and end of the current segment using the standard Node selection option. Then
define additional segments, where the end node of the last segment is the start node of the first segment.
Select:
• End contour definition
Select this option if there is no area within the contour (e.g.
stair openings) where elements are not to be generated.
If openings exist, select Define contour of a hole.
• Define contour of a hole
Define the contour of an opening using the same methods
as for the main contour. More than one hole may be
defined within the main contour. Select End contour
definition when all holes have been defined.

2.5.6.3 Element mesh parameters

The program creates a preliminary mesh for the contour area according to the mesh parameters specified in
this menu.

Specify the parameters and click to continue; the program then superimposes a preliminary mesh
on the contour area according to the specified spacing and options.

Grid step
Specify the size of the elements in the contour area. For example, if 1.0 x 1.0 elements are adequate for our
example, set in X direction and in Y direction equal to 1.00.

Minimum Element
Increasing this value will prevent the generation of small elements; if a generated node on the mesh is less than
the distance specified from an existing node (x or y projection), then the program will not generate the node.

Align grid with existing nodes

The program will modify the grid spacings so that lines pass through existing nodes (the distance between
lines will not be less than the minimum element size), i.e. not all elements will have the same dimensions.
The program will maintain the grid step and the grid lines will not pass through the existing nodes. The
existing nodes will be used as element corner nodes, but irregular shaped elements will be created.

The significance of this option is illustrated in the examples.

Version 12.0 2-75 12/05

STRAP
Ignore existing nodes
Existing nodes may lie within the contour area. These nodes may be connected to elements or may be
ignored, i.e only the generated mesh nodes will be used. Note that all existing nodes on the contour boundary
will always be used, no matter what is specified in this option.
All existing nodes in the contour area will be connected to elements.
All existing nodes in the contour area will be ignored.

Align and split existing beams

Select one of the following options:
ignore existing beams when creating the mesh
align the element boundaries with existing beams and split the existing beams according to the element
corner nodes

Example: The beams in the contour area are shown in Figure (a):

referring to Figure (b), no new beams are created by the mesh option. The beams are connected to the
elements only at the beam end nodes. Note the elements generated above the diagonal beams - the
program ignored the beams when generating them.
referring to Figure (c), all of the original beams were split at the element corner nodes. Note how the
elements are aligned with the diagonal beams.

Align with adjacent elements

The program, by default, will properly connect the elements generated by the Mesh command with existing
larger/smaller elements adjoining the mesh contour. It is recommended that the option be set to when
generating a new mesh.

The reason is illustrated by the following example. When a refined ‘Mesh 2' is generated adjacent to existing
'Mesh 1', setting the option to generates a node along the common line that is connected only to 'Mesh 1'

Version 12.0 2-76 12/05

STRAP
This option should be set to only when editing existing meshes. For example, refine 'Mesh 1' in the upper
figure to the same density as 2:
• edit 'Mesh 1', revise the dimension parameters and set the option to to avoid generating triangular
elements.

• then edit mesh 2, keep the same parameters and set the option to

Grid angle
The element edges are drawn parallel and perpendicular to the base line of the grid.

The base line of the grid may be defined in two ways:

• type in the value of the angle in the text box, where the angle is measured from a base line as follows:
plane models - parallel to X1
space models - parallel to the projection of X1 on the plane. If the plane is parallel to X1, the base line
is parallel to X2.
The grid angle is measured counterclockwise from the base line.

• click the button and select two existing nodes defining the base line.

Version 12.0 2-77 12/05

STRAP
2.5.6.4 Modify mesh lines:

The lines in the preliminary mesh may be modified:

• move a single horizontal or vertical line
• revise the number of spacings between any two selected lines, i.e. add/delete lines in specific areas
• move the entire grid by a specified distance.

For an orthogonal mesh:

For a circular mesh:

Select to create the final mesh after all corrections have been completed.

Move a horizontal/vertical line

Use this option to move a line to a different location. Select a grid line and then specify the new location; two
options are available:

Move grid line to a node: select an existing node

Move grid line by a distance: enter a value

Move the grid:

Move the entire grid in the contour area.

Specify DX and DY:

Horizontal/vertical spacing:
Use this option to add new lines to the grid.

Select two parallel grid lines (not necessarily adjacent);

define the new number of spacings between them:
Note that the distance between the two selected grid lines
will always be divided into equal spacings.

Version 12.0 2-78 12/05

STRAP
2.5.6.5 Mesh example 1

A model with 1.0x1.0 elements (approx.) of the flat slab shown in Figure (a) will be created with this option.

First, define the nodes shown in Figure (b).

Select the Mesh option and begin defining the contour:

Move the mouse and highlight the corner nodes as shown in Figure (c).

Define the opening:

Select:
• Define contour of a hole and select the four corner nodes of the opening as shown in Figure (c).
• End contour definition when the above menu is displayed again.

The program now displays the mesh parameter menu:

Version 12.0 2-79 12/05

STRAP

Select to create the mesh after all corrections have been completed.

The program now superimposes a mesh on the contour area according to the specified spacing and options.
Two variations are shown below according to the parameter specified for Align grid with existing nodes:

For the two variations in the figure above, the following meshes are created:

For the variation shown in Figure (iii), the dotted lines could be aligned with nodes 5,6,7,8 as shown in Figure
(v) below using the "Move line" and "Change spacing" options. The program would then generate the elements
as shown in Figure (vi).

Version 12.0 2-80 12/05

STRAP
2.5.6.6 Mesh example 2

Define a model for the arc shaped floor below containing elements approximately 0.5 x 0.5

• First define the nodes shown in Figure (b) above.

• Select the Mesh option and begin defining the contour:
• Specify the mesh type:

• Define line 1-2-3; specify the line as an arc in the menu at the side of the screen:

Select node 1 as the start node of the arc; node 3 as the end node of the arc; node 2 as the third node on
the arc. The program draws arc 1-2-3.

• Note that the side menu reverts to straight; select node 10 as the next node on the contour.
• Define arc 8-9-10 (similar to arc 1-2-3) and close the contour by selecting node 1.

• Define the opening:

Select:
- Define contour of a hole and select the four corner nodes 4-5-6-7 of the opening as shown above.
- End contour definition when the above menu is displayed again.

Version 12.0 2-81 12/05

STRAP

• Define the centre point of the parallel arcs of the elements to be generated by identifying any of the arcs;
select any three nodes on an arc, e.g. 8,9 and 10 (or 1, 2 and 3)
• Specify the mesh parameters for the circular mesh:

The program now superimposes a mesh on the contour area according to the specified spacing and options
(Figure a):

The generated arcs may be relocated or the spacing between any two arcs may be adjusted:

Move an arc - select an arc and move by a defined distance or to an existing node.
Change arc spacing - select any two arcs (not necessarily adjacent) and enter the revised number of
spacings; the program will redivide the distance (equal spacing) between the two
selected arcs.
- To generate the grid of elements. The grid created for this example is shown in
Figure (b) above.

Version 12.0 2-82 12/05

STRAP
2.5.6.7 Edit a Mesh

Edit an existing element mesh; change the mesh type, the mesh parameters, or manually move the grid lines,
i.e. jump to any stage of the mesh definition process. Note that the mesh contour cannot be revised.

Select a mesh by pointing to a node on its perimeter. If the selected node is common to two or more meshes,
the following menu is displayed:

Move/add grid lines

Refer to 2.5.6.4

Change mesh parameters

Refer to 2.5.6.3

Change mesh type

Refer to 2.5.6.1

Delete the mesh

Select one of the following options:

Delete ... the mesh definition and the elements in the mesh will be deleted
Rotate ... the mesh definition is deleted but the elements will remain in the model.

Version 12.0 2-83 12/05

STRAP
For the first three options, the following warning messages may be displayed:

• if you moved some of the corner nodes defining the mesh perimeter after the mesh was defined, the
program will display the following warning

Select one of the following options:

Use the original contour coordinates
The program will regenerate the mesh assuming that the corners are at their original locations. Note that
beams attached to the 'moved' nodes will remain in their current location.
Use the nodes at their new location
The program will regenerate the mesh using the contour formed by the corner nodes at their new
locations.

• You have moved the contour corner nodes after the mesh was defined and they now form an illegal contour
(contour lines intersect).

- the program will use the original coordinates of all contour contours.

2.5.7 Delete

Select elements to delete using the standard Element Selection option.

Note that nodes that are not connected to the model after the elements are deleted may be deleted from the
model at the same time; set Yes, delete in the side menu.

Version 12.0 2-84 12/05

STRAP
2.5.8 Renumber

Use this option to renumber existing elements:

Select one of the following options:

Renumber - Individual elements:

Select one or more elements using the standard Element selection option.

Note that the order that the elements are selected is important; they will be renumbered in the order that they
are selected.

Type the new number of the first element selected:

All of the elements selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number in the
sequence has already been assigned to another element, the program will assign the original number of the
selected element to that element.

For example:
• elements 41, 42 and 43 are selected (in that order).
• 75 is specified as the new number for 41
• the elements will be renumbered 75,76 and 77 respectively
• element 76 is an existing element; it will be renumbered 42.

Version 12.0 2-85 12/05

STRAP
Renumber - Grid of elements:
The program requests you to define the grid by pointing to the three corner nodes defining it and then requests
the new number of the element at the start of the base line.

Type the new number of the first element selected:

All of the elements selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number in the
sequence has already been assigned to another element, the program will assign the original number of the
selected element to that element.

All elements with all end nodes lying in the parallelogram defined by the three nodes will be renumbered.

Renumber a plane of elements

Renumber all elements on selected planes. This option is handy for renumbering an entire model or parts of
a model consisting of more than one plane. Note that the planes do not have to be parallel.
• select the elements to be renumbered using the standard element selection option
• define a plane that specifies the renumbering order; the plane is defined by selecting three existing nodes.
• specify the new number of the first element

The renumbering order is determined as follows:

• the first two nodes define the x1r axis of the renumbering plane; the third node defines the x2r axis of the
plane; the x3r axis is determined by the right-hand rule.
• the program sorts the elements according to the angle between their plane and the renumbering plane,
starting with the elements closest to the renumbering plane. Note that if there are elements on both sides
of the plane, the program will first select all elements on one side, then all elements on the other side.
• for elements on the same plane, the program then sorts according to the coordinates of the element center
beginning with the smallest values.

All of the elements selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has
already been assigned to another element, it will assign the original number of the selected element to that
element.

Example:
Renumber the following space frame; the renumbering is to start on the planes perpendicular to X1 global

• select nodes n1, n2 and n3 to define the renumbering

plane
• specify 1 as the new number of the first element

• the elements on the x1-x2 plane are renumbered first

(1-2)
• then the elements on the parallel planes are
renumbered (3-4) and (5-6)
• then the elements perpendicular to the x1-x2 plane
are renumbered.(7-10)

Version 12.0 2-86 12/05

STRAP
2.5.9 Properties

The element properties are :

• plate thickness
• material (may be isotropic or orthotropic)
An element may also be designated as a dummy element (zero stiffness).

Each element must be assigned to a property group. When an element is created, it is automatically assigned
the current Prop group number displayed at the bottom of the screen. The property group assigned to an
existing element may be revised at any time.

Note that a property number may be assigned to an element even if the properties have not yet been defined.

2.5.9.1 Element properties - define/revise

• Select and highlight a property to be defined / revised from the property list.

• Click the button

• Define the element properties:

Version 12.0 2-87 12/05

STRAP
Element properties - Orthotropic:
To define an orthotropic material, set the check box to . The dialog box is then revised to:

Define the Material in the Y direction, where

• 'X' refers to the direction parallel to the local element x1 axis
• 'Y' refers to the direction parallel to the local element x2 axis.
It is important to verify the uniformity of the local x1 and x2 axes of elements in orthotropic models.

Thickness
Enter the element thickness in the current units.

2.5.9.2 Elements - assign a property

• Select and highlight a property group in the list displayed on the screen.
• Select elements that this property is to be assigned to using the standard Element Selection option.

Note: an -Undefined- property group may be assigned to elements; the section properties may be defined later.

2.5.9.3 Delete a property

• click and highlight one of the element properties displayed in the list box

• click the button

2.5.9.4 Dummy Elements

An element may be designated as "Dummy". Dummy elements may be loaded but they do not affect the
stiffness of the model and will not appear in the output tables. For example, use a dummy element if you want
to define an area load in a model that consists entirely of beam elements.

Note: dummy elements should be connected to the MODEL at BOTH ends, i.e. dummy elements should not
be cantilevered or connected only to other dummy elements; the loads on the "unconnected" corners of the
beam are lost by the program.

Select elements using the standard Element Selection option.

If you select Property numbers in the Display option, the letter "D" will be displayed in the dummy elements.

2.5.9.5 User defined material

Define the properties of a 'user-defined' material. A material defined here is saved for the current model only.
To save a user-defined material as a permanent program material, select Setup in the STRAP main menu.
Refer to 2.4.5.9, 2.4.5.9.

Version 12.0 2-88 12/05

STRAP
2.5.10 Local axes

Use this option to revise the direction of the local element x3 axis (the x3 axis is always perpendicular to the
element plane). This option is used to reverse the direction of the local x3 axis as set by default by the
program.

As explained in Coordinate Systems, the program tries to ensure uniformity of the direction of the local x3 axis
so as to avoid confusion in the results. Thus all x3 axes will point in the same direction in a plane of elements.

The following is an example where the program defaults are not adequate.

The figure shows a cylinder whose central axis is parallel to X3. By default, the +x3 axes point in the general
direction of +X2. Consequently +x3 of half of the elements point inward, while +x3 of the other half point
outward. In such cases it is recommended that all +x3 point either inward or outward.

Select the elements whose x3 axis direction is to be revised using the standard Element Selection option.

Specify the direction:

A node:
The positive direction of the x3 axis will point in the general direction of positive global axis selected.

The node cannot lie on the plane of the elements.

In the example above select node 1; all the elements will point inward.

The global X1/X2/X3 AXIS:

The positive direction of the x3 axis will point in the general direction of positive global axis selected.
The axis cannot lie on the plane of the element.

Version 12.0 2-89 12/05

STRAP
2.5.11 Elements - Releases

Define pinned edges for bending elements. This option is similar to the moment release option for beams.

For example, define pinned edges at the connection of two precast slabs; the joint is designed to transfer the
vertical shear, but not moments.

Note:
• moments about a selected edge are released
• elements with releases are less accurate than regular bending elements; the element density should be
relatively greater along released lines to compensate for the loss of accuracy.

Select one of the following options:

A line of elements:
• move the so that the first element in the line is highlighted with the and click the mouse.
• select the two nodes defining the edge to be released.
• move the so that the last element in the line is highlighted with the and click the mouse.
Two small circles will be drawn at the ends of the edges of all elements in the line.

A single element:
• move the so that the element is highlighted with the and click the mouse.
• select the two nodes defining the edge to be released.
Two small circles will be drawn at the ends of the edge.

Delete releases:
Select elements with releases using the standard Element selection option. Releases along all edges of the
selected elements will be deleted.

Version 12.0 2-90 12/05

STRAP
2.6 Springs
Define linearly elastic spring supports - translational and rotational - at nodes.

When an elastic support is defined in a specific direction at a node, the node must be unrestrained in that
direction.

To define or revise springs. Refer to 2.6.1.

To delete springs. Refer to 2.6.2.

To write the spring constant values on the graphic display (for defined springs). Refer to 2.6.3.

Define translational springs that act in the positive or negative direction only of the selected axis,
but not both. Refer to 2.6.4.

Define spring constant per area/length and then select elements/nodes defining area/length;
program will automatically calculate spring constants for relevant nodes. Refer to 2.6.5.

To revise a spring, select Define, select the node and enter the revised value.

Note:

To define a translational spring in a direction not parallel to a global direction, assign a local restraint system
to the node, as explained in Springs - local. (2.6.6). Do not define the global components of the spring
constants using S sin(θ) and S cos(θ).

2.6.1 Define

Define the spring constants:

where:
S1 = translational spring constant in the global X1 direction
S2 = translational spring constant in the global X2 direction
S3 = translational spring constant in the global X3 direction
units: force / length

Version 12.0 2-91 12/05

STRAP
rot1 = rotational spring constant about the global X1 axis
rot2 = rotational spring constant about the global X2 axis
rot3 = rotational spring constant about the global X3 axis
units: moment / radian

To define the springs in a non-global (local) direction, refer to 2.6.6 - Springs - local.

Direction
the program will ignore all zero values in the menu
the program will set spring constants =0. in directions with zero values

For example, a value for S1=3250 was previously defined at a node and you now want to add S2=1000 to the
same node:

If you enter in the dialog box; the spring constants for the node will be:

Direction option set to :

• : S1=3250 and S2=1000
• : S1=0 and S2=1000

Example:

Enter: S2 = 1000 and rot3 = 520

and select nodes with these spring constants using the standard Node Selection option.

2.6.2 Delete

Select the nodes with springs using the standard Node Selection option.

2.6.3 Show Value

Select a node with springs; the spring constants will be displayed at the bottom of the screen and all nodes with
the same constants will be highlighted.

For example:

Note that the spring constants cannot be edited; to revise, select Define, select the node and enter the revised
value.

Version 12.0 2-92 12/05

STRAP
2.6.4 Unidirectional

Define springs that act in either the positive or negative direction only of the selected global axis, but not both.
The spring stiffness will be assumed equal to zero in the opposite global direction.

Note:
• unidirectional springs are non-linear elements and require several iterations of the solution, which may
increase the solution time significantly.
• the rules of superposition do not apply for non-linear elements. Therefore, load combinations for models with
unidirectional springs must be defined in loading ("Combine ld") and not after the solution.

Select the active spring directions for each global axis:

where:
• the direction indicates the direction of the force acting on the spring.
• bi-directional is the default value and indicates a regular spring.

Example:
The foundation in the Figure below is subject to uplift forces under specific combinations of loading. In such
a case there is no contact between the foundation and the underlying soil. Define unidirectional springs in the
-X3 direction.

2.6.5 Springs - Area/line

This option automatically calculates the spring constant at the nodes along a line or at the nodes enclosed in
an area based on a soil coefficient defined by the user. This option is useful for the analysis of beams and mats
on elastic foundations.

Beams: the user selects a line of nodes; the program calculates the distance between adjacent nodes,
multiplies the distance by the specified soil coefficient and defines springs at the nodes.
Mats: The user selects a group of elements; the program calculates the tributary area for each node
attached to the elements, multiplies the area by the soil coefficient and defines springs at the nodes.
Use dummy elements in models with beams only

Version 12.0 2-93 12/05

STRAP

Select the nodes or elements using the standard Node selection or Element selection options; the program will
then calculate the spring coefficients and define the springs at the relevant nodes.

Soil coefficient:
Enter a soil coefficient as follows (in the current geometry units):
Area with elements
Enter a value with units Force/Length**3; the program will multiply the coefficient by the tributary area and
calculate a spring constant (units = Force/Length).
Line of nodes
Enter a value with units Force/Length²; the program will multiply the coefficient by the distance between
adjacent nodes and calculate a spring constant (units = Force/Length).

Define for area with elements:

The spring coefficients are calculated as follows:
• the user selects elements using the standard Element selection option.
• the program identifies all nodes connected to the elements.
• the program calculates the tributary area associated with each node, multiplies by the soil coefficient to
calculate the spring constant and defines the spring.

For example, soil coefficient = 100 (F/L**3);.8 selected elements:

Node 2, 4, 5, 13, 16: Area = 0.5 x 0.5 = 0.25

Spring constant = 0.25 x 100 = 25 F/L
Node 3,8,9,12,14,15: Area = 1.0 x 0.5 = 0.50
Spring constant = 0.50 x 100 = 50
Node 6: Area = 3 x 0.25 = 0.75
Spring constant = 0.75 x 100 = 75
Node 7, 10, 11: Area = 1.0 x 1.0 = 1.00
Spring constant = 1.00 x 100 = 100

Define for line of nodes:

The spring coefficients are calculated as follows:
• the user selects the start node and end node of the line using the standard Node selection option.
• the program identifies all intermediate nodes on the line
• the program calculates the tributary length associated with each node, multiplies by the soil coefficient to
calculate the spring constant and defines the spring

Version 12.0 2-94 12/05

STRAP

For example, soil coefficient = 100

Spring at nodes 1, 4 = 5 x 100 = 500

Spring at nodes 2, 3 = 11 x 100 = 1100

Spring direction:
Select a GLOBAL direction.

Replace existing springs / Add:

Select one of the following:
Replace existing springs
The program will erase the current spring constant IN THE SELECTED GLOBAL DIRECTION at the
selected nodes and replace it with the calculated one.
Add
The program will add the calculated spring constant to the current value at the specified nodes.

2.6.6 Springs - local

Springs, by default, are defined relative to the global axes.

To define a spring relative to any local x1-x2 system:

• define the spring constants using the Define option, but assume that S1, S2, ..., rot3 refer to the local
system
• define a local restraint system using the 2.3.2 - Restraint - Rotate - "Define a local support coordinate
system" option
• assign the local support system to the node with the spring using the Restraint - Rotate "Assign supports
to a local coordinate system" option

Note:
• the spring constant may be defined after the local support system has been defined and assigned.
• local support systems may also be defined for unidirectional springs.
• local support systems will be applied to springs define using the "area/line" option.
• if a local support system has been assigned to a node where a spring has been defined, the local system
will be noted in the graphic and tabular displays of spring data
• when defining a translational spring in a direction not parallel to a global direction, always use the method
detailed above; do not define the global components of the spring constants using S sin(θ) and
S cos(θ).

Version 12.0 2-95 12/05

STRAP
2.7 Copy
Copy is a powerful option which enables the user to copy a block from the model - including nodes, elements,
properties and releases - to a different location.

All elements in the copied block are drawn parallel to the original ones. The location of the copied
block is at a specified distance from the original. Refer to 2.7.1.

The copied block may also be rotated with respect to the original block. The program may stretch
or shrink the dimensions of the block, but will always maintain the same node/element layout. Refer
to 2.7.2.

Create a mirror image of the original block about an axis of symmetry. Refer to 2.7.3.

Note:
• more than one copy of the block may be created with one command
• the program will not generate a new node at the location of an existing node but will use the existing node
when creating the elements in the new block.
• the program will not generate a new element at the identical location of an existing element.
• the copied element will be assigned with the property group number of the original element.
• Releases are automatically copied.
• Beam local axes (Copy+rotate/Mirror)
The program tries to rotate the local axes along with the rotation of the block. For example: a beam with
x2 pointing to the centre of a circle is copied radially around the circle; the x2 axis of all the copies of the
beam will also point towards the centre of the circle.
• Element local axes
The local coordinate systems of the copied elements are selected so that the axes of the copied elements
point in the directions that are as near as possible to the directions of the axes of the original elements.

The block to be copied is defined by selecting a group of nodes using the standard Node Selection option; only
elements with all of their end nodes selected will be included in the block. The location of the copied block is
defined by entering the new location of reference nodes (at an existing node or at any coordinate); if the
distance between the reference nodes is changed in the copied block, then the element dimensions will be
revised proportionally.

• the location of the new block may be defined by rotating and translating the original block.
• the two blocks may have a common intersection line; the program automatically Unifies the two blocks so
that they are connected.
• the program may be instructed to connect the new nodes and the corresponding original nodes with beams.
• the command may stretch or shrink the dimensions of the block, but will always maintain the same
node/element layout.

For all options, select the nodes that define the block.

2.7.1 Copy - Translate

All elements in the copied block will be drawn parallel to the original elements.

The block to be copied is defined by selecting a group of nodes using the standard Node Selection option; only
elements with all of their end nodes selected will be included in the block. Since all generated nodes will be
offset an identical distance from their original nodes, only one reference node is required.

More than one copy can be created with the same command; the offset from the second copy and the first will
be identical to the offset from the first copy to the original block.

Version 12.0 2-96 12/05

STRAP
Example: Copy the plane at X3 = 0. to X3 = -5.0

• Define the block to be copied by selecting the frame 1-2-3-4 using any of the standard Node selection
options.
• Select node 1 as the reference node
• Select the new location of the reference node:

• select By coordinates move the to X1 = 0.0 , X2 = 0.0 , X3 = -5.0 and click the mouse.
• set the copies/numbering/increment options to the following values.
Number of Copies:
More than one COPY can be created with the same
command; the offset to the second copy from the first
will be identical to the offset from the first copy to the
original block.
Note that if the option Connect copies with beams to
set to beams 1-5, 2-6, 3-7, 4-8 will be generated.

Beam Numbering:
The beam/element numbering increment is blank by
default:
• if values are not specified the program will use the
first available number for the first beam/element in
the Copy and then number consecutively.
• if values are specified, the program will add the
increment to the existing beam/element numbers.

Copy restraints:
the program copies all restraints at selected nodes to the new locations.

Connect copies with beams:

the program will generate a new beam between each node in the original block and the corresponding node
in the copied block. Specify the property group number of the connecting beams.
these beams will not be generated.

Version 12.0 2-97 12/05

STRAP
2.7.2 Copy - Translate and rotate

The block to be copied and rotated is defined by selecting a group of nodes using the standard Node Selection
option; only beams and elements with all of their end nodes selected will be included in the block.

The rotation and translation is defined by specifying the new location of reference nodes; the new location of
each node can be either at any existing node or at a coordinate. The nodes form a plane and the translation
and the rotation of this plane is applied to all of the selected nodes.

There are four options available: 2 options maintain the shape of the selected geometry and the other 2
stretch/squeeze the block proportionally according to the new distances between the reference nodes:

• if the stretch/squeeze options are

selected, the program will 'stretch' or
'squeeze' all of the elements in the block
according to the change in distance
between the reference nodes; the
program will not distort the block, i.e. all
parallel beams will be stretched or
squeezed by the same factor.

• the block may be copied more than once

by the same command; the offset and
rotation between successive copies is
the same amount as that between the
original block and the first copy.

Example 1:

Create the following model:

• Create frame 1-2-3-4 using the Model wizard
• Copy frame 1-2-3-4 to frame 3-4-5-6:
- select all the nodes in the frame using the standard Node Selection
option.
- select Select 3 nodes (stretch/squeeze the copy)
- define the three reference nodes and their new locations:

1st reference node: 1 - - node 3

2nd reference node: 2 - - node 4
3rd reference node: 3 - - at coordinates (5, 0, -8.0)

Note that the distance from the first to the third reference node is changed from 5.0 in the original block
to 8.0 in the copied block; all of the dimensions in this direction are revised proportionally. The
perpendicular distance remains unchanged in the copied block and all vertical dimensions will remain
constant.

Version 12.0 2-98 12/05

STRAP
- Define the number of copies = 1 and node/beam numbering increment = Automatic:
The program should create a node at the new location of node 1. However it checks whether there is
an existing node at the location of each new node and if yes, it does not create the new node. Similarly,
new beams are not created on the line 3-4.

• Create the remaining two planes:

- select all the nodes in both frames using the standard Node Selection option.
- select Select 3 nodes (Create identical copies)
- define the three reference nodes and their new locations:
1st reference node: 3- - node 5
2nd reference node: 4- - node 6
3rd reference node: 5- - node 1
- set Number of copies =1

Example 2:
Create the smaller frame at the right from the frame of Example 1:

Define 1-3-5 as the reference nodes forming the plane and node
2 as the node in the perpendicular direction:

• select all the nodes in the frame using the standard Node
Selection option.
• select Select 4 nodes (stretch/squeeze the copy)
• define the four reference nodes and their new locations:

1st reference node: 1- - node 1'

2nd reference node: 3 - - node 3'
3rd reference node: 5- - node 5'
4th reference node: 2- - node 2'

• Define the number of copies = 1 and node/beam numbering increment = Automatic:

2.7.3 Copy - Mirror

Create a mirror image of the original block about an axis of symmetry.

Only one reference node is required; the program joins the old and new locations of the reference node with
an imaginary line and passes a plane perpendicular to it through its mid-point.

All of the selected nodes are recreated on the other side of this plane.

The reference node may not lie on the plane of symmetry.

Version 12.0 2-99 12/05

STRAP
Example:

1-2-3-4-5 is an existing frame; create a mirror image about a plane through node 5.
• define the block using the standard node selection option.
• select node 2 as the reference node.
• select the location of node 7 as its new location.
• Define the number of copies and node/beam numbering increment:
Set Number of copies = 1 and Node numbering = Automatic
Refer to 2.7.1.

2.7.4 Copy - Unify

When the program finds existing nodes very near (< 10 cm) to the location of new nodes generated by the Copy
command, the following options are displayed:

Unify
The program will not generate new nodes and will connect all new beams/elements to the existing nodes
Never unify
The program will generate new nodes and will connect all new beams/elements to the new nodes
Unify with distance
Specify a new unify tolerance (initially 0.005 units). The program will unify all nodes where the spacing
between the existing and new is less than the value specified

Note that the option selected here applied only to the current Copy command.

Version 12.0 2-100 12/05

STRAP
2.8 Solid elements
Define solid finite elements.

Note: the Bridge postprocessor cannot solve models that include solid elements.

Solid elements are stress elements with actual thickness defined by the distance between end nodes.
The results are stresses and principal stresses at the corner nodes.

The elements are created from existing quadrilateral or triangular plate elements by lifting or rotating the plate
element to the nodes on the opposite face. The plate elements used to generate the solid elements may then
be erased.

The generated elements may have 4,5,6,7 or 8 nodes:

Note that solid element numbering is independent of beam/plate element numbering.

Generate solid elements by "lifting" existing plate elements. Refer to 2.8.1.

Generate solid elements by "rotating" existing plate elements. Refer to 2.8.2.

Delete existing solid elements. Refer to 2.8.3.

Renumber existing solid elements. Refer to 2.8.4.

Define the material properties for solid elements. Refer to 2.8.5.

Define a single element by specifying the corner nodes. Refer to 2.8.6.

The following options are available when a stage other than Whole model is the current stage:
Define/select construction ‘stages’. Different properties may be defined for each stage and
beams/elements may be removed. New beams cannot be defined when a stage other than Whole
model is active

Version 12.0 2-101 12/05

STRAP

“Remove” an element from the current stage. Select beams using the standard element selection
options. Inactive elements are not displayed.

Restore an element to the current stage.

2.8.1 Solid elements - lift

Create solid elements by "lifting" existing plate elements (quad or triangle) to a plane defined by an existing
node. The distance between the plate element and the node defines the 3rd dimension and this dimension may
be divided into one or more solid elements.

Note that this option also generates all required nodes.

For example:

To define the solid elements:

• define the plate base elements if they do not already exist
• select the plate base elements to be lifted using the standard element selection option.
• select the existing nod that specifies the end location of the lift
• specify the lift parameters:

Number of layers
Define the number of parallel solid element layers to be generated between the base plate element and the
reference node defined the end of the lift.

Number of first generated solid

Specify the number of the first element to be generated.
Note that solid elements may have the same number as an existing plate element or beam.

Version 12.0 2-102 12/05

STRAP
Delete generating plane elements
delete the plate elements used as the base for generating the solid elements.
do not delete the plate elements

Node Numbering:
The node numbering increment is blank by default.
• if values are not specified the program will use the first available number for the first node in the Copy
and then number consecutively.
• if values are specified, the program will add the increment to the existing node numbers.

2.8.2 Solid elements - rotate

Generate solid elements by rotating a plate element. The rotation parameters are defined by specifying:
• the axis of rotation - by two existing nodes (n1 and n2 in the
following figure)
• a reference node and its new location
• the generation direction (clockwise or counterclockwise)
• the number of elements to generate

For example:

Note:
• the reference node n1 does not have to be a plate element corner node
• all elements will be identical if the distances R1 and R2 are identical, i.e d1=d2. If not, d1/d2=R1/R2 and
the dimensions Rn and dn at any node are proportional to fn/f.

Number of layers
Define the number of parallel solid element layers to be generated between the base plate element and the
reference node defined the end of the lift.

Number of first generated solid

Specify the number of the first element to be generated.
Note that solid elements may have the same number as an existing plate element or beam.

Delete generating plane elements

delete the plate elements used as the base for generating the solid elements.
do not delete the plate elements

Version 12.0 2-103 12/05

STRAP
Node Numbering:
The node numbering increment is blank by default.
• if values are not specified the program will use the first available number for the first node in the Copy and
then number consecutively.
• if values are specified, the program will add the increment to the existing node numbers.

Rotation directions
The program can generate the elements in either the clockwise or
counter-clockwise directions. The direction is determined from the axis
of rotation (defined by the two nodes n1 and n2) according to the
following rule:

2.8.3 Solid elements - delete

Select the solid elements to delete using the standard element selection option.

2.8.4 Solid elements - renumber

Renumber existing solid elements.

Note that solid element numbering is independent of beam/plate element numbering.

Renumber - individual elements

To renumber selected elements:
• select solid elements using the standard element selection option. Note that the order that the beams are
selected is important; they will be renumbered in the order that they are selected.
• enter the new number of the first element:

Type the new number of the first element selected; all of the elements
selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a
number has already been assigned to another element the program will
assign the original number of the selected element to that element.

Example:
• elements 41, 42 and 43 are selected (in that order).
• 75 is specified as the new number for 41
• the elements will be renumbered 75,76 and 77 respectively
• element 76 is an existing element; it will be renumbered 42.

Version 12.0 2-104 12/05

STRAP
Renumber - plane of elements
Renumber all elements relative to a selected plane. This option is handy for renumbering an entire model or
parts of a model consisting of more than one plane. Note that the planes do not have to be parallel.

• select the elements to be renumbered using the standard element selection option
• define a plane that specifies the renumbering order; the plane is defined by selecting three existing nodes.
• specify the new number of the first element.

The renumbering order is determined as follows:

• the first two nodes define the x1r axis of the renumbering plane; the third node defines the x2r axis of the
plane; the x3r axis is determined by the right-hand rule
• the program calculates the coordinate of the element centre and sorts the elements according to the center
coordinate
• the program sorts the centers according to their x3r coordinate, starting with the centers closest to the
renumbering plane. Note that if there are centers on both sides of the plane, the program will first select all
centers on one side, then all centers on the other side.
• for centers with identical x3r coordinates, the program then sorts according to the x2r coordinate, beginning
with the smallest value.
• for centers with identical x3r and x2r coordinates, the program then sorts according to the x1r coordinate,
beginning with the smallest value.
All of the elements selected will be renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has
already been assigned to another element, the program will assign the original number of the selected element
to that element.

Example:
Renumber the following space frame; the
renumbering is to start on the planes perpendicular
to X1 global
• select nodes n1, n2 and n3 to define the
renumbering plane
• specify 1 as the new number of the first node
• the elements adjacent to the x1r-x2r plane are
renumbered first (1-4); the bottom elements have
the smallest x2r values and the left element has
the smallest x1r value, i.e. it is renumbered first.
• then the elements on the parallel planes (5-8) are
renumbered in the same order.

2.8.5 Solid elements - material

Specify the default material for new solid elements, assign a different material to existing elements or define
a new material (user material).

Version 12.0 2-105 12/05

STRAP
Assign a material
To assign an existing material to existing solid elements:
• select a material from the list displayed
• select the solid elements using the standard element selection option

Note that the material number (from the Output - materials table) will be displayed at the center of the element
if you select Display - property numbers in the menu bar or click the icon in the menu bar.

Define a user material

Refer to 2.5.9.5.

Default material
Select the default material from the existing material types in the list box.

Note that the material selected and displayed here will automatically be assigned to all new solid elements.
To assign the material to existing solid elements, click the Assign a material to solids button.

2.8.6 Single element

Define a single solid element by selecting the existing corner nodes:

• 8 nodes
Nodes 1-4 define the bottom plane; nodes 5-8 define the top plane.
Node 5 must correspond to node 1, etc.
• 6 nodes
Nodes 1-3 define the bottom plane; nodes 4-6 define the top plane.
Node 4 must correspond to node 1, etc.
• 4 nodes
Node 1-3 define the base of a pyramid.
Node 4 defines the apex.

Note:
• to define a 7-node element, select 8 nodes, where one of the nodes on the top plane is the same as one
of the nodes on the top plane.
• the order of node selection (on any plane) is not important.

Version 12.0 2-106 12/05

STRAP
2.9 Wall Elements

2.9.1 Walls - general

The Wall option enables the quick definition of complex walls that extend across multiple levels in the model.
• the wall cross-section is defined first and then is attached to the model by selecting a vertical line of nodes;
the program automatically creates any additional nodes that are required
• each wall section may consist of multiple segments together with coupling beams, for example:

• the number of segments is unlimited, the arrangement and orientation of the segments is not restricted and
each segment may have a different width (coupling beams may have varying heights). For example:

• each wall has a "reference point" at the end of one segment. This point is used to attach the wall to nodes
in the model (referred to as the "Attachment nodes").
• when the wall is attached to the model, the program generates a series of rectangular elements from the
segments and creates the necessary nodes at the corners.

Example: the following wall is defined and attached to the model:

Version 12.0 2-107 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The default axes are determined as follows:

Note that the positive direction of the wall axis always points in the positive direction of the nearest global
axis.

• Each coupling beam generates three beams in the

model: the coupling beam itself and a beam in each
of the adjacent walls that allows transfer of moments
into the coupling beam (elements cannot transfer
moments at their corners!): For example:

• The program creates a single element between nodes along the height axis for each segment. Normally
this implies a single element per story height. Testing has shown that the results are sufficiently accurate
for typical long multi-storey walls (refer to the STRAP Verification
manual). For short walls, improved accuracy will be obtained if
dummy nodes are defined between floor levels and long
segments are defined as more than one segment.

• The wall segments are connected to the rest of the model only
at their end nodes, however there may be existing nodes that lie
within the segment width but are not connected to the wall. The
program can search for such nodes and automatically create
rigid links to the nearest wall corner node.

• Walls with many segments should be divided into several

groups so that the dimensions are legible when the wall section is defined. For example:

Define Wall 1 and Wall 2 separately. Attach Wall 1 at reference

point B; the program automatically creates nodes at point B and
reference point C in Wall 2 can be attached to it.

• The results for wall elements are presented in the form of beam results - one axial force, moment and shear
value for each generated element.

Version 12.0 2-108 12/05

STRAP
2.9.2 Wall options

Define wall elements consisting of one or more segments and attach them to nodes in the model

Add a single wall element between two nodes. Refer to 2.9.3.

Add a series of identical wall elements attached to a line of nodes. Refer to 2.9.3.

Define the section of a wall element consisting of connected wall segments and coupling beams.
Refer to 2.9.4

Delete wall elements from the model. Refer to 2.9.5.

Rotate wall elements about their “reference point” (elements will remain attached to the same
nodes). Refer to 2.9.6.

Renumber existing wall elements. Refer to 2.9.7.

Create rigid links connecting the wall elements to nodes that are located within the width of the wall
segments. Refer to 2.9.8.

The following options are available when a stage other than Whole model is the current stage:
Define/select construction ‘stages’. Different properties may be defined for each stage and
beams/elements may be removed. New beams cannot be defined when a stage other than Whole
model is active

“Remove” an element from the current stage. Select beams using the standard element selection
options. Inactive elements are not displayed.

Restore an element to the current stage.

2.9.3 Wall/Line

Select a series of "attachment" nodes where the wall section reference point will be attached to the model.
There are two options:

Select the start node and the end node; the program will create only 1 wall element between the two
nodes

Select a start and end node; the program will identify all of the nodes along the line joining them and
create a series of wall elements

For both options, the Wall section to be attached is specified in the dialog box at the bottom of the screen:

• type the section number in the Sect.= box, or -

• click list and select a section from the table.

Version 12.0 2-109 12/05

STRAP

Example:

2.9.4 Wall - section

Define/edit a wall section or assign an existing section to an existing wall: Click and highlight a section and
select one of the options:

2.9.4.1 Edit/add section

Define a wall section consisting of several connected segments or coupling beams.

• each segment may have a different width; each coupling beam may have a different height
• each segment must be connected at one end to an end of a different segment; coupling beam must be
connected to wall segments at both ends
• ends of segments may be defined at a coordinate, at the end of another segment, or anywhere along
another segment

Title
Revise the default title for the
current wall section

Material
Select a material from the list box.
New materials can be created in the
Beam/Element option.

Version 12.0 2-110 12/05

STRAP
Properties
Section properties that may be revised for each wall segment are:
• Wall - width
• Coupling beam - width and height

Segment end
Each new segment may be defined to end at:
• offset from the segment start (DX, DY)
• at the start/end point of an existing segment
• anywhere along an existing segment

Segment start
Each new segment may be defined to start at:
• the end of the previously defined segment (default)
• at the start/end point of an existing segment
• anywhere along an existing segment

Delete a segment
Delete one of the segments in the wall. Note that only segments that do not break the continuity of the wall may
be selected. For example:

• move the so that the segment is highlighted with the and click the mouse.

Edit a segment
Edit the segment properties or dimensions:
• move the so that the segment is highlighted with the and click the mouse.
• the program displays the data for the selected segment:

Version 12.0 2-111 12/05

STRAP
• if the segment is part of a closed figure, either the start or the end can be moved or the length change can
be divided equally between both points:

Reference corner
Each wall section is defined with a 'reference point' located at the end of one of the segments. The wall is
attached to the model at this reference point.

The reference point can be moved to any segment start/end point in the section; move
the so that the point is highlighted with the and click the mouse.

Undo
Click this button to undo the previous action, e.g. delete the last segment defined,
restore a deleted segment, etc.

Colinear segments
The program displays results separately for each wall segment. However, in many walls there are segments
that must be defined as two or more colinear segments. For example, segments (a)-(b) and (c)-(d) in the
following example:

Select:
Combine all colinear seg. - The program will search for all colinear segments and will combine them
automatically
Separate all colinear seg. - The program will search for all combined segments and separate them
Combine 2 segments - Select colinear start and end segments to combined
Separate a segment - Select a combined segment to separate.

Note:
• 'Result segments' - combined or separate - are indicated by paired arrows <--------------->
• Coupling beams cannot be combined

Version 12.0 2-112 12/05

STRAP
Add section
Paste an existing wall section into the current section:
• The reference corner of the added section will be attached at the current mark location; use the Move mark
to options to select a different mark location.
• select another existing wall section in the model:

• click Add .

2.9.4.2 Assign a section

Assign a wall section (may be "Undefined") to a defined wall:

• click and highlight a section
• click
• select walls using the standard Wall selection option

2.9.5 Delete

Select walls to delete using the standard wall selection option.

Version 12.0 2-113 12/05

STRAP
2.9.6 Rotate

The program attaches the wall section at its reference point to the line of nodes selected by the user according
to the default orientation. In many cases this orientation will be incorrect; use this option to rotate or flip the wall
section to the correct orientation:
Note:
• the orientation is always relative to the default, not the
current orientation
• a positive angle is counter-clockwise
• the wall may be rotated and flipped at the same time
• select Pick to define the rotation angle by two
nodes. The order of the node selection is important.
For example:

2.9.7 Renumber

Select one or more walls using the standard Wall selection option.

Note that the order that the walls are selected is important; they will be renumbered in the order that they are
selected.

Type the new number of the first wall selected; all of the walls selected will be
renumbered sequentially. If the program discovers that a number has already
been assigned to another wall the program will assign the original number of the
selected wall to that wall.

Example:
• walls 41, 42 and 43 are selected (in that order).
• 75 is specified as the new number for 41
• the walls will be renumbered 75,76 and 77 respectively
• wall 76 is an existing wall; it will be renumbered 42.

2.9.8 Link

The wall segments are connected to the rest of the model only at their end nodes (the program creates nodes
at the segments ends). However there may be existing nodes that lie within the segment width but are not
connected to the wall. This option searches for such nodes and automatically creates rigid links to the nearest
wall corner node. The link is "Rigid in a single direction" in X1, X2 and X3.

Version 12.0 2-114 12/05

STRAP
Example:

2.9.9 Examples

2.9.9.1 Example 1

Define the following wall section:

Note that all dimensions are exterior.

The program assumes that the start point of the first segment is at an arbitrary (0,0) coordinate and that this
is also the reference point
• set:
• define segment 's1':

• Define segment 's2':

• Similarly define segment 's3' with DX = 100:

Define it as a coupling beam:

Similarly define segment 's4' as a Wall with DX = 100

Version 12.0 2-115 12/05

STRAP
• The section is displayed as:

If any of the segments is incorrect, click and redefine them

• Move the reference point to the corner of the 2 walls.:

Click , move the so that the corner is highlighted with the and click the mouse.

2.9.9.2 Example 2

Define the following wall section:

• Define segments s1 to s7 as explained in Example 1

• Close the section:

move the so that the initial corner is highlighted with the and click the mouse.

• Add the dividing wall:

move the so that segment ‘s1' is highlighted with the and click the mouse.

Version 12.0 2-116 12/05

STRAP
• specify the location of the dividing wall on 's1':

• Close the dividing wall:

• move the so that segment ‘s5' is highlighted with the and click the mouse.

• specify the location of the dividing wall on 's5'; specify Distance to starting point = 30 (the default)

The section should be displayed as:

If any of the segments is incorrect, click and redefine them

Version 12.0 2-117 12/05

STRAP
2.10 Sub-model
A sub-model is a model defined in a temporary working area. The model may then be copied to the current
model any number of times, at any location and at any angle. Note that the entire sub-model geometry may
be copied to the main model, including supports, springs, offsets, rigid links, etc.

The sub-model may also be saved as a separate model in any directory.

There are three methods for creating the sub-model:

Note that the main model and the sub-model are open simultaneously until the sub-model is closed; the user
may jump back-and-forth at any time by clicking the icons.

The following options are available:

Models Wizard:
Create the sub-model from one of the models in the Wizard library. Note that the sub-model generated by the
Wizard may be revised before it is added to the current model. Refer to 2.1.3.

Existing model:
Retrieve an existing model from any working directory.

Note that the sub-model may be revised before it is added to the current model.

New definition:
Define a new model and add to the current model. Refer to 2.10.1.

2.10.1 Sub-model - Main Menu

The program displays the geometry definition screen (including the current model if an existing model was
selected). The geometry definition options are displayed at the right-hand side of the screen:

To define node coordinates. Refer to 2.2.

To define restrained supports and rigid links. Refer to 2.3.

To define beam elements. Refer to 2.4.

Version 12.0 2-118 12/05

STRAP

To define quadrilateral and triangular finite elements.Refer to 2.5.

To define elastic supports. Refer to 2.6.

To duplicate a portion of the model at another location, including nodes, elements and properties.
The copied portion of the model may be rotated or a mirror image may be created. Refer to 2.7.

To return to the display of the main model (the sub-model will not be erased).The sub-model screen
will remain active and you may switch back to it at any time by clicking the icon.

To add the completed sub-model to the main model. Refer to 2.10.2.

From the menu bar:

File - refer to 2.10.3.

Display - refer to 1.3.3

2.10.2 Add to main

The sub-model is added to the main model using a method similar to the geometry "Copy and Rotate" option;
three reference nodes are defined in the sub-model and three corresponding nodes are selected in the main
model. The program then attaches the sub-model to the main model at the reference nodes, stretching or
squeezing the sub-model if necessary.

Note:
• this option copies the ENTIRE sub-model, including supports, offsets, rigid links, springs, etc.
• load cases may be copied if the submodel was created from an “existing model”.

The copy is generated by defining three reference nodes:

• as the three nodes can be located anywhere in space, this option allows the copied block to be rotated with
respect to the original.
• if the distances from the first reference node to the second or from the second reference node to the third
are not the same in the copied block as in the original block, the program will 'stretch' or 'squeeze' all of the
elements in the block accordingly; the program will not distort the block, i.e. all parallel beams will be
stretched or squeezed by the same factor.

Note:
• the program will not create a new node at the location of an existing node; the restraints at the existing node
will be the sum of the previous restraints in the existing node and the restraints in the submodel node.
• the program will not create a new beam/element at the identical location of an existing beam/element.
• restraints or springs defined parallel to global axes in the sub-model will be oriented in the closest possible
global direction in the main model. Restraints defined according to a local system will be rotated to the
same orientation relative to the sub-model.

Version 12.0 2-119 12/05

STRAP
For a submodel created from an existing node:

For each load case in the submodel, click on the right column, open up the list box, and select:
• the name of an existing load case in the main model - the loads will be added to the load case.
• "Copy to a new load" - to create a new load case in the main model.

Note:
• Joint loads, beam loads, element loads and global loads only may be copied.
• Support displacements will not be copied.
• Loads that were added to the current load case using the "Combine" command cannot be copied.
• Element loads generated using the "Linear" element load option will not be copied.
• Joint loads rotated to a direction not parallel to a global axis will be separated to the equivalent global
components. For example:

• Global loads defined in a global direction will be applied in the closest global direction after rotation. Global
loads applied perpendicular to the plane will remain perpendicular to the plane.

The option is best illustrated by an example:

Create the model displayed in Figure (a) from the sub-model displayed in Figure (b).

• Create plane 1-2-11-12 from the sub-model:

- define the three reference nodes in the sub-model:
first reference node: 1
second reference node: 2
third reference node: 8

Version 12.0 2-120 12/05

STRAP
- define their new locations in the main model:
first reference node: 1
second reference node: 2
third reference node: 12

• Create planes 2-3-13-12 from the sub-model:

- define the three reference nodes in the sub-model as above.
- define their new locations in the main model:
first reference node: 2
second reference node: 3
third reference node: 13

Note that the distance from the first to the second reference node is changed from 7.0 in the original
block to 5.0 in the copied block; all of the dimensions in this direction are revised proportionally.

As the perpendicular distance from the third reference node to the line joining the first two nodes remains
unchanged in the copied block, all vertical dimensions will remain constant.

The program should create a node at the new location of node 2. However it also checks if two nodes will be
at the same location. Upon discovering that the new node is at the same location as node 2, it connects all
elements to the existing node. Similarly new beams are not created on the line 2-12.

2.10.3 Sub-model - "File" menu

Save sub-model:
Save the sub-model as currently displayed as a separate model in any working directory. The program will
prompt for a model title.

If the sub-model was created with the "Existing model" option, the following menu will be displayed:

Select Replace existing model to overwrite the existing model.

Note that the sub-model will not be closed; you may continue defining the sub-model or you may add it to the
main model.

Quit sub-model:
Close the sub-model screen without saving the sub-model as a separate model. The sub-model screen will
be closed and the model will be lost (unless previously saved).

Save and close sub-model:

Save the sub-model as currently displayed as a separate model in any working directory. The program will
prompt for a model title. The program will close the sub-model screen.

Version 12.0 2-121 12/05

STRAP
2.11 Geometry - "Output"

The following options are available in the Table toolbar:

• GoTo
Enter a node/beam/element number; the program will scroll to the specified
number in the table.

• Print
Print the current table. Refer to

• Copy
Copy the current table to the ‘clipboard’; the table may then be pasted into
Word, Notepad or Excel documents.

Output - Nodes

where:
X1, X2, X3 = coordinates in the global system

Output - Restraints

where:
0 = free
1 = restrained.

relevant restraints:
plane frame : X1,X2,X6
plane grid : X3,X4,X5
space frames : X1 to X6

Version 12.0 2-122 12/05

STRAP
Output - Properties

Properties are about local axes, where

A = area
I2,I3 = moment-of-inertia about x2,x3.
J = torsional mom-of-inertia
h2/h3 = maximum dimensions parallel to x2/x3
e2,e3 = maximum distance from c.of.g to perimeter, parallel to x2/x3
SF2,SF3 = shear shape factors about x2,x3
Material = material number.
Units of all PROP = Property 1 units.

Output - Beams

where:
• JA = start node
• JB = end node
• JC = JC node/or
• BETA= BETA angle

Version 12.0 2-123 12/05

STRAP
• Releases = release (pin) at JA,JB. (Refer also to “Beam End Condition Table”)
The 6 columns are:
- A = Axial force :
blank or n = no release
y = release
t = tension only
c = compression only
- J = torsional release (both ends)
blank or n = no release
y = release
- MVMV = Moment and shear release at JA/JB
blank or n = no release
y = release in both x2 and x3 directions
2 = release in x2 direction only
3 = release in x3 direction only
• LEN = beam length
• PROP = property group number (or DUMMY beam). If the number is preceded by +/- signs, they
indicate the shear center location in unsymmetric sections:

• Mat = material type (see material table)

• COSINE = cos. of angle between global X1,X2,X3 axes and local x2.
• OFF NO = OFFSET group number

Output - Elements

where:
JA,JB,JC,JD = 4 corner nodes in order of definition.
AREA = element surface area.
Thick = thickness
Mat = material type
Release = moment release along the element sides, where 'y' indicates that a
release has been defined. The first letter represents the side
connecting nodes JA and JB. The next three letters represent the
following three sides proceeding counterclockwise around the
element, starting from JB.

Version 12.0 2-124 12/05

STRAP
Output - Springs

where:
S1-S6: Spring Constant in Global X1-X6 directions.
U+/U- = unidirectional spring

Output - Materials

where all values are according to the default units:

Output - Offsets

No. = offset group number

System = GLOBAL or LOCAL
X1, .., X3 = distance from JA/JB to end of
offset in all directions

Beam end conditions

Display beam release data:

Data is displayed at both beam ends

(JA, JB)
• "Free" indicates a release
• Axial: Tens = tension only
Compr = compression only
• M2,M3: "S = .." indicates a semi-
rigid release

Output - Restraint coordinate systems

Local restraint coordinate system defined by JA,

JB, JC.

Version 12.0 2-125 12/05

STRAP
Output - Rigid links

Output - Solid elements

where:
JA, ... ,JH = corner nodes. Note that 4 to 8
noded elements are possible.
Volume = element volume.
Mat = material type

Output - Wall sections

Display the dimensions and properties of all defined wall sections (in the model geometry units):

No = wall section number

Name = wall section title (if different from
default)
Area = section area
Ix,Iy = moments-of-inertia (about centre-of-
gravity)
C.O.G = centre-of-gravity - from "Insertion
point"
Mat = material

Output - walls

Display the wall segment data:

No = segment number as displayed on the screen

JA,JB = start, end nodes of line segment (when defined)
Section = section number and title (if not default)
Ang = rotation angle, relative to the default orientation. F indicates that the wall was "flipped".
Length = Length of wall segment (JA-JB)
Volume = Wall area * Length (does not include coupling beams)

Version 12.0 2-126 12/05

STRAP
Output - format
Specify the number of digits after the decimal point for each values in the output tables:

Output - Print tables

• Print data tables
Print all geometry tables for the entire model

• Print selected data tables

Print selected tables for all or all of the model.

- Nodes/Restraints/Materials/Beams/etc:
Geometry tables set to will be printed.
- Print nodes/elements not display on screen:
data for the entire model will be printed
only data for beams/nodes/elements
currently on the screen will be printed.
- Include saved drawings
add drawings created with the Save for
print/edit drawing option.

Note:
• For an explanation on general printing
options, refer to 1.4.6.
• Tables may be written to ASCII files in user-
specified format using the STBatch utility.

Print Drawing
Refer to 1.4.7.

Print/edit saved drawing

Refer to 1.4.11.

Version 12.0 2-127 12/05

STRAP
2.12 Geometry "File" options

Save:
Save current geometry and continue.

Loads definition:
Save geometry and move to load definition.

STRAP models list:

Save geometry and return to STRAP main menu (list of models).

Results
Display/print current results.

Solve
Solve the current model and proceed to results.

Dynamic analysis:
Save geometry and move to dynamic analysis.

Section generator
Create a beam section using the STRAP section generator.

The section can be copied to a beam property group as a section defined by properties (A,I,J, etc).

Steel / Concrete / Bridge

Proceed to one of the design postprocessors.

Quit
Exit the program WITHOUT saving changes to the geometry. Note that only changes made after the last
“Save” or the start of the session will be deleted.

Exit and save

Save geometry and leave STRAP.

Version 12.0 2-128 12/05

STRAP

3 Loads
• The program can solve the model for multiple load cases. Each load case may consist of joint loads, beam
loads, element pressures, support displacements and temperature loads.
• Load cases may be combined to form a new load case.
• The location of the beam and element loads may also be entered relative to the global coordinates of the
model; standard load patterns may be stored in a file and recalled.
• The defined loads are displayed graphically superimposed on the geometry, showing all the loads entered
up to the previous command for the current load case.

Select one of the following options:

To begin the definition of a new loading case. Refer to 3.1

To revise the loads in an existing load case. Refer to 3.2

To delete an existing load case. Refer to 3.10

Deactivated load cases are not solved but are not erased. Refer to 3.11

Automatically generate a series of "moving" load cases from a single basic case. The global loads
in the basic case will be offset by a constant increment in each successive generated case. Refer
to 3.12

Automatically generate a series of load cases with alternating patterns of live load from basic load
cases containing the dead and live loads on all spans. The patterns are arranged according to
Code requirements for calculating maximum and minimum moments in beams. Refer to 3.13

Calculate second-order (P-∆) forces and moments. Refer to 3.14

Define wind load cases according to Code requirements. Refer to 3.17

Copy an entire load case. Refer to 3.16

Define sway unit load cases at specified nodes. These load cases are required for the sway/drift
control option in the Steel postprocessor. Refer to 3.15

From the menu bar:

File - refer to 3.18

Display - refer to 3.19
Output - refer to 3.20

Refer also to:

• 1.6 - Command Mode for details on defining loads by typing in commands.
• 1.3.3 - Display loads for details on the conventions for the graphic display of the loads on the model.

Version 12.0 3-1 12/05

STRAP
3.1 Define a load case
Enter the title of a new loading case or revise the title of an existing load case:

Select of the following load types from the side menu:

• Joint loads : Refer to 3.3

Joint loads are concentrated forces and moments applied at the model's nodes. They are
defined relative to the global coordinate system.

Self-weight may be defined as a joint load; the program will compute the reaction of the
uniform self-weight load of each element and apply it as a concentrated load at the end
nodes of the element.

• Beam loads: Refer to 3.4

Beam loads are uniform, linearly distributed or concentrated loads applied anywhere along the length of the
beam between the end nodes.

Beam loads can be defined parallel to the directions of the local beam axes or in the direction of the model
global axes.

Self-weight and temperature (expansion / contraction or gradient) are defined as Beam Loads.

• Element loads: Refer to 3.5

Element pressures are applied to the entire surface area of quadrilateral or triangular elements.

The pressure is not necessarily applied normal to the element surface; the load can be applied in any of the
local or global axis directions. In all cases, the total load applied is the pressure multiplied by the surface
area of the element.

• Support displacement:: Refer to 3.6

Support displacements may be entered in the direction of any degree-of-freedom, including rotation.

These displacements should only be defined at nodes which have been restrained in the same degrees-of-
freedom (Restraints).

• Combine loads: Refer to 3.7

Use this option to combine existing loading cases to create a new load case; the existing load cases may
be multiplied by a factor.

Version 12.0 3-2 12/05

STRAP
Note that the STRAP result module also has an option for combining load cases. In general, it is more
convenient to define combinations after the solution rather than at this stage, because:
- the solution time is decreased
- combinations may be revised without solving the model again
- since the P-Delta effect is non-linear, the rules of superposition do not apply. Therefore, load
combinations for models with P-Delta must be defined here in LOADS, rather than in the results module.

This option may also be used to insert an existing loading case into a new loading case.

• Global loads: Refer to 3.8

Load locations may be defined relative to the global coordinate system. The program locates the nodes and
elements surrounding the "global loads" and converts the loads to equivalent joint loads or element loads,
as requested by the user.

This option is useful in models characterized by load patterns which do not coincide exactly with the nodes
or elements, such as bridges.

Global loads can be entered directly or may be stored and recalled from a file.

• Solid loads: Refer to 3.9.

Define temperature loads or self-weight for solid elements. All other loads (pressure, linear loads,
concentrated loads, etc) must be defined by applying them to beams or plate elements (dummy or regular)
defined parallel to the solid elements surfaces.

3.2 Revise a load case

Revise the loads in an existing load case or revise the stage assigned to a load case. The program displays
a list of the existing cases:

• to select a different stage - click on the relevant row, click the to open up the listbox and select a stage
from the list.
• to revise loads select a load case; move the into any cell on the line in the table corresponding to the load
case and click the mouse.
• select the load type to be revised ( beam load, joint load, etc.)

• click the icon

• continue as explained in 3.1 - Define loads.

Version 12.0 3-3 12/05

STRAP
3.3 Joint loads
Joint loads are defined relative to the global coordinate system or to any arbitrary local system defined by three
nodes.

The positive force and moment sign conventions are:

The options displayed for joint loads are:

3.3.1 Joint loads - define

• Enter the load values; note that loads in more than one global
direction can be defined at the same time.
• The loads are defined relative to the global axes by default;
click Coord. System to define loads relative a local system.
• Select the nodes that the loads are to be applied to using the
standard Node Selection option.

Local coordinate system

Joint loads may be defined relative to any local system U,V,W defined by three nodes:

• U lies along the line joining nodes 1 and 2 and

points in the direction of 2.
• V lies on the plane formed by 1-2-3, is
perpendicular to 1-2 and points in the general
direction of node 3
• W is defined by the right-hand rule
•

Version 12.0 3-4 12/05

STRAP

Enter the load values; note that loads can be defined in more than one
local direction at the same time. The program displays the global
components of the loads in the bottom half of the dialog box.
Select the nodes that the loads are applied to using the standard Node
selection option

Note:
Joint loads are always displayed with their global components.

Refer also to Joint loads - sign conventions

3.3.2 Joint loads - Revise

Select one node with a joint load to be revised/deleted using the standard single node selection option.
• If more than one load was defined for the selected node you must decide which one of them to revise. For
example, a node with a two joint loads:

Select the load to be revised.

• The corresponding current load values will be displayed on the screen; revise them.
• If the selected load was applied to more than one node in the same command, the program will highlight
the nodes with a ; you may correct the load on all of them or some of them at the same time:
Revise load only for the selected node
Load will be revised on the selected node only.

Revise load for all highlighted nodes

Load will be revised on all nodes highlighted
with the .

Select beams not to revise

Use the standard element selection option to
select nodes for which THE WILL BE
TURNED OFF.

Note:
• Loads that were added to the current load case by the Combine loads option cannot be corrected; the
original load case must be revised.

Version 12.0 3-5 12/05

STRAP
3.3.3 Delete Joint Loads

Delete all loads on nodes or delete selected loads:

• Select the node with the load to be deleted using the standard single node selection option.
• If you specified Delete a selected load, the program will display a list of loads applied to the node; select
one. For example, a node with a two loads:

• If the selected load was applied to more than one node in the same command, you may correct the load on
all of them at the same time (the nodes will be highlighted):

Delete load only for the selected node

Load will be deleted on the selected node only

Delete load for all highlighted nodes

Load will be deleted on all nodes highlighted
with the

Note:
• Loads that were added to the current load case by the Combine loads option cannot be deleted; the original
load case must be revised.

3.3.4 Joint loads - self-weight

Apply the self-weight as a load at the nodes. The program computes the reaction of the uniform self-weight load
of each element and apply it as a concentrated load at the end nodes of the element.

The self-weight can be applied in any direction multiplied by any factor:

Examples:
• apply self-weight as a vertical service load:

• apply 10% of the self-weight as a horizontal load:

Version 12.0 3-6 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The self-weight is automatically calculated and applied for all elements in the model.
• Self weight can also be applied as a Beam load; the load can then be applied for selected elements only.
• Self-weight applied to nodes is NOT displayed graphically on the model; a footer line "Self-weight on nodes
..." is displayed (and printed) below the model.
• If the material is User-defined, the density must be defined.
• If fictitious beams were defined with an arbitrarily large area and their self-weight is applied, incorrect loading
will result; define the material density for the beams equal to zero or define as a Beam load and exclude the
fictitious beams from the beam list.
• If self-weight is defined more than once, only the last definition will be used by the program, i.e. self-weight
commands are not superimposed by the program.
• To delete self-weight loads, set all factors equal to zero.

3.3.5 Copy loads

The Copy loads option enables the user to copy existing loads from one part of the model to another. Similar
to "Copy" geometry, the loads may be translated, translated and rotated, or a mirror image may be created.

Note:
• Joint loads, beam loads, element loads and global loads only may be copied.
• Global loads and support displacements will not be copied.
• Loads that were added to the current load case using the "Combine" command cannot be copied.
• Element loads generated using the "Linear" element loads will not be copied.
• Loads must be copied to identical geometry in order to be duplicated:
- joint loads that do not fall exactly on another joint will not be copied
- beam/element loads that do not fall on another
beam/element with identical dimensions will not be copied.
- global loads must be ‘enclosed’ by the selected nodes and
on the same plane in order to be copied:
area loads: the contour must enclose at least one of the
selected nodes or at least the first three
nodes of the contour must be 'surrounded' by
selected nodes
point loads: must be 'surrounded' by selected nodes.
• The program will maintain the direction of beam/element
loads, even if the local axis directions are not consistent. For example:

• Joint loads rotated to a direction not parallel to a global axis will be separated to the equivalent global
components. For example:

• Global loads defined in a global direction will be applied in the closest global direction after rotation. Global
loads applied perpendicular to the plane will remain perpendicular to the plane.

Version 12.0 3-7 12/05

STRAP
To copy loads:

• select: , , or
• Specify the Copy load options:

Number of copies:
Loads may be copied more than once; each copy will be offset an identical distance from the previous one.

Copy:
Set the checkboxes for the various load types:
the loads will be copied
the loads will not be copied
Note:
• beam/element loads: only the loads on beams/elements with ALL end nodes selected will be copied.
• global loads must be 'enclosed' by the selected nodes and on the same plane in order to be copied:
area loads: the contour must enclose at least one of the selected nodes or at least the first three nodes
of the contour must be 'surrounded' by selected nodes
point loads: must be 'surrounded' by selected nodes.

Factor:
All copied loads may be multiplied by a factor. A negative factor will reverse the load directions.
- Use the standard Node selection option to select the nodes specifying the joints, beams and elements
whose loads are to be copied. For beams and elements - ALL corner nodes must be selected.
- Select the reference nodes and their new locations.
- Use the standard Node selection option to select the nodes specifying the joints, beams and elements
whose loads are to be copied. For beams and elements - ALL corner nodes must be selected.

• Select the reference nodes and their new locations:

select one reference node and its new location in the first copy. The distance between all
subsequent copies will be identical.

the new location is specified by three reference nodes.

the new location is specified by a single reference node (not on the plane of symmetry). The
program joins the old and new locations of the reference node with an imaginary line and bisects
this line with a perpendicular plane. All selected loads are copied on the other side of the plane.

Version 12.0 3-8 12/05

STRAP
3.4 Beam loads
Beam loads may be defined either in a direction parallel to one of the global coordinate axes or parallel to one
of the local coordinate axes of the beam.

The options displayed for Beam loads are:

Note:
• do not define beam loads with an axial component (e.g. axial temperature, global linear load on a sloped
beam, etc) on tension/compression only beams. The program will always apply these loads to the model,
even if these beams are not active for the relevant load case.

3.4.1 Beam loads -define

Define one of the following load types:

A uniformly distributed load along the entire span length. Refer to 3.4.1.1

A linear distributed load segment anywhere along the span or a uniformly distributed load acting on
part of the span. Refer to 3.4.1.2

A point load acting anywhere along the span. Refer to 3.4.1.3

A point load acting anywhere along the span. Refer to 3.4.1.4

Axial expansion/contraction or a gradient on beam height. Refer to3.4.1.5

Apply the self-weight of beams as a uniform load. Refer to 3.4.1.6

A parabolic or straight prestress force (axial force and eccentricity). Refer to 3.4.1.7

define the load applied to a model by a beam that is initially too short or too long. Refer to 3.4.1.9

Apply a load to the perimeter surface area of the beam. Refer to 3.4.1.9

Version 12.0 3-9 12/05

STRAP
3.4.1.1 Beam loads - uniform

Define a uniformly distributed load along the entire length of a beam.

Load:
Enter the load according to the current units.

• Uniform, linear and concentrated loads:

Remember that a positive load is in the positive direction of the specified local / global axis. In the following
examples, all loads should be defined with negative values.

• Moments:
The direction of a positive moment is determined by a right-hand
rule. The thumb points in the positive direction of the local axis
about which the moment acts, and the other fingers all curl in the
direction of the positive moment, i.e, a positive moment acts
counter-clockwise about the positive direction of the local axis.

Direction
Uniform, Concentrated, Linear: select the local/global axis the load acts parallel to.
FX1 - parallel to X1 or x1 - relevant for plane and space frames
FX2 - parallel to X2 or x2 - relevant for plane and space frames
FX3 - parallel to X3 or x2 - relevant for grids and space frames

Version 12.0 3-10 12/05

STRAP
Moment: select the axis that the load acts about.
MX1 - about X1 or x1 - relevant for grids and space frames
MX2 - about X2 or x2 - relevant for grids and space frames
MX3 - about X3 or x2 - relevant for plane and space frames

Type
Local : the load is parallel to the beam local axis specified.
Global : the load is parallel to the global axis specified and is applied to the total beam length.
Global projected : the load is parallel to the global axis specified, but is applied to the projected beam
length as projected onto the specified global axis (uniform and linear loads only).

The following figure illustrates the Global, Global projected and Local beam loads commands.

Display
The beam is displayed in the box with the same orientation as on the screen.

If more than one beam is selected, a separate box will be displayed for each group of beams with parallel local
x2/x3 axes. I.e. the box will be displayed only once if the relevant axis of all the selected beams are parallel.
Note that the beams are considered parallel even if the positive directions of the axis are opposite. In such a
case, the program can be instructed to apply all loads in the same direction. Refer to the next option (“Apply”).

If the box is displayed for a second group of beams, the following options are available:

OK - apply load as displayed

Cancel - do not apply load to the selected beams (cancel command)
Invert load direction - to change the sign of the load definition
Invert beam start-end - to create a mirror image of the loads defined
Skip confirmation - to cancel the display of the centre box for the remaining beams selected.

Version 12.0 3-11 12/05

STRAP
Apply
For beam loads applied in a local axis direction, the program checks whether the relevant local axis points in
the same direction for all of the parallel beams in the group. If not, the user may instruct the program to apply
all of the loads in the same direction.

The importance of this option is explained by two examples:

• Example 1:
Parallel Beams 1 and 3 in Figure (a) below are selected together and a load of -5.0 is defined parallel to the
local x2 axis. However, note that the local x2 axes of beams 1 and 3 point in opposite directions. The
direction box is displayed for Beam 1 only

Apply loads on parallel beams in the same direction

The loads are applied in the same direction as shown in Figure (b)
Apply loads on parallel beams in the same direction
The loads are applied in opposite directions as shown in Figure (c)

• Example 2:
Beams 8 and 14 are on opposite sides of the surface of a cylinder. The local x2 axis of both beams point
outwards, i.e. in opposite directions. The direction box is displayed only for beam 8 because the two beams
are parallel.

Apply loads on parallel beams in the same direction

The loads are applied in the same direction as shown in Figure (b)
Apply loads on parallel beams in the same direction
The loads are applied in opposite directions as shown in Figure (c). This is most likely the correct option.

Apply as joint load

In many cases it is convenient to define a load as a linear load even when the load is applied to the model only
at the supporting nodes. For example:

the program calculates the end reactions from the beam loads and
applies them to the nodes as joint loads ; no bending moments and
shear are generated in the beam.

Version 12.0 3-12 12/05

STRAP
3.4.1.2 Beam loads - linear

Use this option to define general linear loads.

Each load is made up of 'segments'. More than one segment (per beam) may be defined. Each segment is
defined by specifying the location of both ends and the magnitude of the load applied.

First, select the beam to which to apply the loads using the standard Beam selection option.

Then enter the load value, type and direction;

Direction/Type/Display:
Refer to 3.4.1.1 - Uniform loads

Start:
For the first segment in the command, Distance is measured from the start of the beam; for all following
segments, Distance is always measured from the end of the previous segment.

End:
The program assumes that the load extends to the end of the beam,, i.e. Length will be displayed with the
distance to the end of the beam.

After each load has been defined, select:

• to terminate the command.
• to add another load segment to the command; the distance (or fraction) is measured
from the previous segment.

Apply
Refer to 3.4.1.1 - Uniform loads

Version 12.0 3-13 12/05

STRAP
Examples;

The input is: (the default values are underlined)

Example (1) Example (2) Example (3)
Segment Loc Dist. Load Dist. Load Dist. Load
Start 0 -1.7 1 -2.3 0 0
1
End 2.5 -1.7 1.5 -2.3 1 -0.9
Start 0 -1.4 0 -0.9
2
End 1 -1.4 2.2 -0.9
Start 0 -0.3
3
End 0.75 -0.3
Start 0 -0.3
4
End 0.75 0

3.4.1.3 Beam loads - concentrated

Enter point loads or moments at any location along the length of the beam.

First, select the beam to which to apply the loads using the standard Element Selection option.

Then enter the load value, type, direction and location;

Define the load value and the distance from the beam start to the load as a length or a fraction of the beam.

Direction / type / display/ apply – refer to 3.4.1.1 - Uniform loads

After each load has been defined, select:

• To terminate the command.

Version 12.0 3-14 12/05

STRAP

• to add another concentrated load to the command; the distance (or fraction) is
measured from the previous load point. Five loads may be added using this option; if there are more than
6 point loads on the beam in the current load case, click the Conc icon again and define the remaining loads
in a separate command.

Examples:

Example (a):

Example (b):

Version 12.0 3-15 12/05

STRAP
3.4.1.4 Linear - line Beam Loads

The option is similar to "Linear", but allows linear loads to be defined over a chain of continuous beams.

Select the first beam ...

Select the start beams of the lines using the standard beam selection option; the program will automatically
identify the continuation beams for each start beam (beams connected to JB).
Select all beams ...
Select a chain of beams not necessarily forming a straight line but having common nodes
Select an arc ...
Select the start and end beams of an arc using the standard beam selection option; the program will
automatically identify the continuation beams lying on the arc.
The chain is treated as a single beam and the linear load segments are defined as in "Linear".

The option is best explained by an example:

• select beam 37 - the start beam in the chain (selecting 38 along
with 37 will give the same results).
• the program automatically identifies all following beams
(connected to JB). Note that if you select beam 38, the program
will not identify beam 37.
• the load definition box is displayed with the combined length:

• define the first load segment from 0.0 to 3.2 with Load = -7.0
• select "Define another load segment"
• define that second load segment from 0.0 to 6.3 with Load = -7.0 at start and Load = -19.0 at the end.
• select "End load pattern"

Note:
• the program divides the linear-line load into individual linear loads on each beam, i.e. to revise the load in
the example, the loads on beams 37 and 38 must be revised separately. ("Undo" will erase the entire
command).
• a beam is considered as part of the chain if the angle between its x1 axis and the x1 axis of the previous
beam is less than 5 degrees.
• the length of the chain is limited to 80 beams (use two or more commands for 80+ beams)

Version 12.0 3-16 12/05

STRAP
3.4.1.5 Beam loads - temperature

Temperature loads are always defined relative to the local coordinate axes.
• A temperature change in the x1 direction expands/contracts the beam and applies a force to the model at
the beam ends.
• A temperature change in the x2 or x3 directions creates a temperature gradient across the height/width of
the beam, resulting in a curvature of the beam, similar to bending.

First, select the beam to which to apply the loads using the standard Element Selection option.

Then enter the load value, type and direction.

Type
Select:
• Axial - a uniform temperature change that expands/contracts the beam
along its axis.
• Gradient - a temperature gradient across the height of the beam that
produces a curvature in the beam.

Note: do not define an axial temperature load on tension/compression only beams. The program will always
apply these loads to the model, even if these beams are not active for the relevant load case.

Temperature change
Enter the temperature difference in degrees Celsius (°C). Note the sign conventions.

The program multiplies the temperature difference by the thermal coefficient of the material(s); therefore the
temperature and the coefficient must have the same units. Check the value of the thermal coefficients and enter
the difference in degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F) accordingly.

Version 12.0 3-17 12/05

STRAP
Beam height
The height is required in the case of a gradient to calculate the curvature and hence the applied loads. Height
must be defined even if the properties were defined by dimensions.

For tapered beams:

• axial: the program takes into account the tapered section when calculating the applied nodal forces.
• gradient:

At beam start and varies along the beam:

The program assumes that the height defined here is at the beam start and then varies linearly to the beam
end according to the (hr/hl) ratio calculated from the tapered section dimensions defined in Beam Properties.

Constant along the beam length:

The program assumes that the height defined is constant throughout the beam length.

Examples:
• Axial expansion due to temperature rise of 30°C:
Select: Axial
Enter: Temperature change = 30
• Temperature gradient of 25°C on height = 0.50 m. (5°C on +x3 face, 30°C on -x3 face).
Select: X3 gradient
Enter: Temperature change = 25 Beam height = 0.5

3.4.1.6 Beam loads - self-weight

Self-weight defined as a Beam Load is applied as a uniformly distributed load on the beam. The load is always
applied in the direction of one of the global axes.

Self-weight may be defined as acting on all beams in the model or only on selected beams.

Note:
The program automatically computes the load by multiplying the beam area by the material density:
• If the material is User defined, verify that the density was defined.
• If fictitious beams were defined with an arbitrarily large area and their self-weight is applied, incorrect loading
will result; define the material density in these beams equal to zero or exclude them from the list of beams.
• do not define self-weight on tension/compression only beams that are sloped.(i.e. an axial component will
be applied) The program will always apply these loads to the model, even if these beams are not active for
the relevant load case.
• Self-weight of elements is applied separately as an Element load.

First, select the beam to which to apply the loads using the standard Beam selection option.

Version 12.0 3-18 12/05

STRAP

Then enter the load value, type and direction:

Direction:
Select one of the following GLOBAL directions:

Factor:
The calculated self-weight is multiplied by the factor; the sign of the factor defines the direction of the applied
load relative to the selected axis.

Examples:
• apply self-weight as a vertical service load:
Direction = X2 Factor = -1.00
• apply 10% of the self-weight as a horizontal load:
Direction = X1 Factor = 0.10

Self-weight - topping
For composite beams only:
calculate the self-weight as the sum of the weights of the beam and the topping
calculate and apply the self-weight of the beam only.

3.4.1.7 Beam loads - prestress

Define a prestress force for a beam by specifying a prestress force and eccentricity. Different eccentricities may
be defined at start and end points (not necessarily the beam ends) and at the mid-point between the strart/end
to simulate a parabolic cable. The prestress load applies a force and moments (due to the eccentricity of the
load) to the end nodes of the beam.

Version 12.0 3-19 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• several different prestressing segments may be applied to the same beam.
• prestressing may be defined in a line of beams

- Individual
Select beams using the standard beam selection option
- Line of beams

Select the first beam ...

Select the start beams of the lines using the
standard beam selection option; the program
will automatically identify the continuation
beams for each start beam (beams connected
to JB).
Select all beams ...
Select a chain of beams not necessarily
forming a straight line but having common
nodes

Select an arc ...

Select the start and end beams of an arc using the standard beam selection option; the program will
automatically identify the continuation beams lying on the arc.

Define the prestress data:

Version 12.0 3-20 12/05

STRAP
Prestress force:
Enter the prestress force in the default force unit. The value must be positive.

Eccentricity:
Enter eccentricity values in the default length unit::
• First enter the Start and End values; the program assumes that the cable is straight and writes the
corresponding mid-point value in the Middle box. If the cable is parabolic, enter the actual mid-point
eccentricity in the Middle box.
• a positive eccentricity is measured in the positive direction of the local axis; in the example above, Start
= positive, Middle = negative, End = negative.
• Eccentricity is measured from the centre-of-gravity of the section.

Eccentricity direction:
Select the eccentricity axis (local) - x2 or x3.

Distance
The length of the individual beam or the total length of the line of beams is displayed in the dialog box title line.
Enter the distance from the start of the beam to the start of the prestressing and the distance from the end of
the beam (or line of beams) to the end of the prestressing.

3.4.1.8 Beam loads - lack-of-fit

Apply the load generated by a beam that is initially to short or too

long and is stretched/squeezed to fit the distance between the end
nodes.

• select the beams according to the standard beam selection

option
• enter the length of the gap between the end of the beam and the
end node (note the sign convention displayed in the dialog box).

The load applied is similar to a temperature load.

3.4.1.9 Beam loads - Surface

Enter an area load applied to the perimeter surface area of the beam. The program applies the resulting
uniform load to the entire beam length.

First, select the beam to which to apply the loads using the standard Beam Selection option.

Then specify the surface load value and direction;

The "Perimeter" values in the beam property

tables are used for this calculation and they must
be defined.

Note that in all models created prior to

Version 9.00, Perimeter=0 and hence all
surface loads will be zero.

Version 12.0 3-21 12/05

STRAP
To update the section properties:

Steel table (H2, H3, perimeter calculated automatically by program from section dimensions)
• return to geometry, click the Beams icon, then click the Prop icon
• highlight one of the steel sections and click the Define/revise button
• click the Steel table icon and select the same section (it will be highlighted in the tables so you only have
to click the mouse).
• repeat for all other steel sections

Dimensions (H2,H3, perimeter calculated automatically by program from section dimensions)

• return to geometry, click the Beams icon, then click the Prop icon
• highlight one of the sections defined by dimensions and click the Define/revise button
• click the Dimen. icon, select the same section type, and click the OK button on the dialog box (it will be
displayed with the current dimensions)
• repeat for all other sections defined by dimensions

Properties (H2,H3, perimeter defined by user)

• return to geometry, click the Beams icon, then click the Prop icon
• highlight one of the sections defined by properties and click the Define/revise button
• click the A= I= icon, enter values for H2. H3, perimeter and click the OK button.
• repeat for all other sections defined by properties.

3.4.2 Revise Beam Loads

• Select the beam with the load to be revised using the standard single element selection option..
• If more than one load was defined for the selected beam/element, you must decide which one of them to
revise. For example, a beam with a two distributed loads:

Select the load to be revised.

• The corresponding current load values will be displayed on the screen; revise them.
• If the selected load was applied to more than one beam/element in the same command, the program will
highlight the beams with a ; you may correct the load on all of them or some of them at the same time:

Revise load only for the selected beam

Load will be revised on the selected beam only
Revise load for all highlighted beams
Load will be revised on all beams highlighted with
the
Select beams not to revise
Use the standard element selection option to select
beams for which the will be turned off.

Note:
• Loads that were added to the current load case by the Combine loads option cannot be corrected; the
original load case must be revised.

Version 12.0 3-22 12/05

STRAP
3.4.3 Delete Beam Loads

• Delete all loads on beam or delete selected loads:

• Select the beam with the load to be deleted using the standard Element selection option.
• If you specified Delete a selected load, the program will display a list of loads applied to the beam; select
one. For example, a beam with a two distributed loads:

• If the selected load was applied to more than one beam in the same command, you may correct the load
on all of them at the same time (the beams will be highlighted):

Delete load only for the selected beam

Load will be deleted on the selected beam only
Delete load for all highlighted beams
Load will be deleted on all beams highlighted with the

Note:
• Loads that were added to the current load case by the Combine loads option cannot be deleted; the original
load case must be revised.

3.4.4 Beam loads - copy

Refer to 3.3.5.

Version 12.0 3-23 12/05

STRAP
3.5 Element loads
The options displayed for Element loads are:

3.5.1 Element loads - define

Uniform pressure on the face of the element. Refer to 3.5.1.1

Linear pressure (hydrostatic, soil pressure, etc.) applied to a group of elements. Refer to 3.5.1.2

A uniform temperature change that expands/contracts the element in the plane of the element or
produces a temperature gradient across the thickness of the element that produces a curvature in
the element. Refer to 3.5.1.4

Linear pressure (hydrostatic, soil pressure, etc.) applied to a group of elements that varies in two
directions. Refer to

Apply the self-weight as a uniformly distributed element pressure. Refer to 3.5.1.5

3.5.1.1 Element loads - uniform

Use this option to define a uniform pressure on the face of the element.

The pressure may be defined either in a direction parallel to one of the global coordinate axes or parallel to one
of the local coordinate axes of the element.

First, select the beam to which to apply the loads using the standard Element Selection option.

Then enter the load value, type and direction:

Direction
Loads may be applied parallel to any of the relevant local or global
axes
Direction type
Local : the load is parallel to the element local axis.
Global : the load is parallel to the global axis specified.
Global projected :
the load is parallel to the global axis specified, but is applied to
the projected element area as projected onto the specified
global axis

Version 12.0 3-24 12/05

STRAP
The following figure illustrates the Global, Global projected and Local element loads commands.

Load:
• the sign is positive in the positive direction of the axis.
• the total load applied is the load times the element area (for all directions), or the projected element area
for "Global projected" loads.

3.5.1.2 Element loads - uniform on group

Use this option to define a linear pressure (hydrostatic, soil pressure, etc.) applied to a group of elements. The
pressure varies in one direction only (refer also to 3.5.1.3 - Bilinear pressure)

The program calculates the average pressure on each of the element and applies it as a UNIFORM pressure
on the entire face of the element. The pressure is displayed as a standard uniform pressure.

Define the parameters:

Load varies linearly in:

The pressure can vary in any one of the global axes directions:
Note that this option defines the direction in which the load varies and not the direction in which it is applied
(these are not necessarily the same - see example (b) below).

Apply in direction:
The load may be applied in any local or global direction, i.e, perpendicular or parallel to the surface, vertically
or horizontally, etc.

Level:
Define the coordinate of the start and end of the pressure diagram

Version 12.0 3-25 12/05

STRAP
Pressure:
Define the value of the pressure at the start and end of the pressure diagram

Select the elements to which the pressure is applied using the standard Element Selection option.

The program will display the pressures as standard uniform pressures.

Examples:

• Example (a):

Select all of the elements in the tank walls.

• Example (b):

Select elements 25 to 80.

Note that the load could also have been defined as varying in the X1 direction from coordinate 0.0 to 5.2.

Version 12.0 3-26 12/05

STRAP
3.5.1.3 Element loads - bilinear

Use this option to define a linear pressure (hydrostatic, soil pressure, etc.) applied to a group of elements. The
pressure varies in two directions (refer also to the regular pressure option to define pressure that varies in one
direction only)

The program calculates the total pressure on each element and applies it as a UNIFORM pressure on the entire
face of the element. The program displays the pressures as standard uniform pressures.

Define the parameters:

Note:
• lines AB and AC must be perpendicular.
• point A must be the middle point of the chain C-A-B.

Load varies linearly in

The pressure can vary in the general direction of any one of the global planes.
Note that this option defines the direction in which the load varies and not the direction in which it is applied
(these are not necessarily the same.

Pressure
Define the pressure values and the coordinates.
The pressure diagram must be planar, therefore it is sufficient to define three corners and their location; the
program will interpolate the plane over the surface of all elements selected.

Note:
• lines AB and AC must be perpendicular.
• point A must be the middle point of the chain C-A-B.

Version 12.0 3-27 12/05

STRAP
Example:

• Select Global X2 and X3 direction

• Define the 3 points and the corresponding pressure values:

• Select elements 25 to 80

3.5.1.4 Element loads - temperature

Two types of temperature loads may be applied:

• a uniform temperature change that expands/contracts the element in the plane of the element.
• a temperature gradient across the thickness of the element that produces a curvature in the element. Enter
the temperature at the +x3 face of the element less the temperature at the -x3 face.

Define the parameters:

Load type:
Select:
Contraction/expansion
a uniform temperature change that expands/contracts the element
in the plane of the element.
Gradient
a temperature gradient across the thickness of the element that
produces a curvature in the element. Enter the temperature at the
+x3 face of the element less the temperature at the -x3 face.
Temperature change:
Enter the temperature difference.

The program multiplies the temperature difference by the thermal coefficient of the material(s); therefore the
temperature and the coefficient must have the same units. Check the value of the thermal coefficients and enter
the difference in degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F) accordingly.

Examples:
• Expansion / contraction:
A plate model is heated uniformly by 27 °C.
Enter: Temperature change = 27
• Gradient:
In a dome structure, the interior (-x3) temperature is 18°C and the exterior (+x3) temperature is -15° C;
Enter: Temperature change = -33

Note:
Temperature loads applied to orthotropic elements will be calculated using E x, αx in the local x1 direction, and
Ey, αy in the perpendicular direction .

Version 12.0 3-28 12/05

STRAP
3.5.1.5 Element loads - self-weight

Apply the self-weight as a uniformly distributed element pressure.

Note that self-weight can also be applied as a Joint load.

Direction:
The self-weight can be applied in any global direction.

Self-weight factor:
The self-weight is calculated as the element thickness multiplied by the
material density and may be multiplied by a factor. If a negative factor is
defined, the load will be applied in the negative direction of the global axis.

If the material is USER-DEFINED, verify that the density was defined.

Select the elements using the standard Element Selection option.

Examples:
• apply self-weight as a vertical service load:
Global X2
Self weight factor=1.00
• apply 10% of the self-weight as a horizontal load:
Global X1
Self weight factor=1.00

3.5.2 Revise element loads

Refer to 3.4.2 - Revise beam loads.

3.5.3 Delete element loads

Refer to 3.4.3 - Delete beam loads.

3.5.4 Element loads - copy

Refer to 3.4.4.

Version 12.0 3-29 12/05

STRAP
3.6 Support displacements
Support displacements may be entered in the direction of any degree-of-freedom, including rotation.

Note that the nodes must be restrained in the same degrees-of-freedom as the defined displacements.

• Displacements:
dX1, dX2, dX3 = Initial translation in the direction of the global X1, X2 and X3 axes respectively.
• Rotations:
rX1, rX2, rX3 = Initial rotation about the global X1, X2 and X3 axes, respectively (radians)

Example:
Initial settlement in the X2 axis direction = 2.00 mm.
Initial rotation about the X3 axis = 0.04 radian
Specify: dx2 = -0.002 rx3 = 0.040

Select the support locations using the standard Node Selection option. Only nodes with restraints may be
selected.

Version 12.0 3-30 12/05

STRAP
3.7 Combine load
Use this option to:
• define a load case as a combination of existing load cases
• add an existing load case into the current load case, in addition to other loads.

All load cases added to a combination may be multiplied by a factor.

For all options:

Select a load case and define a factors:

• move the into the correct cell in the "Factor" column and click the mouse
• type in the load factor
• Repeat for other load cases and click to complete.
In the above example, 1.4 * dead load +1.6 *live load + 0.0 * wind loads will be added to the current load case.

Note:
• combinations may also be defined in the after the solution. It is strongly recommended that combinations
be defined after the solution rather than at this stage as results can be obtained for new or revised
combinations without solving the model again, however -
• The P-Delta effect is non-linear, i.e. the rules of superposition do not apply. Therefore, load combinations
for models with P-Delta must be defined here, rather than in the post-processor. The same applies for
tension/compression only members and for unidirectional springs.
• if a load case in a combination is updated, then the combination is updated automatically.
• loads that were defined by a Combination cannot be corrected using the "Revise" option of Joint Loads,
Beam Loads, etc. The original load case must be revised.
• a combination cannot include a load case which includes a combination.

Version 12.0 3-31 12/05

STRAP
3.8 Global loads
Load locations may be defined relative to the global coordinate system. The program locates the nodes and
elements surrounding the "global loads" and converts the loads to equivalent joint loads or element loads as
specified by the user. Loads outside the model limits are ignored in certain cases (refer to Method of
Application).

This option is useful in models characterized by load patterns which do not coincide exactly with the nodes or
elements, such as bridges.

Note that Global Loads can be applied any plane of elements, including planes not parallel to a global plane.

Select the global load options:

3.8.1 Global load types

3.8.1.1 Point Load

Global point loads may be defined at a node or a coordinate; select the method from the side menu:

By nodes
highlight and select any node in the model

Version 12.0 3-32 12/05

STRAP
By coord.
Specify the global coordinate of the concentrated load on the global plane perpendicular to the load
direction:

For an example on the application of global point loads, refer to 3.8.2.2 - Global area loads.

3.8.1.2 Area loads

Area loads are applied to a rectangular or polygon area defined by a planar contour connecting coordinates
and/or nodes (not necessarily parallel to a global plane). The contour corners may be defined at a node or a
coordinate; select the method from the side menu:

A different option may be used for every corner.

By nodes
highlight and select any node in the model

By coord.
Specify the global coordinate of the area load corner on the global plane perpendicular to the load direction:

- Double-click the last corner or click the button to end the definition.

Note:
- the contour nodes must all lie on the same plane, not necessarily parallel to a global plane
- the uniform load may be applied in any global direction or perpendicular to the surface of the plane.
Refer to Global load - direction for the sign conventions for loads applied perpendicular to the surface.

The program calculates the global components of the total area load and asks the user to confirm or reverse
the direction:

Version 12.0 3-33 12/05

STRAP
For area loads applied as beam loads:
- there are inaccuracies in the algorithm. The program calculates the total defined load and the total
applied load. A warning is displayed if there is a discrepancy greater than 3% of the defined load.

Example (rectangular):

Apply the global POINT and AREA loads as displayed in the following figure:

- specify:
Point load Global X3
Load = -10.7
- move to X=9.75 , Y=3.2 and click the mouse; repeat for coordinates X=9.75 , Y=4.9
- specify:
Area load Global X3
Load = -0.88
- repeat for X=8.25/Y=3.2 , X=8.25/Y=4.9 and X=5.5/Y=4.9.
- click on the first point to close the contour.

3.8.1.3 Pattern
Global loads may be stored in an ASCII format file and recalled directly into a load case. This option is useful
for applying vehicle loads to a bridge model.

The load patterns are stored in the file PATTERN.DAT.

• A file with standard vehicle loads is installed with STRAP in the program directory. The user may edit, add
or delete the loads in the file using any text editor program.
• The user may create a PATTERN.DAT file in any working directory. When the user selects the Load
pattern option, the program first looks for the file in the current working directory; if the file is not found, the
program then looks in the program directory.

Various load patterns can be stored in the file and can be recalled separately. Each group begins with a "load
name" (no blanks allowed) and is terminated with "END". The load commands are identical to those entered
in the Command Mode, except that "BEAM list" or "ELEM list" at the end of the command is not allowed; the
loads are applied by default to all beams/elements (refer to Appendix A3 - Method of Application) but may be
applied to selected elements as explained above.

Each load pattern is defined on an X-Y plane and the loads are referenced to an arbitrary zero coordinate.
When the pattern is recalled into a load case, the location of the zero coordinate on the model is defined at a
node or coordinate.

In space models, when the load is applied to a plane parallel to the:

• X1-X2 plane, X corresponds to X1, Y corresponds to X2
• X2-X3 plane, X corresponds to X2, Y corresponds to X3
• X1-X3 plane, X corresponds to X1, Y corresponds to X3

Each group may be recalled several times to a single loading case.

The file format is:

Version 12.0 3-34 12/05

STRAP

To apply the load:

• The program displays a list of the "load names" of all load patterns stored in the file "PATTERN.DAT".

For example:

• Select one, then move the to the location of the pattern origin on the global plane:

Example:

Apply H2 from the previous file example as shown in the

following figure.

Specify:

Load direction = X3
Angle = 90
Factor = 1.4

Set coordinates to: X1 =2.5 , X2=0.71

Version 12.0 3-35 12/05

STRAP
3.8.2 Global loads - additional options

Global loads - "load ="

The value of the area / point load to be applied; a positive value is applied in the positive direction of the axis.

Global Loads - “Loads type”

Global loads may be Point loads, area loads (rectangle, bounded by a contour or polygon) or may be a standard
load pattern retrieved from a file (e.g. wheel loads). Refer to 3.8.2.

Global loads - "Load direction"

Global loads are applied either in global axis directions or perpendicular to the surface of the plane.

For loads applied perpendicular to the plane, the sign convention is determined by the direction that the contour
is defined:

Global loads - "Apply loads as"

Global loads are converted to joint loads, beam loads or element loads; for a detailed explanation on the
method of application. (refer to Appendix A3 )
Joint specifies that the load will be converted to joint loads.
Beam specifies that the load will be applied as beam loads to the surrounding beams; part of the loads
outside the model boundary will be applied as joint loads by the program in certain cases. Refer
to Method of application (Appendix A3).
Element specifies that the load will be applied as an element pressure load on the adjacent elements; loads
outside the model boundary will be ignored. Refer to Method of application (Appendix A3).

Note:
• Global loads are applied by default to all adjacent beams/elements. To apply the global loads to selected
beams/elements only, use Apply loads to selected beams only
• Global loads applied the dummy beams/elements that are not connected to the model (i.e. that are
connected only to other dummy beams/elements) are not applied to the model.

Global loads - "Level"

Global loads are applied only nodes/beams/elements lying on the contour plane +/- a tolerance value.

The tolerance value is by default set to 0.01 to allow for minor inaccuracies in the contour coordinate definition.

Example:
The global area load is to be applied to the two adjacent parallel planes:

Version 12.0 3-36 12/05

STRAP
Global loads - Apply to selected beams only
Global loads - point, area or pattern - may be applied to selected beams or elements only.

Select beams and elements using the standard element selection option.

For the method of application to selected beams/elements, refer to Method of Application (Appendix A3).

Global loads - Factor

Factor by which all of the loads in the group are multiplied when applied.

Global loads - Angle

Angle of rotation of entire load group. When the load is applied, it may be rotated about the (0,0) point of the
load group, where a positive angle is counterclockwise.

Global loads - "Apply moments"

Applicable only if the global loads are applied as joint loads:
Apply forces and moments at the nodes, as explained in Method of Application
Apply the forces only at the nodes.

Version 12.0 3-37 12/05

STRAP
3.9 Solids loads
The loads that may be defined for solid elements are temperature loads and self weight. To define any type
of surface load (pressure, concentrated, etc) define dummy beam or elements connected to the end nodes of
the solid elements and apply loads to them.

The options displayed for Solids loads are:

3.9.1 Solid loads - define

Refer to 3.9.1.1

Refer to 3.9.1.2

3.9.1.1 Solids loads - self-weight

Apply the self-weight as joint loads; the weight of the element (volume x density of the element material
property) will be divided equally to the element end nodes, even if the element is not symmetric.

Note that an identical self-weight can also be applied as a Joint load.

Direction:
The self-weight can be applied in any global direction.

Self-weight factor:
The self-weight is calculated as the element thickness multiplied by the material density. This value may be
multiplied by a factor. If a negative factor is defined, the load will be applied in the negative direction of the
global axis selected.

Select the elements using the standard Element Selection option.

Version 12.0 3-38 12/05

STRAP
Examples:
• apply self-weight as a vertical service load:
Global X2
Self weight factor = 1.00

• apply 10% of the self-weight as a horizontal load:

Global X1
Self weight factor = 0.1

3.9.1.2 Solids loads - temperature

A temperature load applies a uniform stress in all global directions equal to Eα(∆T)/(1-2µ)

Enter the temperature difference.

The program multiplies the temperature difference by the thermal coefficient of the material(s); therefore the
temperature and the coefficient must have the same units. Check the value of the thermal coefficients and enter
the difference in degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F) accordingly.

3.9.2 Revise element loads

Refer to 3.4.2 - Revise beam loads.

3.9.3 Delete element loads

Refer to 3.4.3 - Delete beam loads.

3.9.4 Element loads - copy

Refer to 3.4.4 - Beam loads - copy.

Version 12.0 3-39 12/05

STRAP
3.10 Delete Loads
To delete an entire load case:

The program displays a list of existing load cases;

• Highlight a load case using the and click the mouse.

• Click the button

• Click in the following menu to confirm the deletion.

3.11 Deactivate loads

Deactivated load cases are not solved but not erased. This option allows you, for example, to define basic
loading cases and use them in load combinations without solving them, thereby saving solution time.
Deactivated load cases may be reactivated at any time.

The program displays a list of existing load cases:

Place the in any cell along the load case line and click the mouse; the status of the load case will be revised.

Note that the combinations in the result module will be automatically updated when a load case is activated or
deactivated.

Version 12.0 3-40 12/05

STRAP
3.12 Moving loads
Generate a series of new load cases from an existing load case containing global loads. In each new load
case, the global loads will be moved by a constant increment. All other load types (beam loads, etc.) will be
applied in the generated cases, but will remain at the same location.

Select an existing load case; the program displays the following menu:

No. of generated loads:

Specify the number of new load cases (in addition to the original case). The “maximum allowed” is the
maximum number of load cases allowed less the number of cases already defined.

Move by:
Enter the coordinate increment of the global load location

Moving loads - arc

To generate copies of global loads along an arc:
• Specify the number of generated loads
• click the Move in an arc button
• specify the nodes at the start and end of the arc as well as any intermediate node.

If the existing global load is at the start node, then the last generated copy will be at the end nodes and the
intermediate copies will be at equally spaced intervals along the arc.

If the reference point of an existing global load in the same load case does not lie on the defined arc, the
program will draw an identical arc parallel to the original one starting at load reference point; global load will
be generated along the parallel arc as described above.

Example:

The title of an existing load case is "Wheel at +12.3"

The original load case is shown in the following figure. Generate the two load cases shown in (b) and (c).

Specify:

No. of loads generated: 2

DX1 = 2.0 DX2 = 0.0

The program now generates two new loading cases, "Wheel at +12.3 #2" and "Wheel at +12.3 #3"

Version 12.0 3-41 12/05

STRAP
After generating the new cases, the program remains in the "Moving load" options and adds the title of the last
generated load case to the list. If this case is selected for generating new moving loads, the second set of
generated loads will be labeled "Wheel at +12.3 #3", "Wheel at +12.3 #4", etc. This feature allows variable
coordinate increments to be easily defined.

If the original load case is revised, the program may be instructed to regenerate all the moving loads; if a
generated load case is revised, the other cases will not be automatically regenerated.

Referring to the Method of Application for global loads, loads located outside the model that are applied as
beam loads will still generate loads on the structure. This may create a problem in the Moving Loads option
as the last generated load case may be partially or completely beyond the model boundary. For example:

To ensure that such loads are not applied to the model:

• define nodes offset a small distance (1 cm) from the model ('ja', 'jb' in the above figure)
• connect these nodes with dummy beams lying parallel to the model boundary
• do not connect these new nodes to the structure with other beams or elements.

The global loads outside the model boundary (the two concentrated loads in our example) will be applied to
the dummy beams. they will have no influence on the structure as the dummy beams are not connected to the
model. The solution and results modules of the program ignore dummy beams so no error messages or results
will be displayed.

Version 12.0 3-42 12/05

STRAP
3.13 Chess (Staggered) Loads
Most design codes require several patterns of dead and live loads for the calculation of maximum support and
span moments in beams.

This option automatically generates the required patterns from basic load cases containing the dead loads on
all spans and the live loads on all spans; if one of the basic dead or live load cases is later revised, all of the
generated cases may be automatically revised.

Example: automatically generate the load cases (c), (d) and (e) from the basic load cases (a) and (b):

The patterns to be generated are listed in the file CHESS.DAT which may be revised by the user.

Select dead/live loads:

Identify the load cases that contain dead loads (5 maximum) and live (imposed) loads (5 maximum).

Dead load max. factor:

Specify the load factor for dead loads when maximum load is applied. For most Codes, the value is 1.40.

Dead load min. factor:

Specify the load factor for dead loads when minimum load applied. For most Codes, the value is 1.00.

Live load factor:

Specify the load factor for live loads when applied. For BS8110 and Eurocode 2, ACI 318-02, the factor is 1.60.

The program now displays schematically each of the generated load cases in sequence.

Version 12.0 3-43 12/05

STRAP
Click:

• To generate the load case.

• Return to the previous generated load case.

If the arrangement of the live load is not satisfactory, three options are available for modifying it:

All beams assigned with maximum load will be assigned with minimum load and vice versa.

Select loaded beams using the standard Beam Selection option; all selected beams with minimum
load will be revised to maximum load.

Select loaded beams using the standard Beam Selection option; all selected beams with maximum
load will be revised to minimum load.

Note:

The design postprocessors (steel and concrete) assume that the factored load combinations are defined after
the solution and that the load case deflections are from service loads.

If the load combinations are defined using this option, then the loads in the cases are factored. As the
postprocessors cannot reduce the deflections, the allowable deflection limit must be correspondingly increased
in the postprocessor..

For example:
• allowable service load deflection = L/350
• Average load factor on span = 1.55
• Specify adjusted allowable deflection = 350 / 1.55 = L/226

Version 12.0 3-44 12/05

STRAP
3.13.1 Generated Patterns (File CHESS.DAT)

The list of patterns to generate is stored in the file CHESS.DAT. The file may be revised using any editor
program.

Each line is in the format:

LEN nsp PAT n1 n2 ... nnsp
where:
nsp = number of spans in the pattern
n1, n2, .. = 0 or 1 for each of the nsp spans; 1 indicates that the span is loaded and 0 indicates that the span
is unloaded

The default patterns are:

LEN 2 PAT 1 0
LEN 4 PAT 1 1 0 0
Line 1: 2 spans in the pattern; 1st span loaded and 2nd span unloaded.

The program will produce the load patterns:

Line 2: 4 spans in the pattern; 1st and 2nd spans loaded and 3rd and 4th spans unloaded.

The program will produce the load patterns:

For the following example, the file CHESS.DAT should read:

LEN 1 PAT 1
LEN 2 PAT 1 0

Version 12.0 3-45 12/05

STRAP
3.14 P-Delta
Secondary moments and forces resulting from the action of the loads on the deflected model (the P-DELTA
effect) may be calculated.

Note:
• For details on the algorithm used by the program refer to 3.14.1 - P-Delta - Method of Calculation.
• P-Delta calculation applies only to beam elements. The calculation must be specified for each load case
where the effect is required, as explained below.
• The P-Delta effect is non-linear, i.e. the rules of superposition do not apply. Therefore, load combinations
for models with P-Delta must be defined here in LOADING, rather than after the solution.

The program displays a list of existing load cases:

Using the mouse/arrow keys highlight the correct loading case and click the mouse; the P-Delta status of the
loading case will be revised.

3.14.1 P-Delta - method of calculation

The program uses the following iterative method for calculating the secondary moments and forces in the model
due to the action of the loads on the deflected structure - the P-Delta effect. The P-Delta calculations are
applicable to beam elements only.

The program carries out the P-Delta calculation as follows:

• at any node, the applied loads equal the sum of the internal forces at the ends of the beams connected to
the nodes, with the opposite sign (Figure a).

• for the second and subsequent iteration, the program first calculates the new orientation of each beam,
based on the deflected location of its end nodes from the previous iteration, i.e., a revised local coordinate
system is assigned to the beam (Figure b).
• the program calculates the sum of the internal forces at each node based on the new local systems of the
connected beams. This new sum is then applied to the node (with the opposite sign) as the new applied
load. In the example above, the applied load from the original vertical load now has a horizontal component
(Figure b).
• the program solves the model again and continues with the next iteration, if required by the convergence
criteria.

Version 12.0 3-46 12/05

STRAP
This iteration process is repeated until the following condition is satisfied at ALL nodes in the model:

where:
i = the current iteration.
i-1 = the previous iteration
max. deflection: refers to the original solution.

Relatively flexible structures may not converge. If the solution has not converged after five iterations, the
program pauses and asks the user whether to continue. The question is repeated every 5 iterations. Note
that almost all models converge within 5 iterations.

Note:
• all iterations are calculated with the INITIAL stiffness matrix (calculated from the initial, undeflected
geometry)
• the support reactions in the result tables will not include the additional forces due to the P-Delta effect.
• the calculation is generally conservative for relatively slender members with deflections along the length of
the member. Referring to Figure (a) in the following drawing, the deflection assumed by the method is not
equal to the actual deflection of the member.

The accuracy may be improved by inserting a dummy node along the member as shown in Figure (b).

Version 12.0 3-47 12/05

STRAP
3.15 Sway
The sway/drift control module in the Steel postprocessor selects new beam sections in order to reduce the sway
at specified nodes to user-defined values in any global direction. Similarly, the drift between two specified
nodes may also be limited.

Specify the nodes and global directions where the Steel postprocessor will check the sway/drift (the actual
sway/drift limits are defined in the Steel postprocessor).

The program automatically creates unit load cases at the selected nodes (note that these load cases will not
be displayed when Revise or Output are selected).

The list box at the centre of the menu displays the sway/drift nodes already defined.

Select one of the following options:

• To define new sway/drift nodes:

Sway:
Limit the deflection at a specified node in a specified global direction
Drift:
Limit the relative deflection between two specified nodes in a specified global direction.
Select the sway/drift node(s) using the standard node selection option.

• To delete a defined sway/drift check:

Highlight the relevant line in the list box (single click) and click the Delete button; the line will be erased.

Version 12.0 3-48 12/05

STRAP
3.16 Copy a load case
To copy an entire existing load case:
• select the load case from the list

Regular copy
define a title for the new case.
Copy and change load direction
The loads in only one global direction may be copied. Define a title for the new case, select the global
direction to be copied and specify the global direction of the copied loads.

The copied loads may be multiplied by a factor. In the example above, all vertical loads are converted
to horizontal loads and multiplied by -0.15

Note:
• all loads are converted to joint loads based on the original applied loads, i.e. all beam loads are converted
to joint loads.
• the program maintains the sign of the loads. For example:

Version 12.0 3-49 12/05

STRAP
3.17 Wind loads

3.17.1 Wind loads - general

This option generates wind loads according to Code requirements.

The user defines:

• the outline of areas referred to as "panels", or selects beams and defines the perpendicular panel width.
• the direction in which the wind acts.
• the "height" direction of the panel.
• various Code parameters.

The program calculates the wind pressure distribution on the panel according to the Code and distributes the
load to the nodes/beams/elements in the panel area.

In general, each wall or roof plane should be defined as a separate panel.

Note:
• Wind pressures are applied to the nodes/beams/elements using the same methods that are used to apply
global area loads.
• Dynamic effects are not considered.

3.17.2 Procedure

• click the icon

• select "Define a new wind load case"
• specify the load application method for the wind loads:
- contour area applied as beam/element/joint loads
- selected beams and perpendicular width (for plane models).
• define a contour outlining the first panel / select beams and define width
• define the Code wind load parameters
• repeat for additional panels (all additional panels must use the same load application method).
• repeat for additional load cases

To check the loads generated by the program

• click the icon

• select the wind load case
• the global loads generated by the program on the panels will be displayed.
** Do not revise the loads in this option **

Version 12.0 3-50 12/05

STRAP
To revise wind loads:

• click the icon

• select Revise a wind load case" and select the case
• for panels defined by contour: revise the load application method (beam/element/joint loads).
• revise the contour/beam list; revise the parameters of an existing panel; add new panels
Note that a wind load case defined by contours cannot be revised to a case defined by beams & width, or vice-
versa.

3.17.3 Define/revise wind load

Select one of the following options:

• Define a new wind load case

Define a new load case with program generated wind loads

• Revise a wind load case

Revise a wind load case created using the previous option
or add wind loads to a regular load case; select a load case
for the list displayed on the screen
• Copy and revise a wind load case
Copy any existing load case (wind or regular) and add wind
loads to the copy.

• Display/print load data

Display/print a table detailing the calculation of the load pressure for each panel according to the Code
parameters. For example:

Refer also to 3.17.1 - Wind loads - general.

Version 12.0 3-51 12/05

STRAP
3.17.3.1 Define

Apply wind loads to area (panels) or beams:

Select one of the following options:

The wind loads may be generated by specifying:

• a contour area: the global area loads calculated by the program are applied to either nodes, beams or
elements.
• a series of beams and the perpendicular width: the program applies linear beam loads (this is the only option
available for plane frames)

• as uniform beam loads on a "lattice" structure. the program assumes that the model is an open structure,
i.e. the wind blows through the model. This option is primarily intended for transmission towers, open trusses
in industrial buildings, etc.
The program calculates the projected surface area of each member
perpendicular to the wind direction, calculates the wind load for individual
members in a lattice structure according to the Code and applies it either as a
distributed load on the selected beams or as joint loads at the beam ends.

Version 12.0 3-52 12/05

STRAP
Define the panel name:

• Wind loads in a load case may be generated on a series of contour areas.

• Each contour area is called a "panel".
For example:

If you selected "beams", specify the width of the "panel" perpendicular to the line of beams.
Example:

Define the code parameters as explained in 3.17.4 or 3.17.5.

The program than calculates global or beam loads and applies them to the model.

3.17.3.2 Revise

Refer to 3.17.2 - Procedure

The program displays the following menu for each panel defined in the load case:

Change param. - to revise the Code based parameters that

define the wind load on the panel
Change contour - redefine the entire contour for the current
panel (you cannot revise individual
nodes); the program will automatically
display the parameter menu after the
contour has been revised.
Delete panel - delete the current panel entirely
Next panel - do not revise the current panel

Version 12.0 3-53 12/05

STRAP
3.17.4 Wind design codes - Panels

Select one of the following design Codes:

3.17.4.1 BS6399
• Insert pages 3-55 to 3-58 from CODES_UK.PDF

3.17.4.2 Eurocode1
• Insert pages 3-54 to 3-58 from CODES_EURO.PDF

3.17.4.3 UBC1997
• Insert pages 3-55 to 3-58 from CODES_USA.PDF

3.17.4.4 IS875
• Insert pages from CODES_INDIA.PDF

3.17.5 Wind design codes - lattice

3.17.5.1 BS6399
• Insert pages 3-55 to 3-58 from CODES_UK.PDF

3.17.5.2 Eurocode1
• Insert pages 3-55 to 3-58 from CODES_EURO.PDF

3.17.5.3 UBC1997
• Insert pages 3-55 to 3-58 from CODES_USA.PDF

3.17.5.4 IS875/IS802
• Insert pages 3-55 to 3-58 from CODES_INDIA.PDF

Version 12.0 3-54 12/05

STRAP
3.17.6 WINDUSER.DAT

A single wind pressure vs. height table may be defined and stored by the user:
• The file name must be WINDUSER.DAT
• The file must be saved in the program directory
• The program assumes that the data in the file is in the model units and does not modify them, e.g. if the
model units are kips and feet, then the heights must be defined in feet and the pressure in ksf.
• The numbers must include a decimal point
• The file may contain any number of rows and must end with a row that starts with -99999.0
• The rows must be arranged in ascending order of height
• Each row includes one height value and one pressure value; the height value must be in columns 1-8 and
the pressure value must be columns 9-16

Example:
3.0
5.0 0.7
7.0 1.4
| 2.5
| |
100.0 |
120.0 12.9
-99999.0 16.2
(height) (pressure)

Version 12.0 3-59 12/05

STRAP
3.18 Loads - file

Solve the model:

Save the load data and begin the solution.

STRAP models list:

Save the load data and return to the STRAP main menu (list of models).

Revise Geometry:
Save the load data and return to the geometry for the current model.

Exit:
Save loads data and leave STRAP

3.19 Display

For all general display options, refer to 1.30.

Display global loads

Display the distribution of global loads to beams (for global loads applied as beam loads).
• close the current load case
• select the Display global loads option in the Display pulldown menu
• select a load case

Example:
A global load was applied to a rectangular area bounded by beams -

Version 12.0 3-60 12/05

STRAP

Show data
Display all input load data for a selected node/beam/element:
• specify the data type option in the box at the right side of the screen:

• highlight the node/beam/element by placing the adjacent to it and click the mouse

Example: beam loads -

Version 12.0 3-61 12/05

STRAP
3.20 Output

Display load commands

Display the defined loads for selected load cases in tabular form.

The program displays a table of the defined load cases:

• to display a single load case, move the to the appropriate line and double click the mouse (or click the
mouse and click the button)
• to display multiple load cases:
- select the first load case (single click) then select other load cases by single clicking while pressing the
Ctrl key; click the button to display.
- to display a range of case, select the first case (single click), then select the last load case by single
clicking while pressing the Shift key - all intermediate cases will also be highlighted; click the
button to display.

For each loading case, the program first lists the load definition commands and then a summation of the loads
in each of the three global axis directions. The commands are in the standard format; refer to the Command
Mode Manual.

For example:

Check the input by calculating the sum of the loads on the structure in each of the global directions and
comparing the result to the summation in the table displayed on the last three lines.

Version 12.0 3-62 12/05

STRAP
Display load commands and applied loads
The program internally converts all defined loads into joint loads. The sum of the joint loads at each node is
called the applied load.
Display:
• the load commands
• the applied loads at all nodes.
• the center-of-gravity of the loads in each global direction

Output - global loads applied to beams

Display the beam loads and joint loads generated by global loads applied as beam loads:

For the method the program uses to apply the global loads, refer to Appendix A3.

Print load commands

To print the loading data displayed.
• selected load cases only may be printed
• Applied loads to nodes may be printed
• Global loads applied as beam loads may be printed
Note:
• Tables may be written to ASCII files in user-specified
format using the STBatch utility.

Display list of loads

Display/print a list the load cases. For example:

where:
no. = load case number in the load definition
module
no. in results = load case number in result module and
postprocessors, where inactive loading
cases are ignored in the numbering

Print drawing
Use this option to print the current display directly to the printer or to a file. The printed display will be enclosed
in a frame and will include a header. Refer to 1.4.7.

Print/edit saved drawing

Refer to 1.4.11.

Version 12.0 3-63 12/05

STRAP

*** Blank page ***

Version 12.0 3-64 12/05

STRAP

4 Solve the model

4.1 Solve - general
Refer to Solution method (4.2) for a detailed explanation on the method used by the program to solve the
model.

The program deletes the inverted stiffness matrix at the end of the solution phase in order to save disk space.
However, for large models it may be advisable to save the stiffness matrix if the same geometry will be solved
with different loads; the solution will then skip the matrix inversion.

Press to save the matrix.

At the start of the solution, the program displays the header:

The original and optimized nodal bandwidths appear on the second line. The actual degree-of-freedom
bandwidth and the total number of degrees-of-freedom appear in the third line of the table.

The program displays the rate of progress of the solution: Estimate the solution time by the rate-of-change of
the number of degrees-of-freedom already solved.

If the model is unstable, the program will display singularity messages. The messages may be printed.

Refer to:
4.3 - Singularity
4.4 - General problems

After solving all degrees-f-freedom (d.o.f), the program solves the load cases:

Version 12.0 4-1 12/05

STRAP
The iteration number appears only if non-linear options (P-Delta, unidirectional springs, etc.) were specified.

The program copies a back-up of the solution to the disk every few minutes (refer to 1.12.8 - Setup). The
solution may be stopped at any stage by clicking Abort. After a few seconds the program will return to the
operating system. The solution can later be continued from the point of the last backup as follows:
• start the program
• select the current model
• select Solve on the menu bar

To restart the solution from the point of interruption, select Resume solution when the following menu is
displayed:

4.2 Solution method

The program solves the model by the stiffness method. This method solves models on the basis of joint
equilibrium equations in terms of stiffness coefficients and unknown joint displacements. The method
formulates the matrix equation
[K] * {d} = {P}
where:
[K] = the stiffness matrix and is a function of the geometry
{d} = the nodal displacement vector
{P} = the applied nodal forces vector

The equation is solved for the unknown node displacements and hence the internal element forces or stresses.

The stiffness matrix is a square matrix where each side is approximately ndof*nj (where ndof is the number of
degrees-of-freedom per joint and nj is the number of joints in the structure), and is symmetric about the diagonal
starting in the upper-left corner of the matrix.

Most of the values in the matrix are equal to zero; The non-zero values are usually clustered along the diagonal,
forming a diagonal band. The width of this band is called the 'bandwidth'.

The significance of the bandwidth is that its size is the most important factor in determining the solution time.
The bandwidth size is dependent on the way the nodes and elements in the model are numbered. For example,
numbering the nodes in a multi-story model vertically instead of horizontally will increase the bandwidth size.

However the user need not worry about the numbering method. The program automatically renumbers the
model so that the bandwidth has the minimum width and so minimizes the solution time. The renumbering is
internal, so the results always appear according to the defined node and element numbers.

The program begins the solution by inverting the stiffness matrix. The stiffness matrix is a function of the
geometry only and the inversion of the matrix takes up the majority of the solution time.

If the program finds a zero value along the diagonal when building the stiffness matrix, the program replaces
it with the value 1.0E+20, and displays a ZERO STIFFNESS warning.

The program decomposes the matrix by the CHOLESKY method.

Version 12.0 4-2 12/05

STRAP
During the decomposition of the matrix, if the program discovers a value X along the diagonal that after
decomposition has a value 1.0E-9*X, the program replaces it with the value 1.0E-7*X and displays a
SINGULARITY message.

Beam Elements:
The program includes the shear contribution in the beam stiffness matrix and allows for a reduced shear area.

Triangular Elements:
• Bending: The program uses the HSM element (Hybrid Stress Model) as described in:
A Study of 3-Node Triangular Plate Bending Elements
Jean-Louis Batos
International Jour. for Numerical Methods in Engineering
Vol. 15 1771-1812 (1980)

• Plane Stresses: The program uses a constant strain plane stress element.

Quadrilateral Elements:
• Bending:
The program divides each rectangular element into four HSM triangular elements by creating a new node
at the element centre. The program then uses matrix condensation to delete the new node.
• Plane Stresses:The program uses a linear strain plane stress element.

Refer also to 4.5 - References.

4.3 Singularity
The program may also display additional messages during the solution phase indicating that it encountered
problems in solving the equation i.e. the stiffness matrix was found to be singular.

Singularity warnings may be printed.

Singularity indicates that the matrix determinant equals zero. The cause of singularity is instability of the model.

ALWAYS DETERMINE the REASON for SINGULARITY

There are two types of singularity:

Local Singularity:
The model as a whole is stable but there is local singularity at a node:
zero stiffness at node in dof . dof was restrained
The program will restrain the DOF and proceed with the solution.

Several examples are:

• Plane truss : X3 was not restrained at all nodes.
• Plane frame : All beams connected to a node are pinned.
• Space frame : Torsional moment of inertia (J) not defined.

Note:
In many cases of local singularity the corrective action taken by the program will lead to the correct solution
(e.g. plane truss example above). However, the solution time required will be greater.

Version 12.0 4-3 12/05

STRAP
Structural Singularity:
The entire model is unstable. The following message appears:
Singularity or near singularity detected at node __
The program will take corrective action, i.e., supply missing restraints, in order to proceed with the solution.

Note that the program arbitrarily restrains the first joint in the model that will make the model stable. The
corrected model usually does not correspond to the model that you intended to solve; check the reactions in
the result table to see if the program created new supports or display graphic displacements and check if the
deflected structure has the correct form.

If the model is not as intended, ignore the results and return to geometry to revise the input.

Note:
• this singularity message may be displayed when there is a large difference between maximum and minimum
moment-of-inertia values defined for property groups.

4.4 Problems - General

• If the solution is interrupted by a power failure or computer malfunction, the solution may be restarted from
the point of the last backup as explained in ccciv - General.

• Warning messages (solution will be completed):

- if the model consists of two or more unconnected parts.
- if two or more beams connect the same two nodes
- too many beams connected to one node (node/element optimization is discontinued).

• Error messages (solution is aborted):

- Total number of degrees-of-freedom exceeds 2000.
- Various errors in the geometry.
- Not enough space on disk:
At the start of the solution, the program checks if sufficient disk space is available to complete the
calculations. If not, the program displays a warning message and lists the number of bytes required.
Erase unnecessary files from your disk and restart the solution.

The program creates four new files during the solution phase:

File Status Size (bytes)

Stiffness matrix file temporary or (Final DOF bandwidth +2) *(Number of DOF + 6) * 4
MATRnnn.DAT permanent
Work file temporary [nodes*28) + (beams+tri)*112 + (quad*140)] * load cases +
—nnn.DAT 100
Results file permanent (Final DOF bandwidth)² * 8
RESLTnnn.DAT
F.E. graphic results file permanent [(tri + 4*quad) * 48 * (load cases)] +50
ELRESnnn.DAT

Version 12.0 4-4 12/05

STRAP
4.5 References
• Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures
Weaver and Gere
D. Van Nostrand, 1980

• The Finite Element Method - A Basic Introduction for Engineers

Rockey, Evans, Griffiths and Nethercot
Granada Publishing, 1975

• Finite Elements for Structural Analysis

Weaver and Robinson
Prentice Hall, 1984

• A Study of Three-Node Triangular Plate Bending Elements

Jean-Louis Batos
Int. Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering
Vol. 15 1771-1812 (1980)

• Formulas for Stress and Strain

R. J. Roark
McGraw-Hill

• The Finite Element Method

O.C. Zienkiewicz
McGraw-Hill 1977

• Finite Element Analysis Fundamentals

R.H. Gallagher
Prentice-Hall 1975

• Theory of Elasticity
Timoshenko and Goodier
McGraw-Hill 1970

• Strength of Materials
S. Timoshenko
Van Nostrand Reinhold

Version 12.0 4-5 12/05

STRAP

** Blank page **

Version 12.0 4-6 12/05

STRAP

5 Results
After completing the solution, the program enters the output module of the program.

General options in the menu bar:

To display graphic/tabular results:

• Define the load Combinations (menu bar). Refer to 5.1.
• Specify Options, e.g. result axes (menu bar). Refer to 5.2
• Select - Tables or Draw or Single beam
• Click:

to display the tabular/graphic results.

to print the tabular/graphic results. Refer to 1.4.6 and 1.4.7 for standard print options.
Tables may be written to ASCII files in user-specified format using the STBatch utility.
• Geometry only:
to redraw the current screen with geometry only and without results.
This option is convenient when rotating large models with results that take a considerable amount of time
to calculate and draw, e.g. contour maps. The program must recalculate the results every time one of the
rotate icon is clicked.
In such cases, select Geom only, rotate the model (without the results), then select Draw to redisplay
the results.

Refer to:
• Punching/average results - 5.3
• Graphic results - 5.4
• Tabular results - 5.5
• Single beam - 5.6
• Files (menu bar option) - 5.7

Note:
• Results from several different models can be combined prior to displaying the results. Refer to 1.13.1 -
Combine results of 2 projects.

Version 12.0 5-1 12/05

STRAP
The following terminology is used throughout the output modules:

Load cases defined in “Loads” (prior to solving the model). Note

Load CASES that some of these cases may be in fact “Combined load cases” but
are still referred to as CASES.

Combinations of load cases defined after solving the model using

Load COMBINATIONS
the “Combinations” option

5.1 Combinations
Use this option to define combinations of the load cases for the following output modules:
• tabular results
• graphical results
• design postprocessors

Note:
• For a detailed explanation of "Groups" and "Library" , refer to 5.1.1 - Combinations - General
• the rules of superposition do not apply for non-linear elements. Therefore, load combinations for models with
tension/compression only elements, unidirectional springs, etc, must be defined in loading ("Combine ld")
and not after the solution using this option.

Select one of the following options:

Define/Revise combinations
Define new combinations for this model or revise combinations already defined. Refer to 5.1.2.

Define / revise Groups

Define or revise load case groups. Refer to 5.1.3.

Standard combinations library

Retrieve a combination definition from the Combination Library or to add to the Library a defined combination.
Refer to 5.1.4.

Print/Display combination List

Display the combinations defined for the current model. Refer to 5.1.7.

Disable all combinations

To display results for load cases instead of combinations. Refer to 5.1.6.

Deactivate selected combinations

Reactivate combinations for results display and all design postprocessors. Refer to 5.1.7.

Definition options
Specify load cases to be displayed in the Combination definition dialog box. Refer to 5.1.8.

Version 12.0 5-2 12/05

STRAP
5.1.1 Combinations - General

• Each "Combination" is defined as a combination of load cases, each of which may be multiplied by a factor.
• Combinations may also be retrieved from a "Combination Library"; combinations defined for the current
model may be added to the combination library for use in other models.
• "Groups" of load cases may also be defined. If a group is added to a combination definition, the program
will either:
- automatically generate a separate combination for each load in the group, or
- add the sum of the load cases in the group to the combination.

Examples:

• Groups:
The following load combination is required:
1.4*Dead + 1.6*Imposed + 1.6*Crane
where there are 5 different load cases with Crane loads, each corresponding to a different point of
application of the load.

Instead of defining 5 separate combinations, the 5 crane loading cases may be defined as a Group; then
only one combination which includes 1.6*"Crane load group" need be defined. The program will then
automatically generate a separate combination for each of the five loads in the group, i.e.
- 1.4*Dead + 1.6*Imposed + 1.6*Crane (1)
- 1.4*Dead + 1.6*Imposed + 1.6*Crane (2)
- etc.

• Library:
Note that standard combinations need not be redefined in every model as combinations containing groups
may be stored in the library. For example:
- 1.4*Dead + 1.6*Live
- 1.2*Dead + 1.2*Live + 1.2*Wind
- etc.

For each Current Model, retrieve the standard combinations from the Library; then define groups that contain
the "dead", "live" and "wind" load cases.

Note:
• the combination library is stored in the file COMB.DAT.
• the COMB.DAT file in the current directory is referred to as the "User library"
the COMB.DAT file in the program directory is referred to as the "Program library"
• combinations add to the library are always added to the User library (in the current directory)
• create/update the Program library by manually copying the COMB.DAT file from a current directory to the
program directory.

Version 12.0 5-3 12/05

STRAP
5.1.2 Define/Revise Combinations

The combinations are defined/revised by typing the factors in the appropriate cells in the following list view box.
There is a column for each load case (you may have to scroll horizontally if there are many cases).
Combinations may also be copied from the Clipboard.

To define a combination:
• move the arrow into the appropriate cell and click the mouse; the entire combination row will be
highlighted.
• type in the load factor and press [Enter]; the cursor will move to the next cell in the row.
• the cursor will move to the following row after you press [Enter] in the last cell. The program will
automatically generate a default title for the combination. The title may be edited at any time, but an edited
title will not be automatically updated if the combination is revised.

To delete a combination:
• place the anywhere on the combination line and click the mouse

• click the button

To copy a combination:
• place the anywhere on the combination line and click the mouse

• click the button

• place the anywhere on the line where the copy is to be written and click the mouse (if you select a line with
an existing combination, then the copy will be inserted at this point).

• click the button

To rearrange the combination list:

• Similar to "Copy a combination", except click after selecting the combination to be moved.

To copy a combination from the clipboard:

• type the combination definition in a program such as "Notepad" in the format:
TITLE tit (optional)
lc1 f1 lc2 f2 ........lcn fn..G1 fg1 ...... Gn fgn

where:
tit = combination title string. The program will create a default title if this line is omitted
lcn = load case number
fn = factor for load case 'n'
fgn = factor for group 'n'

Version 12.0 5-4 12/05

STRAP
Example:
for a combination 1.4*load case 1 + 1.6 * load case 3 + 1.2 * group 2, titled "Dead + Live + Group 2", type:
TITLE Dead + Live & Group 2
1 1.4 3 1.6 G2 1.2
• Highlight the commands (click and hold the mouse, drag the cursor), then select "Edit", "Copy" in the
menu bar
• Press [Alt][Tab] to return to STRAP
• place the anywhere on the line where the command is to be written and click the mouse (if you select
a line with an existing combination, then the command will be inserted at this point).

• click the button

5.1.3 Add/revise a group

Define a new group or revise an existing group. The program displays a list of the groups. For example:

To define a new group:

• Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight an "Undefined" group; Click the mouse.
• Enter the Group title.

To revise an existing group:

• Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight the title; Click the mouse.

Select the load cases to include in the group

• The program then displays a list of the load cases on the screen. For example:

Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight a load case to be included in the group; click the mouse. "Yes" will
be displayed alongside the load case. Click again to delete the "Yes".

Version 12.0 5-5 12/05

STRAP
• Specify the combination method for the group:

- Generate ...
the program will automatically generate a separate combination for each load in the group when this
group is added to a combination.
- Include ...
the program will automatically add the SUM of the load cases in the group to the combination when this
group is added to a combination.

5.1.4 Combination Library

Any combination defined for a particular model may be stored in the Combination Library and be retrieved later
for use in another model.

Retrieve combination from user library

To retrieve a combination from the Library:
• User library - retrieve combinations from
the file in the current working
directory
• Program library - retrieve combinations from
the file in the program
directory

The program displays a list of the combinations. For example:

Move the to the combination to be retrieved and click the mouse (or
press the up/down arrows until the combination is highlighted and
press [Enter]). The selected combinations will be added to the end of
the combination list of the current model.

Add combinations at end of library

To add a combination defined in the current model to the end of the User library (in the current directory).
The combination list for the current model is displayed. Select combinations and click when the
selection is completed. The selected combinations will be appended to the end of the library.

Insert combination into library

To insert a combination defined in the current model into the User library (in the current directory).
This option is similar to Add combinations to end of library, except that the program first asks you to specify
the location in the library combination list where the model combinations should be inserted.

Delete combinations form library

To delete a combination from the User library (in the current directory). Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight
the combination to be deleted; click the mouse.

Version 12.0 5-6 12/05

STRAP
5.1.5 Display/Print Combination List
To display/print the combinations defined for the current model:

If groups have been defined, select :

• Combinations:
to display/print all combinations, including those generated by groups.
• Load groups:
to display/print a list of the load cases in each group.
• Combination definitions:
to display/print the combination definition commands.

5.1.6 Disable all combinations

The combinations will be temporarily deactivated (not deleted); results will be displayed for load cases only.

Note that this option, if selected, is ignored by all postprocessor and design modules. To disable selected
Combinations for all modules, select Deactivate selected combinations.

5.1.7 Deactivate selected combinations

Click and highlight combinations in the list box to deactivate them; Inactive will be displayed next to the title.

Note:
• the combinations will be deactivated for graphic/tabular results and all design postprocessors
• the temporarily deactivate all combinations in order to display load case results, select Disable all
combinations

5.1.8 Definition options

The program by default displays all load cases in the Define combinations dialog box. This may be
inconvenient for models with many cases, especially if some loads will never be included in a combination.

Use this option to delete specified load cases from the Define combinations dialog box:

where:
load cases included in a group will be displayed
load cases included in a group will not be displayed (default)

Version 12.0 5-7 12/05

STRAP
5.2 Options

Units
Specify the units for display of results (the default result units are the same as the input units). Refer to 5.2.1.

Output format
Specify the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the various result types. Refer to 5.2.2.

Beam buckling parameters

To specify parameters for axial stress calculation (buckling length, etc.). The program calculates the allowable
axial stress based on design code equations. Refer to 5.2.3.

Principal axes
this option to display beam results about the principal axes,- Mu, Mv, etc. - instead of the results about the
major/minor axes - Mx, My, etc.

This option is relative only for beams with unsymmetric sections, e.g. single angles.

Element result coordinate system

To specify the direction of the result coordinate system for finite elements (by default the element local
coordinate system) and the skew angle between the two major reinforcement directions. Refer to 5.2.4.

Use local system for reactions

Display the reaction values according to the "local restraint coordinate system" and not the global system.
• graphic:

• tables:

Reinforcement parameters
Define reinforcement parameters (minimum diameter and spacing) for individual elements. The default
reinforcement parameters for the entire model are defined every time the display of reinforcement results
(tabular or graphic) is requested. Refer to 5.2.5.3.

Version 12.0 5-8 12/05

STRAP
The following options are displayed only if the BS8007 module has been installed:

BS8007
Check crack widths or calculate reinforcement to limit crack widths in reinforced concrete elements according
to British Standard BS8007:1987 - "Design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids". Refer to
5.2.5.1.

5.2.1 Units

Different units may be selected for each result type:

Note that the default units are not changed.

5.2.2 Output format

Specify the maximum number of digits to display after the decimal point for the various result types:

where:
• No. of digits:
The program will display fewer digits after the
decimal point for large values. The total
number of digits displayed will equal this value
(and will exceed it for larger numbers).

For example, 'No of digits' = 3 and 'Significant digits' = 3:

Result Displayed
0.0013245 0.001 (but see note below for beam results only)
0.013245 0.013 (3 significant digits)
1.3245 1.32 "
13.245 13.2 "
132.45 132. "
1324.5 1324. (4 digits required for large value)

Note:
• for 'beam result diagrams, the program will always display at least two non-zero digits following the zeros
after the decimal point. For example, if you specified 'No. of digits" = 3 and the result is 0.004793, the
program will display 0.0048, not 0.005.

Version 12.0 5-9 12/05

STRAP
5.2.3 Axial Stress Parameters

Select the design parameters for the design check of steel beam members under axial loads only. The
parameters are effective buckling length, steel type and allowable stresses.

Axial stresses are modified by a factor which is a function of the member slenderness; the allowable stresses
are reduced in the American and British codes, while the actual stresses are increased in the German code.

The factors for modifying the stresses are contained in file BCF.DAT. (refer to Appendix A5)

Note:
• This option is intended mainly for trusses as bending moments and shear are ignored. (For a complete
design of structural steel members, refer to 7.0 - Steel Postprocessor).
• Beam Axial Stress results may be requested in the Result menus even if parameters were not defined in
this option. In such a case the program assumes:
- all buckling lengths equal to the beam lengths
- the steel type is the first one listed in file BCF.DAT. (refer to Appendix A.5)
• If the moment-of-inertia was not defined during the geometry definition (i.e. only the area was defined), the
program is unable to calculate the radius-of-inertia and hence the slenderness. In such cases the program
will not calculate the axial stresses.
• For tapered members the program will use the properties at JA.

This option calculates the linear buckling effect according to the following working stress steel design codes:
• American AISC ASD
• British BS 449
• German DIN code.

Select one of the following options:

5.2.3.1 Revise buckling length

The buckling length of a beam is the effective length of the beam as used in the standard Euler buckling
equation. The effective length is denoted in most codes by 'Le' or 'KL'.

The program requires the buckling lengths about the two local axes x2 and x3 (they need not be equal).

Buckling about x2 is buckling associated with the moment of inertia I2, and buckling about x3 is associated with
the moment of inertia I3. In the following example, x2 buckling is perpendicular to the plane of the truss, while
x3 buckling is in the plane of the truss.

Note:
• All node restraints entered during geometry definition are ignored when calculating buckling lengths;
• The buckling length of a member may be defined as exceeding its actual length.

Version 12.0 5-10 12/05

STRAP
• If no data is entered for a beam, the program will assume the buckling length in both the x2 and x3
directions is equal to the actual length of the beam. You do not have to enter any data for such beams.
• If information for buckling length about only one axis is entered, the program assumes that the buckling
length about the second axis equals the actual beam length.

Example:

• purlins at every second node provide

lateral support perpendicular to the
top chord of the truss.
• in-plane buckling length = 0.9 * actual
beam length.

• Arrange the box as follows:

• select all top chord members using the standard beam selection option.
• repeat for the x3 direction.

5.2.3.2 Define Steel Type

Define the steel type parameters and the design code to be used for the calculations.

After the parameters have been selected, assign them to the beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

Steel table:
• British code : G43 , G50 , G55
• German code : ST37, ST52 , PIPE37 , PIPE52
• American code : MAIN36, BRAC36, MAIN42, BRAC42,
MAIN50, BRAC50
where the number represents the specified minimum yield
point of the steel. Example: for A36 steel, enter MAIN36
or BRAC36.

Allowable compression/tension:
(Required for German code steel code only)

Define the allowable tension and compression stresses.

Version 12.0 5-11 12/05

STRAP
Code type:
Select one of the following steel design codes.
German - DIN
British - BS449
American - AISC ASD

5.2.3.3 Display/Print Buckling Data

Data includes effective length, radius of inertia and slenderness about each of the two buckling axes.

Examples:

• British or American codes:

The table header is:

where:
Beam no. = Beam number as listed in the geometry table.
Length = Actual length of the member.

The following values are listed separately for the x2 direction and the x3 direction:
Buckl. Length = The effective buckling length about the axis.
R. of inert . = The radius of inertia of the section = sqrt(I/A).
Slenderness = Effective length divided by the radius of inertia. (Le/r)
Red. Factor = the ratio of the allowable stress for this slenderness to the allowable stress without
buckling effect.

• German code:

where:
omega = The factor for this value of slenderness. If the beam in compression, the program increases the
actual stress by this factor.

Version 12.0 5-12 12/05

STRAP
5.2.4 Element Coordinate Systems

Revise the coordinate system used by the program ro display finite element results. The default Element and
Reinforcement coordinate systems may be revised for each element in order to ensure consistency of results.

Refer to
• 5.2.4.1 - for a general explanation on the element results and reinforcement coordinate systems
• 5.2.4.2 - revise results coordinate system
• 5.2.4.3 - revise reinforcement skew angle
• 5.2.4.4 - display result axes and skew angles for each element

5.2.4.1 General

The explanation of results for finite elements necessitates the introduction of two new coordinate systems in
addition to the global and local element systems. They are:

Result Coordinate System X,Y,Z

The result coordinate system is the set of axes about which the element results are calculated and displayed.
In most cases the results axes are identical to the local or global systems.

If the direction of the local x1-x2 axes for all of the elements are not co-directional, there will be an apparent
inconsistency in the results and this will lead to time-consuming Mohr's circle calculations.

The program automatically assigns a default result coordinate system to each element. In general, the default
X axis is as close as possible to the general direction of X1.

The default result X and Y axes are determined as follows:

• Plane frame, plane grid:
The X axis is always parallel to the global X1 axis and the Y axis is always parallel to the global X2 axis.

If the program discovers that the direction of the local x3 axis of an element is opposite to the direction of
the global X3 axis, it reverses the sign of results for that element. This insures continuity of the lines.

• Space frames:
- Elements parallel to the X1-X2 global plane:
X = X1 , Y = X2 Z = X3
- Elements parallel to the X1-X3 global plane:
X = X1 , Y = -X3 Z = X2
- Elements parallel to the X2-X3 global plane:
X = X2 , Y = X3 Z = X1

- Elements not parallel to a global plane:

• X = direction parallel to the line of intersection of the element plane
with a plane parallel to the X1-X3 global axis (+X in the general
direction of +X1)
• Y = perpendicular to X and in the general direction of X2. (+Y in the
direction of +X2)
• Z = perpendicular to the element and in the general direction of +X3

- Elements perpendicular to the X1-X2 plane:

• X = direction parallel to the line of intersection of the element plane
with a plane parallel to the X1-X2 global axis.

Version 12.0 5-13 12/05

STRAP
Reinforcement Coordinate System X* ,Y*
The reinforcement coordinate system is required for reinforcement design moment calculation in concrete slab
models. The reinforcement axes X* and Y* are defined as parallel to the directions of the reinforcement. The
program assumes that X* is always in the same direction as the result coordinate system X axis. Y* can be at
any angle α from X*. By default, α = 90°.

5.2.4.2 Revise results coordinate system

The result coordinate system is the set of axes about which the element results are calculated and displayed.
The default result axes are related to the global systems.

Refer to 5.2.4.1 for an explanation on the default systems.

In certain cases the default axes may not give the required results. For example:
• reinforcement in concrete slabs is not parallel to the global axes
• x3 local axis directions are not consistent in cylindrical or spherical models

Refer to the following menu options for examples.

You may revise the result coordinate system for each quadrilateral and triangular finite element:

Default
This option restores the default element result axes for the selected elements.

The element local axes

The result coordinate system of each selected element will be identical to its local coordinate system, i.e.
X = x1 , Y = x2 , Z = +x3

Examples:
• Grid:

For elements 1 to 9, the reinforcement is rotated 45° from X1 (i.e.

parallel to the element boundaries) and so the moments should be
relative to the local axes. By default the results will be relative to the
global axes.

• Space frame:

Version 12.0 5-14 12/05

STRAP

The default Z axis directions are displayed above; note that some point inwards towards the centre of the
cylinder while the rest point outwards. Use this option to define a consistent direction for all elements.

Note that this option may lead to misleading and inconsistent results. For example:

• Triangular elements:
The results for triangular elements 3 and 7 will not be
relative to the same axes as quad elements 1,2,4,5,6.

• Slab reinforcement:
Confusion will result in the reinforcement calculation if the local x3 axis directions are not consistent. The
program assumes that the "TOP" face is the +Z face of the slab and the "BOTTOM" face is the -Z face.
Hence, "Top" and "Bottom" reinforcement in elements may actually be at the same face if their x3 axis
directions are reversed.

Local axes of a selected element

The result axes for an element may be defined as identical to the local axes of a different element. The
"different" element must lie on a parallel plane.

For example, "local axes" were specified for a group of elements but their local x3 axes directions are not
consistent. Confusion will result in the reinforcement calculation because the program assumes that the "TOP"
face is the +Z face of the slab and the "BOTTOM" face is the -Z face. Hence, "Top" and "Bottom" reinforcement
in different elements will actually be at the same face!

To unify the results, specify that the results axes for all elements are identical to the local axes of one element.
Refer to the previous option in this menu - The element local axes - for more details.

5.2.4.3 Change reinforcement skew angle

The reinforcement coordinate system is required for reinforcement design moment calculation in concrete slab
models. The reinforcement axes X* and Y* are defined as parallel to the directions of the reinforcement. The
program assumes that X* is always in the same direction as the result coordinate system X axis. Y* can be at
any angle α from X*. Normally, α = 90°, and the program assumes this value if no other value is defined.

The design moments Mx* and My* for reinforcement design are calculated according to the Wood and Armer
equations in the direction of X*, Y*.

The figure shows an example with α > 90°.

The axes parallel to the main directions of reinforcement
are denoted by X* and Y*. The program always assumes
X* to be parallel to the result X axis.

In most reinforced concrete slabs, the two reinforcement

directions are perpendicular. This is the default
assumption of the program.

For all other cases, the skew angle α between X* and Y* must be defined. The program will then calculate the
design moments for reinforcement in the directions of the reinforcement coordinate axes X* and Y*.

Version 12.0 5-15 12/05

STRAP

Enter a value between 1° and 179°.

5.2.4.4 Display result axes and skew angle

A table will be displayed on the screen showing the following information for each element in the model:
• result coordinate system axes directions
• skew angle "α"
• deletion of element from the display.

5.2.5 BS8007 – Crack widths and control

5.2.5.1 General

This program module is based on British Standard BS8007:1987 - "Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining
Aqueous Liquids".

The calculations enable the user to design reinforcement in concrete finite elements so that that crack widths
resulting from applied loading (bending and axial forces) and temperature and moisture effects are limited to
acceptable values.

The module can either:

• calculate the reinforcement required to limit the crack width to a user defined value
• calculate the crack width resulting from any arrangement of reinforcement

The calculations are based on the following code sections:

• Appendix A - "Calculation of minimum reinforcement, crack spacing and crack widths in relation to
temperature and moisture effects"
• Appendix B - "Calculation of crack widths in mature concrete"

Crack widths are always calculated according to both Appendices and the maximum value is displayed or used
to calculate reinforcement

The calculations are based on service stresses. The module calculates the service stresses from the load
combinations with all factors = 1.0 (or -1.0, for negative factors). Therefore, the STRAP load cases must be
defined with service loads.

The calculation is carried out as follows:

• the program calculates the reinforcement required to satisfy moment/force requirements (using factored load
combinations).
• the program then calculates minimum reinforcement requirements according to Code Appendix A (wmax
< allowable) and revises the reinforcement, if necessary.
• the program then calculates the crack width based on the service load requirements of Code Appendix B.
The program increases the reinforcement if the width is greater than the limiting crack width parameter
specified by the user (if the option is selected by the user).

Version 12.0 5-16 12/05

STRAP
5.2.5.2 How to use this module

• Define default parameters for minimum reinforcement and spacing for the entire model. These parameters
are displayed in the dialog box when the Display BS8007 results or Display BS8007 detailed results
options are selected in the Options pulldown menu
• Define different minimum reinforcement parameters for selected elements, if necessary. Select the BS8007
element parameters option in the pulldown menu.
• Calculate and display results for the model by selecting Display BS8007 results in the pulldown menu:
- Revise parameters displayed in the dialog box, if necessary (e.g. concrete type, cover). All parameters
are applied to all elements in the model.
- Select the calculation method:
Reinf. required for moments/forces
Calculate and detail the reinforcement required for moments and forces only. This option ignores the
crack width requirements of the Code.
Reinf. required for limiting crack width
Calculate and detail the reinforcement required to limit the crack width according to the requirements
of the Code. The reinforcement listed in the results will not be less than the reinforcement required
for moments and forces
User defined reinforcement
The program will calculate crack widths resulting from user defined reinforcement (minimum diameter
and spacing).
• Display detailed calculation results for selected elements by selecting the Display BS8007 detailed results
option in the Options pulldown menu. The parameters and the calculation method may be revised as in
the previous step.
• Display results graphically:

- click the icon in the side menu

- select BS8007 results in the Display type list box
- the parameters and the calculation method may be revised as in the previous step.

Version 12.0 5-17 12/05

STRAP
5.2.5.3 BS8007 - Parameters

Specify parameters for selected elements. The default parameters for the model are specified when selecting
the Display BS8007 results or Display BS8007detailed results options in the pulldown menu.

Different reinforcement parameters may be specified in both directions and at both faces.

Specify the parameters, then select elements using the standard element selection option.

Refer also to:

• 5.2.5.1 - BS8007 - General for help on the calculation method
• 5.2.5.2 - How to use this module

Reinforcement
Reinforcement (actual or minimum) may be specified in both directions and at both faces of the element.
Reinforcement defined in this option overrides the default values for reinforcement specified in the Display
BS8007 results or Display BS8007 detailed results options in the pulldown menu.

For each direction (X or Y) and each face (+x3 or -x3), select one of the following options:
Default
Use the default reinforcement values for the selected elements
No change
Use the current reinforcement values in this direction/face for the selected elements (default values or
values specified previously using this option).
Change to
Select a diameter from the list box and type a spacing value in the edit box.

For all options, select elements using the standard element selection option.

Version 12.0 5-18 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The reinforcement specified in this option will be used as follows:
Design option Reinforcement
Reinf. required for moments/forces Minimum
Reinf. required for limiting crack width Minimum
User defined reinforcement Actual

• Reinforcement may be checked by selecting the Display BS8007 parameters option in the pulldown menu.
• X/Y directions refer to the Element result coordinate system
• +x3/-x3 directions refer to the element local coordinate system.

Restraint factor - R
The default factor for all elements in the model is always 0.5. Refer to Code section A.3, A.5 and Figure A.3.

Select one of the following options:

Restraint factor =
Revise the restraint factor R for selected elements.
No change
Use the current factor value for the selected elements (the default value or values specified previously using
this option).

Slab type
The slab type is required for the calculation of r, the steel ratio. the ratio value is based on the area of the
"surface zone". Refer to Code section A.3 and Figure A.2.

The default slab type for all elements in the model is always "Wall or suspended slab".

Select one of the following options:

Wall or ground slab / Suspended slab ..
Revise the slab type for selected elements.
No change
Use the current slab type for the selected elements (the default value or values specified previously using
this option).

Version 12.0 5-19 12/05

STRAP
5.2.5.4 BS8007 - Results - Options

Calculate and display crack widths and reinforcement for elements in the model according to the parameters
in the menu.

Note that the reinforcement diameter and spacing parameters are the default parameters for the entire model;
different parameters for individual elements may be specified using the BS8007 element parameters option
in the pulldown menu.
Results - display options
The following display options are available:
• Maximum only
for each element, display results only for the maximum combination
for each element, display results separately for all combinations
• Only element of property
display only results for the property group specified in the adjacent box
display results for elements in all property groups
• Elements not on screen
Display results for the entire model
Display results only for those elements currently displayed on the screen

• Include in maximum undisplayed elements

the maximum crack widths for the entire model, displayed at the end of the table, will be calculated from
the crack widths for all elements in the model.
the maximum crack widths will be calculated only from those elements currently displayed.

Concrete strength
Specify the nominal concrete strength

Steel strength
Specify the nominal steel strength

Version 12.0 5-20 12/05

STRAP
Cover
Specify the gross cover (to centre-of-gravity of the reinforcement) according to the displayed units. Note that
different values may be specified in the X and Y directions, where X and Y refer to the Element results
coordinate system.

Wood & Armer moments:

Use the Wood & Armer design moments to calculate the reinforcement area (refer to 5.8)
Use the STRAP Mx and My moments to calculate the reinforcement area (ignore the influence of Mxy)

In-plane forces
* Space frame models only:
Calculate the reinforcement area required for the Mx. My, Mxy moments only and ignore the Fx, Fy, Fxy forces

Reinforcement - min/max
Specify default values for the range of reinforcement diameters and allowable reinforcement spacings. The
values specified in this option will be applied by default to all elements in the model. Different values may be
specified for selected elements with the BS8007 element parameters option in the pulldown menu.

Define the following parameters:

• Diameter: select the minimum and maximum diameters
• Spacing: specify the minimum spacing and increment
Example:minimum spacing = 75 mm and spacing increment = 100 mm.
allowable spacings are 75, 100, 200, 300, ... mm.

Note:
Reinf. required for moments/forces -or-
Reinf. required for limiting crack width
The program will select reinforcement for each element from the range specified so that that the resulting
crack width is as near as possible to the limiting crack width, but not less than the reinforcement required
for moment and axial forces.
User defined reinforcement
The program calculates the crack width corresponding to the Minimum diameter and Minimum spacing
values specified in this option. Maximum diameter and Increment values are ignored.

Temperature
Specify the total temperature drop (T1 + T2), where:
• T1 = the fall in temperature between the hydration peak and ambient
• T2 = additional fall in temperature due to seasonal variations
Refer to Code section A.3 for more details.

Limiting crack width

Specify the allowable crack width for the model.

Note:
Reinf. required for moments/forces -or-
Reinf. required for limiting crack width
The program will calculate the reinforcement required to limit the crack width to the value specified here
(but not less than the minimum reinforcement).
User defined reinforcement
This parameter is ignored by the program; the program calculates the actual crack width corresponding to
the current reinforcement.

Version 12.0 5-21 12/05

STRAP
Welded intersections (nw)
Specify nw, the number of welded intersections within the length smin (normally 1 or 2).
Refer to Code section A.3.

Design - reinforcement options

Three different reinforcement design options are available:
Reinf. required for moments/forces
Calculate and detail the reinforcement required for moments and forces only. This option ignores the crack
width requirements of the Code, i.e. the resulting crack width may be greater than the allowable crack width..
Reinf. required for limiting crack width
Calculate and detail the reinforcement required to limit the crack width according to the Code requirements.
The reinforcement listed in the results will not be less than the reinforcement required for moments and
forces
User defined reinforcement
The program will calculate crack widths resulting from user defined reinforcement (diameter and spacing).

5.2.5.5 BS8007 - Detailed results-Options

Display detailed crack widths and reinforcement calculations for for a single selected element. The calculations
are done according to the parameters in the menu.

Note that the reinforcement diameter and spacing parameters are the default parameters for the entire model;
different parameters for individual elements may be specified using the BS8007 element parameters option
in the pulldown menu.

Select an element using the standard element selection option.

Version 12.0 5-22 12/05

STRAP
Detailed results - combination
Select one of the following:
Maximal combination
display the detailed results only for the load combination that generates the maximum crack width
All combinations
display the detailed results only for all load combinations

For all other options, refer to 5.2.5.4.

5.2.5.6 BS8007 - Display parameters

Display the current parameter values. The parameters are those that can be defined per element using the
BS8007 element parameters option in the menu bar.

For example:

where:
R = the restraint factor. Refer to Code section A.3, A.5 and Figure A.3
ground = slab type. The field is blank for "wall or suspended slab". Refer to Code section A.3 and Figure
A.2.

5.2.5.7 BS8007 - Results summary

The program displays results for all elements according to the options specified. The results are displayed
separately for each face (+x3/-x3) and each direction (X/Y). For example:

where:
Reinforcement= diameter and spacing of current reinforcement. In the above example, the reinforcement
is governed by the moments and forces in the element and is greater than the reinforcement
required to limit the crack widths to the allowable value.
Crack width = the crack width corresponding to the current reinforcement.
Max. spacing = the spacing for the current diameter that limits the crack width to the allowable value.

Version 12.0 5-23 12/05

STRAP
5.2.5.8 Detailed results

The program displays detailed calculations for a selected element. The results are displayed separately for
each face (+x3/-x3) and each direction (X/Y). For example:

where:
Mx, Fx = factored moment and force corresponding to the relevant face/direction
As req'd = reinforcement area required to satisfy moment and force requirements. Refer to Appendix A5 -
Reinforcement - method of calculation for more details
Provided = diameter and spacing (f16@42 cm in above example) of reinforcement provided and
corresponding area
Rhocrit = ρcrit = critical (minimum) ratio of steel to the gross area of the concrete section. Refer to Code
section A.2.
Zone ht. = Height of 'service zone'. Refer to Code section A.2 and Figures A.1, A2.
Asmin = As calculated from ρcrit and zone height
Smax = likely maximum spacing of cracks (Code section A.3)
Wmax = estimated maximum crack width (Code section A.3)
Service = service (unfactored) moment and force corresponding to the relevant face/direction
reinf at .. = reinforcement at the opposite face in the same direction.

Referring to Appendix B:
Acr = distance from pt. considered to nearest longitudinal bar
Cover = cmin = cover to tension steel
H = overall depth of the member
x = depth of the neutral axis
ε1 = strain at the level considered
ε2 = strain due to stiffening effect
εm = average strain = ε1- ε2
Fs = service stress in steel. Refer to Code section 3.2.2(c) and Table 3.1.
Fc = service stress in concrete
W = design surface crack width

Version 12.0 5-24 12/05

STRAP
5.3 Punching / Average moments
Calculate:
• punching shear stresses
• average moments at supports
The column location selection is common to both options.

5.3.1 Select nodes

Select the location of columns where punching stresses or average moments are to be calculated (the selection
is common to both options):

Select the global Height direction. The program will identify element surfaces perpendicular to this direction
and all nodes in these surfaces with restraints or nodes that have beams parallel to the height axis connected
to them. Only these nodes may be selected:
Automatic selection of nodes
The program will select all of the nodes described above
Select the nodes manually
Select the nodes using the standard Node selection option; only the nodes described above may be
selected.

Note:
• When a column is defined using this option, the program calculates the default column type
(Centre/Edge/Corner) and the default column dimensions. These default values can be revised by the user
using the other options in this menu. Therefore, the program does not compare the column punching data
with the current model geometry. If the relevant data is subsequently revised in STRAP geometry (column
dimensions, slab edge location, etc.), the column locations for the punching calculation must be selected
again.

Version 12.0 5-25 12/05

STRAP
When some or all of the nodes you have selected already have columns defined at their location, the program
displays the following menu:

Redefine - The program will recreate the columns and assign the default parameters and dimensions
to them; all user-defined parameters and dimensions will be erased.
Skip defined - The program will create columns only at new locations; the data for existing columns will
not be revised.

5.3.2 Punching

5.3.2.1 General

The program calculates the punching shear stress in the slab elements at all column locations according to the
Code requirements and compares it to the allowable shear stress. If the actual stress exceeds the allowable,
the program calculates the reinforcement required.

Note:
• all columns must be parallel to a global axis - the "height" axis
• when exterior columns extend beyond the edge of the slab, the program extends the slab to the exterior face
of the columns when calculating the shear perimeter

• The program calculates the shear force at the column by summing the corner forces at the support node -
Figure (a). If rigid links (all directions) were defined at the nodes adjacent to the support to model the
column - Figure (b), the program sums the corner forces of all elements attached to the linked nodes:

• The program calculates the effective punching shear at the first punching perimeter only (unless a column
head is defined) and uses this shear value to compute the distance required for the reinforcement. This is
a conservative approach.

Version 12.0 5-26 12/05

STRAP
• The program calculates the required punching shear reinforcement:

Note:
- The area displayed is the total area of all the links (1 to 4 in
the figure above) equidistant from the columns, assuming a
spacing of d/2.
- Distance is measured from the column face; if a column
head is defined, the distance is measured from the edge of
the head.

5.3.2.2 Punching - single column data/results

Display/revise the punching data and display shear stress results for a single column.

Note:
• the punching data for several columns can be revised simultaneously by selecting the Punching parameters
for selected nodes option
• the results for all columns can be displayed by selecting the Display punching result and data table option
• The results are compatible with the currently displayed data. Revise the data and click Recompute to
recalculate.

Column data
Define the column size. The program identifies the column shape and dimensions from the model geometry,
if possible. The dimensions and orientation may be revised.

Note:
• the dimension B,H are relative to the global axes displayed at the bottom of the group box (note that the
column may be rotated about these axis if a "Beta" angle was defined in geometry or Angle is defined in
this option).

Version 12.0 5-27 12/05

STRAP
• The Other shape assumes a rectangular column when calculating Veffective, but unlike Rectangular,
it allows the Full contour length to be revised. Note that if Other is selected for an edge/corner column,
the Full contour length must be defined as if the column is Centre; the program automatically calculates
the effective perimeter from the full perimeter length
• The Angle value allows the column to be rotated about its axis. The program initially displays the "Beta"
angle defined in geometry (default=0); a positive angle is counter-clockwise. The axes rotate with the
section and the B,H values must be defined accordingly:

The program modifies the M1, M2 moment values required to calculate the effective punching stress
according to the angle value.

Slab data

Define the slab and column head dimensions:

Note:
• the default value for the effective depth (thickness - cover) is calculated from the element thickness adjacent
to the column and the cover value defined in Punching parameters.
• the column head dimensions B,H are relative to the same global axes and the column B,H dimensions
(displayed at the bottom of the "Column size" group box). Column heads are rotated with the column.
• the program does not identify column heads defined in STRAP geometry by thicker elements adjacent to
the column. In such cases, define the panel dimensions and revise the effective depth to (t2 - cover)
• if a column head is defined, the program checks for the critical shear stress in both the head area and the
surrounding slab.

Refer also to Punching - general

Contour data
Define the column type - Centre, edge or corner - and the distance from the column centre to the slab edge.
• The program uses the data to calculate the Full contour length at the top of the group box and the Contour
length in the Results box.
• The side (Left/right/top/bottom) is important for Edge columns in certain codes where the sign of the
moment influences the value of the effective shear
• the distance from the column centre to the slab edge is used to calculate the Effective contour perimeter.

Version 12.0 5-28 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The initial column location type and edge distance are taken from the STRAP geometry. By default, the
program assumes that all columns are Center, except in the following cases:

and similarly for Corner columns.

Note that when exterior columns extend beyond the edge of the slab, the program extends the slab to the
exterior face of the columns when calculating the shear perimeter (refer to Punching - General)
• the effective contour length when openings are present may be reduced by a Factor. (Factor = 0.1 will
reduce the contour length by 10%).
• The Full contour length is always calculated automatically assuming that the column is "Centre" and may
not be revised unless the column type is Other. The effective contour length is displayed in the Results box.
• If Other is selected for an edge/corner column, the Full contour length must be defined as if the column
is Centre; the program automatically calculates the effective perimeter from the full perimeter length
• If the perimeter with four lines intersects an edge that is not parallel to a global axis, the program assumes
that the column is "Centre" and automatically calculates the reduction factor required to reduce the contour
length.

Refer also to Punching - general

Results

This box displays a result summary for the current column (data items may vary according to Code):
Contour length - the effective contour length used to calculate the punching stress, after all reductions,
etc.
Critical comb - the design combination or load case
Shear force - sum of the corner forces (refer to Punching - general)
M1/M2/M3 - the moments about the relevant global axes. MB, MH are displayed if the column is
rotated.
Veffective - the effective shear force used to calculate the punching shear stress, according to the
relevant Code clauses. Veffective = f(V,M)
Shear stress - the punching shear stress
Concrete cap. - the punching shear capacity, assuming no reinforcement

The program displays the calculation status:

Shear stress is OK - The shear stress is less than the capacity and no additional reinforcement is
required
Reinforcement needed - The shear stress exceeds the capacity and reinforcement is needed. The
required area and location are displayed.
Shear exceeds allowable - the Shear stress exceeds the maximum allowable shear stress; the slab
thickness must be revised.

Version 12.0 5-29 12/05

STRAP
Recompute
Click this button to recalculate the punching stresses and reinforcement.

Note that the appearance of the button indicates the status of the calculation:

5.3.2.3 Punching default parameters

Define the default punching design parameters for all locations. Note that cover and reinforcement percentage
may be modified for individual column by selecting the Punching parameters for selected nodes option.

Reinforcement angle
Specify the angle of the punching shear reinforcement (links/stirrups) - 45, 60 or 90 degrees.

Reinforcement percentage
The allowable punching stress is generally a function of the longitudinal slab reinforcement. Enter an average
reinforcement percentage = 100*(As/bd) %. Refer to design assumptions.

Combinations/loads
The punching combination calculates the maximum punching shear stress for selected load CASES or
COMBINATIONS.
• Select Load cases or Combinations (if defined)
• Click on any case/combination in the list box to "Deactivate" it or reactivate

Version 12.0 5-30 12/05

STRAP
5.3.2.4 Punching parameters - selected nodes

Punching data and parameters may be revised simultaneously for several columns. Select one of the options
from the following menu, define the revised data and then select the columns using the standard Node selection
options.

The options are identical to the ones in Display/edit single column punching and
in Punching parameters.

5.3.2.5 Punching - results and data table

Display the punching data and results for all (displayed) columns for the critical case/combination or a selected
case/combination:

• Select the case/combination (maximum or specified). Note that results may be displayed for all column
locations or only those currently displayed on the screen

• the program displays the results and data table. For example:

Version 12.0 5-31 12/05

STRAP
where:
- U = effective contour length
- column location: Centre/corner/edge
R = right; L = left; T = top; B = bottom
- Conc. capacity:
* indicates the reinforcement is required; the area is displayed below the stress capacity
** indicates that the stress exceeds the maximum allowable (i.e. the slab thickness must be increased);
the max. allowable stress is displayed below the stress capacity.

5.3.3 Average moments

Finite element analysis usually gives exaggerated moment values at support nodes because the support is
represented by a perpendicular line element with a zero dimension. In theory, a zero dimension support
generates an infinite moment.

Use this option to 'average' the moments adjacent to the supports. The averaged values will be used for all
output options, including "Sum results over a strip ..."

• Define a rectangular area adjacent to support nodes (select in this option or the Punching option)
• the Rectangle dimensions and the averaged moments can be displayed using the Display average
moments table option. Note that the averaged moments will also be displayed by all the graphic and
tabular output options.

For a detailed explanation and an example, refer to Results along a Line - General.

5.3.3.1 Rectangle size

Define the area over which the program will average the results:
• select the column locations; note that the Punching and Average options use the same selected columns,
i.e. any columns specified for punching will automatically be used for the Average option.
- if no columns have been selected the program will display the Punching column selection menu,
- otherwise, select individual columns using the standard node selection option
Note that only nodes with perpendicular beams or restraints can be selected

• Define the dimensions for the selected columns:

Note :
• set Hatch rectangles for average to display the defined areas on the screen
• do not define overlapping rectangles; unexpected results may be displayed
• the global directions corresponding to DX and DY depend on the direction specified for the "Height axis":
- height axis = X3: DX is parallel to X3; DY is parallel to X3
- height axis = X2: DX is parallel to X3; DY is parallel to X1
- height axis = X1: DX is parallel to X2; DY is parallel to X3

Version 12.0 5-32 12/05

STRAP
5.3.3.2 Average moments - Tables

Display the Rectangle dimensions and the averaged moment values for each load case. Note that the averaged
moments will also be displayed by all the graphic and tabular output options.

Note:
• the global directions corresponding to DX and DY depend on the direction specified for the "Height axis":
- height axis = X3: DX is parallel to X3; DY is parallel to X3
- height axis = X2: DX is parallel to X3; DY is parallel to X1
- height axis = X1: DX is parallel to X2; DY is parallel to X3

For a detailed explanation and an example, refer to Results along a Line - General.

5.3.3.3 Average moments - Hatch

set Hatch rectangles for average to display the defined areas on the screen.

Version 12.0 5-33 12/05

STRAP
5.4 Graphic results
All result types - moments, shear and axial forces, stresses and deflections - for beam elements and finite
elements may be displayed graphically on the screen.

When Display types is selected in the menu, the following options are available:

For:
• Beam result diagram - Refer to 5.4.1
• Results at element centers - Refer to 5.4.2.1
• Element results contour map - Refer to 5.4.2.1
• Element results along a line - Refer to 5.4.2.1
• Displacements - Refer to 5.4.3
• Reactions - Refer to 5.4.4
• Write beam results - Refer to 5.4.5
• BS8007 results - Refer to 5.4.6
• Solid elements - Refer to 5.4.7
• Wall elements - Refer to 5.4.8

Note : the following terminology is used throughout the graphic results module:

Load cases defined in “Loads” (prior to solving the model). Note

Load CASES that some of these cases may be in fact “Combined load cases” but
are still referred to as CASES.

Combinations of load cases defined after solving the model using

Load COMBINATIONS
the “Combinations” option

Version 12.0 5-34 12/05

STRAP
5.4.1 Graphic Results - Beams

When Beam result diagram is selected as the result type, the following menu is displayed.

Result Types:
All result types may be displayed on the screen.
Axial = the axial force acting on the beam.
M2 = moments and shear about the local x2 axis.
M3 = moments and shear about the local x3 axis.
Torsion = the torsion moment about the local x1 axis.
V2 = shear parallel to the local x2 axis
V3 = shear parallel to the local x3 axis

Load Case:
Select the load case or load combination to be displayed. You may select a single load case or combination
or an envelope of maximum/minimum results for all of the load cases / combinations.

Select one of the following options and then select the case/combination in the list box.
Load case
The program displays a list of the load cases in the box at the centre; select one.
Combination
The program displays a list of the combinations in the box at the centre; select one.
Envelope
Select one of the following options in the box at the centre:

The program searches all load cases/combinations for the maximum/minimum results.

Version 12.0 5-35 12/05

STRAP
The following is an example of an envelope for bending moments:

Maximum result will be scaled as:

The bending moment diagrams, deflections, etc. are displayed relative to a scale chosen as follows:

The program searches for the maximum result in the plot area and plots it on the screen as the dimension listed
above - the default value is 1.5 cm (0.6 in.). All other results are plotted in proportion to this value.

Move the into the text box, type a new dimension in cm. and press [Enter].

Example: bending moment diagram:

• maximum moment = 12 kN m is drawn as 1.5 cm. on plotted diagram;
• Moment = 4 kN m will be drawn as 0.5 cm.

Display only values greater than:

For clarity, part of the numerical values may be deleted from screen (the entire geometry and result diagram
will be plotted).

All values less than a given fraction (default = 0.5) of the maximum result will not be displayed.

Move the into the text box, type a new percentage and press [Enter].

Example:
Maximum bending moment = 12 kN m and fraction = 0.5 : Only numbers greater than 6 kN m will be displayed
on the screen.

Display the result diagram in:

Screen plane
The result diagram is plotted on the screen plane without considering the direction of the local axis of the
beam. This is the default option.
Result plane
The result diagram is plotted on the relevant beam local axis. If the local axis is perpendicular to the screen,
the results diagram will appear as a line.

Hatch the result diagrams:

Set the box to to hatch the diagram. For example:

Version 12.0 5-36 12/05

STRAP
5.4.2 Graphic Results - Finite Elements

When one of the Element result options is selected as the result type, the following menu is displayed.

Select:

Display type:
To display a contour map, results along specified lines or results written at element centres. Refer to 5.4.2.1.

Result type:
To select the result type - moment, shear, etc. - to be displayed. Refer to 5.4.2.2.

Load case:
To select a load case, combination or load case/combination envelope. Refer to 5.4.2.3.

Parameters:
To set the specific display parameters for the result type selected. Parameters options vary according to the
type selected. Refer to 5.4.2.4.

Version 12.0 5-37 12/05

STRAP
5.4.2.1 Display types

Results at Element Centres

To display the model geometry with the numerical value of the result written at the centre of each element. This
option superimposes the tabular results at the element centre on the geometry display. The values are the
same as those displayed in the tables.

For example:

Note:
• Results are displayed according to the Default element result coordinate system,
unless the result system was revised for specific elements ("Options"/"Element
results coord. system" in Menu bar)
• the program does not change the sign of the results, even if the directions of
the local axes are inconsistent.
• local stress or moment concentrations at element corners, e.g. from a joint load
applied at a node or a support reaction, are not displayed. Display Contour map
or Results Along a Line for a more complete picture.

Result Contour Map

To display the model geometry with a contour map of the results superimposed. Each line of the contour map
gives the location of a specified value of the result. For example:

This option creates a contour plot from the element centre and corner results. In
order to produce smooth and continuous contours, the program averages the
exact corner results from all the elements connected to a particular node, as well
as along the edges of two adjacent elements.

Referring to the explanation for Results along a Line it is obvious that this
averaging of results may lead to a discrepancy between the corner results from
the tables and the contour map.

Results are displayed according to the Default element result coordinate system,
unless the result system was revised for specific elements ("Options"/"Element
results coord. system" in Menu bar)

• Space models:
*** WARNING ***
The local x3 axis direction is not reversed as in plane models. If the x3 axes of adjacent elements are in
opposite directions, the sign of the results will be inconsistent and their interpolation over the element
surface will be incorrect.

Note:
• Results are not averaged along a line where two planes meet, e.g. a wall is connected to a slab (results are
averaged when the angle between the element planes in less than 10°)
• Stresses and reinforcement area results are NOT averaged along a line where two property groups meet,
i.e. at locations where the element thickness changes.
• It is obvious that the averaging of results will create a discrepancy between the corner results in the tables
and the results at element corners in the contour map. Refer also to the explanation for Results along a Line.
• Results are displayed according to the Default element result coordinate system, unless the result system
was revised for specific elements ("Options"/"Element results coord. system" in Menu bar)
• For reinforcement by diameter and spacing, a uniform steel area is calculated for each element according
to the maximum area required in the element, i.e. only one colour is displayed in each element.

Version 12.0 5-38 12/05

STRAP
Results along a line
To display the results plotted along a section through the model. For example:

This option calculates the results at all points along any line arbitrarily drawn through
the model, using the linear stress distribution assumed in each element. Therefore,
this option will show a local stress or moment concentrations at element corners and
the results correspond to those in the tables.

If a section is plotted along an element boundary, the program uses the results of
one of the adjacent elements and does not average the values of all the adjacent
elements.

The user selects the plot of the result type along the line or perpendicular to the
line.

The result coordinate axes are defined as follows:

• X always refers to the axis along the line of the section.
• Y always refers to the axis perpendicular to X (in the element plane).
• Z axis is perpendicular to the plane of the element:
- Plane models:
The positive direction of the Z axis of all elements is the positive direction of the global X3 axis, i.e. if the
local x3 axis of adjacent elements point in opposite directions, the result diagram will still be continuous.
- Space models:
The positive direction of the Z axis of each element is the positive direction of the local x3 axis of the
element; if the local x3 axis of adjacent elements point in opposite directions, the result diagram will not
be continuous.

The results are drawn 'above' and 'below' the line as follows:
• stresses: compression stresses are negative and are drawn below the line
• moments: moments are positive if they create compression ‘above’ the element and are drawn below the
line

The 'above' side is always to the left of the line when looking in its positive direction:
The positive direction is determined as follows:
• line parallel to a global axis (within 5° of the axis):
the positive direction of the axis
• plane model - line defined by 2 points:
from the 1st point to the 2nd point
• space model - general case:
in the general direction of +X1, except -
- if perpendicular to X1: in the general direction of +X2
- if perpendicular to X1-X2: in the general direction of +X3

Note that while the stress distribution within each element is

assumed linear, the actual stress distribution is usually non-
linear. This discrepancy results in discontinuities in the result
diagram as shown.

Using a finer mesh in areas where the slope of the result

diagram varies significantly will improve the accuracy of the
results. An indication of the inaccuracy can be obtained by
comparing results at the same node for adjacent elements -
theoretically they should be identical but in general they differ.

Version 12.0 5-39 12/05

STRAP
In general, the program calculates the results at any point on the surface of a rectangular element as follows:
• Each element internally consists of 4 triangular elements; the program calculates results at the centre of the
rectangle and at the centre-of-gravity of each triangle, i.e., results are available at the 4 corners and 5
internal points:

The program can linearly interpolate results along any of the lines shown in the figure.

• when the user defines a section line cutting through the element, the program
calculates the result values at the intersection points of the section line with the internal
lines, for example:

• If the "Average moment" option is selected, the program assigns the Average moment
value to any of the 9 result points that lie within the rectangle defined by the user. The
program then interpolates and draws the moment diagram as explained above. For
example:

Note that in section B, the "average moment" value is

drawn only at point d because the section line intersects
only one other internal line, at the bottom-right corner.

Version 12.0 5-40 12/05

STRAP
5.4.2.2 Result Types

Select the result type to be displayed on the screen.

Moments, forces and stresses

The definition of X and Y varies with the result type selected - Results at element centres, Contour map or
Results along a line. Refer to 5.4.2.1.

Space models: stress results may be displayed on the upper or lower surface

Refer also to 5.5.8.2 - Sign Conventions - Elements.

Slab reinforcement area

To calculate the area of reinforcement required for bending moment and axial force - top and bottom - in both
directions.

Version 12.0 5-41 12/05

STRAP

Note:
• the program calculates compression reinforcement if the moment exceeds the Code limit for tension
reinforcement
• the program checks minimum reinforcement percentages only if the “Diameter and spacing” option
is selected
• the program does not check maximum reinforcement percentages

For more details, refer to:

• Appendix A5 - Reinforcement - method of calculation.
• 5.8 - Wood and Armer Equations

Specify the following options:

• Code:
Select the design code. If the Code you require does not appear in the list, please contact your STRAP
dealer.

• Nominal concrete strength:

- BS8110 - fcu
- ACI318-02 - f'c
- Eurocode 2 - fck
- CSA A23.3 - f'c, etc.

• Nominal steel strength:

- BS8110 - fy
- ACI318-02 - fy
- Eurocode 2 - fyd
- CSA A23.3 - fy, etc.

• Cover:
Specify the gross cover (to centre-of-gravity of the reinforcement) according to the displayed units.

• Use Wood & Armer moments:

Use the Wood & Armer design moments to calculate the reinforcement area
Use the STRAP Mx and My moments to calculate the reinforcement area (ignore the influence of Mxy)

• Ignore in-plane forces (Space frame models only):

Calculate the reinforcement area required for the Mx. My, Mxy moments only and ignore the Fx, Fy, Fxy
forces .

Deflection
** for Contour map only:
• Deflection - absolute value
The program displays the vector sum of the deflections in the three global directions, i.e.
√(δX1²+δX2²+δ X3²).
• Deflection - perp to element
The program displays the deflection perpendicular to the element (including the corner node deflections).

Version 12.0 5-42 12/05

STRAP
5.4.2.3 Load cases

Select the load case or load combination to be displayed. You may select a single load case or combination
or an envelope of maximum/minimum results for all of the load cases / combinations.

Select one of the following options and then select the case/combination in the list box.
Load case
The program displays a list of the load cases in the box at the centre; select one.
Combination
The program displays a list of the combinations in the box at the centre; select one.
Envelope
For all element result types, select a "maximum" result envelope or a "minimum" result envelope; the
program cannot display maximum and minimum results simultaneously.

• Element Centre:
maximum = largest positive result or smallest negative result
minimum = largest negative result or smallest positive result
• Contour Map:
maximum = positive results only
minimum = negative results only
• Results along a line:
maximum = largest positive result or smallest negative result
minimum = largest negative result or smallest positive result

5.4.2.4 Parameters

• Results at Element Centres

Display only values greater than:

For clarity, part of the numerical values may be deleted from screen (the entire geometry and result diagram
will be plotted).

All values less than a given fraction (default = 0.5) of the maximum result will not be displayed.

Example: Maximum bending moment = 12 kN m and fraction = 0.5 : Only numbers greater than 6 kN m
will be displayed on the screen.

Version 12.0 5-43 12/05

STRAP
• Contour Map

Fill Contour Regions with Colour:

Set the box to to fill the areas between contour lines with colour. The colour intensity will reflect the
magnitude of the result values.

No. of Contour Lines:

A maximum of 20 contour lines can be specified.
The program scans the results to find the
maximum and minimum values, and divides the
resulting range of results into equally spaced steps
for contour lines. These are the default values for
the contour lines and initially "Equally spaced" is
displayed for this option.

The values may be revised. For example, if twelve

contour lines were specified, the program displays
a table:
To revise a value:
- using the mouse/arrow keys highlight the line
displayed the contour line to be revised; click
the mouse.
- type in the new value in the Value text box.
- repeat for additional contour lines.
- click to end revisions.

Note that program will automatically recalculate the remaining contour line values so that the steps between
defined values are equally spaced.

Principal direction arrows

Draw vectors representing the maximum/minimum principal stresses at the centre of each element. For
example:

The direction of the vector is in the direction of the "Angle" in the tabular
results (refer to Sign convention - elements) and the length is proportional
to the maximum value of principal stress in the displayed elements.

Version 12.0 5-44 12/05

STRAP
• Results along a line

Define section line:

Plot any of the results types along a section line drawn through the model in any direction.
- plane models: the section is defined by a line drawn in any direction on the surface of the model.
- space models: the section is defined by the intersection of a plane drawn in any direction and the model
surface.

Plane models: Space models:

Define by 2 points:

Use this option to draw a section in any arbitrary direction in a plane model.

- Parallel to X1-X3/X2-X3/X1-X2:
Select the global plane and then define the coordinate on the perpendicular global axis.

- Define by plane:
In space models, locate the section line by three points which define a plane cutting through the model.
If the display plane is parallel to one of the Global Planes, the program assumes that the section plane
is perpendicular to the Global Plane and requests two pints only.

Delete section line

Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight the section line to be deleted with the rectangular blip ; click the
mouse.

Move a section line

- move the adjacent to the centre of the section line so that it is highlighted with a ; click the mouse
- move the to the new location of the section line.

Version 12.0 5-45 12/05

STRAP
Sum results across strip
Display the TOTAL result across the width of a strip defined along the section line.

5.4.3 Displacements

The program displays the numerical value of the deflection in the form ddd / 10n, where ddd is written adjacent
to the beam and the factor 10n appears at the bottom of the screen.

Examples:
• 51 written adjacent to the element; Values are * 10^3 at the bottom of the screen.
deflection = 51/1000 = 0.051 (current length units).
• 272 written adjacent to the element; Values are * 10^2 at the bottom of the screen.
deflection = 272/100 = 2.72 (current length units).

Note: only flexural deflections are displayed; shear deflections are not displayed.

Animate
Set this option to to animate the deflections.
The model will deflect to its full displacement in five equal steps during the time = interval specified and will
continue until the End animation button at the bottom of the screen is clicked.

Version 12.0 5-46 12/05

STRAP
Display type
This option is relevant for beam elements only.
• Node and beam deflections
The complete deflected structure will be plotted. (i.e. the deflections of the two following options are
combined).
• Node deflections
The program will plot the nodes in their deflected location and connect them with straight lines representing
the beams. This is the fastest option.
• Beam deflections
Only deflections due to beam loads are plotted; the beam ends remain at their original locations.

Note:
• if envelope is selected, only Node deflections may be displayed

Write Values
• Total of all directions
The program will display only the vector sum of the deflections in the three global directions, i.e.
√(δX1²+δX2²+δX3²).
• Global X1/X2/X3 directions
Display the deflection value for one of the global directions only.

5.4.4 Reactions

To display reactions at the supports. Select one of the following, where:

• Envelope:
The program calculates the maximum positive and negative reactions:
- Force reactions = the absolute maximum of the "positive" and
"negative" force reactions.
- Positive reactions = the maximum positive value is displayed;
nothing is displayed if all values are negative
- Negative reactions = the maximum negative value is displayed;
nothing is displayed if all values are positive.
- X1/X2/X3 reactions = the same as "Force reactions", but in the specified direction only
- Moment reactons = the absolute maximum moment
• Load case/combination
All force options display the same values

Spring reaction stresses = the absolute maximum soil pressure under nodes with springs

Refer to 5.4.1 - Graphic results - beams for information on the display options.

Version 12.0 5-47 12/05

STRAP
5.4.5 Write beam results

Write the value of a selected result adjacent to the beam. Note that the value will be
written at the midpoint of the beam span (even if you select the result at the beam end).

Select the beam result to be written:

Version 12.0 5-48 12/05

STRAP
5.4.6 Graphic results - BS8007

Display crack widths for current reinforcement or reinforcement required to limit crack widths to a specified
value according to British Standard BS8007.

For a detailed explanation on BS8007 options, refer to 5.2.5.

Select the display options:

Result type
Crack width results may be displayed for either direction and for either face.
Select one of the following combinations:

Note:
• X/Y refers to the Element result coordinate system
• +x3/-x3 refers to the local element coordinate system

BS8007 - Display parameters

Specify result type to be displayed and colour coding.

Colour coding:
by reinforcement
The elements are filled with colour according to reinforcement group (diameter and spacing)
by crack width
The elements are filled with colour according to crack width values.

Result types (may be displayed simultaneously):

cracks
Display crack width values at the element centre. Small values may be removed from the display by
entering a minimum display width in the adjacent text box.
diameter and spacing
Display diameter and spacing values at the element centre

Version 12.0 5-49 12/05

STRAP
For example:

5.4.7 Solid elements

Select one of the following result types:

The contour map for solid elements displays the stresses on the surface of the elements. The surface may be
either planar or cylindrical and is defined by pointing to three nodes.

Solids - results on plane

Display a contour map of stresses on a plane defined by three nodes. The program identifies all element
surfaces lying on the plane and draws the contour map on them.
Note that the surface must lie on the plane. No results will be drawn if the plane cuts through the element.

Solids - results on cylinder

Display a contour map of stresses on the surface of a cylinder defined
by three nodes:
The program identifies all element surfaces perpendicular to the
perimeter of the circle and draws the contour map on them.
Note that the surface must lie on the cylinder defined by the projection
of the circle. No results will be drawn if the cylinder cuts through the
element.

Version 12.0 5-50 12/05

STRAP
Previous Surface
Display the results on the previously defined surface.

Solids - tolerance
All corner nodes of the surface must be located at a distance less than the "tolerance" from the plane/cylinder
for the contour map to be drawn on it.

The tolerance is defined according to the model geometry units.

5.4.8 Wall elements

Result types

All result types may be displayed on the screen.

Axial = the axial force acting on the wall
Moment = moments about the local x3 axis.
Mperp = moments about the local x2 axis.
Torsion = the torsion moment about the local x1 axis.
Shear = shear parallel to the local x2 axis
Sperp = shear parallel to the local x3 axis

Note:
• results for the total wall may be displayed in tabular form only.

Average results

Version 12.0 5-51 12/05

STRAP
5.5 Results - Tables
The main features of the tabular results module are:
• results sorted by elements/nodes or load cases
• search for maximum/minimum results per element or node over all load cases or combinations.
• selected output.

The program displays all results table with the following header:

Click the Goto option to skip directly to the display of a specific node/beam/element:

Type in the node/beam/element number and press [Enter] or click the button.

The following terminology is used throughout the output modules:

Load cases defined in “Loads” (prior to solving the model). Note

Load CASES that some of these cases may be in fact “Combined load cases” but
are still referred to as CASES.

Combinations of load cases defined after solving the model using

Load COMBINATIONS
the “Combinations” option

Version 12.0 5-52 12/05

STRAP
The program displays the following menu;

For “Print”:

• add drawings created with the Save for “print/edit drawing” option.

Note:
• results are displayed according to the Default element result coordinate system, unless the result system
was revised for specific elements 5.20.3 - ("Options"/"Element results coord. system" in Menu bar)
• For the interpretation of the results described in this section refer to 5.40.6 - Sign conventions.

5.5.1 Options

Deactivate load cases/combinations

Display the tabular results either for load cases or load combinations (if defined).

If you want the program to ignore one of the load cases/combinations, you may temporarily deactivate it using
this option. The load case/combination is not deleted, and it may be reactivated at any time.

Example:The following load combinations were defined:

The search for the maximum/minimum results should be
carried out on load combinations 1,2 and 4 only; load
combination 3 must be deactivated:
• move the anywhere in line 3 and click the mouse.
Inactive will be displayed in the "Deactivated" column.
• Repeat for other load combinations when required;
click to return when all combinations have been
selected.
• To reactivate a combination, click again with the
mouse; the Inactive will be removed.

Version 12.0 5-53 12/05

STRAP
Display options
Sort results by load
The program displays the results for load combinations (or load cases, if no combinations were defined).
Sort results by element/node
In this option, the results for all load combinations (cases) for a specific element/node are displayed together
in one table.

Display maximum results only

To display only the maximum results for each node/beam/element calculated over all of the load combinations
(cases). At the end of the table the program will display the overall maximum/minimum results for all the
nodes/beams/elements.

Note that the results are displayed only for the nodes/beams/elements currently displayed on the screen. If you
want to view the overall maximum results for the entire model, select the following option.

Maximum includes undisplayed beams:

For maximum results (at end of tables, or "Display maximum results only"):
The program will search the beams/elements in the ENTIRE model for the maximum results.
The program will search only the beams/elements DISPLAYED on the screen for the maximum results.

Display results for elements not on screen

The program by default displays the results only for nodes/beams/elements currently displayed on the screen.
To view results for all nodes/beams/elements, or to display maximum results for the entire model, turn on this
checkbox.

Display only elements of property no.:

To display only the results for beams in a specified property group. The program will also display the maximum
results for the property group.

Maximum beam results:

For "Sort results by elements/nodes":
By default ("All results") the program searches for the maximum results separately for each result type and
the maximum results for the different types may be from different combinations.

Use this option to display the maximum result of a specified type and the corresponding results FOR THE
SAME COMBINATION of all other types.

Select the specified result type:

For example, select "Max. M3 + corresponding results"

All results in the first line are from
combination 4, the combination with the
maximum M3 result. Similarly, all results
in the second line are from combination 2.

Version 12.0 5-54 12/05

STRAP
Deactivate load combinations
If you want the program to ignore one of the load combinations, you may temporarily deactivate it using this
option. The load combination definition is not deleted, and it may be reactivated at any time.

If no combinations were defined, you can instruct the program to ignore one or more of the solved load cases.

Example:The following load combinations were defined:

The search for the maximum/minimum results should be
carried out on load combinations 1,2 and 4 only; load
combination 3 must be deactivated:
• move the anywhere in line 3 and click the mouse.
Inactive will be displayed in the "Deactivated" column.
• Repeat for other load combinations when required;
click to return when all combinations have been
selected.
• To reactivate a combination, click again with the
mouse; the Inactive will be removed.
Element options
• All finite element results may be displayed in two ways:
- results at the element centre only
- results at the element centre and at the element corner nodes
It is important to display element results at the corners in models with stress concentrations at the nodes.
These concentrations are caused by loads, supports, openings, etc.
• Element stress results can be viewed either at the top (+z) plane or the bottom plane (-z) of the element.
This element is important only in space models.

Walls - average results

Version 12.0 5-55 12/05

STRAP
5.5.2 Beam results

Beams - Axial force, Moments and Shears

Display axial force, shear and moment values at both ends of beams and either the maximum value in the span
or at specified intervals - 1/2, 1/4, 1/5, 1/10 or 1/20 of the span. All results are relative to the beam local axes.

Example:

where:
Axial = axial force along beam x1 axis. For trusses, only the result at JA is displayed (the value at JB may
be different if an intermediate axial load is applied, but the result will not be displayed).
V2 = shear force parallel to the beam x2 axis
V3 = shear force parallel to the beam x3 axis
MT = torsion moment about the beam local x1 axis
M2 = bending moment about the beam local x2 axis
M3 = bending moment about the beam local x3 axis

Refer also to 5.5.8.1 - Sign conventions - beams.

If the End results and max in span option is selected, the display is:

where:
FR = fraction of span length (from JA) at which the maximum intermediate moment occurs.

Note:
• The intermediate moments are calculated at 1/20 intervals and at concentrated load locations.
• The sign of the intermediate moment and shear is relative to the sign at JA.
• The intermediate shear value displayed is at the same point as the maximum moment.
• An intermediate value is displayed only if the maximum positive moment or maximum negative moment are
not at the end supports.
• All intermediate values displayed are included in the following MAX / MIN value searches.
When calculating the MAX/MIN results, the program reverses the sign of the moments at JB:

Referring to 5.5.8.1 - Sign Conventions - beams, and to the example in the following figure, it is apparent that
engineering 'negative' moments at the two ends of the beam have opposite signs in the table.

Version 12.0 5-56 12/05

STRAP
To ensure consistency when calculating the 'maximum/minimum' results, the program reverses the sign of the
moment at JB. Therefore, the moment results for the beam in the above Figure are displayed as:

Beam Axial Stresses

Display the beam stresses due to axial forces only, based on the Buckling parameters (5.2.3).

Note that the use of this option requires that the moments-of-inertia for all relevant beam elements be entered
during the geometry definition.
• BS 449 and AISC - ASD Codes:
The max./min. stresses are given for each member along with the calculated allowable stresses.

Note that the maximum stress is the greatest tension stress amongst all the loading combinations. If the
beam is always in compression, the value represents the smallest compression stress.

Similarly, the minimum stress is the largest compression stress amongst all of the combinations, or the
smallest tension stress when there is no compression.

Example:

where:
AXIAL P = The axial force in the beam.
P/A = The axial stress corresponding to that force.
ALLOW. STRESS = The allowable compression stress about the two buckling axes. For compression, the
value is a function of the slenderness of the beam.
% OF ALLOW = The ratio of the actual stress to the allowable. Note that if the ratio exceeds 100%,
a ** flag is added to the end of the line.

• German DIN Code:

The maximum and minimum stresses are given for each member.

Note that the maximum stress is the greatest tension stress amongst all the loading combinations. If the
beam is always in compression, the value represents the smallest compression stress.

Similarly, the minimum stress is the largest compression stress amongst all of the combinations, or the
smallest tension stress when there is no compression.

Version 12.0 5-57 12/05

STRAP
Example:

where:
AXIAL P = The axial force in the beam.
P/A = The axial stress corresponding to that force.
P/A * OMEGA = The actual axial stress multiplied by the corresponding omega factor. If the beam is in
tension, omega = 1. If this stress exceeds the allowable, a ** flag is displayed at the end
of the line.

Span Deflections
Display the maximum span deflection. The deflection is relative to the final location of the nodes, not the joint
coordinates. For example:

For beam 6:

Version 12.0 5-58 12/05

STRAP
5.5.3 Element results

Element Moments, forces, stresses

• Stresses:
±SX = stress in element result X direction on the ±Z surface.
±SY = stress in element result Y direction on the ±Z surface.
±SXY = shear stress on ±Z surface.
• Forces, moments = stress resultants in the result coordinate system:

Note:
• the moments are per unit width, i.e. MX = 50 indicates 50 t m/m (kN m/m, ft kip/ft, etc.)
• MX is the moment in the direction of the element result X axis and not the moment about the X axis (see
Figure below). Therefore, the stress SX corresponds to the moment MX. Similarly, MY is the moment in the
direction of the element result Y axis and not the moment about the x2 axis.
• a stress distribution with tension on the +z face results in a positive bending moment; refer to 5.5.8.2 -
Element sign conventions.
• For the equations relating moments and forces to stresses, refer to Element sign conventions.

Example (moments sorted by combinations):

• Maximum values are calculated from all of the result points.

• Rot indicates the angle between the local x1 axis of the element and the result X axis is displayed in the first
line of the table.

The result axes may be defined in the Element result coordinate system option (5.20.3). If no specific axes are
defined, the program uses the default result axes, as follows:

• Plane model
The X axis is always parallel to the global X1 axis and the Y axis is always parallel to the global X2 axis.

If the program discovers that the direction of the local x3 axis of an element is opposite to the direction of
the global X3 axis, it reverses the sign of the results for that element.

• Space model
Elements parallel to the X1-X2 global plane:
X = X1 , Y = X2 Z = X3
- Elements parallel to the X1-X3 global plane:
X = X1 , Y = -X3 Z = X2
- Elements parallel to the X2-X3 global plane:
X = X2 , Y = X3 Z = X1
- Elements not parallel to a global plane:
• X = direction parallel to the line of intersection of the element plane with a plane parallel to the X1-
X3 global axis (+X in the general direction of +X1)
• Y = perpendicular to X and in the general direction of X3. (+Y in the direction of +X2)
• Z = perpendicular to the element and in the general direction of +X3

*** Warning ***

In space models the local x3 axis direction is not revised as in plane models. The sign of the results will be
inconsistent if the local x3 axes of adjacent elements point in opposite directions and their interpolation over
the element surface will be incorrect.

Version 12.0 5-59 12/05

STRAP
Solid elements – stresses

The search for the maximum/minimum results should be carried out on load combinations 1,2 and 4 only; load
combination 3 must be deactivated:
• move the anywhere in line 3 and click the mouse. Inactive will be displayed in the "Deactivated" column.
• repeat for other load combinations when required; click to return when all combinations have been
selected.
• To reactivate a combination, click again with the mouse; the Inactive will be removed.

Solid elements – principal stresses

The principal stress table displays two different cases:
• principal stresses; the stresses on the principal planes, where the shearing stresses Sxy = Syz = Szx = 0
• maximum shearing stresses

For example:

where:
• Sp1, Sp2, Sp3 = the three principal stresses
angles = angles to rotate the X1-X2-X3 global axes to the principal axes; the first angle
represents the rotation about X1, etc.
VM = Von Mises stress

The three principal stresses are determined as follows:

The three roots of this equation give the values of the three principal stresses Sp1, Sp2 and Sp3.
• Tau1, Tau2, Tau3 = maximum shearing stress
The maximum shearing stresses act on the plane bisecting the angle between the largest and smallest
principal stresses and is equal to half the difference between these two principal stresses

(Reference: "Theory of Elasticity" by Timoshenko & Goodier, 3rd Edition, p. 219-226)

Version 12.0 5-60 12/05

STRAP
Steel area
To calculate the area of reinforcement required for bending moment - top and bottom - in both directions.

Select one of the following:

Steel area
The reinforcement results will be displayed as area/unit width, e.g. mm²/m, in²/ft, etc.
The program does not check maximum reinforcement percentages

Diameter and spacing

The reinforcement results will be displayed as diameter and spacing, e.g. φ10@200, #6@10, etc.

The program requires the following parameters in order to calculate the results:
- minimum diameter
- minimum spacing
- spacing increment
The program initially tries minimum diameter with minimum spacing. If this combination is insufficient, it tries
larger diameters with the same spacing. When an adequate diameter is found, the program searches for
the maximum spacing (a multiple of the increment) with this diameter that provides sufficient area.

The program check minimum reinforcement percentage but does not check maximum reinforcement
percentages.

Note:
• the program calculates compression reinforcement if the moment exceeds the Code limit for tension
reinforcement
• a uniform steel area is calculated for each element according to the maximum area required in the element,
i.e. only one value or colour is displayed for each element.

For all other options, refer to 5.4.2.2.

For more details, refer to:

Appendix A5 - Reinforcement - method of calculation
5.8- Wood and Armer Equations

Version 12.0 5-61 12/05

STRAP
Element Corner Forces
To display the element corner forces.

These are the forces and the moments in the six degrees of freedom at each corner of an element, and
represent the 'reactions' at the element 'supports' - i.e. at the connection points to the adjacent elements.

Note that the corner forces are always relative to the global coordinate system.

Refer to 5.5.8.2 - Sign conventions - elements for more details on the sign conventions.

Concrete Design Moments

To display the reinforcement design moments for slab design - Mx* and My*. The calculations are based on
the Wood & Armer equations (refer to 5.8).

The moments are calculated separately for the top +Z and the bottom -Z surfaces. Note that +Z is referred to
as the "TOP" surface in the tables.

Example:

The angle required to rotate the element local x1 axis to the element result X axis is denoted by Rot, where
counterclockwise is positive. For element 1 in the above example:

The reinforcement coordinate system angle Alpha is listed adjacent to Rot.

The moments at the element corners may also be displayed.

Refer to 5.5.8.2 - Sign conventions - elements for more details on the sign conventions.

Element Shear Forces

To display the transverse shear forces Qx, Qy at the element centre.

• Tabular results:
The shear values are calculated from the slope of the moment diagram at the element centre only.
• Contour map:
The program calculates the corner values for Qx, Qy based on an estimated 2nd derivative of the
Mx,My,Mxy results at the centre and uses the averaged estimated values to draw the contours.

It is obvious that Qx, Qy will be less accurate than Mx, My, Mxy for the same elements because of the
inaccuracy of the corner results. The accuracy of the shear results are more sensitive to changes in the density
of the mesh.

Refer to 5.5.8.2 - Sign conventions - elements for more details on the sign conventions.

Version 12.0 5-62 12/05

STRAP
Element Principal Stresses
Display the principal max/min element stresses. The principal stresses are displayed at element centre only.

Refer to 5.5.8.2 - Sign conventions - elements for more details on the sign conventions.

5.5.4 Node Deflections and Rotations

Display the global deflections and rotations at the nodes in the model.

Example: for a model with three loading combinations:

where:
X1, X2, X3 = deflections parallel to the global axes. Positive deflections are in the positive axes directions.
X4, X5, X6 = rotations about X1, X2, X3, respectively. For the positive direction of rotation, refer to 5.5.8.1 -
Sign conventions

5.5.5 Reactions

The program sums at each node all of the applied loads and element result end forces of the attached elements
for all degrees-of-freedom. The sum for degrees-of-freedom at nodes that were not defined as restraints should
be equal to zero. The reactions are:
X1, X2, X3 = reaction force parallel to the global axes. A positive force is in the positive direction of the axis.
X4, X5, X6 = moments about X1, X2, X3, respectively. For the positive direction of the moment, refer to
5.4.7.1 - Sign conventions

The results displayed are in effect the "actions" on the support.

• Results Sorted by Loads:
The program displays the reactions only for the nodes in the current display. For example:

where:
- SUM = sum of reactions for nodes displayed in the table
- Total = The sum of the reactions for all support nodes in the model; the values should equal the sum
of the loads applied in that loading case.

Due to the limited numerical precision of computers (and particularly micro-computers), non-zero values will
occasionally appear in the Reactions for unrestrained degree-of-freedoms (i.e. nodes that were not defined
as supports). Usually, these values will be negligible in comparison to the internal forces at these degree-of-
freedoms (approximately N*10E-5, where N are the internal forces at a DOF). However in certain instances,
the numbers could be much greater.

Version 12.0 5-63 12/05

STRAP
In such cases, the user should check for the following causes:
- Singularity messages during the solution stage.
- Too large a difference between the values of the largest and smallest moment-of-inertia (or area) was
defined for the model; The ratio between the largest and smallest values should not exceed 1:10E8.
- In plate bending elements, the element thickness is large relative to the element dimensions (note that
only the Reactions are affected - moments and deflections are accurate)

• Results Sorted by Elements/Nodes

The reactions are printed only at nodes that were defined as restraints and so the inaccuracies described
above will not be apparent.

Note that the max/min reactions are the maximum and minimum numerical reactions at the supports.

5.5.6 Spring reaction stresses

Calculate the pressure under the springs, i.e. the soil pressure for elastic foundations.

The program calculates the pressure = R/A, where:

R = STRAP result reaction
K = spring constant defined in STRAP geometry
A = K/M
M = soil coefficient (subgrade modulus) defined here
Note:
• For models with rigid links with springs defined at
the slave nodes: The program sums all of the
reactions from the slave nodes at the master node
but uses the tributary area of the master node only.

5.5.7 Wall results

Wall results are displayed for each segment in a wall element, including coupling beams. For example, a wall
with two segments and a beam:

The results are displayed in the form of beam results and values are shown for each result type at the top and
bottom of the wall (along the height axis).
• Segments: The Moment and Shear values are segment major axis results; Mperp and Sperp are
the minor axis results and usually will be relatively small. Refer to Walls - sign
conventions.
• Total wall : refer to Walls - sign conventions
• Coupling beams: Results are identical to beams, where Moment = M3, Mperp = M2 and Sperp = V3

Version 12.0 5-64 12/05

STRAP
5.5.8 Tables - Sign Conventions

The tabular results use a mathematical sign convention as opposed to the standard engineering sign
conventions; the sign of the results may often be opposite to what is expected and so the user must understand
the conventions in order to correctly interpret the results.

5.5.8.1 Sign Conventions - Beams

Member results are listed at nodes JA, JB of each element. Results are relative to the local coordinate axes.

The positive sign conventions are:

• Moments: (M2, M3, MT)

The direction of a positive moment is determined by a right-hand rule. The thumb points in the positive
direction of the local axis about which the moment acts, and the other fingers all curl in the direction of the
positive moment.

In the following example engineering negative moments act at both ends of the beam, however the sign of
the moment at JA will be positive in the tables.

• Shear: (V2, V3)

A positive shear force acts in the positive direction of the local axis.

• Axial:
The sign of the axial force is positive in the +x1 direction of the beam. A positive axial force value at JA
(along with a negative value at JB) always indicates that the beam is in compression. For trusses, only the
result at JA is displayed, i.e. a positive value indicates compression! (the value at JB may be different if an
intermediate axial load is applied, but the result will not be displayed).

Version 12.0 5-65 12/05

STRAP
5.5.8.2 Sign Conventions - Quadrilateral and Triangular Elements

The results are relative to the element result coordinate system. (Refer to 5.2.3)

The forces are per unit width. i.e, MX = 50.2 means 50.2 ton/m (kN/m, kip/ft, etc.).

• STRESSES:
+SX = stress in element result X direction on the +Z surface.
+SY = stress in element result Y direction on the +Z surface.
+SXY = shear stress on +Z surface.

-SX = stress in element result X direction on the -Z surface.

-SY = stress in element result Y direction on the -Z surface.
-SXY = shear stress on -Z surface.

• FORCES= stress resultants in the result coordinate system.

The element forces are computed directly from the element stresses:

• PRINCIPAL STRESSES = principal stress at each face derived from the Mohr's circle equations:

where: MAX and MIN are the algebraic maximum and minimum, not the absolute.

S. MAX = = maximum shear

ANGLE = the amount (in degrees) the element X axis must rotate counterclockwise about the Z axis to
coincide with the principal stress axis.

Note:
- when the X axis coincides with the maximum stress axis, Y coincides with the minimum stress axis.
- MAX. SHEAR occurs on a plane offset 45° from the principal axis.
- Shear is zero in the principal stress directions.

The positive sign conventions for all stresses and forces are shown in the figures below.

• MOMENTS = Moments relative to the result coordinate system at the centre of the element.
The moments are computed directly from the stresses by:

Version 12.0 5-66 12/05

STRAP
Note:
- The sign convention for moments is illustrated in Figure (b) below: referring to the equation above for
calculating MX, it is obvious that a stress distribution with tension on the +z face results in a positive
bending moment.
- MX is the moment in the direction of the element result X axis and not the moment about the X axis (see
Figure below). Therefore, the stress SX corresponds to the moment MX. Similarly, MY is the moment
in the direction of the element result Y axis and not the moment about the Y axis.
- The moments are per unit width, i.e. MX = 50 indicates 50 t m/m (kN m/m, ft kip/ft, etc.)

The following are the positive element results sign conventions:

Referring to Figure (a) above, approximately equal and opposite forces act on opposite faces of the element.
The sign of the displayed results are for the face in the positive direction of the result axis. Therefore:
• if FX is positive, the element is in tension in the direction of X.
• if +SX is positive, the top face is in tension.
• etc.

Note:
• for graphic results, the program may modify the sign of the results in order to ensure consistency, etc.

5.5.8.3 Wall elements

Member results are listed at the top and bottom of each element segment (identified by the corner nodes).
Results are relative to the wall local coordinate axes.

The positive sign conventions are:

Version 12.0 5-67 12/05

STRAP
• Moments
The direction of a positive moment is determined by the right-hand rule.
The thumb points in the positive direction of the local axis about which
the moment acts, and the other fingers curl in the direction of the positive
moment.

In the following example the wall is in single curvature, however the sign
of the moment at the bottom will be positive in the tables.

• Shear
A positive shear force acts in the positive direction of the local axis.
• Axial
The sign of the axial force is positive in the +x1 direction of the wall. A positive axial force value at the
bottom (along with a negative value at the top) always indicates that the wall is in compression.

5.6 Single beam

To display all graphic results simultaneously for a selected beam.
• select the load case/combination and the result types to be displayed:

• select any beam, or set Display a line of beams and specify the first and last beams in a continuous
line of STRAP members
• scroll through the results. For example:

Version 12.0 5-68 12/05

STRAP

5.7 Menu bar - Files

Geometry definition:
Return to the geometry input for the current model. Refer to 2.0.

STRAP models list:

Return to the STRAP main menu (list of models). Refer to 1.8.

Steel postprocessor:
Go to the STRAP structural steel postprocessor. Refer to 7.0.

Concrete postprocessor:
Go to the STRAP reinforced (beam and column) postprocessor. Refer to 8.0.

Foundations postprocessor
Design spread footings location of STRAP supports. Refer to 5.6.1.

Print/Edit saved drawing

Refer to 1.4.11.

Copy display to clipboard

Use this option to copy the current display to the Windows "Clipboard"
in "Metafile" format . The display will be identical to that produced by
Print drawing, i.e. it will include a frame and a header.
Select one of the following metafile formats:
Metafile: WMF format
Enhanced Metafile: EMF format
Your graphics program, word processor, etc, may recognize only one of
the above formats.

Exit:
Quit STRAP and return to the Windows Program Manager screen.

Version 12.0 5-69 12/05

STRAP
5.7.1 Footing postprocessor

The STRAP footing postprocessor designs rectangular spread footings at all nodes assigned with restraints
(and springs, if specified by the user).

The postprocessor automatically retrieves from STRAP:

• the reactions for all STRAP load combinations at these nodes (force and moments)
• the column dimensions (if possible) from the section of the member attached to the node.

The postprocessor works in two modes:

All/several footings
The program automatically designs the footings for the group of supports selected. Design parameters may
be defined for the entire model. Results for the entire model are displayed in tabular form. Results for
footings previously designed with the Single footing option will not be overwritten.
Single footing
The program automatically designs the footing for the support selected. Design parameters may be revised
for the individual footing. Load cases may be added, revised or deleted. Results for the individual footing
are displayed in graphic form. Results for footings previously designed with the All/Several footing option
are overwritten.

Current results for any footing may be viewed by selecting Single footing and selecting the associated node.

Note:
• footings are assumed to be oriented according to the local x2,x3 axis of the column
• the program always transfers the column dimensions as a rectangle that bounds the actual section
dimensions. The loads are assumed to act in the center of this rectangle.
• for columns defined by properties (A,I), the program transfers zero dimensions and the postprocessor
begins the design with a default dimension that may be revised by the user.

Select the footing design parameters:

Design
Single footing
Select a node with a restraint or spring using the standard node selection option. The footing postprocessor
will allow the user to define design parameters for the footing and will calculate dimensions and
reinforcement accordingly.
Selected footings
Select several nodes with restraints or springs using the standard node selection option. Note that the
footing postprocessor will design the selected footings as a group; parameters may be defined for the entire
group but not for individual footings.

Version 12.0 5-70 12/05

STRAP

All footings
Design the footings for all nodes with restraints (or springs). Note that the footing postprocessor will design
the selected footings as a group; parameters may be defined for the entire group but not for individual
footings.

Height axis
Specify the height axis of the model.
The program will assume that the reaction parallel to this axis is the vertical load on the footing and will use the
dimensions of the beam connected to the node lying parallel to this axis (±10°) as the column dimensions for
the footing design.

Footing - distance

The program multiplies the reactions (R) by the distance and adds the resulting moments to the loads applied
to the footing.

Spring
Design footings only at nodes with STRAP restraints
Design footings only at nodes with either restraints or springs

Version 12.0 5-71 12/05

STRAP
5.8 Wood and Armer moments
The STRAP output tables display the elastic bending and torsional moments at the centre of each element. (Mx,
My and Mxy). For reinforced concrete plates, these moments must be translated into equivalent design
moments Mx* and My* which take into account not only the bending moments Mx and My but also the torsional
moment Mxy. These design moments are then used to calculate the reinforcement steel required.

The calculation of the design moments Mx* and My* is based on the Wood & Armer equations .

The postprocessor first calculates the element moments Mx, My and Mxy relative to any orthogonal coordinate
system chosen (the "result coordinate system"). The design moment calculation assumes that the
reinforcement X* axis is parallel to the X axis of the result coordinate system and that the Y* reinforcement axis
is skewed at an angle alpha (usually 90°).

A similar calculation must be carried out to derive the design forces Fx* and Fy* from the STRAP results Fx,
Fy and Fxy.

Refer also to 5.2.3 - Element coordinate systems for a more detailed explanation on the result and
reinforcement coordinate systems.

The sign convention for the design moment equations is shown in the following Figure:

Version 12.0 5-72 12/05

STRAP
The equations are:

Moments:

Version 12.0 5-73 12/05

STRAP
In-plane forces:

Combined Forces
From examination of the equations above, it is obvious that for the general case
Mx ± |Mxy| and Fx ± |Fxy|
where the worst case is used for each calculation.

When reinforcement is calculated for combined forces, four different combinations of moment and in-plane
forces must be checked to determine the worst condition, i.e.
Mx ± |Mxy| combined with Fx ± |Fxy|
For example, bottom X reinforcement:

• Moment only:
Mx + |Mxy| will always be the governing case

• Moment and in-plane force:

For a small negative moment and large tension force, tension reinforcement will be required. Mx - |Mxy|
will reduce the design negative moment and hence minimize the bottom compression stress.. Therefore,
Mx - |Mxy| (min. compression) combined with Fx + |Fxy| (max. tension) will be the worst case condition for
maximum bottom tension.

Version 12.0 5-74 12/05

STRAP

6 Dynamic analysis
6.1 Dynamic analysis - general
This dynamic analysis module analyses the modal shape of the model :
• solves for the natural frequencies and the corresponding mode shapes
• calculates the earthquake response and the resulting moments and forces in the model based on the
calculated mode shapes and Code related factors
• calculates the time history response for forced vibrations.

When Dynamics is selected from the menu bar in the STRAP main menu, the following pull-down menu is
displayed:

• Weight data:
To define the dynamic nodal weights. Refer to 6.2.

• Solve mode shapes:

To start the mode shapes and natural frequency calculation (after nodal weights have been defined). Refer
to 6.3.

• Results display:
- to display the results of the mode shape and natural frequency calculation. Refer to 6.4.
- to carry out a seismic analysis on the model (frame structures). Refer to 6.5.

• Time History Response

This module calculates the transient (history) response of a model subject to dynamic loads in which viscous
damping is present. It enables the dynamic analysis of models subject to impact, impulse or cyclic loads
or any other type of load that varies with time. Refer to 6.6.

Note:
The static analysis, dynamic analysis and seismic analysis must be carried out in the correct sequence.
Refer to 6.5.2 - Seismic analysis - Procedure for more details.

Version 12.0 6-1 12/05

STRAP
6.2 Nodal Weights
This dynamic analysis module analyses the modal shape of the model. The program solves for the natural
frequencies and the corresponding mode shapes. The mode shape of the lowest frequency (longest period)
will be numbered 1 and all the others will be numbered respectively in ascending order.

The program assumes a lumped-weight model, i.e. the weight of the model is concentrated at the nodes. The
weights (not mass) applied to the model must be defined prior to the start of the solution. The first time the
dynamic analysis is run for a model the weights are equal to zero.

To define weights at the model nodes. Refer to 6.2.1.

To revise the nodal weights. Refer to 6.2.2.

To define the self-wt of the model as nodal weights. Refer to 6.2.3.

To delete nodal weights. Refer to 6.2.4.

To add loads from a static load case to the nodal weight table. Refer to 6.2.5.

To define the parameters for the mode shape analysis calculation. Refer to 6.2.6.

From the menu bar:

• File
Start the calculation of the mode shapes and the natural frequency.
• Output
Display the nodal weights table. Refer to 6.2.7.
• Display:
Select:
- Nodal weights to graphically display the total weight (additional + self-weight) applied to the nodes.
- Rotation weights to graphically display the rotation weight) applied to the nodes.

6.2.1 Nodal weights - Add

Define a weight applied to any node in the model. Note that if a weight has already been defined at the
selected node, the new weight will be added to the existing one.

Define the weight in the current weight units.

Select the nodes using the standard Node Selection option.

Version 12.0 6-2 12/05

STRAP
Nodal weights - advanced
For most standard models the assumptions that the weight acts equally in all directions and that the weight is
centered at the node give sufficiently accurate results.

In certain models a more refined definition of the weights may be required. The weight may not act equally in
all directions (e.g. sliding supports) or the weight may be eccentric to the node (e.g. tributary area not centered
at the node, machinery and bases, etc.)

Use this option to define different weights in different directions and/or rotation "mass moments of inertia":

Mass moments of inertia are defined as follows:

• General mass transformed about a support node:
(WX) = (WX)o + WL²
where:
(WX)o = mass moment of inertia through centre of weight
L = projected distance in relevant global direction

The mass moment of inertia through centre of weight for various shapes:
• General thin plate:
(WX)o = (W/A)(Ix + Iy)
where: Ix, Iy = moments-of-inertia about X,Y respectively
A = area
• Rectangular plate: dimensions a,b:
(WX)o = (W/12)(a² + b²)

6.2.2 Nodal weights - Revise

To revise a weight previously applied at node.

• Select the nodes using the standard Node Selection option.
• Define a new value for the weight.

To revise self-weight, use the self-weight option (6.2.3).

6.2.3 Nodal weights - Self-weight

To instruct the program to calculate the self-weight reactions of all beams and elements attached to specified
nodes and to automatically apply them as nodal weights.

• Select the nodes using the standard Node Selection option.

• The calculated self-weight may be multiplied by a factor:

Entering a factor of zero will delete the self-weight.

Version 12.0 6-3 12/05

STRAP
6.2.4 Nodal weights - Delete

Delete nodal weights applied to selected nodes. Select the nodes using the standard Node Selection option.

Note: To delete self-weight, use the self-weight option (6.2.3).

6.2.5 Nodal weight - static loads

Add a static load case to the nodal weights table.

Static load case:
Select any of the existing load cases from the list box.

Addition mode:
Select one of the following:
Add static loads to nodal weights
The specified static load case will be added to the
nodal weights already defined.
Replace nodal weights by static load
All defined nodal weights will be deleted and the
specified static load case will be added to the table.

Static load component:

The selected load case may contain loads acting in
more than one global direction.
Select the load direction that will be added to/replace the nodal weights.

Factor:
The selected loads may be multiplied by a factor before they are added to the nodal weights table.

6.2.6 Nodal weights - Mode Parameters

Define the parameters for the mode shape and natural frequency calculation:

No. of mode shapes to be calculated:

The number of mode shapes equals the number of dynamic degrees-of-freedom with applied weights. For
most structural models only the first few modes are important. Specify the number of mode shapes to be
calculated.

Version 12.0 6-4 12/05

STRAP
The number of requested mode shapes should not exceed the following:
• 42 mode shapes
• number of degrees-of-freedom with non-zero weight

For most structural models only the first few mode shapes are needed (up to five). Notice that the solution time
increases with the number of mode shapes requested.

Tolerance:
The program solves the eigenvalue equation by the "Subspace Iteration" method; the program bases the
calculation of the eigenvalues in the current iteration on the eigenvalues of the previous iteration. When the
previous and current values converge, the program terminates the calculation.

The measure of the difference between the values is called the "tolerance".

A stricter tolerance limit will increase accuracy but also increase the number of iterations required.

A tolerance of 1.E-3 (.001) is the program default value. A reduced tolerance exponent will significantly
decrease the solution time. In larger models, the user may reduce the tolerance exponent according to his
engineering judgment.

Apply weight:
To eliminate/add the weight effect in any of the global directions.

Eccentricity
Many seismic design codes stipulate that the weights be applied offset from their center of mass, i.e. at a
specified distance from the nodes.

For example, UBC 1630.6: " the mass at each level shall be assumed to be displaced from the calculated
center of mass in each direction a distance equal to 5 percent of the building dimension ...".

Define the eccentricity (offset) of ALL nodal weights from their nodes, where dx1, dx2, dx3 refer to the X1, X2,
X3 global axes.

To define different eccentricities for specific levels, click the Story eccentricities button; values defined
here override the default values specified in the menu.

The program initially lists all

levels in the Height direction
with no eccentricity. Enter
values of eccentricity in any
global direction at any level;
the program will apply the
eccentricity to the weights at all
nodes at that level. Note that
the default eccentricity will be
used when a value is left
blank.

Version 12.0 6-5 12/05

STRAP
Select:

Insert to add a new row to the table; enter the elevation value and the eccentricities

Add nodes add new rows to the table by selecting nodes in the model

Delete click and highlight a row in the table and click Delete; the row will be erased

Cancel to cancel all changes.

6.2.7 Nodal weights - Display (tables)

Example:
where:
Total weight = sum of additional weights
and self-weight applied at
the node.
Add’l weight = weights other than self-
weight applied at the node.
Self wt factor = factor by which self-weight is
multiplied.
Eccentricity = eccentricity of ALL weights in
the X1, X2, X3 global
directions

Note: self-weight = (total weight - additional weight)/factor

6.3 Solve the model

This dynamic analysis module analyses the modal shape of the model. The program solves for the natural
frequencies and the corresponding mode shapes.

The program solves the problem of undamped free vibrations. This involves the solution of the generalized
eigenvalue equation:

The eigenvalues correspond to the natural frequencies by the following equations:

eigenvalue = ω5
natural frequency = ω/2π

Each value of the eigenvector is the relative displacement of the corresponding degree-of-freedom.

The mode shape of the lowest frequency (longest period) will be numbered 1 and all the others will be
numbered respectively in ascending order.

The program assumes a lumped-mass model, i.e. the mass of the model is concentrated at the nodes.

The program solves the general eigenvalue problem using the Subspace Iteration method. Explained simply,
the program bases the calculation of the eigenvalues in the current iteration on the eigenvalues of the previous
iteration. When the difference between the previous and current values is very small, the program terminates
the iteration process.

Version 12.0 6-6 12/05

STRAP

Each iteration contains three stages and the progress is displayed on the screen:

• Stage 1:
For each degree-of-freedom (d.o.f) the program solves for all mode shapes requested. This stage takes
up the most of the solution time.

• Stage 2:
Subspace Iterations: The program solves the eigenvalue problem in a reduced subspace:

• Stage 3:
The program calculates the tolerance and the eigenvectors for the next iteration (if required). The program
displays the eigenvalues for the current iteration and the tolerances. The tolerance values reflect the rate
of convergence and allow a rough estimates of the solution time.

If the specified tolerance is met, the program lists the eigenvalues:

The solution is automatically backed-up every iteration; select Abort in the menu bar to interrupt the
calculation.

If you then select Dynamics in the STRAP main menu and Solve the model the program asks:

Select:
Continue - to resume the solution from the point of
interruption.
Restart - to start the solution from the beginning.

This message will also appear if the solution was

interrupted by a power failure, computer malfunction, etc.

Version 12.0 6-7 12/05

STRAP
6.4 Dynamic analysis - Results
Display the results of the mode shape analysis or carry out a seismic analysis and display the results.

From the menu bar:

From the side menu:

Display/print the graphic or tabular results for the mode shape analysis and/or seismic
analysis.

Seismic analysis - refer to 6.5.

Tabular results - refer to 6.4.1.
Graphic results - refer to 6.4.2.

6.4.1 Results - Tables

6.4.1.1 Display

Display the tabular results for the mode shape analysis and seismic analysis.

Tabular results - Eigenvalues

For each mode shape requested the program displays:
• eigenvalue = w²
• natural frequency = f = w/2p
• period of vibration = 1/f (in seconds)

Version 12.0 6-8 12/05

STRAP
For example:

Tabular results - Mode shapes

For each mode shape requested the program
displays the mode shape displacements. The
displacements are always relative values and
dimensionless; the maximum deflection is set to 1.00
and all other deflections are proportional to it.

Note that the maximum relative deflection of 1.00 at

node is the deflection in one of the global directions.
The vector sum of the relative deflections at node 6
is greater than 1.000.

For example:

Tabular results - Modal results

The Seismic analysis summation over all calculated mode shapes is displayed in the format:

where:
T = period (seconds)
Wn/Wtot = a factor reflecting the relative influence of the mode shape.
Fn = sum of external forces in all global directions.
Qn = A factor which when multiplied by the mode shape 'deflections' calculated by the Mode Shape
Analysis program (where the maximum deflection in each mode shape is always 1.0) gives the
actual deflection at each node.
Vn = A similar factor for velocity.
An = A similar factor for acceleration.

Version 12.0 6-9 12/05

STRAP

Tabular results - Seismic analysis

Display the deflections, beam forces and moments, element moments and stresses as generated by the
CQC/RSS calculation.

The results are in the same format as the STRAP static tabular results.

Results may be displayed for individual modes or for a range of modes (CQC/RSS summation).

Tabular results - Select modes

Results may be displayed for individual modes or for a range of modes (CQC/RSS summation). If you selected
the “Missing mass correction” method, the line MMC will be displayed at the end of the individual mode shape
list.

6.4.1.2 Print

Print the tabular results for the mode shape analysis and seismic analysis.

Refer to 6.4.1.1.

Deactivate mode shapes:

Mode shapes may be initially deactivated by selecting deactivate mode shapes, i.e they will not appear in the
pull-down boxes displayed when selecting the above options. The program will automatically deactivate mode
shapes not required by the selected design code.

Version 12.0 6-10 12/05

STRAP
6.4.2 Results - Graphics

Display the mode shapes graphically

Select mode shape

Select the mode to be displayed from the list in the box.

Maximum result will be scaled as:

The bending moment diagrams, deflections, etc. are displayed relative to a scale chosen as follows:
The program searches for the maximum result in the plot area and plots it on the screen as the dimension listed
above - the default value is 1.5 cm (0.6 in.). All other results are plotted in proportion to this value.
Example: bending moment diagram:
• Maximum moment = 12 kN m is drawn as 1.5 cm. on plotted diagram;
• Moment = 4 kN m will be drawn as 0.5 cm.

Display only values greater than:

For clarity, part of the numerical values may be deleted from screen (the entire geometry and result diagram
will be plotted). All values less than a given fraction (default = 0.5) of the maximum result will not be displayed.
Example: Maximum bending moment = 12 kN m and fraction = 0.5 : Only numbers greater than 6 kN m will
be displayed on the screen.

Hatch the result diagrams:

Set the box to to hatch the results diagram. For example:

Write Values
Select one of the following options:
• Total of all directions
The program displays only the deflection vector sum in the three global directions, i.e. √(δX15 + δX25 + δX35).
• Global X1/X2/X3 direction
Display the deflection value for one of the global directions only.

Animate time:
Set this option to to animate the mode shapes deflections.
The model will deflect from its full positive deflection to its full negative deflection in seven equal steps during
the time = interval specified. The animation will continue until the End animation button at the bottom of the
screen is clicked.

Version 12.0 6-11 12/05

STRAP
6.5 Seismic analysis
This module calculates the earthquake response and the resulting moments and forces in the model based on
the calculated mode shapes and Code related factors.

The results (deflections, moments, forces and stresses) for the Seismic Response Spectrum load case can be
viewed directly in this module in tabular form. These results may also be transferred to the STRAP results file
to combine the dynamic results with static results.

For more information, refer to 6.5.1 - Seismic analysis - General.

The Seismic Response Spectrum analysis can be carried out only after other parts of STRAP have been
executed. Refer to 6.5.2 - Seismic analysis - Procedure.

When Seismic analysis is selected from the Menu bar, a pull-down menu with the following options is
displayed:

Method for combining modes

To specify one of the following methods for combining the maximum values of modal response:
• SRSS (square root of the sum of the squares)
• CQC (complete quadratic combination
Refer to 6.5.1.

Edit spectra file

Revise existing spectrum data (e.g. El Centro) or add new spectra to the file. Refer to 6.5.4.

Parameters
To specify the parameters for the seismic analysis. Refer to 6.5.5.

Story calculations
Check whether the drift between selected floor levels complies with the Code requirements; Calculate rigidity
center and center of mass for each floor. Refer to 6.5.6

Update results files

To transfer the seismic analysis results to the STRAP results file in order to combine the dynamic results with
static results. Refer to 6.5.8.

Version 12.0 6-12 12/05

STRAP
6.5.1 Seismic analysis - General

This module calculates the earthquake response and the resulting moments and forces in the model based on
the calculated mode shapes and Code related factors.

The mode shape analysis calculates 'n' different mode shapes. The maximum response (deflection, base
shear, etc.) for each shape is calculated from a "Response Spectrum". This spectrum is a graph which gives
the acceleration as a function of the natural period, T, of the model.

The spectrum may be an idealized one taken from a Code, e.g. Figure 1B in the SEAOC (California Blue Book)
Code, or it may be based on ground motion histories at the specific site.

When calculating the maximum response, the total response usually cannot be obtained simply by adding the
maximum responses of the individual nodes because these maxim a usually do not occur at the same time.

The user may select one of the following methods to estimate the maximum total response from the maximum
calculated modal values;
• SRSS (Sum of Root of the Sum of the Squares) method.
• CQC (Complete Quadratic Combination)

In both methods the program calculates the response for each mode separately and then combines them
according to a formula that accounts for the fact that when one mode achieves its maximum response, the
responses of the other modes are less than their individual maxima.

Note that each maximum response is calculated separately, e.g. the maximum moments are calculated as the
RSS/CQC of the moments from the individual mode shapes, and not as the moments resulting from the
RSS/CQC deflections of the model.

For additional theoretical explanations and background, refer to any textbook covering dynamic response of
multi degree-of-freedom systems.

6.5.2 Seismic analysis - Procedure

The general procedure is:

• Define the model geometry.
• If there are static loading cases, define and solve them before selecting Dynamic.
• Select Dynamic:
Define Nodal weights, select Exit and then Solve the model (all options in Menu bar).
• Select Seismic analysis in the Menu bar.
Calculate the dynamic response as explained in the following sections and transfer the results to STRAP.
This option adds new load cases to the STRAP results file.
Note: solve each earthquake direction separately and transfer separately to the STRAP files.
• Select Exit and STRAP models list. When the STRAP Main Menu is displayed, select Results and then
Combinations (all options in Menu bar)
Note that Seismic analysis results are always positive. When combined with static loads, two combinations
should be defined:
a. (static load cases) * factor + (Seismic results) * factor
b. (static load cases) * factor + (Seismic results) * factor * -1
• Select any of the STRAP options for displaying or postprocessing results.

Do not solve the static load cases after the Seismic Analysis calculation

When the program adds the Seismic Response Spectrum results to the STRAP results file it also appends
"zero" load cases to the loading file so that the number of load cases in both files are the same. Solving the
static load cases again will create zero results for the Seismic analysis cases.

Version 12.0 6-13 12/05

STRAP
If the static loads have to be solved again:
• delete the load cases created by the Seismic analysis
• solve the model again (static)
• run this module again to recalculate the Seismic load cases.
• append the Seismic load cases to the STRAP results.

Select the following options:

6.5.3 Method of combining modes

RSS/CQC Methods
There are two methods available to estimate the total
response from calculated modal values:
• SRSS (square root of sum of squares)
The estimated response R (force, displacement, etc.) at
a specified coordinate may be expressed as:

where Ri is the corresponding maximum response of

the ith mode at the coordinate.
• CQC (complete quadratic combination)
The estimated response may be expressed as:

where the cross-modal damping coefficient ρ may be approximated by:

where: r = ϖj/ϖi = ratio of the natural frequencies of modes i and j

ξ =the constant modal damping

Application of the SRSS method generally provides an acceptable estimation of the total maximum response.
However when some of the modes are closely spaced, the method may grossly underestimate or overestimate
the maximum response. Large errors have been found in particular in space models in which the torsional
effects are significant. The term "closely spaced" may be arbitrarily defined as the case where the difference
between two natural frequencies is less than 10% of the smaller frequency.

The CQC method is a more precise method of combining the maximum values of modal response. Note that
the two methods are identical for undamped models (ξ = 0).

Version 12.0 6-14 12/05

STRAP
Cut-off frequency
Instruct the program to ignore the mode shapes having a natural frequency greater than the specified value.
The program will use all mode shapes if the value is set to 0.

Sign of results
The SRSS/CQC method calculates the maximum ABSOLUTE (positive) value results as a weighted
combination of the mode results. These positive results must be converted to design values when transferring
the load case to STRAP. There are two options available:
the default method: the moment diagrams are drawn entirely on one side of the member (i.e. single
curvature, the critical case for column design. Therefore, STRAP transfers a negative moment at one end
and a positive moment at the other (Refer to Sign conventions). All axial forces are positive.
All results are transferred with the sign of the results calculated for the dominant mode shape, i.e. the mode
shape with (Fn)max

Missing mass correction (MMC)

The "Missing mass correction" is a mathematical procedure to correct the results when not all mode shapes
are used and hence Σ (Wn/Wtot) < 1.00.

Note that this option can be used only if the Use "missing mass correction" method was specified in the
Modes option when defining the weights prior to solving the model.

6.5.4 Edit spectra file

The program is supplied with the El Centro 1940 spectrum data. The user may add any spectrum other than
El Centro by using this option. The spectra are stored in file UDAMPS.DAT (located in the program directory)
Refer to 6.5.9 for an explanation on the file format.

The program displays the following dialog box:

Select:
Add - to add a new spectrum
Revise - to revise one of the existing spectra. Click
and highlight the line with the title and then
click Revise
Delete - to delete one of the existing spectra or to
delete one of the accelerograms in the
spectrum (corresponding to a specific
damping). Click and highlight the line with
the title and then click Delete.

• For an existing spectrum, select the accelogram to revise:

To add a new accelerogram, select any value.

Version 12.0 6-15 12/05

STRAP
• Enter/revise the frequency and acceleration values for the accelogram.

Spectrum - damping
Enter a value for the damping (%). The value is used to create the title for the accelerogram.

Spectrum - units
Specify the length unit for the acceleration values (and the gravitational constant)
For example, if you specify inch,
• all acceleration values must be defined in in/sec5
• the program will automatically use a gravitation constant g = 386.22 in/sec5
If you select None, the program will use a value of 1.00 for 'g' (this value can be manually edited by the
user - refer to 6.5.9 - Spectrum file).

Spectrum values
Specify the frequency and the acceleration of each point on the accelerogram. The accelerations must be
defined in the same units as the gravitational constant 'g'.

Press [Enter] to move from cell to cell, or point to a specific cell and click the left mouse button
Insert - to insert a new line above the currently highlighted line. Note that the frequency values do not
have to be entered in the correct order (the program will automatically rearrange the table after
you click OK).
Delete - to delete the currently highlighted line
OK - to save the current changes and return to the previous menu.
Cancel - to cancel all changes made in the current session and to return to the previous menu.

• The program displays the following menu if you revised the damping value for an existing accelogram:

Select:
New - The program will add a new accelerogram
to the list (without modifying or erasing the
existing one).
Update - The program will revise the existing
accelerogram
Cancel - Cancel all changes and return to the
previous menu

Version 12.0 6-16 12/05

STRAP
6.5.5 Seismic analysis - parameters

6.5.5.1 Response Spectrum

The calculation is based on a specified response spectrum. The program contains one standard spectrum
based on the El Centro 1940 earthquake. The user may define and specify any other spectrum; refer to 6.5.4 -
Edit spectra file.

No. of modes
To specify the number of mode shapes calculated in the Modal Shape Analysis program to be included in the
Seismic analysis. (The higher mode shapes usually do not influence the results in standard models).

Construction factor
Specifies the intensity of the earthquake according to the code being used; the factor may be used to amplify
the response spectrum or to include factors contained in local building codes reflecting structure type, soil
factor, behavior factor, etc.

Spectral model
To select the response spectrum to be used for the calculation. The program contains the El Centro 1940
earthquake response spectrum and the user may define additional spectra. (refer to 6.5.4 - Edit spectrum file).

Select a spectrum from the pull-down list.

Accelerograms
To specify the damping percentage in the response spectrum to be used. Each mode shape may be assigned
with a different damping percentage as damping is often greater in the second or higher modes.

By default, all mode shapes are assigned to the first damping value in the spectrum.

Version 12.0 6-17 12/05

STRAP
For the El Centro earthquake:

The different damping values contained in the spectrum file are listed in the right table; The damping values
assigned to each mode shape are listed in the left table.

To modify the table:

• click the mode shape in the left table (you can drag the for multiple selections.
• click the mode shape in the right table.
• click the Assign damping factor to selected modes button to update the left table.

6.5.5.2 1997 Uniform Building Code (UBC)

• Insert pages 6-19 to 6-22 from CODES_USA.PDF

6.5.5.3 1994 Uniform Building Code (UBC) / SEAOC

• Insert pages 6-19A to 6-22A from CODES_USA.PDF

6.5.5.4 ASCE 7-98

• Insert pages 6-19B to 6-22B from CODES_USA.PDF

6.5.5.5 IS:1893 (India)

• Insert pages 6-19 to 6-22 from CODES_INDIA.PDF

6.5.5.6 Eurocode 8

• Insert pages 6-19 to 6-22 from CODES_EURO.PDF

6.5.5.7 National Building Code of Canada

• Insert pages 6-19 to 6-22 from CODES_CDN.PDF

Version 12.0 6-18 12/05

STRAP
6.5.6 Story calculations

Check the drift (relative deflection between adjacent levels) according to the Code requirements.. The drift may
be calculated for RSS/CQC (range of mode shapes) or a specific mode shape:

Click to define the levels and calculate the drift:

The table is initially blank:

• specify the "Height direction". All levels selected will be along this global axis.
• select Add nodes and select nodes at the levels using the standard node selection options. The program
then writes all of data in the table, as shown in the example above.
• select Insert to add new levels between rows in the table and Delete to remove rows

Drift results
No. - level number
Indicates that the drift is less than the Code limits
X Indicates that the drift exceeds the Code limits
Level - coordinate along the height axis
Height - story height; dimension between adjacent levels
Drift - drift value calculated according to Code equations, including all modification factors, etc.
Defl - min and max deflections at the level, calculated from deflection values at all nodes at that level
(the values may not be equal because of the rotation of the model).

Rigidity and mass centres

The program calculates the centre of mass and the centre of rigidity for each floor (story). The distance
between the centres is also displayed.

Note:
• The centre of rigidity of a story can be calculated only if rigid links connect all of the nodes in its plane. The
centre will not be calculated if there are either no rigid links or more than one group of rigid links in the plane.
• The centre of mass is calculated from the weights defined in the program and not from the density of the
elements

Version 12.0 6-23 12/05

STRAP
6.5.7 Weak stories

The program identifies "Weak stories" as defined in the Code. For example, UBC-1997, Table 16-L - "A weak
story is one in which the story strength is less than 80% of that in the story above".

The shear strength is calculated as the sum of the shear capacity of all concrete walls and columns as well as
structural steel sections in the direction being considered, i.e.
Shear = (Σconcrete area)* (allowable concrete shear stress) + (Σsteel area)* (allowable steel shear stress)
where the allowable shear stresses are specified in the menu.

Select:
Insert
to add a new row to the table;
enter the elevation value

Add nodes
add new rows to the table by
selecting nodes in the model

Delete
click and highlight a row in the
table and click Delete; the row
will be erased

Cancel
to cancel all changes to the
table

An X is displayed at the left side of the table when the story is 'weak'.

6.5.8 Seismic Analysis - Update results files

Write the dynamic results to the static results file.

Select the "load cases" to be created:

CQC / RSS over modes
a single load case containing the Seismic Response Spectrum analysis summation; select the range of
modes to be included in the calculation using the Deactivate option.
Mode shapes
a separate load case for each mode; select the modes.

Both options may be selected.

Version 12.0 6-24 12/05

STRAP
The SRSS/CQC procedure is the method stipulated by all Codes for determining the maximum response.
Models properly analyzed and designed by STRAP will comply with the Code requirements.

The structural response may be calculated separately for each mode. However, since the maximum response
for each mode does not occur at the same instant of time, it would be over-conservative to simply add the
separate maximum modal responses. Alternatively, carrying out a complete time-history analysis for the entire
model is unfeasible. The SRSS/CQC procedures recommended by the Codes represents the most probable
maximum response and takes in to account the fact that the peak modal responses occur randomly with
respect to time.

Note:
• The SRSS/CQC method calculates the maximum ABSOLUTE (positive) value results as a weighted
combination of the mode results. It is obvious that the method can generate only one load case to be
transferred to STRAP.
• The program does the SRSS/CQC calculation separately for shear and moment. If there is more than one
mode shape the shear values will not equal the sum of the moments divided by the span length.
• These positive results must be converted to design values when transferring the load case to STRAP.
There are two options available:
- the default method: the moment diagrams are drawn entirely on one side of the member (i.e. single
curvature, the critical case for column design. Therefore, STRAP transfers a negative moment at one
end and a positive moment at the other (Refer to Sign conventions). All axial forces are positive.
- All results are transferred with the sign of the results calculated for the dominant mode shape, i.e. the
mode shape with (Fn/)max
• Two sets of combinations should then be generated in the STRAP results module, one with the transferred
seismic load case multiplied by the positive load factor and the other multiplied by the NEGATIVE load
factor. Remember that the structure vibrates in both directions so all results can have either sign.
• the program has an option to transfer the results of individual mode shapes to STRAP instead of the
SRSS/CQC results. Equilibrium will be maintained in such load cases. However, this option is permissible
only if the first mode shape is very dominant. The seismic Codes specify the minimum number of mode
shapes that must be used in the calculation.

Deactivate mode shapes:

Mode shapes may be initially deactivated by selecting Deactivate mode shapes, i.e. they will not appear in
the pull-down boxes displayed when selecting the above options. The program will automatically deactivate
mode shapes not required by the selected design Code.

Note:
• If static load cases were defined or revised but not solved, the message -

will be displayed. All static load cases must be solved before entering this module.

• The program updates two STRAP files:

- Results file: each dynamic load case is appended to the file.
- Applied forces file: in order that the number of load cases in this file will correspond to the number of
load cases in the results file, "zero" load cases are appended to the end of the file.

• When writing the results to the static result file, the program also saves the following information:
- direction earthquake applied
- CQC/RSS results or individual mode results (and which mode number).

Version 12.0 6-25 12/05

STRAP

When writing the results, the program checks if results were already written for the same situation. If yes,
the program will overwrite the existing load case in the results file. If not, the program will add a new load
case.

• In the Equilibrium Check for the Seismic Response Spectrum analysis load case, values will be displayed
at nodes that were not defined as supports. This occurs because squaring the forces erases their sign,
thereby destroying the equilibrium at the node. These values should be ignored.

6.5.9 Spectra file format

The user may use any spectrum other than El Centro by appending the relevant data to the ASCII file already
containing the El Centro information.

File name: UDAMPS.DAT (located in the program directory)

File format:

line 1:
Default gravitational constant 'g'.
Examples: for in/sec5 , enter 386.22047
for m/sec5 , enter 9.81
Note: the value is used only for accelerograms where a value for 'g' is not found in the title line (see 'ND lines'
below).

line 2:
NS= the number of different spectra included in the file (maximum = 99 spectra)

NS lines
separate line for each spectrum containing a spectrum title (39 characters)

For each of the NS spectra:

• line 1
the spectrum number (1 to NS), preceded by a #, e.g. #1
• line 2
ND = the number of different accelerograms in the spectrum, each for a different value of damping
(maximum = 30).

ND lines
separate line for each accelogram containing:
- a title (39 characters)
- gravitational constant, 'g', starting in column 60. If not defined the program uses the default value in line 1.

For each of the ND dampings:

• line 1
the spectrum number (1 to ND), preceded by a *, e.g. *1
• line 2
NP = the number of defined points on the accelerogram (maximum = 200 points).

NP lines
The frequency and the acceleration of each point on the graph (free format).
The accelerations must be defined in the same units as the gravitational constant 'g'.

Version 12.0 6-26 12/05

STRAP
The file as provided:
386.22047 - gravitational constant
1 - 1 spectrum in file
Averaged El Centro 1940 - title of one spectra
#1 - El Centro Spectrum:
6 - 6 damping accelerograms
0% Damping - titles of 6 damping
2% Damping - accelerograms
5% Damping - "
10% Damping - "
20% Damping - "
40% Damping - "
*1 - 1st accelerogram
38 - contains 38 points
.010 2.02576 - coordinate of 1st point (free format)
etc. - frequency and acceleration (for units, see note above)

The program contains an option to revise/add the spectrum data, but the file can also be edited manually
externally to STRAP.

Example:add a new spectrum titled "User Spectrum 1" to the file. Assume 2 damping factors are defined, each
with 3 points per damping (note that the El Centro spectrum contains 38 points):

Revise the beginning of the file as follows:

386.22047
2
Averaged El Centro 1940
User Spectrum 1
#1
. . . . etc.

append to the end of the file:

#2
2
5% Damping
10% Damping
*1
3
.010 2.02576
.1 22.3
.8 10.2
*2
3
.010 1.05
.1 18.3
.8 6.1

Version 12.0 6-27 12/05

STRAP
6.6 Forced vibrations and transient response (Time history response)
For background information, refer to one of the following topics:
6.6.2 - General - a summary of the theory and program assumptions.
6.6.3 - Procedure - an outline of the procedure for carrying out a forced vibration analysis of a model.

6.6.1 Main menu

From the menu bar:

Exit - to return to the program main menu, geometry definition, define weights, etc.
Combinations - Create combinations of the existing dynamic load cases. Refer to 6.6.6.
Time tables - Define the time intervals at which to calculate and display tabular results or append static
result files (this option does not apply to graphic results). Refer to 6.6.7.

From the side menu:

Define a new load case (consisting of nodal forces) and the associated base acceleration and
history function. Refer to 6.6.4.

Revise any of the existing load cases. Refer to 6.6.4.

Delete any of the existing load cases. Select a case from the list displayed.

To select the number of mode shapes to be used for the calculation and the damping factor for each
of the shapes. Refer to 6.6.5.

Output options:

Select:
Tables - Display or print tabular results. Refer to 6.6.8.
Graphs - Display or print graphic results. Refer to 6.6.9.
Loads - Display or print tables showing all load case data - history function, nodal forces and base
acceleration. Refer to 6.6.10.

To append results to the static result files. Refer to 6.6.11.

6.6.2 Time history response - General

This module calculates the transient (history) response of a model subject to dynamic loads in which viscous
damping is present. It enables the dynamic analysis of models subject to impact, impulse or cyclic loads or any
other type of load that varies with time.

Version 12.0 6-28 12/05

STRAP
The equations of motion are solved on the basis of the results from the Natural Frequency and Mode Shape
analysis.

The equations of motion are:

where:
[m] = diagonal mass matrix
[c] = matrix of damping coefficients
[k] = stiffness matrix
{P} = joint load distribution
F(t) = time history of the applied forces

The program assumes:

• At each node the history behaviour of the load is represented by the input joint loads multiplied by the history
function F(t).
• the history function F(t) is composed of either:
- a series of straight line segments defined by a set of pairs of time and amplitude values:
{t1, F(t1)}, {t2, F(t2)}, .... , {tn, F(tn)}
where: tn > tn-1 > 0
- a sine function curve
A different history function may be defined for each load case.
• the damping matrix [c] is proportional to the mass matrix:
[c] = 2 [β] [m]
where [β] is a constant diagonal matrix.
The damping is defined as a set of coefficients, one for each mode shape, where the coefficients represent
a percentage of the critical damping β cr = wn (wn = modal frequency).

6.6.3 Procedure

• Solutions may be obtained for a single dynamic load or combinations (super-positions) of up to 10 different
dynamic loads.
• Each load case is defined as a series of joint loads, or as a base acceleration, or as a combination of both.
- The joint loads act according to the history function.
- The base acceleration is defined as a direction vector (X1, X2, X3) and an amplitude.
- The program solves the equations of motion at each point in time that is included in a user-defined table.

Time load:

For each load case, define joint forces and/or a base acceleration:

• click the icon

• click the. .icon

define joint forces at nodes.

• click the icon

• Enter the magnitude and direction of the base acceleration (factors for X1,X2,X3).

• click the. .icon

• define the graph of the history function F(t).

Version 12.0 6-29 12/05

STRAP
Damping:

• click the icon

• enter the damping coefficients (%) for each mode shape.

Compute times and Display times (for tabular results):

• select Time tables in the menu bar
• select Define computed time table in the pull-down menu.
• Define a set of intervals and steps that specify the times at which the results are computed and displayed.

Output:

• click the icon to display results in screen .

• select the result type, display time, etc. to display.

• click the icon to print graphic results or the icon to print tabular results
• click the button to add load cases to the static results file. Note that this option uses the
Compute times defined above.

6.6.4 Define/Revise a Load Case

Define a load case as nodal forces and/or base acceleration acting according to a time history function.

Define a new load case (consisting of nodal forces) and the associated base acceleration and
history function. Refer to 6.6.4.1.

Revise joint loads. Refer to 6.6.4.2.

Delete joint loads. Refer to 6.6.4.2.

Define the acceleration vector (direction and magnitude) to be applied to all nodes in the model.
Refer to 6.6.4.3.

Add the joint loads in a static load case to the current dynamic load case. Refer to 6.6.4.4.

Add the joint loads defined in any other dynamic load case defined in this section to the current
dynamic load case. Refer to 6.6.4.5

Define the time behavior of the nodal forces (or base acceleration) for the current load case. The
history function may be defined as either:

• Linear: a series of pairs of time and amplitude values forming a series of straight line segments:
{t1, F(t1)}, {t2, F(t2)}, .... , {tn, F(tn)}
where: tn > tn-1 > 0 Refer to 6.6.4.6.
• Sine: a sine function curve Refer to 6.6.4.7.

Version 12.0 6-30 12/05

STRAP
6.6.4.1 Joint Loads - define

Joint loads are defined relative to the global coordinate system.

• Enter the load values; note that loads in more than one global direction can be defined at the same time.
• Select the nodes that the loads are to be applied to using the standard Node Selection option.Joint loads

The positive force and moment sign conventions are:

6.6.4.2 Joint loads - revise/delete

Select nodes with joint load to be revised/deleted using the standard Node selection option.

For Revise, enter new values for the load as explained in 6.6.4.1 - Joint loads - define .

Note that unlike the static joint loads, the program does not remember that the same load was applied to more
than one node at the same time. To revise a group of identical loads, all of the nodes must be selected.

The loads on the selected nodes are updated/deleted on the graphic display.

6.6.4.3 Base acceleration

Define the acceleration vector (direction and magnitude) to be applied to all nodes in the model:

• Magnitude - defined as a factor for 'g'

• Direction - select one of X1, X2, X3 or Other

Version 12.0 6-31 12/05

STRAP
If Other is selected, then define the vector components for X1, X2 and X3:

Note that the values entered determine only the direction of the vector.

6.6.4.4 Add static load

Use this option to add the joint loads from an existing static load case to the current dynamic case.

Select a load case from the list:

Note that the program will ignore all beam loads, element loads, etc. in the static load case.

6.6.4.5 Add time load

Use this option to add the joint loads from an existing dynamic load case.

Select a case from the list displayed:

Note that the program does not copy the base acceleration from the selected case.

Version 12.0 6-32 12/05

STRAP
6.6.4.6 Time History Function - Linear

Create a time history function consisting of a series of straight line segment. The segments are created by
defining their end points. Note that a function may be saved/retrieved from a file.

Cyclic:
The function is the first cycle of a periodic
function that extends to infinity. The
amplitude of the function is assumed to be
zero beyond the defined time domain.

Time point:
Define the time at the point in seconds

Value f(t):
Define the amplitude of the function at the
current point. The program will multiply
the joint loads by the amplitude.

Add a point:
define Time point and Value, then click

Revise a point:

click or until the values of the point are displayed. Enter new values and click

Delete a point:

click or until the values of the point are displayed, then click .

Save/retrieve function
The current linear function may be saved to a file and retrieved in a different load case or model.
• Save: the default file extension is *.HIS
• Open: the retrieved function will erase any current function on the screen

The function may also be written to an ASCII file using any standard editor program.

The file format is:

Row 1: HIST
Row 2: t1 f(t1)
Row 3: t2 f(t2)
.
Row n+1: tn f(tn+1)

where:
• the lines are unformatted
• the times must be in ascending order
• the times are in milliseconds

Version 12.0 6-33 12/05

STRAP
6.6.4.7 Time History Function - Sine

The curve above was defined with the values in the Text boxes.

Amplitude:
Define the amplitude of the sine curve.

Period T:
Define time in seconds of one cycle of the sine curve.

Start at t0:
Define the "phase shift" in seconds. Note that the initial sine curve displayed is the classic sine curve having
an amplitude of zero at time t=0 and then increasing to the amplitude value. This curve can be "shifted" so that
any other amplitude is present at t=0.

The shift is defined by entering the time value on the original curve that has the desired amplitude.
For example, the curve in Figure (a) was created by shifting the curve in Figure (b) by 2 seconds.

Version 12.0 6-34 12/05

STRAP
6.6.5 Damping

Define the modal damping factors as a percentage of the modal frequency. A different damping factor may be
assigned to each mode shape.

To define the damping factors:

• Click and highlight the mode in the box (or drag
across a series of modes).
• Enter a damping value in the Damping factor text
box.
• Click the Assign damping factor button.

• Click the button when damping factors

have been assigned to all mode shapes.

6.6.6 Combinations

6.6.6.1 Combinations - define

Add a combination:
To define a new combination. The program displays a list of the load CASES. For example:

Select load cases and enter the load factor:

Version 12.0 6-35 12/05

STRAP
In the above example, the combination will be 1.4 * dead load + 1.6 * live.

Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight a load case that you want to include in the combination; click the mouse.
Enter the factor for this load case in the Load factor = text box. The factor will then be written alongside the
load case / group title.

Repeat for additional load cases. Click the End button when the definition is completed.

The program then requests a title for the combination (the default title is the combination command). Enter a
title or click the button to use the default title. The combination title will be added to the combination
list.

Copy and revise a combination:

To create a copy of an existing combination and revise the copy. The original combination will not be deleted
or revised; refer to the previous option for an explanation.

6.6.6.2 Combinations - revise

The options are:

Revise a combination:
To revise a combination definition. Select the combination and proceed as per Define a combination

Delete a combination:
To delete a combination. Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight the combination that you want to delete; click
the mouse.

Change combinations order:

To rearrange the combination order. Use the mouse/arrow keys to highlight the combination that you want to
move; click the mouse. Select the new location in the list and click the mouse - the selected combination will
be placed before this location; the program will then display the combination list in the revised order.

6.6.6.3 Display combinations list:

To display the combinations defined for the current model.

6.6.6.4 Disable all combinations:

The program will calculate the results for the load cases only (the combinations will not be erased)

Version 12.0 6-36 12/05

STRAP
6.6.7 Time Tables

Specify the times at which tabular results will be calculated and displayed (this option does not apply to graphic
results). The values are also used when appending results to the static result files.

A series of time intervals can be specified. Each interval can then be divided into sub-intervals by defining a
"Step". For example, define a time interval from 6 to 9 seconds, with a Step of 0.5; the program will calculate
the results at 6.0, 6.5, ...... , 8.5 and 9.0 seconds. These are referred to as "Compute times".

In addition, the program can be instructed to display the results at selected intervals only. These are referred
to as "Display times". For the example above, specify that the results will be displayed every third step, i.e. at
6.0, 7.5 and 9.0 seconds.

Select one of the following options:

6.6.7.1 Define computed time table

Specify the times at which tabular results are displayed.

Click the button to return.

Interval
The Time Table is defined as a series of "Intervals:
• Each interval is defined by a start time and the "Interval end" (the start time is the "Interval end" of the
previous interval. In the example displayed there is an interval from to
• Each interval may be sub-divided into "Steps". The interval from 3 to 5 has a step of 0.25 seconds.
For the interval from 3 to 5 seconds, the program will calculate the tabular results at 3.0, 3.25, 3.50, ..., 4.75,
5.00 seconds.

Interval end:
Define the time at the end of the current interval (in seconds)

Interval step:
Define the number of sub-intervals in the current "Interval.
For example, if the interval starts at 3 seconds and ends at 5 seconds and the Step is defined as 0.5 seconds,
results will be computed at t = 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0 seconds

Version 12.0 6-37 12/05

STRAP
Min/Max:
The upper and lower limits of the time table (for information only)

Insert interval:
To insert a new interval in the Time Table:
• enter the correct values of Interval end and Interval step in the Text boxes
• click the Insert interval button

Delete interval:
To delete an interval:
• Click and highlight the interval in the table
• Click the Delete Interval button

Modify step:
To modify a "Step" value:
• Click and highlight the interval in the table
• Enter a new value in the Interval step text box

6.6.7.2 Define times for display/print

Display results at only some of the "Compute times".

To define the "Display times":

• click an interval in the Select interval box
• define a value for Step in the Select display times box, where:
0 = do not display results at any of the compute time step, i.e. only at the interval ends
1 - display results at all compute time steps
n - any other number for a selected number of steps
• Click the Modify time selection button

• When the Display times have been defined for all intervals, click the button.

6.6.7.3 Mode shape range

By default, all results are calculated for the entire range of mode shapes.
Use this option to exclude mode shapes from the calculation:

Version 12.0 6-38 12/05

STRAP

6.6.8 Results - Tabular

Select a result type, the display times and the load cases, then click the button to display the tables.

Result type:
Results are displayed at all nodes.
Moments and forces are displayed for all beams and elements.

Deactivate load case:

This option is displayed only when all load cases (combinations) were selected in the "Load case" option. Load
cases may be temporarily deactivated so that they do not appear in the list of cases (combinations). Use this
option in conjunction with the "Load case" option above to select the load cases (combinations) to be used in
the calculation.

Display times:
Select the times at which the results are to be displayed:
Single time point
Define any time value
Display time table points and maximum results
At all Display times defined by the Intervals, Steps and Sub-step values.
Maximum results only
The program will search for the maximum result within the min-max time range defined in the Time Table
option Note that the program does not search for the maximum result only at the Display times specified
but at all the Compute times.

Display results for elements not on screen:

display results for all elements/nodes even if not displayed because Zoom or Remove options were
selected.
display results for displayed elements/nodes only.

Version 12.0 6-39 12/05

STRAP
Display general maximum values:
Display the overall maximum values for each result:
• the values are displayed at the end of the table.
• the values are calculated from results for displayed elements/nodes only.
• the values are computed from all Compute times, not only Display times.

Load case:
Single load - search for the results in a single load case (combination)
ll load cases- search for the results over all load cases (combinations)

6.6.9 Graphic results

Select a result type, load case/combination, direction and the time domain. To display the graph, click the
button and select a node/beam/element.

Result type:
Select one or more result types:
Nodal results - select a global direction
Element results - select Mx, My, Mxy, Fx, Fy or Fxy
Beam results - select axial force, V2/V3 shear or M2/M3 moment

Load case:
Load case - Select a load case from the list box
Load combination - Select a load combination from the list box

Start/End:
Define a time range for the result display

OK:
Select a node/beam/element; the program will display the result diagram according to the specified parameters.

Version 12.0 6-40 12/05

STRAP
6.6.10 Display/Print loads/History Time table

6.6.10.1 Display

Display the joint loads and the history function in tabular form:

where:
Nodal point forces - Display defined joint loads and/or the base acceleration.
History function - Display the history function intervals (linear) or the sine curves parameters.

6.6.10.2 Print

Print the joint loads and the history function in tabular form:

where:
Nodal point forces - Print defined joint loads and/or the base acceleration.
History function - Print the history function intervals (linear) or the sine curves parameters.
Single load case - Select a load case
All load cases - Print the data for all defined load cases

Version 12.0 6-41 12/05

STRAP
6.6.11 Result files

Update the STRAP result files according to the following options:

Time domain:
Single time point
Use the node/element/beam results at a single time only
Maximum values
Use the maximum values (maximum positive or minimum negative) over the time range specified in the
"Time table" option and calculated at all Compute times.
Minimum values
Use the minimum values (maximum negative or minimum positive) over the time range specified in the
"Time table" option and calculated at all Compute times.
Maximum absolute
Use the maximum absolute value of "Maximum" and "Minimum".

Note:
• If static load cases were defined or revised but not solved, the message -

All static load cases must be solved

before entering this module.

• The program updates several STRAP files:

a. Result files: each dynamic load case is appended to the file.
b. Force files: in order that the number of load cases in this file will correspond to the number of load
cases in the results file, "zero" load cases are appended to the end of the file.
c. Load file
• When writing the results to the static result file, the program creates a load case title that contains the
following information:
- time point/minimum/maximum/absolute maximum
- load cases or combinations (but not "deactivated" cases).
• When writing the results, the program checks if a load case with the identical title exists. If yes, the program
will overwrite the existing load case in the results file. If no, the program will enable the user to either add
a new case to the existing ones or to replace all of the existing dynamic load cases with the new case.
• In the Equilibrium Check for the Forced Vibration load cases created with "Maximum/minimum values",
reaction values will not be correct. These values should be ignored.

Version 12.0 6-42 12/05

STRAP

7 Structural Steel Design

7.1 Steel Design - General
The STRAP Steel design module is a program for the design of structural steel buildings.

The program selects for each member the lightest section which meets the Code requirements. The sections
are chosen from a specified table. Section constraints, design data and intermediate supports may be defined.

Alternatively, the program may be instructed to check the suitability of a section specified by the user.

The program automatically searches for the critical load combination, and checks the section for bending
moments, lateral-torsional buckling, shear, axial forces and combined stresses as well as deflections and
slenderness.

The program may be instructed to select sections according to the methods outlined in any one of the following
structural steel design codes. For more information on the Design Assumption, refer to:
• British Standard BS 5950
Part 1 : 2000, "Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings". Refer to A7.11.
Part 3, Section 3.1 - "Design of Simple and Continuous Composite Beams"
• Eurocode:
Eurocode 3 - Design of Steel Structures - Part 1 , 1992. Refer to A7.12
Eurocode 4 - Design of Composite Steel and Concrete Structures - Part 1, 1990
• AISC - LRFD & ASD - 2005 - Refer to A7.21
AISC - Load and Resistance Factor Design - 1993. Refer to A7.13
AISC - Allowable Stress Design - 1989. Refer to A7.14
• CSA/CAN S16-01 - Limit States Design of Steel Structures - 2005. Refer to A7.17
• AASHTO - LRFD Bridge Design Specifications - 1999. Refer to A7.15
• AASHTO - Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (ASD) - 1996. Refer to A7.16
• SABS 0162-1: 1993. Refer to A7.17
• IS:800 - Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel
- 1984. Refer to A7.18
- 2003 (LRFD). Refer to A7.19
IS:802 - Use of Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers (1995)
• GBJ 17 88 - Specification for the Design of Steel Structures - 1988. Refer to A7.20

Cold formed:
• AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. Refer to A7.31
- 1986 Edition with 1989 Addendum - ASD only
- 1999 Edition - ASD and LRFD
• CSA S136 - 94. Refer to A7.32
• Eurocode 3 - Part 1.3. Refer to A7.33
• BS 5950 - Part 5 : 1998 - “Code of practice for design of cold-formed thin gauge sections”

The program strives to design the lightest structure possible; the section chosen is the one with the least self-
weight that satisfies all of the design criteria for all loading combinations and meets the Code requirements.

For all Limit States Codes (all Codes except AISC/AASHTO/AISI - ASD and IS:800):

The factored combinations may be defined in STRAP loading or in the "Combinations" option after the solution.
The choice does not affect any of the design calculations except for deflections which are based on service
loads. The module assumes that load CASES are unfactored, i.e the combinations were defined after the
solution. If the factored combinations were defined in Loading, the deflection results for the load cases will also
be factored. The allowable deflection limit should then be increased proportionally. Refer to 7.4.4 - Allowable
deflection for an example.

Version 12.0 7-1 12/05

STRAP
7.1.1 Steel section tables and selection

The program contains three complete section tables - the "master" table.
• British sections (CONSTRADO tables)
• American sections (ASTM)
• European sections (Euronorm)
• Canadian
• South African
• Indian

Cold-formed sections may be added to the master tables; refer to 1.13.2 - User steel table.

In addition:
• A "user" steel table may be created. This table can contain sections from any or all of the three tables
above, or user-defined rolled/cold-formed sections. Refer to 1.13.2 - User steel table for instructions.
• additional “built-up" sections may be defined by specifying dimensions; the program will assume that these
sections are welded shapes.
• Combined (rolled) sections may be defined (2L, I+[, ][, etc).

The following terminology is used throughout the program:

• Master table: The initial complete table of steel sections (British, American, European, etc. or User).
• Model table: The section table for the current model, containing the sections from the selected master
table.
• Section type: Section classification according to shape, e.g. CHANNEL, RHS, Z+LIPS, etc.
• Group: A user-defined list of sections which may contain sections from several types.

The program either selects a suitable section from a list or checks a specified section.

In the following cases, the program will by default check the section defined in STRAP geometry:
• if the section properties of the member were defined as a steel section using the Steel table option.
• “combined” sections, defined in the STRAP geometry or in the Steel Postprocessor
• if the section properties of the member were defined using the Define the section dimensions option, the
program will assume that the member has a Built-up welded section with the same dimensions.
Note that only "Pipe", "Tubes", "L shape" and symmetric "[ shape", "I shape" and "T shape" sections will be
converted to Built-Up sections.
• if a "tapered section" was defined in STRAP and the properties at both ends of the member were defined
using the Define the section dimensions option, the program will check the tapered section.

For all other STRAP properties, the program will ignore the STRAP properties and must be instructed to select
the lightest suitable section from a user-defined list or to check a specified section. The cases are:
• "dimension" section types - "Rectangular" and unsymmetric "[ shape", "I shape" and "T shape" sections.
• properties defined with the section constants "A=,I=" option
• tapered sections defined with properties other than acceptable "built-up" shapes.
• if the property was defined with a steel section not in the current model table.

A warning will be displayed at the start of the program. For example:

Version 12.0 7-2 12/05

STRAP
When selecting a suitable section, the program checks sections from a specified list, beginning from the lightest
one, until it finds the first adequate section. If the program had to search the complete "master" table when
designing each member in the model, the selection process would be very time consuming.

To limit the number of sections that the program is allowed to check, instruct the program to select the section
from a single type or from a predefined group of sections only.

Refer to 7.5 - Sections

7.1.2 Creating a Steel Structure from the STRAP Model

Member selection is automatic; the program designs all beams in sequence without prompting for information.

Therefore, all data and information relevant to the design of the members as required by the Code must be
entered before member selection begins.

In many cases the model geometry as defined in STRAP does not provide sufficient information for the Code
to carry out an accurate design.

For example, Figure (a) shows a typical steel floor plan. Figure (b) shows the same floor as analyzed in
STRAP. It is obvious that the program is unable to determine which STRAP members form continuous beams,
i.e. which chains of members must be designed as a single unit by the program.

For example, members 21-22-23-24-25-50 form a single beam.

(a) (b)

Another important item that must be defined in the module is the location of "intermediate supports". The
support locations are required by the program in order to automatically determine the unsupported length for
beams and the design length for columns.

• beam (a) has a continuous support on its upper flange,

and is unsupported along the entire bottom flange.

• beam (b) has a single support on its upper and lower

flanges.

• beam (c) is unsupported on its upper flange and has a

single support on its lower flange.

If the upper flange is entirely in compression, the section

required for each of the beams (a),(b),(c) will be different.
As the support data is not available from the STRAP
geometry, it must be defined in this module.

Similarly, column (e) has an unsupported length about its

minor axis double that of column (d).

Version 12.0 7-3 12/05

STRAP
Other data items required for design are:
• allowable maximum deflection
• allowable maximum slenderness (tension and compression)
• beam end support conditions
• column effective length factors
• section orientation
• steel grade

Additional design constraints for section selection may also be specified:

• minimum and/or maximum section dimensions for each member.
• a series of members may be defined as "identical", i.e. the same section will be selected for all members
in the series.

Version 12.0 7-4 12/05

STRAP
7.2 Steel design - main menu
For general information on the steel design module, refer to 7.1 - Steel design - General.

Select one of the following options:

• define and revise section groups
• define and revise built-up sections
• replace model table. Refer to 7.3.

To revise the default parameter values displayed at the bottom of the screen. Refer to 7.4.

For a specified member, to limit the section selection to:

• a section type
• a section group
• a specified section. Refer to 7.5.

To specify that a single section must be selected for a series of members. Refer to 7.6.

To define the orientation of the section major/minor axes relative to the section
local x2/x3 axes, i.e. to rotate the section by 90° about the section x1 axis. Refer to 7.7.

To specify different parameters for individual beams (if a parameter is not defined
for a specific beam, the default parameter is used). Refer to 7.8.
To define intermediate supports along a member to allow the program to calculate effective
lengths. Intermediate supports may be defined for both bending and compression design:
• lateral-torsional buckling: define the location of intermediate supports on the
• top and/or bottom faces of the section.
• buckling: define intermediate supports about the major and/or minor axes. Refer to 7.9.
To define the location of cantilevers, and:
BS5950, IS:800- Define the "Conditions at Support" at the ends of beams and cantilevers.
AISC - Specify main/secondary members.
Eurocode 3 - Define the effective length factor for LTB. Refer to 7.10.

Use this option to combine members into a single design unit. Refer to 7.11.

To start the design and section selection process, according to the parameters
specified in the previous options. Refer to 7.12.

From the menu bar:

File
To leave the module. Note that the STRAP geometry may be updated with the selected sections. Refer to
7.18.

Display
To display input data graphically. Refer to 7.13.

Version 12.0 7-5 12/05

STRAP
Results
• to display and/or print the tabular results
• to graphically display the load/capacity ratios
Refer to 7.14.

Data Tables
To display tables showing the input data (design parameters, constraints and supports). Refer to 7.15.

Loads
• axial load reduction: specify load cases as "live" and define reduction factor
• composite beams: specify load cases as applied to steel or to composite beam
• deflections: define different allowable deflections for different load combinations
Refer to 7.17.

Sway
To select new sections that limit the sway/drift at specified nodes to user-defined values. Refer to 7.16.

Version 12.0 7-6 12/05

STRAP
7.3 Section Table

7.3.1 Define a new section group

A group is a subset of the current model table, and the program can be instructed to select the section for a
particular member from a specified group.

Examples: groups may be defined to include -

• economical sections only
• available sections only
• all angles and channels with a limited range of flange widths
It is recommended that groups be defined for every model because the time required for member
selection will be reduced as the number of possible sections for each member is reduced.

The program displays a list of the section types and section names that are in the model table. The names of
section types currently included in the group appear highlighted. For example:

Version 12.0 7-7 12/05

STRAP
Then select the sections that are to be included in the group:
• click one of the section types in the left list box; the sections in this type will be displayed in the right list box.
• only highlighted sections are included in the group; click the section name to include it in the group or to
remove it from the group
• use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the list box to display the continuation of the section list.
• similarly select sections for all section types
• click to end the group definition.

Note:
• a section group may contain a maximum of 640 sections.
• built-up sections cannot be included in a group.

7.3.2 Define a combined sections group

Define a group of combined section.

• Select a section type from the list in the menu:

• specify additional information if required, e.g. spacing, long/short legs back-to-back. For example, 2L:

• select the sections from the list box as in regular griup definition. In the above example, the complete list
of single angles will be displayed.

In the above example, a group will be created containing the double angle sections made from the single angle
sections selected from the master list, all with long legs back-to-back and all with the same spacing.

7.3.3 Edit an Existing Section Group

A list of the existing groups is displayed on the screen; select one.

Edit the sections in the group as explained in 7.3.1 - Define a new section group.

Version 12.0 7-8 12/05

STRAP
7.3.4 Define/Revise Built-up Sections
Use this option to define:
• Single built-up sections. I, U, T, L, round/hollow tubes or tapered sections may be defined by entering the
section dimensions; The program will assume that these defined sections are welded with reference to
various clauses in the Code. All required properties are calculated automatically by the program from the
dimensions. No rounded corners are assumed.

Built-up sections cannot be selected by the program during automatic design; the user may request that
such a section be specifically checked by the program (Refer to 7.5 - Sections)
• Combined rolled sections:

Select a property to be defined:

In the above table, properties 1-3 were defined in STRAP geometry using the "Table" option, while property
4 is a built-up section previously defined in this option or in STRAP geometry using the "Section dimensions"
options.

Enter the section number; to define a new section, select an "Undefined" section. A list of the possible section
types is displayed:

Select a type:
• for welded single sections, define the section dimensions according to the
diagram displayed.
• for combined sections, select the shapes and define additional properties
• Unsym I has different flange thicknesses
• Unsym Tube may have different thicknesses on all four sides
• Box section defines typical sections for box-girder bridges
The default section orientation is identical to that explained in Major / minor.

Note:
• if the default dimension in STRAP are "feet" or "inch", define the built-up
section dimensions in inches. For all other default length dimensions, define
the built-up section dimensions in millimeters.
• tapered sections must be defined with built-up sections at both ends.

Version 12.0 7-9 12/05

STRAP
7.3.5 Display/Print Built-up Sections Table

To display / print the built-up section table, including section dimensions and properties.

7.3.6 Replace sections file

To reset the model table to any of the "master" tables (British, American or European, etc. or User-defined).

Note:
• Selecting this option will erase all Groups previously defined and delete all section type assignments to
individual beams.

Select a table (the list of national steel tables may vary according to country of installation):

The British/American/European, etc. steel table:

To copy the appropriate national steel table.

User defined steel table:

To copy the user-defined steel table, which may contain sections from any or all of the above tables or user-
defined sections.

This option is displayed only if the user table exists. A user steel table is created by the User steel table utility
(STRAP main menu - Files).

A section table from another model:

To copy the section table that you defined for another STRAP model. A list of models will appear on the screen;
select one of them.

7.3.7 Welded/hot-rolled

The program, by default, assumes that all sections from the tables are hot-rolled and that all user-defined
sections are welded and designs them according to the relevant code provisions.

Use this option to change the default assumption.

Version 12.0 7-10 12/05

STRAP
7.4 Default parameters
The default parameters are design codes (hot-rolled and cold-formed), maximum slenderness (compression
and tension members), maximum deflection, steel grade, net tension area factor, end connection types
(BS5950, IS:800-84 only) and building type (AISC, CSA and IS:800-84).

The default parameter values are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

The default parameters are used when design parameters have not been defined for individual members using
the Parameters option (refer to 7.8).

Note:
• the effective length factors for columns, kx and ky, are assumed by default to be 1.0. This default value
cannot be revised. To specify a different value for selected members, refer to 7.8 - Parameters.
• the maximum allowable tension slenderness cannot be modified for individual members.

Click on one of the “tabs:” in the dialog box:

7.4.1 Default parameters - Cold Formed

Holes in web
Specify the diameter of the web holes; the program will calculate the reduced section properties according to
AISI - Section B2.2.

Note:
• the area is removed from each web element in the section
• all stiffened elements are assumed to be webs

For example: the specified area will be removed twice in back-to-back channels.

Strength increase
The program will calculate the increase in strength due to cold forming according to AISI - Section A7.2 in
the Code; Fya will be calculated according to Eq. A7.2-1 and will be substituted for Fy when calculating axial
capacity, flexural capacity and for the combined stress checks.
Strength increase from cold forming will not be calculated.

Note that this option is specified for the entire model and is not a parameter for specific members.

Version 12.0 7-11 12/05

STRAP
Design code
Select one of the Cold-formed design codes displayed in the menu.

Note:
• the selected cold-formed Code applies only to members limited to a cold-formed type or section in the
Sections option.
• refer to Appendix A.7 - Design assumptions for detailed explanations on the Code equations used by the
program.
• All code modules are purchased separately ; contact your STRAP dealer for further information.

7.4.2 Default parameters - composite

Specify the default parameters and dimensions for composite beams.

To design a composite beam:

• specify the default parameters (Composite and/or Composite - additional)
• specify Parameters for individual beams if necessary (Composite and/or Composite - additional)
• specify Composite in the Sections option for all composite beams

Nominal concrete strength

Enter the nominal concrete strength used in the current design code; the program will automatically reduce
the strength by the appropriate factors.

Normal/lightweight concrete
The modulus-of elasticity, Ec, (and hence the modular ratio, n) is revised for lightweight concrete, as follows:

AISC-ASD - normal: w = 145 psf

lightweight: w = 110 psf
- (ACI 318 - 8.5.1)
- Ec, n are revised only for the calculation of deflections and not for stress computations. (I2-2)

AISC-LRFD - w, Ec: similar to AISC-ASD

AASHTO-LRFD
AASHTO-ASD

CSA S16. - lightweight: gc = 1750 kg/m^3

(CSA A23.3 - Eq. 8-6)

- normal:

Version 12.0 7-12 12/05

STRAP
BS5950 - normal: a = 6/18 (BS5950 - part 3 - Table 1)
- lightweight: a = 10/25

IS:800 - modular ratio m = Es/Ec

Es = 200000

Dimensions
The following dimensions are required:

Studs
There are two options for stud design:
Compute no. of studs
The program will compute the total number of studs required for full capacity
No. of studs per beam
Specify the number of studs in the positive moment region of the beam.

If the user specifies the number of connectors in the positive moment region and the number is less than the
number required to develop the positive moment capacity of the section, the program designates the beam as
having a "partial shear connection" and reduces the Bending capacity accordingly (by reducing the effective
slab width).

The number of connectors in negative moment regions cannot be specified. If reinforcement in the topping is
specified, the program assumes full shear connection in the negative moment region; hence the user should
not specify topping reinforcement if the required number of connectors cannot be provided.

For both options, specify the shear capacity of a single stud.

Note: for BS5950 only - the program will use 80% of the capacity specified.

Reinforcement
The reinforcement in the slab will increase the section capacity in regions of negative (hogging) moment, i.e.
when the slab is in tension.

The program assumes that the reinforcement is located in the centre of the concrete slab.
Enter:
• the total reinforcement area
• the nominal value of fy

Note:
The number of shear connectors in negative moment regions cannot be specified. If reinforcement in the
topping is specified, the program assumes full shear connection in the negative moment region; hence the user
should not specify topping reinforcement if the required number of connectors cannot be provided.

Version 12.0 7-13 12/05

STRAP
7.4.3 Default - composite - additional

Reduction factor
The program converts the concrete slab to an equivalent steel section by reducing the slab width according to
the modular ratio (Es/Eb).

Many codes specify a different modular ratio for transient (short-term) and long-term loading; specify the
relationship between the long-term and short-term modular ratios:
• BS5950 - Part 3 : Refer to Section 4.1, Table 1
• AASHTO - LRFD : Refer to Section 6.10.5.1.1b
• AASHTO - ASD : Refer to Section 10.38.1.4

All other Codes do not refer to this factor. However, the program will use the factor for all Codes if long-term
and short-term loads are specified.

Axial
Select one of the following options for design of axial forces in composite sections:
Ignore
The program ignores completely the axial forces present in all load cases.
Add to steel section only
The program assumes that the entire axial force is taken by the steel section and that no axial force is
present in the concrete slab.

Moments
Select one of the following options for design of minor axis moments in composite sections:
Ignore
The program ignores completely the minor axis moments present in all load cases.
Add to steel section only
The program assumes that the entire minor axis moment is taken by the steel section and that the slab
does not contribute the minor axis strength.

Version 12.0 7-14 12/05

STRAP
7.4.4 Default - general

Allowable deflection:
The maximum allowable deflection expressed as L/x. e.g. to specify a maximum deflection of L/300, enter
"300".

Note that deflections must be calculated from service loads. As the program assumes that the STRAP loading
cases contain service loads, the program sets all the load factors equal to 1.00 when calculating the deflection
for each load combination.

If the factored combinations were defined in the STRAP load definition module and not in the Combinations
option, the STRAP deflections will also be factored, so the allowable deflection should be increased by 1.5.

Allowable slenderness:
The maximum Kl/r value allowed (about any axis) for a member.

Different values may be defined for tension and compression.

Tension area (% of gross area):

A factor to calculate the net area for tension members. For example, if An = 0.9Ag , enter 90%.
• IS:800 - the effective section area computed by the program is multiplied by this factor
• This option is applicable for hot-rolled sections only. For cold-formed sections, the net area is calculated
by deducting the diameter of the holes in the web (defined in 7.8 - Parameters).

Combined forces
The program calculates various capacities for combined forces - major and minor axis moments, moment and
axial load, moment and shear.

Two options are available:

Use maximum result in each direction
The program combines the maximum result from each type, even though they may not be at the same
location. For example, in a typical beam, the maximum shear is at the support while the maximum moment
is at the mid-span. This approach is conservative, but faster.
Design at 1/10 of beam
The program calculates the combined forces at 11 points along the length of the beam, using the actual
forces at each point, and uses the worst case for design. This approach is more accurate, but slower.

Version 12.0 7-15 12/05

STRAP
Angles - principal axes
Two options are available for the design of angles, and user-defined doubly unsymmetric sections(defined
in the Section editor - CROSEC utility):
The program will use the principal axis properties, Iu, Iv, etc. - for designing these sections
The program will use the major/minor axis properties, Ix, Iy, etc. - for designing these sections
Note:
• this option applies only to LTB, bending and deflection calculations (but not axial compression, where
principal axes are always used in the calculation).

7.4.5 Default - steel grade

Select the steel grade or define your own:

User defined: define the yield strength.

• For AISC/AASHTO Codes: Fy must be entered in ksi.
• For other codes: py must be entered in N/mm².

CSA, SABS:Hollow structural sections may be designated as CSA Standard G40.20, Class C or Class H.

Version 12.0 7-16 12/05

STRAP
7.4.6 Code

Use this option to specify the design codes for hot-rolled and built-up sections. The Codes available are:

Note:
• refer to App. A7 “Design assumptions” for detailed information on the Code equations used by the program.
• Indian Standard:
- set the first checkbox to to use the IS800:1984 (ASD) code.
- set the second checkbox to to calculate axial strength according to IS802 (all other strength values
will be calculated according to the selected IS:800 Code).
• All code modules are purchased separately ; contact your STRAP dealer for further information.

7.4.7 End conditions

• AISC/AASHTO/CSA/IS800-84 – Building type

The building must be classified as BRACED or UNBRACED. This parameter is required for:

- AISC-ASD: Cb (Section F - Moment - non-compact): Cb = 1.0 for braced buildings

Cm (Section H - Combined Stresses): Cm = 0.85 for unbraced buildings
- AISC-LRFD: Equation C1-1: braced frames: Mu = B1Mnt
unbraced frames: Mu = B2Mlt
- AASHTO-ASD: Cb (Section 10.32 and Table 10.32.1A): same assumption as for AISC-ASD
Cm (Section 10.36 - Combined Stresses): Value from Table 10.36a).
- AASHTO-LRFD: Equation 4.5.3.2.2b-1: braced frames: Mc = dbM2b
unbraced frames: Mc = dsM2s
- CSA S16-01: U1x and U1y, according to Clause 13.8.2 (a)(b)(c)
- IS:800-84: Cm = 0.85 for unbraced buildings (7.1.1)
Cm = 1.00 for braced buildings

• For all other Codes and options, refer to 7.10.

Version 12.0 7-17 12/05

STRAP
7.4.8 Defaults - combined section

Define additional default data for members fabricated from several sections. The program uses this data when
calculating the slenderness of the section.

Connectors spacing
Specify the spacing between the connectors:

Maximum allowed by the code

The program calculates the maximum spacing allowed by the Code and uses this value.
Distance =
Specify any other distance

Connection stiffness
For Eurocode only:
Select:
Members are closely spaced
Referring to Code Figure 5.9.7, these are standard built-up section (not battened) such as double angles
back-to-back, etc.
Connector moment-of-inertia =
For battened sections, specify Ib = the in-plane second moment of area of one batten. Refer to Section
5.9.3.2 in the Code.

Connection type
For American codes only:
Specify the default connection type, Welded or Snug bolted.
For members that are not in contact, always select Snug bolted.

Version 12.0 7-18 12/05

STRAP
7.4.9 Defaults - composite column

Specify the default parameters for composite columns:

The program can calculate the following columns:

• all sections encased in concrete, including pipes and RHS
• pipes and RHS filled with concrete

Composite column - size

Two options are available:

Column size
The concrete column size (B,H) is specified, the program searches for the smallest steel section that fits into
the concrete rectangle
Cover from shape
The concrete cover (C1, C2) is specified; the program determines the corresponding concrete rectangle
dimensions each time it selects a steel section to be checked.

Note:
• The dimensions (B,H or C1,C2) are relative to the
major/minor axes of the steel section.

Composite column - reinforcement

Add longitudinal reinforcement to composite columns. Specify -
• the total area
• the design stress of the reinforcement

Note:
• the additional reinforcement is used to calculate axial capacity only and its location is not relevant. The user
must ensure that the specified cover value is sufficient to accommodate this reinforcement.

Version 12.0 7-19 12/05

STRAP
7.5 Sections
For each member, the program -
• searches through a user-defined section list (not the model table) in order to find the lightest adequate
section, or
• checks a specified section (hot rolled, cold-formed or built-up).

The beam may also be specified as:

• composite (steel section + concrete topping)
• steel joist (American steel table only)

A user-defined list or specified section must be defined for each member; the program will not search
the entire model table.

A different list may be specified for each member; after the list is defined, select beams using the standard
Beam Selection option.

Limit selection to a section type:

Instruct the program to check only the sections of one type in the model table. Select a type from the pull-down
menu.

If a 'cold-formed' section type is selected, the program will automatically check the section capacity according
to the Cold-formed Code selected in Defaults.

Select the members limited to this section type using the standard Beam Selection option.

Limit selection to a section group:

The program displays a pull-down menu with a list of the existing group names .

At the same time, you may further limit the selection by specifying upper and lower limits for the section
dimensions.

Select a group and assign this selection to specified beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

Version 12.0 7-20 12/05

STRAP
Check a specified section:
Instruct the program to check a specified section only. Select the section type and section name from the pull-
down menus displayed and assign this selection to specified beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

If a 'cold-formed' section is selected, the program will automatically check the section capacity according to the
Cold-formed Code selected in Defaults.

Check a specified built-up section:

Instruct the program to check an existing built-up section only. Select the section from the list displayed in the
pull-down menu and assign this selection to specified beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

Note that built-up sections can only be checked; they cannot be added to groups.

Check section from geometry:

Check the section currently in the STRAP geometry file for the selected members. This option resets the
Section option to the program default.

Note that the geometry section property must be a steel section included in the model table.

Limit section dimensions:

For "Type" and "Groups", you may further limit the selection by specifying upper and lower limits for the section
dimensions.

Enter the dimensions according to the units displayed.

Units:
inch - if the STRAP default length unit is "feet" or "inch"
mm - for all other STRAP default units.

Composite
Composite beam
the program will select a steel section assuming that the beam is composite, i.e, a steel beam with a
concrete topping. The topping dimensions and properties are defined in the Default and Parameters
options. The topping dimensions remain constant during the design process.
Composite column
the program will select a steel section assuming that the column is composite, i.e, an encased or filled steel
section. The concrete dimensions/cover, properties and additional reinforcement are defined in the Default
and Parameters options.

Version 12.0 7-21 12/05

STRAP
7.6 Same section
Specify a list of members that must have identical sections.

Note:
• If different section types were specified for the various members in an identical list, the program will use the
section type of the lowest numbered member in the list for all of the members.
• If Check a specified section was selected for a member in an identical list, the identical command will be
ignored.
• If a member selected already belongs to an identical list, the two lists will be combined.

Select one of the following options:

Select a series of identical beams:

Use the standard beam selection option to select members which are to be "Identical".

Select beams by their property number:

Specify the elements in 'same section' groups according to geometry property groups:

• Click property groups in the list box; each highlighted property number will create one 'same section' group,
or -
• Click "Select all' to select all of the property groups in the list box.
• if you check the "Apply this option ..." checkbox, the program will display the standard element selection
option; select elements - only the specified elements that are also in highlighted geometry property groups
will be included in the 'same section' groups.

Note: If a member selected already belongs to an identical list, the two lists will be combined.

Version 12.0 7-22 12/05

STRAP
Define lines of identical beams:
Select a member located on a line of continuous members; the program will automatically create an "identical"
list that includes the specified member and all preceding and following ones.

Note that the program will add preceding/following members to the list only if the angle between the two
adjacent members is less than 30°.

Select beams using the standard beam selection option.

Example: The two beams highlighted with the rectangular blip are selected; the two "identical" series are
automatically generated.

Remove beams from “identical” list:

Remove beams from identical groups using the standard beam selection option.

Version 12.0 7-23 12/05

STRAP
7.7 Major / Minor

The program assumes by default that the section orientation of a member is as currently defined in STRAP
geometry, unless the orientation was revised using this option:
• the section may be aligned so that its major axis resists M2 moments or M3 moments.
• for sections not symmetric about one axis, flange location may also be specified.

The default alignment is determined as follows:

Axis resisting moment:

STRAP geometry I3 > I2 I2 > I3 I2 = I3

Plane frame Major Minor Minor

Plane grid Minor Major Major

Space frame Major resists M3 Major resists M2 Major resists M3

Select one of the following options:

• Major minor axis - refer to 7.7.1.

• Flange location - refer to 7.7.2.

7.7.1 Major/minor

Select one of the following options:

Plane frames:

Space frames:

Version 12.0 7-24 12/05

STRAP
The major/minor axes for the standard steel sections are:

Note that these assumptions for orientation of major/minor axes remain unchanged even if the minor axis
moment-of-inertia is greater than that of the major axis.

7.7.2 Major/minor- flange

The design of non-symmetric sections is dependant on the location of the flange:

• stresses at opposite faces of the section are not equal - Figure (a)
• maximum stresses for major/minor axes are not at the same point - Figure (b)

The program, by default, combines the maximum stresses, even if they are not at the same point (Worst flange
location in the following menu).

This option allows the exact orientation of the section to be specified, relative to the local axes:

Version 12.0 7-25 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• this option applies only to sections defined using the elastic modulus (all working stress - ASD - codes and
certain sections in ultimate stress - LRFD - codes)
• for all other non-symmetric sections, this option defines the location of the shear center relative to the
center-of gravity of the section"

Version 12.0 7-26 12/05

STRAP
7.8 Parameters
Define the design parameters for specified members. If a parameter is not defined for a specific member using
this option, the program will use the default value when designing the member.

• AISC - LRFD/ASD, AASHTO-ASD/LRFD and CSA/SABS - refer to 7.8.1.

• BS 5950 - refer to 7.8.2.
• Eurocode 3/IS800 - refer to 7.8.3.
• GBJ 17 88 - refer to 7.8.4

7.8.1 Parameters - AISC/AASHTO/CSA/SABS

Only parameters with defined values will be used; all other parameters will not be revised for the
selected members.

Allowable
Refer to 7.4.4

Steel grade
Refer to 7.4.5

Parameters - minor axis

In space models, analysis results may include relatively small minor axis values for moments, deflections , etc.
which may be ignored for certain members, e.g. a floor slab prevents minor axis bending. These small values
may however cause the program to select a larger section.

This option instructs the program to ignore specified design checks for selected members:

Version 12.0 7-27 12/05

STRAP
Effective length factors

To specify the effective length ratio Le/L about both axes.

For major/minor axis, select one of the following from the list box:
• Define directly: enter the value for kx / ky
• Compute
Instruct the program to compute the factors according to the Code. The program calculates the k-factors
according to the standard alignment charts, such as Figure C-C2.2 in the Code commentary.

The stiffness of members attached to "Restraints" (pinned or fixed supports) defined in STRAP geometry
are calculated according to the note in Fig. C-C2.2, as follows:
- pinned: GB = 10.
- fixed: GB = 1.

For non-symmetric sections:

This option apples only to the axial compression calculation (not bending, LTB or deflection).

The program calculates buckling about both the geometric axes and the principal axes
(u,v). Supports are defined only about the geometric axes (x,y). To apply supports to
the principal axes, specify that certain geometric axis supports also act in one or more
principal axis directions:
When only X or Y are restrained - U and V are free
when there is only one geometric axis restraint defined (either X or Y) - both U
and V will be assumed free
When only X or Y are restrained - U and V are restrained
when there is only one geometric axis restraint defined (either X or Y) - both U
and V will be assumed restrained
X restrained = U restrained; Y restrained = V restrained
the U restraint will be identical to the X restraint; the V restraint will be identical
to the Y restraint.

Note that all points supported in both X and Y will automatically be supported in both U and V.

Example: the following column has three supports defined as shown, creating four design segments a,b,c,d -

Version 12.0 7-28 12/05

STRAP

Note that only the potentially critical checks are listed in the table.

Note:
• the program always calculates the factors using the sections defined in STRAP geometry, not the sections
selected by the steel design module, i.e. the factors will not change when new sections are selected or
specified.
• if the beam is part of a "combined" beam, the program calculates kx/ky for the combined beam.
• intermediate supports and "combined" beam end conditions are ignored by the program.
• in plane models, the program calculates the factor for the in-plane axis only.

Parameters - composite
Specify the default parameters and dimensions for composite beams.

To design a composite beam:

• specify the default parameters (Composite and/or Composite - additional)
• specify Parameters for individual beams if necessary (Composite and/or Composite - additional)
• specify Composite in the Sections option for all composite beams

• Topping for [-section:

Select one of the following options:

• All others options - refer to 7.4.2.

Version 12.0 7-29 12/05

STRAP
Parameters - composite (additional)

• Topping flange:
The program, by default, assumes that the concrete topping is located on the side of the steel beam in the
positive direction of the closest global axis.

Select one of the following directions:

• All other options - refer to 7.4.3.

Parameters - torsion
Specify the torsion parameters for the selected beams:

• Check beam for torsion:

include torsional moments in the design check
ignore torsional moments

• Warping restraint:
The ends of the beam may be either free or restrained for warping.

Version 12.0 7-30 12/05

STRAP

Note:
• warping stresses are generated only when ends are restrained
• when a beam is free at one end and restrained at the other, the program calculates the warping stresses
along the length of the beam according to the solution for a beam subjected to a linearly varying torsional
moment.

Select one of the following options:

No change
Do not revise the warping restraint detail for the selected beams
Flange is free to warp
No warping stresses will be generated in the selected beams
Flange is restrained
Warping stresses will be generated in the selected beams

Refer also to Appendix A7 - Torsion - general.

Parameters - combined sections

Refer to 7.4.8

Parameters - composite columns

Refer to 7.4.9

7.8.2 Parameters - BS5950

Only parameters with defined values will be used; all other parameters will not be revised for the
selected members.

Allowable - refer to 7.4.4

Steel grade - refer to 7.4.5
Combined sections - refer to 7.4.8
Composite columns - refer to 7.4.9
Minor axis - refer to 7.8.1
Composite - refer to 7.8.1
Composite additional - refer to 7.8.1
Torsion - refer to 7.8.1

Version 12.0 7-31 12/05

STRAP
Destabilizing load

BS5950 - to specify that a destabilizing load as defined in § 4.3.4 acts on selected members.
Eurocode - when using equation (F.2) to calculate Mcr for lateral-torsional buckling for "loaded" beams, the
program calculates Zg as the maximum distance from the shear centre to the face of the beam.
GBJ 17 88 - for calculation of factor β b for lateral-torsional buckling, a destabilizing load indicates a
transverse load acting on the compression flange

Effective length factors

To specify the effective length ratio Le/L about both axes.

For major/minor axis, select one of the following from the list box:
• Defined directly: enter the value for kx / ky
• Compute
Instruct the program to compute the factors according to the Code.

Referring to BS5950 Appendix E, § 4.7.2 and Figures 23 to 26, instruct the program to calculate the relative
stiffnesses of the members framing into the end nodes.

Braced frame - the program will use Table 23.

Unbraced frame - the program will use Table 24.
Partial bracing - the program will request the value of "k3".

The stiffness of members attached to "Restraints" (pinned or fixed supports) defined in STRAP geometry
are calculated according to § 5.1.2.4, as follows:
• pinned: k2 = 1.0/1.1
• fixed: k2 = 0.5

For intermediate supports in non-symmetric sections, refer to 7.8.1.

Note:
• the program always calculates the factors from the sections defined in STRAP geometry, not the sections
selected by the steel module, i.e. the factors will not change when new sections are selected or specified.
• if the beam is part of a "combined" beam, the program calculates kx/ky for the combined beam.
• intermediate supports and "combined" beam end conditions are ignored by the program.
• in plane models, the program calculates the factor for the in-plane axis only.

Version 12.0 7-32 12/05

STRAP
7.8.3 Parameters - Eurocode 3/IS800

Only defined parameters will be used; all other parameters will not be revised for the selected
members.
Allowable - refer to 7.4.4
Steel grade - refer to 7.4.5
Combined sections - refer to 7.4.8
Composite columns - refer to 7.4.9
Minor axis - refer to 7.8.1
Composite - refer to 7.8.1
Composite additional - refer to 7.8.1
Torsion - refer to 7.8.1
Destabilizing load - refer to 7.8.2

Effective length factors

To specify the effective length ratio Le/L about both axes.

For major/minor axis, select one of the following from

the list box:
• Define directly: enter the value for kx / ky
• Compute
Instruct the program to compute the factors
according to the Code.

The program calculates the k-factors according to:

- Eurocode: Figures E.2.1 and E.2.2
- IS:800: Figures C-1 and C-2

The stiffness of members attached to "Restraints" (pinned or fixed supports) defined in STRAP geometry
are calculated according to BS5950 - § 5.1.2.4, as follows:
- pinned: ç2 (â2) = 1.0/1.1
- fixed: ç2 (â2) = 0.5

For intermediate supports in non-symmetric sections, refer to 7.8.1.

Note:
• the program always calculates the factors using the sections defined in STRAP geometry, not the sections
selected by the steel module, i.e. the factors will not change when new sections are selected or specified.
• if the beam is part of a "combined" beam, the program calculates kx/ky for the combined beam.
• intermediate supports and "combined" beam end conditions are ignored by the program.
• in plane models, the program calculates the factor for the in-plane axis only.

Version 12.0 7-33 12/05

STRAP
7.8.4 Parameters - GBJ 17 88

Only parameters with defined values will be used; all other parameters will not be revised for the
selected members.

Allowable - refer to 7.4.4

Steel grade - refer to 7.4.5
Combined sections - refer to 7.4.8
Composite columns - refer to 7.4.9
Minor axis - refer to 7.8.1
Composite - refer to 7.8.1
Composite additional - refer to 7.8.1
Torsion - refer to 7.8.1
Destabilizing load - refer to 7.8.2

Effective length factors

To specify the effective length ratio K = µ =Le/L about both axes.

For major/minor axis, select one of the following from the list box:
• Define directly: enter the value for kx / ky
• Compute
Instruct the program to compute the factors according to the Code.

The program calculates the k-factors according to the equations in the Code for frames with/without joint
translation.

The stiffness of members attached to "Restraints" (pinned or fixed supports) defined in STRAP geometry
are calculated as follows:
- pinned: K2 = 0.0
- fixed: K2 = infinity

For intermediate supports in non-symmetric sections, refer to 7.8.1.

Version 12.0 7-34 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• the program always calculates the factors using the sections defined in STRAP geometry, not the sections
selected by the postprocessor, i.e. the factors will not change when new sections are selected or specified.
• if the beam is part of a "combined" beam, the program calculates kx/ky for the combined beam.
• intermediate supports and "combined" beam end conditions are ignored by the program.
• in plane models, the program calculates the factor for the in-plane axis only.

Design
Specify the following design method options for selected members:

Use elastic design

Can be selected for both section classifications (plastic and non-plastic).
The following option can be selected for elastic design only:
Member is subject to direct dynamic load
the plastic adaption coefficient used for the section capacity check is equal to 1.00 when direct dynamic
load is specified.

Use plastic design

Plastic design can be carried out only for sections classified as plastic. Non-plastic sections will always be
deigned using the elastic method even if 'plastic' was specified.

Version 12.0 7-35 12/05

STRAP
7.9 Supports
Use this option to define the intermediate supports along the length of a member to allow the program to
calculate effective lengths.

Supports may be defined at any location along the span of a member or as continuous along the entire span.
The maximum number of individual supports that may be defined for a single member is 10.

Intermediate supports may be defined for both bending and compression design:

• Bending:
For lateral-torsional buckling check, define the supports at the top and/or bottom faces of the section. The
program will calculate lateral-torsional buckling separately for the top and bottom flanges according to the
supports defined and the sign of the bending moment.

• Compression:
For buckling check, define intermediate supports about the major and/or minor section axes.

Note
• compression supports do not influence the effective length for lateral-torsional buckling and vice-versa.
• For single angles - compression buckling check: If the user restrains the angle in both local axis directions,
the program will restrain the angle in both principal axis directions. If the user restrains the angle in one
local axis direction only, the program will assume that the angle is unrestrained in both principal axis
directions. To restrain angles in only one of the principal axis directions, refer to 7.8.1 Parameters - effective
length

Version 12.0 7-36 12/05

STRAP
Examples:

• Member (a):
The slab restrains the top flange along its entire length:
Select "Continuous support".
Set "Major axis bending: at +z face" to "Restrained".

Note: The slab will most likely restrain the beam also against buckling; if so, set "Major axis buckling"
and "Minor axis buckling" to "Restrained" as well.

• Member (b):
The perpendicular beam supports the top and bottom flanges:
Select "Intermediate supports".
Set "Major axis bending: at +z face" and "Major axis bending: at -z face" to "Restrained".
Define "Distance from beam start" as 2.75 m.

Note: The perpendicular beam will most likely restrain the beam also for "Minor axis buckling".

• Member (c):
The perpendicular angle supports only the bottom flange:
Select "Intermediate supports".
Set "Major axis bending: at -z face" to "Restrained".
Define "Distance from beam start" as 2.75 m.

• Member (d):
The channel prevents minor axis buckling:
Select "Intermediate supports".
Set "Minor axis buckling" to "Restrained".
Define "Distance from beam start" as 1.5 m.

Version 12.0 7-37 12/05

STRAP
7.9.1 Intermediate supports

To define support locations along selected members:

• Set each of the support types to or according to the support conditions.
• Define the coordinate of the support along the length of the beam. The program displays a sketch of the
beam in the centre of the screen and prompts for the coordinate to the first support:

• Set each of the support types to or according to the support conditions.

• Define the coordinate of the support along the length of the beam, either as a length or a fraction of the
beam length. If a combined beam is selected, the location may be specified from the start of the combined
beam.
• Enter the coordinate; the program will display the support on the sketch at the centre of the screen. (for an
explanation of the symbols used to display the support, refer to 7.13 - Display - supports.
• Select one of the following:
End - no more supports are located on this beam
Next support - define another support on the same beam. The same support conditions will apply. The
distance can be defined from the beam start or from the previous support.
• Select the beams where the support is located using the standard Beam Selection option

7.9.2 Supports at concentrated load points / Continuous supports

To define support locations along selected members:

• Set each of the supports types to or according to the support conditions.
• Select:
Supports at all concentrated load points
to add supports at all locations where concentrated beam loads were defined (in any load case). After they
are defined, these supports will be assumed by the program to be "intermediate supports".
Continuous support
To define a continuous support along the entire span of a member.

• For all types of support locations, select the beams where the support is located using the standard Beam
Selection option.

Version 12.0 7-38 12/05

STRAP
7.9.3 Revise/delete supports

Revise or delete a support already defined.

• Select:
all supports - revise/delete all supports (intermediate or continuous) on selected spans.
continuous supports - revise/delete continuous supports on selected spans.
selected supports - revise/delete intermediate supports on selected spans.
• Set each of the supports types to be deleted to
• Click the Delete supports button.
• select the beams where the supports are located using the standard Beam Selection option.
• for Intermediate supports, the program will display a sketch of the beam showing the support locations.
Move the to the supports to be deleted/revised and click the mouse.

Version 12.0 7-39 12/05

STRAP
7.10 End Conditions
Define the end conditions of beams:

AISC/AASHTO/CSA - refer to 7.10.1

BS 5950 - refer to 7.10.2
EC3 - refer to 7.10.3
IS:800-03 - refer to 7.10.4
IS:800-84 - refer to 7.10.5

7.10.1 End conditions - AISC/AASHTO/CSA

Regular/cantilever
Beams defined as cantilevers will be designed with Cb = 1.00. In addition, cantilevers must be identified so that
their maximum deflection will be calculated properly.

Select the cantilever beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

Main/secondary
Applicable only for design according to the ASD code - 1978 version. For beams with l/r > 120 and specified
as "secondary", Fa is modified by a factor: 1.6 - l/200r

Note that this clause is not present in the 1989 version of the ASD code.

Select the main/secondary members using the standard Beam Selection option.

7.10.2 End conditions - BS 5950

To calculate the effective length Le for lateral-torsional buckling, define:

• for fixed/pinned beams, define the "Conditions at Support" referred to in Tables 13 and 14 of the Code.
• for cantilevers, define the restraint conditions at both ends according to Table 14. Cantilevers must be
identified so that their maximum deflection will be calculated properly.

Values selected here override the default values for the specified members only.

Version 12.0 7-40 12/05

STRAP

The End conditions refer to Table 13:

Select a type.

Assign connection to:

Both beam ends
select members using the standard beam selection option
One beam end
beams must be selected individually; move the crosshair to the end of the beam to be released; note that
the blip can appear at either end of the beam.

Referring to table 14 in BS5950, select the restraint condition at both ends of the cantilever:

Select the free end (tip) of the cantilever as explained in 'one beam' above.

Version 12.0 7-41 12/05

STRAP
7.10.3 End conditions - Eurocode 3

Effective length factor for LTB:

Define the value of the "k" factor for specified beams, as explained in Appendix F of the Code (§ F.1.2). The
factor refers to end rotation on plan; if not defined, it is assumed by default to be equal to 1.0.

Define a value for "k" and assign it to members using the standard Beam Selection option.

Regular cantilever
Cantilevers must be identified so that their maximum deflection will be calculated properly (refer to Appendix
A7 - Design assumptions).

Select the cantilever beams using the standard Beam Selection option.

7.10.4 End conditions - IS:800-03

Effective length factor for LTB:

Regular cantilever
Refer to 7.10.3 (EC3)

IS802 angles
The 'IS802 - angles' option is displayed only when Use IS802 for axial forces is selected.

Select the connection conditions according to IS802 (Part 1/Sec 2) - Clause 6.1 and Annex B; the end
conditions are used to determine the Slenderness ratios for the compression members.

Version 12.0 7-42 12/05

STRAP
7.10.5 End Conditions – IS:800-84

To calculate the effective length Le for lateral-torsional buckling, define:

• for fixed/pinned beams, define the support conditions according to § 6.6.1 of the Code.
• for cantilevers, define the restraint conditions at both ends according to § 6.6.3. Cantilevers must be
identified so that their maximum deflection will be calculated properly.

Values selected in this option override the default values for the specified members only.

Compression flange
The three options correspond to items a), b) and c) in
§ 6.6.1.

IS802 angles
The 'IS802 - angles' option is displayed only when
Use IS802 for axial forces is selected.

Select the connection conditions according to IS802

(Part 1/Sec 2) - Clause 6.1 and Annex B; the end
conditions are used to determine the Slenderness
ratios for the compression members.

Cantilever
Referring to § 6.6.3 in IS:800, select the restraint condition at both ends of the cantilever; the six options
correspond to items a) to f) in § 6.6.3:

Then select the free end (tip) of the cantilever.

Version 12.0 7-43 12/05

STRAP
7.11 Combine Beams
The program, by default, will design each member as defined in the geometry as a separate unit.

In certain cases, this will lead to incorrect design. For example -

• frames: dummy nodes entered along a beam
• grids: intermediate node on a main beam where it support a secondary beam
Nodes where grid of elements is connected

Use this option to combine members into a single design unit; select a series of beams which have common
nodes and specify the bending/buckling restraints at the connection.

Automatic
The program identifies connected beams on the same line that have no perpendicular beams or columns at
their common node in one or both directions. The program automatically combines the beams and applies the
relevant restraints.

For example:

Example(d):

The specified restraints are always identical at all common nodes in

a combined beam. Therefore the program applies no restraints at all
three nodes and adds a "Support" at the middle node (with restraints
according to the orientation of the column - A-A or B-B). Note that the
Support will remain if the Combined beam is deleted.

Version 12.0 7-44 12/05

STRAP
Select each beam individually:
Select a series of members using the standard Beam Selection option. The program will check that the beams
are connected.

Note:
• Connected beams with x1 axis pointing in opposite directions may be combined (in this option only)
• Connected beams not forming a straight line (e.g. an arc) may be combined (in this option only)

Select start and end beams in the line:

Select the first and last members only of the combined beam; the program will automatically identify all
intermediate members. The order of selection is important - the program will only "combine" members when
the JA node of the member is the same as the JB node of the previous one.

Select start beam only of each line:

Select the first member only of the combined beam; the program will automatically identify all following
members. Note that the program will add the following member to the beam only if the angle between it and
the previous member is less than 30°.

Delete combined beams:

Select a member to be deleted from a combined beam; all the following members will also be deleted from the
combined beam list.

Supports at beam connections:

The program assumes that the combined beam was defined as a single member, i.e. the common nodes do
not exist. You may add intermediate supports at the common nodes:

This menu is identical to the one in 7.9 - Supports.

These support conditions will be defined at all the common nodes in the Combined beam. If the support
conditions are not identical at all the common nodes:
• select the minimum conditions in this option
• return to the Supports option (7.9) and define the missing supports at the relevant member start/end.

Revise a combined beam

Revise the "combined" directions for a combined beam:
• specify the new bucking and bending restraints
• click Revise
• select the Combined beams using the standard beam selection options.

Note:
• A member cannot appear in two different "Combined" beams.
• A maximum of 50 members may be combined in one beam.
• All members in a Combined beam are designed according to the current parameters for the first member.
• When "Checking" sections for Combined beams, different sections may be specified for the different
members in the list (but all other parameters will be those of the first beam in the list).
• The deflection check is calculated for the length of the combined beam. If there is a deflection support at
a common node, i.e. the beam deflects only on part of its length, the allowable deflection parameter should
be adjusted accordingly. For example: two members of equal length are combined; enter deflection limit of
L/150 instead of L/300.
• If the axial force is not constant in a Combined beam, the program uses the largest (absolute) value for all
the design checks throughout the length of the beam.
• A beam with a hot-rolled type or section cannot be combined with a beam having a cold-formed type or
section.

Version 12.0 7-45 12/05

STRAP
Examples:

Example (a):
• Combine members 47 and 48.
• Define a "Minor axis buckling" support at the common node

Example (b):
• Combine members 27 and 28, 37 and 38.
Define a "Major axis bending: +z face" support at the common node.

If the beams are defined with "select start beam only" option, beams 72, 82 will not be included because the
angle is > 30 .

• Combine members 112 and 113, 186 and 187

As the common nodes are dummy nodes, set all support conditions at the common nodes to "unrestrained".

Example (c):
• Combine members 1,2 to form the cantilever; all supports should be "unrestrained". The cantilever must be
defined in member 1.

Version 12.0 7-46 12/05

STRAP
7.12 Compute
When the option "Compute" is selected in the Main Menu, the program begins automatic member selection.

First, select the beams to be computed:

Only for beams displayed on screen

The program will compute results for all beams at
least partially displayed on the screen.
Delete beams from the screen using the "Remove"
or "Zoom" options in "Display".
All beams
The program will compute results for the entire
model, even if beams were deleted from the display
using the "Remove" or "Zoom" options.

The progress of the design is displayed on the screen:

The program begins the design by checking the lightest section available. If the check fails (because of
inadequate capacity or failure to meet user-defined constraints), the program selects the next heaviest member
in the list and begins the check again. The process is continued until an adequate section is found.

Note:
• if the type assigned to a member in the Section option (7.5) is a cold-formed section, the program
automatically designs the member according to the specified cold-formed Code.
• If more than one type is allowed (i.e. if there is more than one type in a group), the program searches for
an adequate section independently for all of the types and then selects the overall lightest adequate section.
• if a member is part of an identical list, the program begins the design check from the section selected for
the previous member in the list. If a larger section is required for the current member, the program will
recheck all of the previous members in the list for the new section.
• refer to Appendix A7 - Design assumptions for detailed explanations on the Code equations used by the
program.
• refer to Appendix A7 - Joists for a detailed explanation on the method used by the program to select steel
joists (American steel table only).
• For combined forces, the program may be instructed to either calculate the combined forces at 11 points
along the length of the beam, using the actual forces at each point, and then use the worst case for design,
or to combine the maximum result from each type, even though they may not be at the same location. Refer
to 7.4.4 - Default - general for more details.
• two options are available for the design of angles and other doubly unsymmetric sections (created in the
Section editor utilty): the program may use either the principal axis properties Iu, Iv or the major/nor axis
properties Ix,Iy.
• For general non-symmetric sections (e.g. T-sections), the program by default combines the maximum
stresses even if they are not at the same location on the section, unless the exact flange location is
specified. Refer to 7.7.1 - Major-minor for more details.

When "Compute" is completed, the program automatically displays the Result Summary (7.14.1).

Version 12.0 7-47 12/05

STRAP
7.13 Display

Use this option to graphically display the input data alongside each member.

7.13.1 Input data

Section orientation
The program displays the section shape and orientation for each beam on the graphic display.
For example:

Section Type/Group/Check
Referring to 7.5 - Sections, the program must be instructed by the user whether to check a specific section
(from the tables or a built-up section), or to select a section from a specified type or group, for each member
in the model.

Item Displayed: Explanation:

section name: program will check this section
section type: program will select a section from this type
group number: program will select a section from this group
property number: program will check this built-up section
blank: "illegal" property assigned to this member; program will ignore it.

Identical
The program displays the number of the identical series that the member belongs to; all members with the
same number belong to one identical series.

Version 12.0 7-48 12/05

STRAP
Display - Supports and combined beams
• Supports:
The program displays the support conditions on the beam for each of the four supports that may be defined:
major axis bending: top and bottom flange ; major and minor axis buckling

The symbols used by the program are:

Note that the symbols are displayed relative to the screen:

- Bending:
The supports are always displayed relative to the direction of the local axis parallel to (or closest to) the
plane of the screen.
- Buckling:
The symbols are for supports perpendicular/parallel to the plane of the screen. Note that if you revise
the major/minor definition after a buckling support is defined, the display will also be revised.

If more than one support is defined at a location on a member, the program displays the relevant symbols
superimposed.

• Combined beams:
The program displays a pair of parallel lines at the common node of combined beams. The support
conditions at the common node are superimposed.

For example:

Design parameters

Version 12.0 7-49 12/05

STRAP
The values are displayed adjacent to the member:

Kx,Ky - effective length factors

Slenderness - le/r
Deflection/L - Allowable deflection/span length
Steel grade
Net area - net tension area
End conditions - BS5950 : fixed and pinned end conditions; cantilevers
AISC/AASHTO/CSA : cantilevers
EC 3/IS800-03 : K factor; cantilevers.
IS:800-84 : cantilever end conditions

7.13.2 General arrangement drawing

Create a "General arrangement" drawing (Line diagram) for any plane in the model. For example:

• the drawing may be generated on any plane, e.g. plans or elevations. If more than one plane is displayed
on the screen when this option is selected, the program will prompt the user to select a plane defined by
three nodes.
• the program writes the section name adjacent to each member. The name is written only once for a string
of identical sections. The text size is specified by the user.
• The program differentiates between primary and secondary beams and terminates the line of the secondary
beams before the intersection with the primary beams
• The section shape and name may be imposed on the beam line using one of the following four methods:

The drawing is displayed according to the current parameters when this option is selected. To revise the
parameters, select “General arrangement parameters” in the Display menu. Note that any changes to the
parameters will also revise existing arrangement drawings (saved as views).

Version 12.0 7-50 12/05

STRAP
Section shape and name
The section shape and name may be imposed on the beam line using one of the following four methods:

The name is written only once for a string of identical sections.

The section by default will be drawn according to the same scale as the drawing. Modify Scale section by to
increase/decrease the size of the sections on the drawing.

Text
Specify the drawing scale and the text size.

The drawing scale is required to determine the size of the text on the screen display.

Note that the text will be printed with this size only if the scale specified when printing is the same as the scale
specified in this option; otherwise the text size will be modified according to the ratio of the scales. For
example, a scale of 1:50 is specified here but a scale of 1:100 is specified when printing: the actual text size
will be one-half (50/100) of the size selected in this option.

Columns
"Columns" are members perpendicular to the displayed plane, i.e. for an elevation, "columns" are in fact the
perpendicular beams.

The sections are drawn to scale but may be increased/ reduced by the scale factor.

Beam center line

Specify the beam center line type and the "gap distance":

The centre line may be deleted when Display full section is selected.

Primary axis
The program differentiates between primary and secondary beams and terminates the secondary beams at
the intersection with the primary beams that are drawn as continuous. By default, beams with releases are
always secondary beams

Similarly if a "column" (a member perpendicular to the plane) is drawn at an intersection, then all members on
the plane connected to that intersection are terminated.

For all other intersections, specify the axis that has continuous members:

If None is selected, all beams are terminated at the intersection point.

Version 12.0 7-51 12/05

STRAP
7.14 Results
Use this option to:
• display or print all tabular result tables
• display graphically the sections selected or the result capacity

7.14.1 Display/Print Result Summary

All beams
Include all beams in the model in the results summary table.
Note that only the first member in a combined beam (showing the results for the entire beam) will be
displayed.
All beams - ... - only the critical
If lists of "identical" beams were defined, the program will include only one beam from each list - the critical
beam that determined the section selected.

AISC/AASHTO/CSA/SABS/IS800-84:

Com = design combination that governs member selection.

Defl/L= maximum deflection in terms of beam length (L/?).
Slen = actual slenderness.
Dir = the section axis which the moment is acting about:
MJ: Major axis
MI: Minor axis

Version 12.0 7-52 12/05

STRAP
Ratio of actual forces/moments to allowable forces/moments:
Axial = axial force; a negative value indicates compression.
Shear = shear force.
Mom = bending moment.
LTB = lateral-torsional buckling moment.
Combined = Combined axial and moment
IS:800 - maximum of combined axial & moment, combined shear & moment

BS5950, Eurocode 3/IS800-03:

Com = design combination that governs member selection.

Defl/L= maximum deflection in terms of beam length (L/?).
Slen = actual slenderness.
Dir = the section axis which the moment is acting about:
MJ: Major axis
MI: Minor axis

Ratio of actual forces/moments to allowable forces/moments:

Pc(t)/APc(y) = axial force; a negative value indicates compression.

Fv/Pv = shear force.
M/Mc = bending moment.
M/Mb = lateral-torsional buckling moment.
Loc = Local capacity check, Combined axial and moment
Over = Overall buckling check, Combined axial and moment

7.14.2 Detailed Results

The following options are available:

Select one of the following display options:

Design - the program will display detailed results for the
design combination only.
All - the program will display the results for all
combinations sequentially.
Specified - the program will display a list of all
combinations; select one.

7.14.2.1 Hot-rolled, built-up, cold-formed sections

The detailed results displayed for each beam are:

• beam geometry and orientation.
• summary of all design options, intermediate supports, etc.
• summary of analysis results (moments, shear and axial force) for the combination displayed.
• the section selected and section properties.
• the section classification and classification limits (R=axial stress/Fy)
• the results of the design check. For example:

Version 12.0 7-53 12/05

STRAP

The design check information is displayed in five columns:

Design - the strength or serviceability state being checked (e.g. Shear, Moments, Deflection, etc.) and
the relevant Code clauses.
Equation - the governing Code equation.
Factors - the value of the variables required to calculate the terms in "Equation"
Value - the value of the terms in "Equation".
Result - the ratio of the actual moment/shear/deflection/etc. to the member capacity for the same state.

In the example above, the axial force is 430.1 and the capacity of the member is 652.9;
"Result" = 430.1/652.9 = 0.66

Units:
• Section data:
inch - if STRAP default length unit = feet or inch
centimeter - for all other STRAP default length units.
• Forces and moments: according to STRAP default length and force units.
• Stresses:
ksi (kips/in²) - if STRAP default length unit = feet or inch
N/mm² - for all other STRAP default length units.

7.14.2.2 Steel joists

Refer to Appendix A7 for a detailed explanation on Joists.

Version 12.0 7-54 12/05

STRAP
7.14.3 Results - Section Summary

The program sums the length and weight of each section selected. For example:

7.14.4 Results - display selected sections

The program will write the name of the steel section selected adjacent to the member.

7.14.5 Results - Display capacity

Use this option to display the computational results graphically on each member in the model.

The results are displayed in the form of the % ratio of the load to the member capacity.

The percentage may be written alongside the member and the member and the percentage are displayed with
a colour that represents a specified range of capacity percentage.

Colour by capacity:
To display the member and the percentage according to a colour code.

Display % of capacity:
Display the ratio of the actual force/moment/etc. to the design capacity.

For example, if the design axial load on a member is 31 kN and the computed compression resistance, Pc,
equals 50 kN, the program will display "62%" alongside that member.

The ratio will be displayed for the result type selected in the following option.

Version 12.0 7-55 12/05

STRAP
Result type:
Select the result type to be displayed:

For a detailed explanation of each type, refer to 7.14.1 - Result summary.

Range:
This option allows you to specify a range of result percentages for each colours. The colours are specified
in the Setup option of the STRAP main menu.

Select a range; enter the new upper value. The program will automatically update the lower boundary of
the following range.

Slenderness
For maximum of all results only:
do not include the slenderness check (slenderness/allowable slenderness) in the calculation of the
maximum capacity ratio.
include the slenderness check.

Version 12.0 7-56 12/05

STRAP
7.15 Data Table
This option displays all input data in tabular form. To display the data in graphic form, use the Display option.

7.15.1 Display / Print data table

To display all input data except supports. For example (BS5950):

where:

Sec/Grp : Indicates the limitations imposed on the section selection.

Hx / Hy : minimum/maximum allowable section dimensions (mm.) - OR - name of section to be checked.
In the table above -
Beam 1 : selection is limited to UB sections in the model table; no dimension limits.
Beam 2 : selection is limited to all sections included in Group 2; maximum HX = 200 mm.
Beam 3 : blank: beam will not be designed as its property is not a shape or built-up section.
Beam 4 : the program will check UC 152x152x25.
Beam 5 : the program will check built-up section no. 7.

Def = Allowable deflection expressed as L/"DEF". The allowable deflection for beam 2 is L/500.

Sln = Allowable compression slenderness (kl/r)

Dr = I2 or I3 indicate the major axis direction and the +/- preceding them indicate the flange location.
Referring to the Major/minor - Flange location options -
I2 or I3: i.e. no +/-, indicates the default option - Worst flange location - in both directions
+I2 or+I3 : location of flanges at +x2 and +x3
-I2 or -I3 : location of flanges at -x2 and -x3
+-2 or +-3 : location of flanges at +x2 and -x3 (2/ 3 indicates the major axis direction - I2/I3)
-+2 or -+3 : location of flanges at -x2 and +x3 (2/ 3 indicates the major axis direction - I2/I3)

Version 12.0 7-57 12/05

STRAP
Kx, Ky = Effective length factor for compression buckling.
Tens = Net tension area factor (Ae = Ag * Tens)

Supp Type = End support conditions:

BS5950:
C = cantilever, e.g. BEAM 5 above.
* = destabilizing load, e.g. BEAM 3 above.

fixed, pinned : 1st number = condition at JA; 2nd number = condition at JB.
cantilever : A/B = location of free end (JA/JB)
1st number = condition at support;
2nd number = condition at tip.

Eurocode/IS800-03:
K=1.00C - K value for LTB = 1.00; cantilever beam
K=0.7 - K value for LTB = 0.7
* = destabilizing load, e.g. BEAM 3 above.

AISC - ASD:
CANT- cantilever beam

AISC - LRFD:
MAIN - main member
MAINC - main member; cantilever
SECOND - secondary member
SECNDC - secondary member; cantilever

IS:800-84:
C = cantilever, e.g. BEAM 5 above.
* = destabilising load, e.g. BEAM 3 above.

fixed,pinned : number = restraint condition number

cantilever : a/b = location of free end (JA/JB)
number = restraint condition number for cantilever
f = degree of fixity at the free end.
IS:802:
number = restraint condition number (1-5) according to the program options.

Steel = Steel grade (dependent on Code selected).

Ignore Minor
Displays which minor axis results are to be ignored when designing a space model member, where:
M = ignore minor axis moment
D = ignore minor axis deflection
C = ignore minor axis when calculating section classification.
In beam 5, all three items will be ignored.

Comb = The member which this member is combined with to form a single design unit.
+/-/X/Y = combined directions (not the support directions).

For example, beams 3 and 4 are combined in the top flange bending and minor axis buckling (+Y)
directions, i.e. supports were defined for bottom flange bending and major axis buckling.

Iden to = The member which this member must be identical to.

For example, beams 1 and 2 must have the same section.

Version 12.0 7-58 12/05

STRAP
7.15.2 Display / print supports table

To display all of the defined intermediate supports (bending or lateral-torsional buckling).

For example:

Intermediate support points are defined at -

Continuous= continuous along entire length of beam.
Additional = at any user defined distances from JA.

The directions the support is applied are indicated by +/-/X/Y. Refer to 7.9 - Supports and 7.11 - Combined
beams for a detailed explanation.

7.15.3 Display/print Built-up section table

To display/print the built-up section table, including section dimensions and properties.

7.15.4 Data table – topping

For composite columns, the table displays

• Encased columns:
- cover defined, e.g. Column 11, where cover = 30
- size defined, eg. Column 15, where size = 340x300
• Filled section
e.g. Column 16

Refer to 7.4.2.

Version 12.0 7-59 12/05

STRAP
7.15.5 Data table - torsion

Display the current torsion parameters. For example:

where:
• Compute
YES: Compute torsion/warping for the beam
NO: Ignore torsion moment for the beam

• Warping restraint JA/JB

Fixed: End is fixed for warping, i.e. normal stresses will be generated
Free: End is free to warp, i.e. normal stresses will NOT be generated

Refer also to Appendix A7 - Torsion - general

7.15.6 Display data and supports for a specific beam

Use this option to display all of the data for a specific member; to select the member, move the crosshair until
the member is highlighted with the rectangular blip; click the mouse. The following table will be displayed:

For detailed explanations on the items in the tables, refer to 7.15.1 - Display data table and 7.15.2 - Display
supports table.

Version 12.0 7-60 12/05

STRAP
7.16 Sway
Sway is a module that allows the engineer to design a structure for sway, drift and/or deflections.

The sway option can automatically revise the section properties of beams and columns to reduce the sway at
selected nodes and/or the drift between two selected nodes to user defined limits. Sway can be the controlling
factor even in buildings of a moderate height (as little as 6-8 floors). To have the ability to optimize your
structure for sway and drift automatically using the least weight of steel or volume of concrete can produce
substantial savings even on a medium size project.

The sway option can also be used to reduce the deflection at any node to a specified value. For example, a
truss is designed and all stresses are found to be within the Code requirements. However the deflection of the
truss needs to be reduced. The Sway module will provide information as to which members can be enlarged
most economically. If this is a steel truss (light gauge, rolled sections or both), the Sway module will optimize
all sections automatically, if requested by the engineer.

The program searches for the member that most significantly contributes to the sway/drift or deflection,
enlarges its section and recalculates the sway/drift/deflection. The calculation is repeated until the
sway/drift/deflection is reduced to the limiting value.

The Sway option is part of the Steel design module:

• the user can immediately check the effect of section selection on sway/drift values
• sections selected by the sway option can be immediately checked by the Steel design module.
• the dimensions of concrete sections may be enlarged by the sway options, i.e. this module may be used to
limit the sway in concrete models or mixed models consisting of steel and concrete members.

7.16.1 Recommended procedure for using the sway option:

STRAP load definition module:

• Define loads and combinations as usual.
• specify the nodes at which the sway is to be checked (the program applies unit loads at these nodes
automatically)
• Solve the model.

Steel design module:

• First complete the design of beams and columns for stresses, member deflections, and other parameters.
Define sections groups, sections to select from, identical sections, intermediate supports for lateral-torsional
buckling, etc.
• select the Compute option (the Sway option will be grayed if the model has not been Computed).

After you complete the design of the beams and columns to Code you can proceed to the Sway option.
• select sections according to sway limit in the Sway pull-down menu
• define the sway limits and specify additional parameters (refer to7.8 - "Parameters")
• click the OK button to start the calculation
• select Display selected sway sections in the Sway pull-down menu; review revised sections.
• revise parameters and recalculate, if necessary, until satisfactory results are obtained.

Note that although larger steel sections are selected by this option, there is no guarantee that the new sections
comply with all of the steel Code requirements. To check the new sections:
• select Make selected sway sections current in the Sway pull-down menu
• select Compute in the Steel module side menu to check the new sections
or:
• set Check new selected sections for stress in the Sway parameters menu and select sway sections
again. Sections that do not comply with Code requirements will be automatically enlarged.

Version 12.0 7-61 12/05

STRAP
If the section properties were significantly revised by the Sway option you may want to solve the model again:
• select transfer new sections to STRAP geometry
• return to the STRAP main menu and solve the model again
• return to the Steel design module and repeat the procedure outlined above.

7.16.2 Parameters:

• Selection method:
The user can specify for members in each property group:
Automatic section selection:
The program enlarges steel sections using the following steel module data:
- only members with a type or group assigned to them will be considered. All other members (check or
non-steel section property) will be ignored.
- the program will consider the following parameters when determining the sway section:
same sections, major/minor axis dimension limits.
Calculate optimum area
The program ignores all data defined in the Steel module (type, group, identical, etc) and increases the
section properties for all members in the property group. This option is also used for concrete sections.

• Cost factor:
The user can define a cost factor for each property group in the model. If cost factors are defined the
solution represents the minimum "cost factor * volume increase" for the model, i.e. the most economical
solution. Therefore members in property groups with a low factor will have priority in the calculation and will
more likely be enlarged. For example, you can assign different cost factors to beams and columns.
Conversely, define an arbitrarily large factor for a property group that you do not want to enlarge under any
circumstances.

7.16.3 Additional information:

• Selected sway sections are stored separately from the sections selected by the Steel design module until
they are made “current” by this option. Once the sway sections are current the user can display the module
detailed results for them or transfer them to the STRAP geometry.
• The calculation will be approximate as it will be calculated by modifying the solved deflection results, i.e.
based on the section properties specified in STRAP geometry. If the enlarged sections are significantly
different from the original STRAP sections, transfer the sections to the geometry, solve the model again and
repeat the process in order to obtain the exact deflection results.

This option is active only if :

• sway loads were defined and solved (Refer to 3.15 - Loads - sway.)
• the Compute option was selected in the Steel design module.

The sway option revises the section properties of beams in the model in order to reduce the sway at selected
nodes (or the drift between two selected nodes) to user defined limits.

The program searches for the member that most significantly decrease the sway/drift, enlarges the section and
recalculates the sway/drift. The calculation is repeated until the sway/drift is reduced to the limiting value.

The nodes at which the sway/drift is calculated must be specified during load definition; unit load cases
necessary for the algorithm are defined at the relevant nodes. Refer to 3.15 - Loads - sway.

Note the following terminology:

• Current sections:
sections selected by the steel Compute option
• Sway sections:
Sections selected by this option.

Version 12.0 7-62 12/05

STRAP
7.16.4 Sway menu

7.16.4.1 Sway - display current sections

The deflections at the sway/drift nodes in the relevant global directions are displayed:

Note:
• The deflections are for the current sections, not the sway sections, i.e. the sections selected or checked by
the Compute option of the Steel module or the sway steel sections transferred to the current sections. All
other sections will be taken from the STRAP geometry.
• The program automatically recalculates the sway values when new current sections are selected. The
calculation uses an algorithm based on the results obtained from the original STRAP geometry and hence
the new values will be slightly inaccurate. If there is a significant relative difference between the original
STRAP geometry sections and the current sections, then the user should consider solving the model again
using the new sections.

7.16.4.2 Sway - select sections

Specify the sway/drift limits and start the calculation and click to start the sway calculation.

Version 12.0 7-63 12/05

STRAP
Sway limitation
Define the new sway/drift limits at the nodes:
• highlight line(s) in the list box with the data for the relevant node(s)
• Type in a value in the New allowable sway edit box.
• Click the Change allowable sway button

The program will update the list box.

Check selected sections for stresses

Select one of the following options:
The program will select the sections based solely on the sway/drift limits. The selected sections will not be
checked for compliance with the steel Code design requirements (moments, shear, LTB, etc.) as in the
Compute option
Note:
• suppressing the check is generally not critical as the sway calculation starts from the current section
(which meets the Code requirements).
• this is the faster option.

The program checks all sections selected according to the sway/drift requirements for compliance with the
Code design requirements. This is the slower option and the calculation time will be significantly increased
for large models with many load combinations.

Note that sway sections selected using this option will automatically become the current sections.

Cost factor for each property group

If cost factors are defined the solution represents the minimum (cost factor * volume increase) for the model.
Therefore members in property groups with a low factor will have priority in the calculation and will more likely
be enlarged.

Conversely, define an arbitrarily large factor for a group that you do not want to enlarge under any
circumstances.

Selection mode for each property group:

Select the STRAP property group group from the pull-down list box and specify the option:

Automatic section selection:

The program enlarges the section according the steel module data:
- only members with a type or group assigned to them will be considered. All other members (check or
non-steel section property) will be ignored.
- the program will use the following parameters when determining the sway section:
same sections, major/minor axis dimension limits.

Calculate optimum area

The program ignores all data defined in the Steel module (type, group, identical, etc.) and increases the
section properties for all members in the property group. Refer to optimum area for more details.

Optimum area
If Calculate optimum area is selected:

The program ignores all data defined in the Steel module (type, group, identical, etc.) and increases the section
properties for all members in the property group.

Version 12.0 7-64 12/05

STRAP

The program displays the current property values (area, moments-

of-inertia) for the selected property group.

The program starts the sway calculation from the values in these
edit boxes, i.e. smaller sections will not be selected; different values
may be entered.

The program increases the section area by incremental values

when calculating new section properties to limit the sway.

Specify the increase in the moments-of-inertia when the area is increased by a factor 'F'.

The program assumes a rectangular section by default, i.e. I = bh**3/12. Therefore, I3 will be increased by F**3
and I2 by F.

7.16.4.3 Make selected sway sections current

This option sets the steel module current sections equal to the sway sections. The sway sections calculated
by the sway/drift option are saved by the program but are not used by the Steel module until this option is
selected. i.e.
• all steel module result options will display results for the sway sections
• the sway sections can be transferred to the STRAP geometry

Note that this option applies only to steel sections selected according to the Automatic section selection
option.

7.16.4.4 Display selected sway sections

Display the results of the sway calculation. For example:

• steel sections

• sections defined by properties:

where:
- volume addition = length of member (or sum of lengths of members in property group) multiplied by the
section area
- addition * cost = volume addition multiplied by the cost factor defined for the property group.

Version 12.0 7-65 12/05

STRAP
7.17 Loads
Certain design parameters are dependent on the load case/combination that is computed by the program:
• axial load reduction factor: "live" load cases must be identified
• composite beams: load cases may be applied to the steel beam or to the composite beam
• deflections: different allowable deflections may be required for different load combinations

Load types for composite sections

Loads on composite beam may be applied at two different stages:
• to the non-composite steel beam
• to the composite steel and topping beam, either as a short-term load or as a long term load
The load application stage may be specified for each load case.

This information is required for all calculations where the elastic modulus is used, deflection calculations, etc.

• click and highlight a load case

• specify the appropriate load type

• click the button

Axial live load reduction

Most design codes allow the axial live load in a column to be reduced if the column supports a large area.
Use this option to identify the live load cases:

• highlight the load case line(s)

• specify Dead load or Live load

• click the button

Version 12.0 7-66 12/05

STRAP
Live load reduction factor
Define the live load reduction factor for selected columns:
• select columns using the standard Beam selection option
• define the factor (normally < 1.00)

The live load cases are specified in the "Load types for axial reduction" option.

Allowable deflections
Different allowable deflections may be required for different load combinations, depending on the type of
loading. The Default and Parameters options specify the same allowable deflection for all load combinations.

Specify the allowable deflection for each combination:

Note:
• if the allowable deflection for a
combination is not defined in this option,
then the program will use the value
defined in Default or Parameters..
• if the allowable deflection for a
combination is defined here and an
allowable deflection for a specific member
was defined in Parameters, the program
will multiply the value defined here by
(parameter/default).

For example:
• default deflection = L/300
• parameters deflection for beam n = L/500
• allowable deflection for load combination k specified in this option = L/400

The deflection check is carried out as follows:

• for all beams other than n:
- for all combinations other than k: allowable deflection = L/300
- for combination k: allowable deflection = L/400.
• for beam n:
- for all combinations other than k: allowable deflection = L/500
- for combination k: allowable deflection = L/(400*500/300)=L/667

Version 12.0 7-67 12/05

STRAP
7.18 Files

Geometry definition:
Exit the steel design module and return to the Geometry definition for the same model.

Strap models list:

Exit the steel processor and return to the STRAP main menu to select another model.

Exit:
Exit the steel processor and STRAP.

Exit and update geometry:

Select this option to instruct the program to rewrite the STRAP geometry file with the steel sections selected
in this module. You may then solve the model again with the new properties in order to obtain more accurate
results.

Note:
• the program will automatically erase all of the STRAP result files at the same time. This prevents the
situation where the STRAP geometry and result files are not compatible. As the steel module reads data
from the result files, you will have to solve the model again before you re-enter this module.
• the program will erase properties that are not used for the STRAP geometry file.
• if a section is aligned so that the major axis properties are used in some members and the minor axis
properties of the same section are used in others, the program will create two different properties (with the
same section) in the STRAP geometry file.
• the steel module does not erase the definition of the result combinations.
• for composite sections the program creates a new geometry material for the topping named TOP1.

A warning is displayed if the new number of properties exceeds the program limit. Two options are available:

the program does not update STRAP geometry.

the program automatically reduces the number of property groups to the program limit. Sections
are replaced by larger existing sections of the same type.
Note:
• a 'larger' section has greater values for A, I2 and I3
• built-up sections are not replaced.
• the sections are revised so that there is a minimum increase in the self-weight of the model.

The program displays the increase in self-weight resulting from the reduction in the number of property groups.

Copy to clipboard:
Copy the current graphic display to the clipboard.

Version 12.0 7-68 12/05

STRAP
Print drawing:
Print the current graphic display.

Print/edit saved drawing

Refer to 1.4.11.

Cold-formed options

• AISI ASD Specification:

Select one of the editions of the AISI ASD Code. The version selected will apply to all models in all
directories if they are checked according to the ASD Code.

This option does not apply to the AISI - LRFD Code; the program works only according to the 1996 edition.

To specify AISI ASD or LRFD, click the icon in the side menu.

• Effective stress calculation:

Specify the stresses to be used for the effective width calculation.

Use actual calculated stresses

the effective section properties are based on the actual compressive stress. The properties are
calculated using an iterative procedure.

Use stresses defined in the specification

the program uses a compressive stress defined in the Code, i.e the stress is independent of the actual
load. The properties are calculated using an iterative procedure.

The option selected will apply to all models in all directories, and for both editions of the Code.

Version 12.0 7-69 12/05

STRAP
7.19 Example
Design the plane frame shown below.

Note:
• This example illustrates the method of application of several steel design options. The example is intended
as an aid to learning the proper use of the program options, and is not intended as a guide to proper
engineering judgment in the construction of a model for design.

After the geometry and loads were defined in STRAP and the model was solved, the following data was defined
using the Steel design module options:

Version 12.0 7-70 12/05

STRAP
"Section" :
Limit selection to:

Code BS5950 Eurocode 3 AISC

Columns UC HEA W
Beams UB IPE W
Diag. Bracing EQ.D.ANGLE L 2L
Haunch beams CHANNEL UNP C

Same section:
• Column 8-9-10 specified as an identical group Column 11-12-13-30-31 specified as an identical group
• Column 15-16-32-33 specified as an identical group
• Bracing 20 and 22 specified as an identical group
• Haunch beams 25 and 26 specified as an identical group

Supports:
• Members 4,5,6:
"Continuous" support for +z major axis bending, major and minor axis buckling. The support is provided by
the floor slab. The continuous buckling support for both axes cancels the axial force check.
• Member 16:
Minor axis buckling support at mid-span. The support is provided by the beam perpendicular to the plane
of the frame.
• Member 18:
Support at midspan for +z major axis bending, major and minor axis buckling. The support is provided by
the walkway passing over the beam. This support may be defined using the option "Define supports at
concentrated load points".
• Members 20,22:
Support at the midspan of the bracing for major and minor axis buckling (assumes that the bracings are
attached).
• Member 28:
Support at midspan for +z major axis bending, major and minor axis buckling. This support may be defined
using the option "Define supports at concentrated load points".

Combined beams:
• Members 8,9:
Beam 3 provides buckling support only for the major axis of this column, i.e. members 8 and 9 act as a
single unit for minor axis buckling. Define major axis buckling and -z bending supports at the common node.
• Members 27,28,29:
These three members form a single beam. Define major axis buckling and -z bending supports at the
common node.
• Members 30,31:
Haunch beam 25 provides buckling support only for the major axis of this column, i.e. members 30 and 31
act as a single unit for minor axis buckling. Define major axis buckling and -z bending supports at the
common node.
• Members 32,33: Similar to 30, 31. Define major axis buckling and +z bending supports at the common
node.

Version 12.0 7-71 12/05

STRAP
Data tables:
The data tables for AISC - LRFD for the above input are: (the tables for the other Codes will be slightly
different).

Version 12.0 7-72 12/05

STRAP

8 Concrete Design
8.1 General
The STRAP Concrete Postprocessor is a program for the design of reinforced concrete buildings. The program
designs beams, columns and walls according to the methods outlined in any one of the following reinforced
concrete design codes . For more information on the Design Assumptions and Method of Calculation, refer to:
• British Standard BS 8110 - Part 1 : 1985, "Structural Use of Concrete" - refer to Appendix A8.1
• Eurocode 2 (EC2) - "Design of Concrete Structures" - Part 1 , 1991 - refer to Appendix A8.2
Eurocode 8 (EC8) - “Design Provisions for Earthquake Resistance of Structures” - Part 1-2, 1995
• ACI 318-02 - "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" - refer to Appendix A8.3
• CSA A23.3-94 - "Design of Concrete Structures" - refer to Appendix A8.4
• IS:456 – 2000 – “Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete” – refer to Appendix A8.5
IS:13920 - 1993 - “Ductile Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures Subjected to Seismic Forces”
• NBr 6118-2000 - Brazil. Refer to Appendix A8.6

Note that the manual uses the following terminology:

MEMBER - refers to a STRAP beam element.
BEAM - refers to a continuous beam consisting of a series of connected MEMBERS defined in this
postprocessor. “Beams” are defined by the user.
COLUMN - refers to a column consisting of a series of connected MEMBERS defined in this postprocessor.
“Columns” are defined by the user.
WALL - Refers only to a wall defined using the STRAP “Wall” option. Walls are identified automatically
by the program. Quad and triangular elements cannot be designed as a wall.
SPAN - refers to a span (between supports) in a BEAM or COLUMN, that may be comprised of more
than one MEMBER.
The terms STIRRUPS (American) and LINKS (British) are identical.

8.1.1 Creating a concrete structure from a STRAP model

The Concrete Postprocessor must design beams, columns and walls separately because the design methods
and reinforcement calculation methods are totally different.
• All continuous beams and columns must be created by the user; the program uses the information from
STRAP geometry for determining support locations and widths and section dimensions, if possible. The
program then designs the beams and columns according to user specified parameters.
• Walls are identified automatically by the program from STRAP "wall" elements; quad and triangular
elements cannot be designed as walls.

Beams & columns

The following figure shows a simple plane frame. In order for the
program to design the beams and columns, beams B1-B3 and
columns C1-C4 must be defined by the user (options for automatic
definition of the beams/columns by the program are available).

• Beam B1 must be defined ignoring the dummy node.

• Column C4 must be defined with a support in one direction at
the dummy node.

Walls
The program designs separately each segment of every wall.
By default, the program automatically combines colinear
segments of equal width to create a single design segment, e.g.
segment 1 in Figure (a):

Version 12.0 8-1 12/05

STRAP
To design each segment separately, e.g. Figure (b), edit the file STRAP.INI in the program directory and enter
the following line in section [ConcretePP]:
SeismicUnifyPart=TRUE

8.1.2 Seismic design - general

This section explains the general principles of seismic design for reinforced concrete frames common to all
design Codes. For detailed information pertaining to a specific Code, refer to Appendix A8 .

In general, seismic design must insure minimum levels of ductility in the beams and columns and so has more
stringent requirements for minimum reinforcement. In addition, much of the design is based on the moment
capacity of the members rather than the design forces calculated by the analysis. The moment capacity must
be calculated from the actual reinforcement in the beams/columns and so the program allows the user to
increase the theoretical areas to the actual areas as detailed.

The design procedure is summarized as follows:

• beam longitudinal reinforcement is calculated from the design forces, but not less than the minimum
specified by the Code
• beam shear reinforcement is calculated from shear forces derived from the moment capacity of the beam
(but not less than the design forces).
• column longitudinal reinforcement is calculated from the design forces, but may be increased to ensure that
the sum of the column moment capacities at a joint exceeds the sum of the beam moment capacities.
• column shear reinforcement is calculated from shear forces derived from the moment capacity of the beams
connected to the ends of the columns (but not less than the design forces).

This method ensures a hierarchy of strengths of the different members. Note that three different moment
capacities are calculated by the program:
• factored: normal capacity for non-seismic members
• nominal: capacity calculated using concrete and steel strengths not reduced by Code factors
• probable:capacity calculated using increased steel strength, i.e. actual conditions
and each calculation uses the appropriate capacity.

The design of both longitudinal and transverse reinforcement in columns is dependent on the capacity of the
beams. Therefore, it is mandatory to compute the beams prior to computing the columns. Refer to 8.1.4 -
Design procedure - seismic for more details.

8.1.2.1 Beams

Moment
The beams are designed for all load combinations as defined by the user.
In addition, the program complies with the following requirements found in all Codes:
• at support, the positive moment capacity is not less than a specified percentage of the negative moment
capacity
• at any point along the beam, the positive and negative moment capacity is not less than a specified
percentage of the negative moment capacity at the support
The program adds additional top/bottom reinforcement as required.

Shear
The seismic design shear forces (Ve) are calculated from the probable moment strength of the beam together
with the factored beam loads:

The program also checks the beam for the design shear from all
load combinations.

Note that Mcap is calculated from the actual reinforcement; it is

important that the user increase the theoretical values to reflect
the actual detailing.

Version 12.0 8-2 12/05

STRAP

Stirrups (links) are calculated from Ve , subject to the minimum

requirements in the Code. In general, closed hoops at reduced
spacing are required at all locations where plastic hinges may form
(and to a distance x' beyond):

8.1.2.2 Columns

Moment and axial load

The columns are designed for all load combinations defined by the user. Column areas are not 'reduced' for
lightly loaded columns.

In addition, all codes require that the sum of the column flexural strengths at a column-beam joint exceed the
sum of the nominal beam flexural strengths (strong column - weak beam), i.e.

where:
• Mb is calculated from the actual beam reinforcement at the support (may be
increased by the user)
• k is specified by the Code.

The program ensures that the columns comply with this requirement using the following procedure:
• Σ Mb is calculated at the joint
• the moment is then apportioned to the columns above and below according to their relative stiffness
• the resulting moment is then applied as a separate load 'case' at the column top/bottom along with the
factored axial load; additional column reinforcement will be added automatically if this requirement governs.
These load cases are marked as 'seismic' in the column extended detailed results.

Shear
Similar to beams, the seismic design shear forces (Ve) are calculated from the probable moment strengths of
the beams framing into the columns. The sum of the beam moment capacities at a joint are apportioned to the
columns above and below according to their stiffnesses:

and Ve = (Mc,T + Mc,B)/L

Stirrups (links) are calculated from Ve , subject to the Code minimum requirements. In general, closed hoops
at reduced spacing are required at all locations where plastic hinges may form (and to a distance x' beyond).

Version 12.0 8-3 12/05

STRAP
At the base of the column, the program calculates Mc based on the column capacity because no beams frame
into the node: Mc = Md * capacity factor * fye/fy
where: Mc * capacity factor = approximate column capacity based on design loads
fy = steel strength reduction factor for normal design calculations
fye = steel strength factor for seismic capacity calculations
For example, a column at the base was designed for a moment = 46.2 kN-m and the capacity factor for the
actual reinforcement = 1.07. Steel strength used for regular design = 0.87fy while 1.25fy is used for seismic
capacity probable strength: Mc = 46.2 * 1.07 * (1.25/0.87) = 71.0 kN-m

8.1.2.3 Walls

The program calculates the distributed reinforcement on both wall faces and in addition determines the
concentrated reinforcement required at both wall ends according to the requirements of the relevant seismic
Code. The area where the concentrated reinforcement is required is also calculated.

8.1.3 Design Procedure

• Define all continuous beams/columns including support locations and support widths.
• Define all properties not specified in STRAP geometry by dimensions.
Beams: The program designs rectangular, tee, inverted tee, L, inverted L, and I shaped sections.
Columns: The program designs rectangular, L-shaped, round, symmetric U and T shaped sections.
Note that other shapes are converted automatically by the program or ignored; refer to 8.4 - Define.
• Specify the default parameters for all beams/columns/walls.
• Define parameters for specific beams/columns/walls, if different than the default parameters.
Examples of parameters that may be defined:
Beams:
- reinforcement and concrete type
- stirrup parameters
- moment redistribution percentage
- shear reduction, etc.

Columns/walls:
- reinforcement and concrete type
- effective length factors
- allowable bar diameters
- structure type: braced/Unbraced, etc.

• Compute the results:

The beams, columns and walls are designed in sequence without any prompts for information by the
program. Therefore all design data and parameters must be defined before the design begins. The
program carries out the following calculations:
Beams:
- calculation of moment and shear envelopes from all load combinations.
- automatic moment redistribution (optional) and shear reduction at span supports (optional).
- calculation of reinforcement steel required at all supports and spans.
- automatic stirrup detailing with variable spacing.
- deflection check - span/depth ratio (BS8110 and EC2 only).
Columns:
- determination of the critical STRAP load combination
- calculation of magnified (additional) moments for slender columns and minimum moments.
- selection of reinforcement arrangement which is able to withstand applied bending moments and axial
force for all load combinations, subject to minimum Code requirements.

Version 12.0 8-4 12/05

STRAP

Walls:
The capacity is calculated separately for each segment in the wall -
- determination of the critical STRAP load combination
- calculation of magnified (additional) moments for about the weak axis and minimum moments .
- selection of reinforcement arrangement which is able to withstand applied bending moments and axial
force for all load combinations, subject to minimum Code requirements. The reinforcement is distributed
equally on both wall faces.
• Revise parameters, properties, etc. and compute again.
• Create column drawings and tables
• Print results.

8.1.4 Design procedure - seismic

The design procedure is more rigorous for models designed for seismic loads:

8.1.4.1 General
• Define all continuous beams/columns including support locations and support widths.
• Define all properties not specified in STRAP geometry by dimensions.
• Specify the default parameters for all beams/columns. In particular, specify the seismic frame type and
identify the seismic load cases (click the tab).
• Define parameters for specific beams/columns, if different than the default parameters.

8.1.4.2 Seismic
The Codes specify the following hierarchy for the calculation:
• beam longitudinal reinforcement is calculated from the design forces, but not less than the minimum
specified by the Code
• beam shear reinforcement is calculated from shear forces derived from the moment capacity of the beam,
based on the actual reinforcement area (may be modified by the user), but not less than the design forces.
• column longitudinal reinforcement is calculated from the design forces, but may be increased to ensure that
the sum of the column moment capacities at a joint exceeds the sum of the beam moment capacities
(ΣMc/ΣMb > k).
• column shear reinforcement is calculated from shear forces derived from the moment capacity of the beams
connected to the ends of the columns (but not less than the design forces).

Note that beams must be computed prior to columns as the column capacity is dependent on the end moment
capacities of the connecting beams.

The design procedure is as follows:

Beams
• Compute the beams
• Check results, revise parameters, properties, etc, if necessary, and compute again.
• Specify the exact (increased) reinforcement at all beam ends, top and bottom; select “Defaults” or
“Parameters”and click the tab. To check, click Data tables and Display reinforcement table.
• Display the reinforcement areas and the corresponding moment and shear capacities: click Data tables
and select Display seismic capacity table.

Columns
• Compute the columns
• To display data used to calculate links/stirrups, click Data tables and select Display column shear table.
• Check results, revise parameters, properties, etc, if necessary, and compute again.

Version 12.0 8-5 12/05

STRAP
8.2 Main Menu

To select "Beam", "Column" or “Wall” design mode .Note: the program designs beams, columns and walls
independently (“walls” is displayed only if there are wall elements in the current model); the current mode is
also displayed at the bottom of the screen, e.g. "Now designing: BEAMS" , etc.

To revise the default design parameters (displayed at the bottom of the screen). Refer to 8.3.

To define continuous beams or columns consisting of a series of STRAP members; to revise

supports and property group assignment. Refer to 8.4.

To revise the STRAP cross-section properties or to define new sections. Refer to 8.5.

To specify different design parameters for individual beams and columns (if a parameter is not
defined for a specific beam, the default parameter is used). Refer to 8.6.

To begin the design according to the parameters specified in the previous options. Only "Defined"
beams and columns may be computed. Refer to 8.8.

For columns only:

specify that selected columns must have identical reinforcement. Refer to 8.7.

Create column tables or drawings, including elevations, sections and bar schedules, according to
the column detailing parameters. Refer to 8.8.

Specify different detailing parameters for individual columns (if a parameter is not defined for a
specific column, the default parameter is used). Refer to 8.9.

From the menu bar:

File - Refer to 8.14.

Display - To display input data graphically. Refer to 8.11.
Results - To display and/or print the results. For columns, a different reinforcement arrangement may be
specified. Refer to 8.12.
Data table - To display tables showing the input data (design parameters and supports). Refer to 8.13.

Version 12.0 8-6 12/05

STRAP
8.3 Default
The default parameters are used when design parameters have not been defined for individual members using
option Parameters. (Refer to 8.6)

The current default parameter values are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

8.3.1 Beam default parameters

Beam default parameters – general Refer to 8.3.1.1

Beam default parameters – reinforcement Refer to 8.3.1.2
Beam default parameters – shear Refer to 8.3.1.3
Beam default parameters – deflection Refer to 8.3.1.4
Beam default parameters – seismic Refer to 8.3.1.5
Beam default parameters – reinforcement Refer to 8.3.1.6

8.3.1.1 General
Height axis
Define the vertical axis of the model; when continuous
beams and columns are defined automatically, all
columns will be assumed to lie parallel to this axis and
all beams will be assumed to be perpendicular to it.

Code
Select the design code from the list. Note that if the
Code is changed after continuous beams and columns
have been defined, the program will automatically
adjust design parameters assigned to them.

Load cases
Toggle each load case (place the over the title and click the mouse) and specify it as a Dead, Live or
Earthquake load case.

Note:
• seismic design will be done only when one or more combinations include an earthquake load case.
• the live load reduction factor is applied only to axial column loads in load cases specified as "Live".

(CSA and ACI only):

• deflections will be calculated only for load combinations that do not include earthquake load cases. If all
load cases in non-seismic combinations are specified as 'Dead' or 'Live', the program can calculate the
service load deflections from the cases; otherwise, the calculation will be based on factored load deflections
and will be less accurate.
• When designing slender columns, the program will use this data to calculate the value of β d, where β d = the
ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to maximum factored axial total load. If dead load cases are not
specified, the program will assume β d = 0.40 for all columns.

Version 12.0 8-7 12/05

STRAP
8.3.1.2 Reinforcement

Concrete
Select the concrete grade. Note that different default concrete grades may be defined for beams, columns and
walls.

Steel grade
Select the steel grade for main and shear reinforcement. Note that different default grades cannot be defined
for beams, columns and walls.

Cover
Define the gross concrete cover the distance form the
center of gravity of the reinforcement steel to the face of the
beam, column or wall.

The gross concrete cover = net concrete cover + stirrup

diameter + 1/2 main reinforcement diameter.

Moment redistribution
The program may be instructed to automatically carry out moment redistribution according to the following rules:

Redistribution is carried out on the individual load cases. The moments in each load case are adjusted so that -
• The support moments in the envelope are reduced up to the maximum percentage specified by the user,
but not less than the minimum percentage specified.
• The maximum span moments in the envelope remain constant or are decreased (unless the minimum
redistribution requirement forces an increase in the span moment, which will generally occur in exterior
spans with fixed supports or columns).
• The shear forces in the spans are adjusted so as to maintain equilibrium of forces and moments.
• For beams with columns, the moment transferred by the beam into the column before and after redistribution
is constant. This prevents redistribution in the columns. Therefore, there will be no redistribution at exterior
column supports.
• There is no redistribution at supports of cantilevers.

The net result is that the negative moments at the supports are reduced without a corresponding increase in
the positive span moments.

Version 12.0 8-8 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• The program carries out redistribution at defined supports; it cannot identify support locations from the
shape of the moment envelope diagram.
• For the BS8110, EC2 and IS:456 Codes, the envelope after redistribution is checked to ensure that it lies
within the "70% line". If the maximum redistribution percentage specified is less than 10%, the program uses
a 90% line.

Set the checkbox to and specify the maximum and minimum percentages:
Max % - specify the maximum redistribution percentage that the program will carry out at any support.
Min % - specify the minimum percent of redistribution at all support; the program will reduce the moments
by at least this percent even if the envelope span moments increase as a result.

Minimum reinforcement: (ACI 318/CSA A23.3 only)

• ACI 318:
The program can calculate minimum beam reinforcement according to either of two methods:
- 200/fy·bd
- 1.33*As required (but not greater than 200/fy * bd)

• CSA A23.3:
The program can calculate minimum beam reinforcement according to either of two methods:
- 0.2/(f'c) bh/fy
- 1.33*As required (but not greater than 200/fy * bd)

8.3.1.3 Shear

Steel grade
Select the steel grade for shear reinforcement. Note that different default grades cannot be defined for beams
and columns.

Beam shear reinforcement:

Shear stresses may be taken by stirrups only or by a combination of stirrups and bent-up bars:

Version 12.0 8-9 12/05

STRAP
Stirrups (links) only
The program calculates variable spacing for the stirrups along each span.
The parameters are minimum and maximum stirrup diameter, the minimum spacing, the spacing step, the
number of stirrup legs and an alternate number, and the maximum number of stirrup groups per span.
The program assumes the minimum number of legs and checks which diameter in the range specified
provides spacing greater or equal to the minimum specified (the program will use the smallest diameter
possible). If the minimum number of legs with maximum diameter and minimum spacing does not provide
a solution, the program tries again after increasing the number of legs to the alternate.
The program then varies the spacing along the length of the span according to the shear stress. If the
number of groups in a span is greater than that specified, the program uses an iterative process to delete
the groups with the fewest number of stirrups.

Bent up bars
Specify details of stirrups with constant spacing to be provided. The program will calculate the area of bent-
up bars required in addition to the stirrups provided.

The stirrup details required are diameter, spacing and number of legs.

Shear reduction
Set this option to "Yes" to instruct the program to reduce the
shear stress at the supports; the shear from the face of the
support to a distance 'd' from the face of the support will have
a constant value. Example:

Torsion
Design all beams for torsion according to the relevant Code clauses
Suppress torsion design for all beams

Diameter
Specify the link diameter.
Links only
Specify a range of diameters. The program assumes the minimum number of legs and determines which
diameter in the range specified provides spacing greater or equal to the minimum specified (the program
will use the smallest diameter possible). If “Parameters” are defined, the diameter specified for the first
span will be used for all spans in the beam.
Links and bent-up
Specify the diameter for the uniform links; the program will not revise this value.

Spacing/increment
Specify the allowable values for link spacing:
Links only
A range of spacings must be specified as the program calculates variable spacing along the length of the
span. Specify the minimum spacing and increment. For example, if you specify an initial spacing of 75 mm
and an increment of 50 mm, the allowable spacings are 75, 100, 150, 200, etc.
Links and bent-up
Select a uniform spacing for the entire span from the list box. Note that you can also type in a value.

Version 12.0 8-10 12/05

STRAP
Groups
A link group is a series of equally spaced links.

Specify the maximum number of groups in the current span. For example,
this beam has three link groups.

Note that the program may design fewer groups than the maximum specified.

Legs
Specify the number of link legs. For a standard rectangular link, the number of legs = 2.
Links and bent-up
A uniform number of legs must be specified for the entire span.
Links only
• Non-seismic:
You may also specify an alternate (greater) number of legs for the 1st and last groups only (adjacent to
the supports); if Av/s provided by the maximum diameter together with minimum spacing is not sufficient,
the program will use the "alternate" number of legs.
• Seismic:
The Alternate box is replaced by Seismic group. Specify the number of legs for the hoops within the
plastic hinge length adjacent to the supports. Note that there is always only one group within this length.

8.3.1.4 Deflection

• ACI, CSA only:

Calculation method
Load cases
This option is available if all non-seismic combinations contain load cases identified as "Dead" or "Live".
The program can then calculate the service load deflection for each case and proceed to calculate the
dead, live and sustained load deflections according to the Code.

Version 12.0 8-11 12/05

STRAP

Combinations
When the "Dead" and "Live" load cases are not identified, the program can only calculate the factored
deflections for the combinations. In order to estimate the service deflections for dead and live loads, the
program requires:
• The dead and live load factors to convert the factored loads to service loads.
• The ratio of the dead load to the total load to convert the total factored load to separate dead and live
service loads.

Deflections - Immediate
The program by default applies all dead & live loads to the beam when calculating ai, the immediate deflection.
Enter different percentages if you want to apply only a portion of the loads.

For example, to calculate the immediate deflection excluding the self-weight of the beam when the self-weight
is approximately 35% of the dead load, revise the values to:

Note that these values are not used for the calculation of the long-term deflection, at.

Deflection parameters - long-term

These options influence the long term deflection calculation only and specifically refer to four sections in the
Code:
• Section 7.2: at, the long-term deflection, is defined as the deflection resulting from the 'sustained' load, Fsus,
where Fsus is defined as the permanent (sustained) load applied to the beam, i.e. Fsus is the sum of the
dead load and the sustained live load.
• Section 7.2.2: the value of kt (and hence at) can be reduced by 50% for sustained loads applied 6 months
after the concrete is poured.
• Section 7.2.2: the value of kt (and hence at) must be increased by 50% in desert regions.
• Section 5.2.2: when checking deflections under sensitive elements, etc, only the loads applied to the beam
after the element is installed should be considered.

Specify the percentages of the dead and live loads that should be applied form the long term deflection
calculation and specify the percentage of these loads that are initially applied to the beam 6 months after
pouring.

Example:
The sustained load includes the dead load and 20% of the live load and 25% of the dead load is applied after
6 months. Set the values in the dialog box to:

Note:
• The sum of the dead loads before and after 6 months should be 100% in normal cases.
• For beams in desert regions, the sum of the dead loads should be 150%
• For temporary dead loads, reduce the percentages below 100%.
• parameters in this dialog box do not affect the value of ai.

Version 12.0 8-12 12/05

STRAP
8.3.1.5 Seismic

The text in the menu will vary according to the design code.

Seismic frame type

Specify the seismic frame type according to the Code classification.

The default is no earthquake, i.e. the frames in this model will not be designed according to the seismic
requirements of the Code.

Refer to Design assumptions for more details.

Load case type

Toggle each load case (place the over the title and click the mouse) and specify it as a Dead, Live or
Earthquake load case.

Note:
• seismic design will be done only when one or more combinations include an earthquake load case.
• the live load reduction factor is applied only to axial column loads in load cases specified as "Live".

(CSA and ACI only):

• deflections will be calculated only for load combinations that do not include earthquake load cases. If all
load cases in non-seismic combinations are specified as 'Dead' or 'Live', the program can calculate the
service load deflections from the cases; otherwise, the calculation will be based on factored load deflections
and will be less accurate.
• When designing slender columns, the program will use this data to calculate the value of β d, where β d = the
ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to maximum factored axial total load. If dead load cases are not
specified, the program will assume β d = 0.40 for all columns.

Version 12.0 8-13 12/05

STRAP
8.3.1.6 Modify reinforcement

For seismic design, the Codes specify that:

• the beam design shear forces are based on the beam moment capacity
• the sum of the column moment capacities at a joint must exceed the sum of the beam capacities at the
same joint.
Hence, it is necessary to calculate the beam end moment capacities (positive and negative) based on the
actual end reinforcement rather than the theoretical reinforcement.

This option allows you to specify an increased reinforcement area at the end of every beam, top and bottom.
Select one of the following options:
Area =
Specify the increased area according to the units displayed.

Increase area by factor and add

Example:area required = 765 mm5, factor = 1.1; add = 100 m5
Increased area = 1.1(765)+100 = 941 mm²

Round off to bars and add

Example:area required = 765 mm5, bars = 15 mm (177 mm5); add = 100 m5
765/177 = 4.32: round off to 5 bars
Increased area = 5(177)+100 = 985 mm5
Calculated area =
Restore the calculated area.

For "Parameters":
No change
Do not revise the current modified reinforcement value at the selected end or/or face of the beam.
Use default
Use the area specified in the "Default" option.
Start/end of beam
Select the end (JA/JB) nodes at which the reinforcement is to be modified.

Version 12.0 8-14 12/05

STRAP
8.3.2 Column default parameters

Note:
• the effective length factors for columns, kx and ky, are assumed by default to be 1.0. This default value
cannot be revised. To specify a different value for selected members, refer to 8.6 - Parameters

Column defaults – general Refer to 8.3.2.1

Column defaults – reinforcement Refer to 8.3.2.2
Column defaults – shear Refer to 8.3.2.3
Column defaults – seismic Refer to 8.3.1.5

8.3.2.1 General

Height axis
Code
Load cases
Refer to 8.3.1.1

Structure braced
Specify the structure type to be assumed when calculating the magnified (additional) moments for slender
columns: BRACED or UNBRACED. Note that the column may be braced in one direction and unbraced in the
other.

Design capacity factor

Specify the design (Capacity/Load) ratio. The default value is generally 0.98 - 1.00 (the program uses 0.99).
Higher values give more conservative results.

A new default value may be specified and different values may be assigned to individual columns in the
Parameters - Design option.

Refer also to 8.8 - Compute.

Version 12.0 8-15 12/05

STRAP
8.3.2.2 Reinforcement

Concrete
Select the concrete grade. Note that different default concrete grades may be defined for beams, columns and
walls

Steel grade
Select the steel grade for main reinforcement. Note that different default grades cannot be defined for beams,
columns and walls.

Cover
Define the gross concrete cover - the distance from the center-of-
gravity of the reinforcement steel to the face of the beam or
column.

The gross concrete cover = net concrete cover + stirrup diameter

+ ½·main reinforcement diameter.

Bar diameters
Select the allowable range of main reinforcement bar sizes.

Bar spacing
The program will select the diameter (in the range defined above) which gives a spacing between bars not less
than the value defined here. However, if there is no solution using the maximum diameter and the optimal
spacing, the program will automatically use a spacing less than the optimal specified in this option, but
not less than the absolute minimum spacing allowed between bars by the Code. A warning message will be
displayed.

No. of bar sizes

Select:
• 1 diameter: All bars in a column will have the same diameter.
• 2 diameter: The corner bars may be one bar size larger than the bars along the faces of the column/wall.

Version 12.0 8-16 12/05

STRAP
8.3.2.3 Shear

Ties/spirals

Specify the transverse reinforcement type for ROUND columns:

This option affects the stirrup design only for the ACI318 and CSA A23.3
Codes. The relevant clauses are:
• ACI:
- 7.10.4 - Spirals
7.10.5 - Ties
- 9.3.2.2 - φ value for columns
- 10.3.5.1 - φPn,max for columns (refer to Appendix A8 - ACI - columns)
- 10.9.4 - Equation (10-6) - spirals
- 21.4.4.1 - Seismic requirements - spirals (refer to ACI - seismic - columns)

• CSA:
- 7.6.4 - Spirals
7.6.5 - Ties
- 10.9.4 - Equation (10-7) - spirals
- 21.4.4.2 - Seismic requirements - spirals (refer to Appendix A8 - CSA - seismic - columns)

Links/stirrups
Specify the parameters for column links (stirrups).

Note that for seismic design, different parameters may be specified in the
plastic hinge regions adjacent to the column ends:
Diameter: specify the minimum diameter only
Spacing: specify the minimum spacing and the spacing increment
Increment: The increment for allowable spacing values. For example, if
you specify an minimum spacing of 75 mm and an increment of
50 mm, the allowable spacings that may be selected by the
program are 100, 150, 200, etc (75 mm will not be in the list).
Legs: A different number of legs may be specified in each design
direction

Version 12.0 8-17 12/05

STRAP
The program initially searches for the maximum spacing that is adequate with the minimum diameter. In no
case will the selected spacing exceed the maximum value specified by the Code. If the minimum spacing in
the list is inadequate, the program will increase the diameter until it finds a suitable combination of diameter
and minimum spacing.

8.3.2.4 Detailing & drawing

Note that the default parameters for the drawing/table are assigned to the column when the columns are
created; the parameters can be subsequently revised only by using the “Drawing parameters” option in the side
menu. Creating the column again will restore the default parameters.

Lap type
Specify the default lap type.
To use a different lap type for specific columns, select the detailing parameters - lap type option in the side
menu.

Lap location
• Specify the default lap arrangement:

Each floor
Center between floors
the laps are placed at every floor. To combine bars, select the
“detailing parameters - lap type” option in the side menu.
Each second floor
All bars are two stories long, but the laps are staggered at alternate
floors, i.e. half the bars are terminated at each floor.

To combine bars over two or more stories, select “Detailing parameters -

Lap type”option.

• Define the minimum lap length

Note that the program calculates the lap length according to the Code requirements. The lap length used
is the maximum of the required lap length and the minimum lap length defined here.

Version 12.0 8-18 12/05

STRAP
Bar at column top/bottom
Specify the default reinforcing detail at the column top/bottom and the minimum hook lengths

Note:
• this option also applies at intermediate locations where a step in the column face does not allow the bars
to be extended to the column above.
• To use a different detail for specific columns, select the detailing parameters - bends at bar ends option in
the side menu.

Additional links
Specify the type of additional links to use to tie bars placed between corner bars. Select one of the following
options:

Note:
• Rectangle and diamond links are used only when
there are sufficient intermediate bars and internal link
angles comply with the Code requirements.
Otherwise one-legged ties are used.
• To use a different link type for specific columns, select
the detailing parameters - link types option in the side
menu.

Links at crank point

Add additional links at crank points:

This is a general option and cannot be modified for individual columns.

Links at floor
Set the option to to detail links in the area of the floor and beam:

This is a general option and cannot be modified for individual columns.

Version 12.0 8-19 12/05

STRAP

Links at lap
Define the maximum spacing for links within the lap length. The spacing used within the lap length is the
minimum of that specified here and the spacing calculated according to the Code requirements.

To use a different detail for specific columns, select the “detailing parameters - links at laps” option in the side
menu.

Floor thickness
Specify:
• the default floor thickness used when no slab elements were defined at a floor level. To define a different
floor thickness for specific columns, select the detailing parameters - floors - thickness option in the side
menu.
• The drawing coordinate equivalent to the STRAP 0.00 coordinate. The value defined here added to the
STRAP node coordinate is the elevation value displayed on the column drawing.

8.3.3 Wall default parameters

8.3.3.1 General

Use average wall results

For all other options, refer to 8.2.3.1 - Column general parameters.

Version 12.0 8-20 12/05

STRAP
8.3.3.2 Reinforcement

Refer to 8.2.3.2 - Column reinforcement

parameters

8.3.3.3 Seismic

Multiply shear by
In certain Codes, the design shear force must be increased by a factor. For example, Eurocode 8, section
2.11.1.3:
Vsd = ε Vsd (2.51)
ε = magnification factor (2.52)

Optimal diameter for concentrated reinf.

Select the optimum diameter for the concentrated reinforcement at the ends of the walls.

------

For all other options, refer to 8.3.1.5 - Beam - seismic parameters.

Version 12.0 8-21 12/05

STRAP
8.4 Define beams and columns
Define continuous beams and columns consisting of chains of STRAP members:
• only members that are part of a continuous beam or column defined by this option will be designed.
• beams and columns with undefined properties cannot be defined

8.4.1 Define/display beams

8.4.1.1 Define a beam

Select one of the following options:

•
The program automatically searches for chains of members perpendicular to the Height axis (as defined
in - Defaults) and defines them as continuous beams.

•
Select members using the standard Beam Selection option; the program automatically identifies the
following members in the chain and defines continuous beams (only members perpendicular to the height
axis may be selected).

•
Select the first and last members in a chain using the standard Beam Selection option; the program
automatically identifies the intermediate members in the chain and defines continuous beams (members
parallel to the height axis may be selected).

For all options, check and revise the definition by selecting the "Display/revise beams" option.

Note:
• the program can automatically identify continuous chains of members (a member is considered as a
continuation of the previous member if the angle between the x1 axes of the two members is less than 30°).
• supports are automatically defined at nodes where members parallel to the height axis are connected (a
member is perpendicular if the angle between its x1 axis and the height axis > 60° and < 120°). The support
widths are calculated from the dimensions of the perpendicular member.
• supports may be defined automatically at nodes where members that are not parallel to the height axis are
connected. Refer to 8.4.1.5 - Create supports at perpendicular members in the following menu.

Version 12.0 8-22 12/05

STRAP
• if no support members are found at the common node between adjacent members, the program
automatically "combines" the adjacent members to form a single design span.
• x1 "Offsets" are deducted from the span length.
• the program converts the STRAP sections into design section as follows:
- Steel sections, sections defined by properties and tapered sections are considered as “Undefined”; the
program will not design beams or columns with undefined properties in any of the component
spans.
- Rectangular, round, and L-sections: dimensions are maintained.
- Tubes and pipes are considered as "Undefined".
- T and I-sections: major axis - converted as defined
minor axis - converted to rectangular section with similar dimensions
- U sections:
major axis - converted to rectangular section with similar dimensions
minor axis - converted to I-section
• If the STRAP section is not symmetric (T, U and I-sections), the postprocessor creates a symmetric section
using the minimum dimensions.

8.4.1.2 Display/Revise a beam

Use this option to check the defined beams and to revise support widths and/or section orientation.

Select the beam/column by pointing to any of its component members. The program then displays a drawing
of the beam. For example:

Select one of the following options:

Revise support width

Use this option to revise support widths or to delete supports at intermediate nodes.
• select nodes

Version 12.0 8-23 12/05

STRAP
• select Revise support in the menu at the bottom of the screen:

• Select:

• revise the support width

• For columns, a different support width may be defined in the M2 and M3 directions:

Delete support
Delete the support at a node.
• select nodes
• select Revise support in the menu at the bottom of the screen:

• Click

Revise property
Use this option to assign a different property group to spans or to switch the flange locations in the current
property group.
• select members
• select Revise property in the menu at the bottom of the screen:

• Click to assign a different property group to a span.

Version 12.0 8-24 12/05

STRAP
Note:

• to revise the property groups for many spans, it may be more convenient to select in the main menu.
• to define new property groups, to revise dimensions or switch major/minor axes, refer to .

Invert property

Click to reverse the flange location for T,L and U-sections. Note that this option
does not switch the major and minor axes, i.e. T may be revised to 2, but not to 1.

This option is equivalent to the "flange orientation" option in

8.4.1.3 Revise beam names

Define the beam titles and span names that are used by the BEAMD program.

There are two options (contact your STRAP dealer if you want to change options):

• Define the beam name:

- The default beam name is the beam number followed by the list of STRAP members. Click on the line
corresponding to the relevant beam and type in a new name or revise the existing one
- Span names are "1", "2", "3", etc . and cannot be revised here.

• Define the span names:

- Default span names are "Bnn-1", "Bnn-2", "Bnn-3", etc ..Click on the cell corresponding to the relevant
beam and span and type in a new name or revise the existing one
- The default beam name is the beam number followed by the list of STRAP members and cannot be
revised here.

8.4.1.4 Delete beams

To delete the definition of a continuous beam or column, select any member included in the beam/column.

Version 12.0 8-25 12/05

STRAP
8.4.1.5 Create supports at perpendicular beams

This option is relevant for space frames and grids only

Yes - the program assumes that there are supports wherever STRAP "Restraints" were defined or where
a perpendicular member frames into the node.
No - the program assumes that supports are located only where Restraints were defined or where
members parallel to the height axis are connected; members not parallel to the height axis are
ignored. If no supports (members or restraints) are found, the program automatically add supports
at the beam ends.

A member is perpendicular if the angle between its x1 axis and the height axis > 60° and < 120°.

For example, define beams 1-1 and 2-2 in the following grid:

8.4.2 Define / display columns

8.4.2.1 Define a column

Select one of the following options:

•
The program automatically searches for chains of members parallel to the "Height axis" (as defined in
Defaults) and defines them as continuous columns.

•
Select members using the standard Beam Selection option; the program automatically identifies the
following members in the chain and defines continuous columns.

Version 12.0 8-26 12/05

STRAP

•
Select the first and last members in a chain using the standard Beam Selection option; the program
automatically identifies the intermediate members in the chain and defines continuous columns.

For all options, check and revise the definition by selecting the "Display/revise columns" option.

Note
• the program can automatically identify continuous chains of members (a member is considered as a
continuation of the previous member if the angle between the x1 axes of the two members is less than 30°).
• supports are automatically defined at nodes where members parallel to the height axis are connected (a
member is perpendicular if the angle between its x1 axis and the height axis > 60° and < 120°). The support
widths are calculated from the dimensions of the perpendicular member.
• supports are automatically defined at planes of elements.
• if no support members are found at the common node between adjacent members, the program
automatically "combines" the adjacent members to form a single design span.
• x1 "Offsets" are deducted from the span lengths.
• the program converts the STRAP sections into design section as follows:
- Steel sections, sections defined by properties and tapered sections are considered as "Undefined"; the
program will not design columns with undefined properties in any of the component spans.
- Rectangular, round, and L-sections: dimensions are maintained.
- Tubes and pipes are considered as "Undefined".
- T and U-sections: converted as defined
- I sections: considered as "Undefined"
• If the STRAP section is not symmetric (T, U and I-sections), the postprocessor creates a symmetric section
using the minimum dimensions.
• If the sections are different in the members found in a design segment of a column (between supports), the
program always uses the section of the first member in the segment.

8.4.2.2 Display/Revise a column

Use this option to check the defined columns and to revise

support widths and/or section orientation.

Select the beam/column by pointing to any of its component

members.
Refer to 8.4.1.2 - Display a beam.

8.4.2.3 Delete column

To delete the definition of a continuous beam or a column, select any member included in the beam/column

Version 12.0 8-27 12/05

STRAP
8.4.2.4 Column names

Define names for all columns in the model.

• The program automatically assigns names to the columns and the names may be revised at any time by
the user
• The column names are displayed in the column drawings and tables as well as the result tables.

To define the names:

• Select one of the following options:
Give numbers
The program assigns numbers 1,2,3,.... to the columns in the order of the column numbers (C1, C2, etc)

By grid lines
The program uses the grid line names defined by the user in the Display - grid lines option
• click Automatic name definition
The program updates all names in the table at the left
• to revise a name, click on the cell and edit the text

Note:
• two column with a coordinate difference less than the Tolerance value are assumed to be on the same line.

Version 12.0 8-28 12/05

STRAP
8.5 Properties
Use this option to revise the section types and dimensions defined in STRAP geometry or to define new
sections and assign them to members.

Define /revise section

To define or revise a property:
• select a property group from the list displayed on the screen:

• select a section type:

• define the dimensions:

Properties - print / display table

To display/print a list of the property groups and the section dimensions.

Version 12.0 8-29 12/05

STRAP

Properties - assign to beam

Select a property group number that you want to assign to selected members. The program displays a list of
the property groups (defined and undefined).

Select beams that this property is to be assigned to using the standard Beam Selection option.

Note:
• An -Undefined- property may be assigned to beams/columns; the section properties may be defined later.
However the program will not compute beams/columns with a member having an undefined property.
• If the sections are different in the members found in a design segment of a column (between supports), the
program always uses the section of the first member in the segment.

Properties - return to STRAP geometry properties:

To restore all dimensions and all property group assignments to those in the current STRAP geometry. New
sections defined in the postprocessor will not be deleted from the property table.

Version 12.0 8-30 12/05

STRAP
8.6 Parameters
Define the design parameters for specified members. If a parameter is not defined for a specific member using
this option, the program will use the default value when designing the member.

8.6.1 Parameters - Beams

Beam parameters – general Refer to 8.6.1.1

Beam parameters – reinforcement Refer to 8.3.1.2
Beam parameters – shear Refer to 8.3.1.3
Beam parameters – deflection Refer to 8.3.1.4
Beam parameters - modify reinforcement Refer to 8.6.1.2

8.6.1.1 General

Define beam design parameters for selected beams. Values specified here will override the model default
parameters specified in the Default option.

Flange orientation:
To reverse the flange location for T,L and U-sections. This option is equivalent to the

options in "Display/revise/beam" and "Display/revise column".

Note that this option does not switch the major and minor axes, i.e. 0 may be revised to 2 , but not to 1. To

switch the axes, use the option in the main menu.

Design direction:
The program design beams for uniaxial bending only.

Specify the design direction - M2 or M3; moments in the other direction will be ignored.

Beams with significant moments in both directions should be defined as columns.

Note:
• For "Design direction", the parameter specified for the first member in the beam will be used for the entire
beam.

Version 12.0 8-31 12/05

STRAP
8.6.1.2 Modify reinforcement

This option allows you to specify an increased reinforcement area at either end of any beam, top or bottom:

• set the Start of beam End of beam options at the bottom of the dialog box
• select No change or specify the parameters to increase the area
• click and select the beams

Refer to 8.3.1.6.

Version 12.0 8-32 12/05

STRAP
8.6.2 Parameters - Columns

Specify different parameters for specific columns. The program will use the Default parameters for all columns
except those with different parameters specified using this option.

Column parameters – reinforcement Refer to 8.3.2.2

Column parameters – design Refer to 8.6.2.1
Column parameters – flange Refer to 8.6.2.2
Column parameters – shear Refer to 8.3.2.3

8.6.2.1 Design

Moment magnifier
Specify the method to calculate the additional/magnified moment for specific slender columns and walls.
Calculated by program
User defined
Define the moment magnifier or additional moment for slender columns or walls in terms of a factor δ to
multiply the relevant factored moment.
i.e: braced columns: Md = δ q(0.6qqM2 + 0.4qqM1)
unbraced columns: Md = δ qMend
Note that if the factor is not defined, the program automatically calculates the magnified (additional ) moments
according to the Code. Refer to Appendix A8 - Design assumptions for columns.

Effective length factor

To specify the effective length ratio k = Le/L for both axes. Select one of the following options:

Version 12.0 8-33 12/05

STRAP
• Compute
The program calculates the effective length ratio based on the relative stiffnesses of the beam and columns
framing into both ends of the column. For example, refer to ACI318-02, Section 10.12 and Figure 10.12.1.
Note that different values are calculated for braced (nonsway) and unbraced (sway) frames

• Defined directly
if several members are combined in a design direction, the relevant K value used for all members is the one
defined for the first member. For example:

Members 1 and 2 are computed separately, but are combined in the M2 direction; the K2 value for member
2 is the value specified for member 1.

Note:
• if K2,K3 are not defined here, the program will always use a default value = 1.00.
• k2 is associated with M2; k3 is associated with M3

Live load reduction factor

Most design codes allow the axial load in a column or wall to be reduced if it supports a large area. Enter a
factor and select columns/walls.
Note:
• the default factor for all columns is always 1.00 and cannot be revised
• the factor is applied only to the axial load in load cases specified as Live, i.e. the factor will be ignored if
there are no Live load cases.

8.6.2.2 Flange

Flange orientation
To reverse the flange location for T,L and U-sections. This option is equivalent to the

options in "Display/revise/beam" and "Display/revise column".

Note that this option does not switch the major and minor axes, i.e. 0 may be revised to 2 , but not to 1. To

switch the axes, use the option in the main menu.

Version 12.0 8-34 12/05

STRAP
8.6.3 Parameters - walls

8.6.3.1 Wall parameters - reinforcement

Refer to 8.3.2.2

8.6.3.2 Wall parameters - design

Effective length factor

Specify the effective length factor for the wall in the weak direction.

Critical region
The program assumes by default that all walls are not in the critical/hinge region. Select:
The selected wall segments are located in the plastic hinge/critical region.
No change in option for selected wall segments.
The selected wall segments are not located in the plastic hinge/critical region.
-----

For all other options, refer to 8.6.2.1.

Version 12.0 8-35 12/05

STRAP
8.7 Identical columns
Specify, prior to the start of the calculation, that the reinforcement in several columns must be identical. The
program will calculate the reinforcement required for each column and assign the heaviest reinforcement to
all columns in the "identical list".

Note that only columns with identical section dimensions may be defined as
"identical". Orientation of the section is not important - all of the columns in the
this example may be defined as identical.

There are two main options:

• Identical levels - specify that different levels on a single column are identical
• Identical columns - specify that the same levels on two or more columns are identical
The program combines the results of both options. Refer to the example below.

Identical levels - refer to 8.7.1

Identical columns - refer to 8.7.2

Example:create the following identical groups:

• Create two different identical groups in column 1:

Select
select column 1 and arrange the menu as shown:

Version 12.0 8-36 12/05

STRAP

• Create the same two groups in column 4:

Select
Select columns 1 and 4 using the standard beam selection option.

• Copy the same division into groups along the height to column 2 and 3, but not the same groups.
Select
Select column 1 as the base column, then select columns 2 and 3.

8.7.1 Identical levels

8.7.1.1 Define

Specify that the reinforcement in adjacent levels must be identical. This is convenient when the same bars are
used over several stories.

The following screen shows an example for a column in a four storey building; the "Identical" column in each
row describes the situation at the floor level between two adjacent columns, where:
• Yes - the reinforcement in the columns above and below will be identical
• No - the reinforcement may be different
For columns that have already been designed, the program displays the current reinforcement and capacity
factor.

To change the status, click on the relevant row; the program will toggle the Yes/No value.

Note that in the above example, the status can be revised at the bottom two levels only (3.00 and 6.00):
• Yes cannot be specified at levels where the property changes (+9.00)
• No cannot be specified at a level that is a STRAP dummy node (+10.5)
• The top level is shown for information only.

Version 12.0 8-37 12/05

STRAP
8.7.1.2 Copy

Copy the vertical division into identical groups from one column to another.
• select a column with existing identical groups
• select one or more columns that the vertical division will be copied to.
Note:
different identical groups will be created in the other columns; only the vertical division into groups will be the
same. In the following example, copying the groups in column 1 to columns 2 and 3 will create groups 3 to 6

• columns 1, 2 and 3 may have different cross-section dimensions as

different groups are created. However, the first two segments in
column 2 must have the same dimensions if group 3 is to be created.
• the program will copy the division into groups even if there are
additional nodes in one of the columns, the nodes are offset vertically
in one of the columns, etc.

8.7.1.3 Delete

Delete the vertical division into identical groups on selected columns.

• select a column with existing identical groups

8.7.2 Identical columns

8.7.2.1 Define

Specify that two or more columns are "identical". The program will combine the vertical division of the columns.
Note that only columns with identical section dimensions may be "identical" (orientation is not important).
Both columns are selected in the following examples:

Note:
• the program will create the identical groups even if there are additional nodes in one of the columns, the
nodes are offset vertically in one of the columns, etc.

8.7.2.2 Delete

Remove a column from a group of identical columns.

Note that if a vertical division into groups was previously defined for this column using the
option, the vertical division will not be deleted.

Version 12.0 8-38 12/05

STRAP
8.8 Compute
Design beams and columns according to the current defaults and parameters.

Only "Defined" beams/columns may be Computed. In addition, specific beams/column may be selected
for design:

• Select columns
To compute specific beams/columns only: use the "Zoom" options to isolate the required beams/columns
and specify Only for beams displayed on screen.
• Compute columns with specified reinforcement
The user can specify reinforcement for selected column members using the Results - Specify
reinforcement option.
recalculate the columns, i.e. the specified reinforcement will be deleted
do not recalculate, i.e. maintain the specified reinforcement. Note that such columns that are part of an
identical list will not be designed as identical

The program designs the selected beams/columns in series and automatically displays the Result Summary
table on the screen.

For a detailed explanation of the theory and methods used by the program with reference to the design Codes,
refer to Appendix A8 - Design assumptions for columns.

The following is a general explanation of the algorithm for column design:

The program calculates the section capacity for a specified reinforcement pattern and compares it to the
external forces.

Referring to above figure, the program calculates the location of

point "S" on the interaction diagram and checks the ratio OS/OL.

If the ratio OS/OL > 1, the reinforcement is adequate for the

external forces.

As the program can only check the capacity of sections, the design procedure is iterative:
• the program arranges minimum reinforcement in the section and calculates the capacity.
• if the section capacity is inadequate, the program increases the reinforcement and calculates the new
capacity.
• the process continues until the capacity is greater than the external forces.

Version 12.0 8-39 12/05

STRAP

The iterations are internal to the program and not visible to the user.

The program stops the iteration when the calculation is greater than 99% convergent. Similarly, a ratio of
capacity/load > 0.99 is considered acceptable. These two points explain minor discrepancies in the results.

The iteration also stops if the reinforcement percentage exceeds the allowable value in the Code or if no more
bars can be placed because of spacing limitations. Warnings are displayed in such cases.

The algorithm includes a search for the face of the column where the addition of more reinforcement is most
beneficial. Bars with the current diameter are added until the optimal spacing is reached; the program then
increases the bar diameter by one size.

If two different bar sizes are allowed -

• the corner bars only have the larger bar size
• there is one size difference between the corner bars and the face bars.

Application Point of Load:

The program applies the load at the centre-of-gravity of the concrete section. Note that for flanged sections,
this point may not be identical to the center of resistance of the section, the centre-of-gravity calculated from
the concrete and reinforcement. In such cases, an additional internal moment will be generated.

Version 12.0 8-40 12/05

STRAP
8.9 Draw columns
Detail the reinforcement in computed columns and create drawings showing elevations and sections:
• lap lengths, no. of links, etc., are determined according to the relevant Code clauses
• the detailing may be drafted according to either of two options:
- “drawing”- the sections and elevations are arranged on an engineering drawing
- “table” - the sections and elevations are arranged in tabular form. For example:

To create a column drawing after the columns have been “computed”, select:

• and . Specify the default drawing options for ALL columns, such as lap type and
location, link type, floor thickness, etc.

• Specify the drawing parameters for SPECIFIC columns.

Select:

- to create a new column table; enter the table name and select

- to create a new column drawing; enter the drawing name and select

- to edit an existing column drawing or table

- to delete an existing drawing or table.

Version 12.0 8-41 12/05

STRAP
8.9.1 Draw columns - edit

Create/edit a column drawing.

Select one of the following options:

Add column elevations or sections to the drawing.

Move existing elevations and sections on the drawings.

Delete existing elevations and sections from the drawing.

Revise the scale of a section/elevation, revise the title or change the orientation (x2,x3).

Print the drawing.

Select and edit another column drawing/table or create new ones.

Return to the main column design menu.

Version 12.0 8-42 12/05

STRAP
8.9.1.1 Add

Add column elevations, column sections and bar schedules to the drawing.

Note: elevations should be added to the drawing first so that the cut marks of sections will be drawn
automatically on the elevation.
Add section
To add a column section to the drawing:
• set the menu to Add a column section or Create
sections for all elevation levels
• specify the elevation scale and the orientation
• enter the column name: To draw the section mark on the
elevation as , enter c-c (no blank spaces !!!).
If Create sections for all elevation levels, the first character
will be incremented.
• For Create sections for all elevation levels, the program
automatically places the sections on the drawing; select Add
section at right side or Add section at left side
• Select the column:
move the adjacent to the column segment so that it is
highlighted with the and click the mouse.
• click
• for Add a column section - move the frame around the
section to its correct location and click the mouse.
The section and the section mark on the elevation will be added to
the drawing.
To revise specific details on the section, return to the main menu
and select the option.

Add elevation
To add a column elevation to the drawing:
• set the menu to Add a column elevation or Add elevation of part of a column
• specify the elevation scale and the orientation
• Select the column:
Add a column elevation
move the adjacent to the column so that it is highlighted with the and click the mouse.
Add elevation of part of a column
move the adjacent to the bottom column segment so that it is highlighted with the and click the
mouse; repeat for the top column segment
• click
• Move the frame around the elevation drawing to its correct location and click the mouse.
To revise specific details on the section, return to the main menu and select the option.

Add bar schedule

To add a bar schedule to the drawing:
• set the menu to Add a bar schedule for all col. on drawing
• specify the text size
• select Include bars of entire column or Include bars only at levels in the drawing
• click
• Move the frame around the schedule to its correct location and click the mouse.

Version 12.0 8-43 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• A "Column (is) on drawing" if either its elevation or section is on the drawing.
• If a section is drawn at one level only and Include bars of entire column, then the bars in the entire
column will be added to the schedule.
• The bars in the schedule will be numbered consecutively starting from 1. Therefore, the same bar added
to different schedules on different drawings will have different number in each schedule.

Column orientation
For elevations and sections, specify the orientation of the column on the drawing:

Note:
local x2 - the elevation/section is displayed with +x2 pointing to the left
local x3 - the elevation/section is displayed with +x3 pointing to the right

For sections, the second local axis is always drawn pointing to the top of the drawing, as shown above. For
unsymmetric sections (e.g. L-shape), the flanges are drawn on the side specified in STRAP geometry.

8.9.1.2 Move

• Move the adjacent to the elevation/section/schedule so that it is highlighted with the and click the
mouse.
• Move the frame around the section to its new location and click the mouse.

8.9.1.3 Delete

Move the adjacent to the elevation/section/schedule so that it is highlighted with the and click the mouse;
click .

8.9.1.4 Edit

• Move the adjacent to the elevation/section/schedule so that it is highlighted with the and click the
mouse.
• Revise the relevant data and click .

8.9.2 Column table - edit

For a new table:

• select the columns using the standard beam selection method
• specify the table parameters

Select one of the following options:

Revise the general table parameters, including the bar numbers.

Add/delete elevations to the table, delete columns or rearrange the column order in the table.

Version 12.0 8-44 12/05

STRAP

Add new columns to the table.

Create a bar schedule for the reinforcement displayed in the table.

Displayed only when the table does not fit into one page.

Select and edit another column drawing/table or create new ones.

Return to the main column design menu.

8.9.2.1 Parameters

Table name
Define a title for the column table.

Number of first bar

Specify the bar number of the first bar
in the table; the bars will be numbered
consecutively.

identical stories
Identical columns at adjacent levels
may be combined to one row in the
table. For example:

Opti ons

Version 12.0 8-45 12/05

STRAP

8.9.2.2 Edit

Add/delete elevations to the table, delete columns or rearrange the column order in the table.

Note:

• to add new columns to the table, select the option.

Add/delete
The table is initially drawn with only the sections.

To draw the column elevation alongside the section:

• click and highlight the column line in the list
• click the Add elevation button

To delete a section or elevation from the table:

• click and highlight the line in the list
• click the Delete column button

Move

Revise the order of the columns in the table by rearranging the column lines in the menu:
• Click on a line in the list to highlight it
• Click the Move Up , Move Down to move the line to its new location

Note:
• For any particular column, the elevation will be drawn to the right of the section if the Elevation line in the
list is below the Column line for that column

8.9.2.3 Add column

Add new columns to the table or replace existing columns with others:

• Select Add... or Replace...

• set if you want "identical" columns to be displayed
only once in the table
• Select columns using the standard beam selection
option.

Version 12.0 8-46 12/05

STRAP
8.9.2.4 Bar schedule

Create a bar schedule file that can be edited and printed using the BARSW program (ask your STRAP dealer
for more information). The file will list all reinforcement contained in the columns in the current table.

To create the schedule:

• enter the schedule file name (new or existing)
• enter the general schedule data:

Note that the Schedule name is added to the Select schedule list.

Version 12.0 8-47 12/05

STRAP
8.10 Detail column - parameters
Modify the column drawing parameters at any specified column location. Note that the parameter may be
modified at any of the four column sides at each column end.

Thickness/height
The beam and slab dimensions may be revised at each of the
four sides at the column top.
• Specify the new floor or beam height and the location relative
to the column orientation:

• Select one or more columns using the standard beam

selection option.
Elevation
The beam and slab elevations may be revised at each of the four sides at the column top.
• Specify the floor or beam offset from its current location and the location relative to the column orientation:

• Select one or more columns using the standard beam selection option.

Delete/Add
The beams and slabs may be deleted/added at each of the four sides at the column top.
• Specify the location relative to the column orientation
• Select one or more columns using the standard beam selection option.

Lap type
Specify a different lap type for selected columns (the selection will override the default lap type).

Version 12.0 8-48 12/05

STRAP
• Select:
Crank, Alongside or Inverted crank to maintain the lap at the selected locations, or -
Unify with bar above to delete the lap at the top of the selected columns
• Select columns using the standard beam selection option

Column ends
• Specify a different detail for all reinforcement at the ends of selected columns (the selection will override the
default option).

• Select columns using the standard beam selection option

Note:
• this option also applies at intermediate locations where a step in the column face does not allow the bars
to be extended to the column above.

Link types

Specify a different type of additional links (used to tie bars placed between corner bars) for selected columns
(the selection will override the default type).
• Select one of the following options:

• Select columns using the standard beam selection

option

Note:
• Rectangle and diamond links are used only when
there are sufficient intermediate bars and internal link
angles comply with the Code requirements.
Otherwise one-legged ties are used.

Lap length
Specify a different minimum lap length for selected columns (the selection will override the default length).
• Enter the minimum lap length
• Select columns using the standard beam selection option
Note:
• the program calculates the lap length according to the Code requirements. The lap length used is the
maximum of the required lap length and the minimum lap length defined here.

Version 12.0 8-49 12/05

STRAP

Link at lap
Specify a different maximum spacing for links within the lap length for selected columns (the selection will
override the default spacing).
• Define the maximum spacing; the spacing that will be detailed in the lap length is the minimum of that
specified here and the spacing calculated according to the Code requirements.
• Select columns using the standard beam selection option

Column centre
Any column may be offset relative to its centre-line or aligned with one of the faces
of the column below.
• Specify the column offset from its current location or the alignment face and the
location relative to the column orientation
• Select one or more columns using the standard beam selection option.

Version 12.0 8-50 12/05

STRAP
8.11 Display

Use this option to graphically display the input data and the results alongside each member:

Node/Beam/element numbers
Refer to 1.3.3.

Local axes
Refer to 1.3.3.

Parameters
The design parameters may be displayed alongside the beams in the graphic display. Select one of the design
parameters in the menu:

For example:

Note:
• top/bottom cover values are displayed for beams
• identical columns: the program displays the largest STRAP beam number of all columns in the group (in
the above example, 105, 106, 133, 134 are identical)

Version 12.0 8-51 12/05

STRAP
Sections
Display the section shape, dimension and/or design direction adjacent to each member in the model:

Examples:

End conditions
Refer to 1.3.3.

Results
Use this option to:
• display the numerical results alongside each member in the graphic display of the model.
• display the member with a colour representing a range of results.

Select one of the following result types:

• Steel area:
Select one of the beam locations; reinforcement areas will be displayed adjacent to the beam.

• Capacity, number of bars:

Display one of these column results; the capacity ratio or the number of longitudinal bars will be displayed
adjacent to the column.

• Colour
The beam compression block (x/d) and column reinforcement percentage results may be displayed with a
colour code, where each colour represents a range of the result. The members and associated text will be
coloured according to the range:

Version 12.0 8-52 12/05

STRAP

Use the mouse/arrow keys to select a range; enter the new upper value for the range selected. The
program will automatically update the lower boundary of the following range.

Colours are revised in the Setup option in the STRAP main menu.

Dimension lines
Refer to 7.13.3

Grid lines
Refer to 7.13.4

General arrangement drawing

Create a "general arrangement" drawing for any plane in the model. For example:
• The drawing may be generated on any plane, e.g. plans or elevations. If more than one plane is displayed
on the screen when this option is selected, the program will prompt the user to select
a plane defined by three nodes.
• all sections are drawn as rectangular, e.g. for T-sections, only the web is drawn.
• the program writes the rectangular section dimensions adjacent to each member.
The dimensions are written only once for a string of identical sections. The text
size is specified by the user.

Specify the parameters for General arrangement drawings. Note that any changes
to the parameters will also revise existing arrangement drawings (saved as views).

Version 12.0 8-53 12/05

STRAP

Draw section dimensions

Section dimensions are drawn at the center of the beams; they may be deleted from the drawing.

Draw perpendicular section

Members perpendicular to the displayed plane may be deleted from the drawing. The sections are drawn
to scale but may be increased/ reduced by the scale factor.

Draw intersection lines

Draw/do not draw lines where beams with different height intersect.

Draw column names

Add the column names to the drawing (defined in the Define - Define column names option). Note that
the names are displayed only for columns perpendicular to the display plane.

Beam line type

Draw all beam with solid or dashed lines.

• Scale Text size

Specify the drawing scale and the text size. The drawing scale is required to determine the size of the text
on the screen display.
Note that the text will be printed with this size only if the scale specified when printing is the same as the
scale specified in this option; otherwise the text size will be modified according to the ratio of the scales.
For example, a scale of 1:50 is specified here but a scale of 1:100 is specified when printing: the actual text
size will be one-half (50/100) of the size selected in this option.

Version 12.0 8-54 12/05

STRAP
8.12 Results
Select one of the following options:

8.12.1 Result summary

Beams

Beam: Postprocessor beam serial number.

Mem : STRAP member number
Moments: Max/Min :
• 1st line: minimum moments at support / span / support. If the minimum span moment is the same sign as
the maximum span moment, 0.0 is displayed.
• 2nd line: maximum moments at support / span / support. If the maximum support moment is the same sign
as the minimum support moment, 0.0 is displayed.

Note that "minimum" refers to the smallest positive moment or the largest negative moment; "maximum" refers
to the largest positive moment or the smallest negative moment.
Red S/M
• 1st line: shear reduction at supports: Y = Yes , N = No.
• 2nd line: moment redistribution : Y = Yes , N = No
Reinf: Top/Bot
• 1st line: reinforcement at top face of the beam at support / span / support (in5)
• 2nd line: reinforcement at bottom face of the beam at support / span / support (in5).
Shear reinforcement:
• 1st line : Stirrup diameter, number of legs per stirrup and Av/s required at each end of the member.
• 2nd line : Gap from face of support to the first stirrup, stirrup details, gap from last stirrup to face of right
support.

Version 12.0 8-55 12/05

STRAP
Columns
The program design all selected columns in sequence and automatically displays a design summary table:

Col. Postprocessor serial number.

Mem. STRAP member number.
Dir M3 or M2; local axes moments.
Kl/r,Kl/h Column slenderness.
Class: Column may be Short or Slender.
Cmb: The critical design combination.
Size The external dimensions of the column
P,N: Axial load in critical combination.
Mi: Bending moment in critical combination without additional moment.
Mt, dM Bending moment with additional or minimum moment, i.e. Mt = Mi + Madd; dM = δM
Total The total no. of bars in the section and their diameter
Each The total number of bars on the long face in each direction, including the corner bars
% The reinforcement percentage = As/Ac. & indicates that the reinforcement is specified.
Cap Ratio of design capacity to the critical loads. Normally,
the capacity is > 1.00. However if the maximum
diameter and the minimum spacing do not provide an
adequate solution, Capacity < 1.0.

Note that the factor represents a vector ratio on the

column capacity diagram = L/S.

The program arranges reinforcement along the entire section perimeter as individual bars and not as a total
area. In order to ensure a logical arrangement of bars, the reinforcement is arranged in "groups". These
groups are arranged symmetrically in the section.

In all section types, Group 1 represents the corner bars; these bars are always present and only their diameter
varies as required.

Version 12.0 8-56 12/05

STRAP
Group arrangement for the various section types:

For example, in a rectangular section Group 1 consists of the four corner

bars. Groups 2 and 3 are arranged along the faces of the section
between the corner bars. Bars will be located in these groups only if
required by the calculation or in order to limit the distance between
adjacent bars.

Round sections contain only Group 1 bars; both the number and the
diameter may be revised.

Walls

Wall no. - the STRAP geometry wall number.

Seg - the segment number, refer to Detailed results to determine the location in the wall.
len/th - the wall segment dimensions - length and thickness
Kl/th - the minor axis slenderness value - (kl/thickness)
Comb - the design load combination for the segment. Note that each segment in the wall may be defined
according to a different load combination.
The design loads for the segment. Note that the loads are the design loads and include any additional
moments, etc, as specified by the Code.
P - the axial loads
M - the major axis moment
Mperp - the minor axis moment (Mperp)
V - the major axis shear

Reinforcement:

The total number of bars - concentrated at the ends and distributed between:

Cap - Ratio of design capacity to the critical loads. Normally, the capacity is > 1.00. However if the
maximum diameter and the minimum spacing do not provide an adequate solution, Capacity < 1.0.

Version 12.0 8-57 12/05

STRAP
8.12.2 Column shear

Display the shear and tie (hoop/spiral) data for the computed columns: For example, a column with seismic
design according to ACI 318 (the format will vary for plane/space models, models without seismic design and
for other codes):

where:
Comb = combination with maximum design shear, i.e. (V - Vc)max, where V = max(Vd , Vseis).
Vd = maximum factored shear in the column (combination "Cmb"), from STRAP results.
Vseis = the design shear calculated from the moment capacities at the ends of the column, calculated from
the probable moment strength (Mpr) of the beams framing into the column. Refer to 8.1.2 -
Seismic - general.
Vc = nominal shear strength provided by the concrete considering the axial force in the column.
Critical = Link (stirrup) details in the critical (hinge) area adjacent to the column ends
Middle = Link (stirrup) details in the middle of the column

Version 12.0 8-58 12/05

STRAP
8.12.3 Detailed results:

8.12.3.1 Beams - detailed results

Display options:

Display envelope only

To display only the moment/shear envelope created from all cases.
Display all load cases
To display the moment/shear diagrams for each of the individual load cases comprising the envelope.

The program displays the following screens (the display will vary slightly for different Codes):

Reinforcement:

where:
As`- Top reinforcement
As - Bottom reinforcement
• the program checks minimum reinforcement areas. If the calculated area is less than the minimum
area, the minimum area is printed along with a "*".
• for seismic analysis, the program checks the maximum reinforcement percentage specified by the
Code. If the percentage exceeds the limit, the calculated area is printed along with a “&”.

Version 12.0 8-59 12/05

STRAP
• If the compression block exceeds the maximum allowed, the program will calculate compression
steel required. For example, where compression reinforcement is required for a negative moment:
As` 5.1
As (+1.7)
Comp As 1.7
1.7 in5 is the compression steel required both top and bottom. Top reinforcement of 5.1 in5
includes the 1.7 in5 of compression reinforcement; ‘Comp As =’ is displayed for information only.
• An area may be displayed in parentheses below/above the top/bottom steel; this area is the one
calculated from the bending moment. The required area has been increased for one of two
reasons:
- the user specified a larger area using the “Specify reinforcement” option (Default or
Parameters)
- a larger area was automatically provided by the program according to seismic requirements,
e.g. support positive moment capacity must be greater than 50% x negative moment capacity
Tors-long: the total amount of longitudinal torsion reinforcement required at the span ends and midspan (to
be distributed around the entire perimeter of the web
a/d: Height of the compression block, a, as a percentage of the depth of the beam, d.
As/bd: Reinforcement percentage used for calculating minimum reinforcement. The program uses bw d for
T and I sections with the flange in tension.
Red: at any section: (moment after redistribution) / (the moment before redistribution) * 100%.
Vu/bd: Actual shear stress in the beam.
Vc/bd: Design shear stress in concrete.
Dist: The distance from the centre of the support to the point where Vu = φVc.
Av/s: Required shear reinforcement. For example, BS8110:

where v = V / bv d
For all other Codes, refer to Appendix A8.

A series of warnings will be displayed if:

• the reinforcement at a support or span exceeds the allowable
• Redistribution percentage exceeds the allowable,
• etc.

Stirrups:

Av/s req’d: required transverse reinforcement area for shear and torsion, as specified by the Code:
= (Av/s)v + (Av/s)t

Version 12.0 8-60 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• the area will not be less than the minimum the minimum specified by the code for shear and torsion
(derived from minimum area and maximum spacing requirements)
• Torsion is always calculated for two legs only, even if more than two legs are provided. In such a case
the value of Av/s displayed in the table is: (Av/s)v + n (Av/s)t, where n = (no. of legs/2)
Av/s Prov.:
Av/s provided in the first and last link groups in the spans:
Example: the first link group is 8 mm bars (A = 50 mm5) at 125 mm spacing, 2 legs.
Av/s = 2 * 50 /125 = 0.8

Gaps, groups:
where:
• "4#12..." refers to the number of stirrups, not spaces.
• "GAP" = distance from face of support to the first stirrup.
• The space between groups = the larger spacing of the two groups.

For example, check the following span:

Gap = = 4"
1st group = (16-1) * 4 = 60 Note that in seismic design, many codes specify the maximum
space = max(4,14) = 14 distance to the first link (e.g. ACI318 = 2 in). It is generally not
2nd group = (8-1) * 14 = 98 possible to adjust the number and/or spacing of the links so that
space = max(6,14) = 14 this exact gap is achieved and in such cases the sum will exceed
3rd group = (7-1)*6 = 36 the net span length.
space = max(6,8) = 8
4th group = (5-1)*4 = 16
Gap = = 4
254" ( = 21'-2")

Deflections: BS8110, EC2 and IS:456

As': span top reinforcement, used to calculated the Compression factor

As: maximum span bottom reinforcement, used to calculate the Tension factor
L/d: Actual span length-beam depth ratio.
Allowable: Allowable span-depth ratio as calculated according to the Code, based on the factors listed in
this Table.

Version 12.0 8-61 12/05

STRAP
Deflection: OK - if L/d value is less than the Allowable value.
Basic ratio: The basic span-depth ratio, based on end conditions:
• BS8110: Code table 3.10
• EC 2: Code table 4.14, assuming “Concrete highly stressed”, and 4.4.3.2(3).
• IS:456: 22.2.1
Based on L/: The Code tables are based on limiting the total deflection to L/250.
Flange factor: Factor for flanged beams:
• BS8110: Code Table 3.10,
• EC 2: 4.4.3.2-(3)
• IS:456: Fig.5

BS8110, IS:456:
Tens factor: Modification factor for tension reinforcement:
• BS8110: Code Table 3.11, and calculated according to Equations 7 and 8, where bb is the
redistribution ratio listed in the reinforcement results table.
• EC 2: 4.4.3.2-(4)
• IS:456: Fig. 3
Comp. factor: Modification factor for compression reinforcement:
• BS8110: Code table 3.12
• IS:456: Fig.4

Eurocode 2:
Stl str factor: Steel stress factor, calculated according to 4.4.3.2(4) = 250/σs = (400/fyk)(As,prov/As,reqd)(δ),
where δ = redistribution ratio (< 1 if moment in span is reduced).
Cnc str factor: Concrete stress factor, interpolating between the two values in Table 4.14.

Deflections (ACI318, CSA A23.3)

As' = span top reinforcement, used to calculated the moments-of-
inertia
As = maximum span bottom reinforcement, used to calculate the
moments-of inertia

The program deflection calculations are based on the elastic deflections

calculated by STRAP. These values are calculated from the section
and material properties defined in STRAP geometry but which may
have been modified in the concrete postprocessor. The deflection
values displayed are:

δ (elastic) = elastic STRAP deflection, where:

Load cases - maximum service deflection
Combinations - maximum factored deflection
δ EI/(EI),new = deflection modified according to the current section
and material values

The program calculates the effective moment-of-inertia, Ie, according

to the equation:

where:
Ig = moment-of-inertia of the gross concrete section, neglecting reinforcement
Icr = moment-of-inertia of the cracked transformed section
Mcr = cracking moment of the section

Version 12.0 8-62 12/05

STRAP
Mmax = maximum service moment in member at stage deflection is calculated

The deflection is calculated for three load conditions, therefore:

Mmax,d = maximum service moment due to dead loads
Mmax,d+l = maximum service moment due to live loads
Mmax,sust = maximum service moment due to sustained loads

and the resulting effective moments-of-inertia are Ie,d, Ie,d+l and Ie,sust

The additional long-term deflection factor:

ACI: λ = ξ/ (1+50ρ') (9-10)
CSA: S/(1+50ρ') (9-5)

ai,d = immediate deflection due to dead loads

ai,l = immediate deflection due to live loads = ai,d+l - ai,d
at,sust = long-term deflection due to sustained loads

The latter two values must be checked according to the Code (ACI - Table 9.5, CSA- Table 9.2) and the values
are also displayed in the L/x format.

Version 12.0 8-63 12/05

STRAP
8.12.3.2 Column - detailed results

Select the display options:

Design combination only

Display the column results for the critical combination only.
All combinations
Display the column results for all combinations.
Selected combinations
Select a combination from the list; only results for the selected combination will be displayed.

The following is an example of the detailed results summary (the display varies slightly for different Codes):

where:
Le = effective height of the column in the plane of bending considered.
k = effective length factor.
lu = clear height between end restraints.
r = radius-of-inertia.
le/r = column slenderness.

Version 12.0 8-64 12/05

STRAP
Section:
The section orientation is displayed relative to the local axis orientation displayed at the right of the screen. The
concrete compression area is hatched. The neutral axis is drawn parallel to the compression area block.

Reinforcement:
The number of bars and diameters, the total area and reinforcement percentage are displayed.

Warnings are displayed if:

• the percentage exceeds the allowable.
• the spacing is less than the optimal.
• a reduced area was used for lightly loaded columns.

Capacity factor:
Ratio of design capacity to the critical loads. Normally, the capacity is > 1.00. However if the maximum
diameter and the minimum spacing does not provide an adequate solution, Capacity < 1.00

Extended detailed results:

Moment diagrams:

the moments displayed are the STRAP elastic analysis results and do not include the additional moments.

Additional / Magnified Moments

The additional/magnified moment calculation is displayed for slender columns only. For example (ACI):

Note:
• the additional/magnified moments are always calculated for both directions, unless the user specified a
moment magnifier in the "Parameters" option.
• all symbols used are as defined in the Code.
• refer to Appendix A8 - Design assumptions for a detailed explanation of the assumptions made by the
program when calculating the moment magnifier.

Version 12.0 8-65 12/05

STRAP
Design Loads:

where:
Pu, Mu2, Mu3 = STRAP result moments and axial force
*Mu2, *Mu3 = Design moments (magnified/minimum moments)
Top/Middle/Bottom = Three design locations as required by the Code. For method used by the program
to generate *Mu at each location, refer to Appendix A8 - Design assumptions.

Minimum Moments: (for slender columns only)

where emin2 and emin3 are calculated from the Code equations. For example, ACI: emin = (0.6 + 0.03h) inch

Equilibrium Check:
The final table in the detailed results provides proof that the section is in equilibrium, i.e.
EF = 0 and EM = 0
As the section usually is slightly over-designed, the equations can be written:
EPi > EPe and EM i > EM e
where the subscripts "i" and "e" refer to the internal and external forces and moments, respectively.

Moments are calculated separately about the x2 and x3 axes (x and y), about the lower-left corner of
rectangular of L-sections, or the centre of circular sections.

Version 12.0 8-66 12/05

STRAP
8.12.3.3 Wall detailed results

Select the display options:

Design combination only

Display the column results for the critical combination only.
All combinations
Display the column results for all combinations.
Selected combinations
Select a combination from the list; only results for the selected
combination will be displayed.

The program first displays the wall section with the dimensions and the segment numbers:

The results are displayed separately for each segment in the

wall. The wall segments are always displayed ' vertically' in
the results table with the end at the small direction arrow
shown at the top, i.e. the left side of segment 3 and the
bottom of segment 4 will be displayed at the top, as shown
above.

The following is an example of the detailed results summary (the display varies slightly for different Codes):

Reinforcement
% concentrated - calculated from total segment area
% distributed - calculated from 'distributed' length only
% transverse - calculated from total segment area

Note:
• The maximum length for concentrated reinforcement (at either end) is 0.4 * wall length
• Concentrated reinforcement is not designed if the wall length is less than 4 * thickness

All other results

Refer to column detailed results

Version 12.0 8-67 12/05

STRAP
8.12.4 Specify Reinforcement

Use this option to revise the arrangement of reinforcement or the bar sizes; the program will automatically
recalculate the column capacity for the new arrangement. The arrangement and sizes selected here do not
have to conform to the diameter and spacing parameters and default values previously selected.

Note that groups without bars are represented by a single bar in parentheses (group 3 in the above example).

Revise the bar sizes and the number of bars for each group in the boxes at the bottom of the screen
• Bar size:
Revise the bar sizes (diameter). The corner bars (group 1) may be one bar size larger than the face bars.
• No. of bars:
Revise the number of bars for each group. The number of bars in Group 1 (corner bars) cannot be revised
(except in round sections).

Then click one of the following buttons:

: Accept the new reinforcement.

Compute Recalculate the section capacity with the new arrangement. Note that the program does not
check minimum reinforcement requirements, but displays a warning if they are exceeded.

Detailed results Display detailed results for the current specified reinforcement

For “identical” columns:

If the selected column is "identical" to other column segments:
Assign reinforcement to all other columns in identical list
The reinforcement specified for this column will be assigned to all other columns in the identical list
Only the selected column segment will have the specified reinforcement. Note that the column will still be
in the "identical list", even the reinforcement is no longer be identical.

Version 12.0 8-68 12/05

STRAP
8.12.5 Create BEAMD detailing files

The BEAMD program is a software package for the design & detailing of reinforced concrete beams. Please
contact your STRAP dealer for more information.

This option creates for each beam in the model a detailing file that can be read by BEAMD. Specify the model
beams for which the detailing files are to be generated - "All beams" or "Displayed beams only"

• The detailing files are created by default in the sub-directory \BMnnn of the current working directory, where
nnn = the STRAP model number.
• For convenience, the files may be grouped together in "projects". Up to 10 projects may be created in any
directory.
• Beams may be added to an existing project or a new project may be created: select an existing project in
the "Project" list box, or select "Open a new project" (in the list box) and type in the project name in the
"New project name" edit box.
• The program automatically creates a title for each beam with the format "Bnnn : list", where "Bnnn" is the
concrete postprocessor beam number and "list" is the list of STRAP members. Revise this name by clicking
on
• The program checks whether a file for the beam already exists in the directory (by comparing automatic
beam titles). If a file is found:

Select:
Replace file
Overwrite the existing file
Do not replace file
Do not create a new file

Note:
• BEAMD can handle beams with up to 10 spans. This option will transfer the data from the first 10 spans
of longer beams (members with identical sections separated by dummy nodes will be combined to a single
span)
• Up to 999 beams may be saved in each sub-directory
• The files created by this option are:
- BMPROJ.ATR - an index of the beams and projects in the directory
- Bnnn.BMD - the file (for each beam) containing the detailing data, e.g. B001.BMD, B002.BMD, etc

Version 12.0 8-69 12/05

STRAP
8.13 Data table
To display the current design data - Default or Parameters - for each member. Note that the data is displayed
only for members that are part of a continuous beam or column.

8.13.1 Beam data table

(Headers may vary slightly for different Codes)

Mem No. = STRAP member number
Beam no. = Postprocessor serial number.
Next mem. = next STRAP member in continuous beam.
Prop = STRAP property group number.
Dir = design direction - M2 or M3
f'c = concrete grade.
ds = cover to center-of-gravity of main reinforcement.
Mom Red = automatic moment redistribution: No or Max/Min percentages if Yes.
Shear Red = shear reduction to distance 'd' from face of supports: Yes or No.
Shear reinforcement:
# = range of allowable stirrup diameters.
Leg = default number of legs in stirrups and alternate (larger) number.
Spc = for "Stirrups Only" : minimum stirrups spacing
for "Stirrups + Bent-up bars": constant stirrup spacing along length of beam.
By = for "Stirrups Only" : stirrup spacing increment.
Grp = maximum number of stirrup groups allowed in this span.
Supports:
JA, JB = denotes member start, end nodes.
T = support type: S = Support ; N = No support; C = Cantilever
Wid = support width.

Def/L = maximum allowable deflection (BS8110, EC2 and IS:456 only)

8.13.2 Column data table

(Headers may vary slightly for different Codes)

Mem No. = STRAP member number
Col no. = Postprocessor serial number.
Next mem. = next STRAP member in continuous column.
Prop = STRAP property group number.
f'c = concrete grade.
ds = cover to center-of-gravity of main reinforcement.
Diameter:

Version 12.0 8-70 12/05

STRAP
Min = minimum diameter allowed in this member.
Max = maximum diameter allowed in this member
No = number of different diameter allowed (1 or 2)
Opt. Spacing = minimum spacing between adjacent bars. If no solution is available with this spacing, the
program will add more bars and reduce the spacing.
Dir = design moment direction - M2 or M3
Type = Braced or Unbraced
K = Effective length factor
Support = Height of the beam framing into the column member at its end.
Flange = for U,L and T-sections: the flange location relative to the local axes.
Magn. = Moment magnifier for slender columns. If a value is not displayed, the program will calculate the
value automatically.

8.13.3 Wall data table

(Headers may vary slightly for different Codes)

Wall No. = STRAP member number

fcu = concrete grade.
cover = cover to center-of-gravity of main reinforcement.

Diameter:
Min = minimum diameter allowed in this member.
Max = maximum diameter allowed in this member
No = number of different diameter allowed (1 or 2)

Opt. Spacing = minimum spacing between adjacent bars. If no solution is available with this spacing, the
program will add more bars and reduce the spacing.
K = Effective length factor
Magn. = Moment magnifier for slender columns. If a value is not displayed, the program will calculate the
value automatically.
Live red. = Live load reduction factor

8.13.4 Data table – deflections

Display the beam deflection parameters. Note that the parameters are displayed once for each continuous
beam (the parameters for the entire beam are those assigned to the first span).

Version 12.0 8-71 12/05

STRAP
8.13.5 Data table - reinforcement

This table displays the user specified reinforcement ("Default" and "Parameters"). For example:

The table shows the actual reinforcement at the start/end, top/bottom of every beam. Four examples are
highlighted:

The design area has not been modified by the user, i.e. the design area is increased by a factor x1.00 and
an additional area of 0.00 is added
The design area is increased by a factor x1.15 and an additional area of 0.50 is added.
An area of 3.20 is specified (the design area will be used if greater than this value).
The design area is rounded off to #6 bars and an additional area of 0.80 is added.

8.13.6 Data table - seismic

The program displays the beam "Seismic capacity table". For example:

At the start and end of each beam:

• A's, As:
The actual reinforcement areas at the span supports, as modified by the user.
• Moment capacities, based on the actual reinforcement:
nominal: capacity calculated using concrete and steel strengths not reduced by Code factors
probable: capacity calculated using increased steel strength, i.e. actual conditions
• The seismic design Shear forces (Ve), calculated from the probable moment strength of the beam together
with the factored beam loads:

Version 12.0 8-72 12/05

STRAP
8.13.7 Data table - column shear

Display the column shear parameters as specified in the Default and Parameter options. For example:

Version 12.0 8-73 12/05

STRAP
8.14 File

Geometry definition
Exit the concrete processor and return to the Geometry definition for the same model.

STRAP models list

Exit the concrete processor and return to the STRAP main menu to select another model.

Exit
Exit the concrete processor and STRAP.

Copy to clipboard
Copy the current graphic display to the clipboard.

Print drawing
Print the current graphic display.

Print/edit saved drawing

Refer to 1.4.11.

Version 12.0 8-74 12/05

STRAP
8.14.1 Setup

8.14.1.1 Setup - colors

This option enables the selection of colors

for the graphic screens displayed by the
Detailed results option only. All colors in
the general model display may be changed
using the Setup - colors option in the STRAP
main menu.

8.14.1.2 ACI strength reduction factor

By default, the program uses the strength reduction factors

specified in ACI 9.3.2.2.
Select the second option to use the alternate factors specified in
ACI Appendix C.

The factors are:

9.3.2.2 App. C
Flexure, without axial load: 0.90 0.80
Axial tension: 0.90 0.80
Compression + flexure: 0.70 0.65
Compression + flexure, spiral: 0.75 0.7

Version 12.0 8-75 12/05

STRAP
8.14.1.3 Column drawing parameters

• Section parameters:

• Elevation parameters:

• Bar schedule parameters:

8.14.1.4 Column table parameters

Identical stories
Identical columns at adjacent levels may be combined to one row in the table.
For example:

Version 12.0 8-76 12/05

STRAP
8.14.1.5 Line width for printing

Specify the line width when printing for each of the column elements in the drawing.
Note that a width of 0.0 indicates a width of 1 pixel.

8.14.1.6 Drawing paper types

Specify the net paper size available for the drawing. The
dimensions represent the actual paper size less the margins
specified in the printer manual less any additional margin.

8.14.1.7 Bar diameters

Create and modify sets of bar diameters and select a set for the current model. Note that the sets are used by
all models in all directories.
Current set
Select a new set of reinforcement bars for the
current model only
Note:
• the current set for other existing models will
not change
• the current set is the default set for new
models

Add/delete a set
Click Add a new set to add a new table of
reinforcement bars.

The program automatically copies the data of

the current set to the new set and the data may
then be updated.
Note:
• do not delete a set that is the current set of any model on the computer.
• do not delete a set if any of the following sets is used by a model (i.e. if Set no. 3 is deleted, Set no. 4
changes to Set no. 3, etc).

Diameter/data
Enter /revise the data for each reinforcement bar:
• Name
A text string that is displayed in all menus and result tables (maximum length = 4 characters)
• Area
design bar area, according to the units displayed at the top of the column
• Internal index
An index used by the program; any value between 1-99 is permissible when adding a new bar or creating
a new table. Do not modify the index for existing bars !!!
• Links/main
Specify whether a diameter can be selected by the program for links only, main reinforcement only, or both.
The selection applies to both beams and columns.

Note:
• all changes will apply to all models that use the current set.

Version 12.0 8-77 12/05

STRAP
Move up/down
Highlight a line in the table, then click Move Up or Move Down to move the line to a different location.
Note that this option is for convenience only as the program internally always sorts the list by area when
selecting reinforcement.

Note:
• to add a new diameter to the list, enter the data in a blank line at the end of the list, then click Move Up
to move the line to its correct location in the table
• to delete a diameter from the list, delete all data in the line at, then click Move Down to move the line to
the end of the table. Note that the diameter will be deleted from all models that use the current set.

8.14.1.8 Concrete types

Enter a list of nominal concrete strengths. The program will automatically calculate all allowable stress values
from the nominal strength.

8.14.1.9 Save defaults

The default parameters specified for the current model may be saved as the default parameters for all new
models. Select the parameters to be saved:

8.14.1.10Miscellaneous
According to the Indian Code IS:456, all beams with a torsional moment must be designed and detailed
accordingly.
Specify a minimum torsional stress; torsion will be ignored in all beams with a stress value less than that
specified here.

Version 12.0 8-78 12/05

STRAP

9 Bridge Postprocessor
9.1 Bridge postprocessor - general

9.1.1 Getting started

9.1.1.1 Introduction

Most bridge design codes require that each point on the bridge be designed for the arrangement and
combination of loads that produce the most adverse moments, shears, etc. at that point.

In order to comply with the requirements of the Code, the bridge designer has to calculate influence lines for
each result type at every point along the bridge. Based on the results, he then decides where to load the
bridge. It is obvious that as the bridge becomes more complicated, the amount of work required increases
enormously.

The STRAP bridge module calculates the load patterns and the corresponding results, as follows:
• The user defines a regular STRAP model of the bridge consisting of beams and/or elements, all load cases
(self-weight, wind, earthquake, etc.) - other than highway (vehicle) loads, and solves the model for these
loads.
• The user then selects the Bridge design option and defines the following:
- lanes
- lane loads
- load cases
• The program then calculates for every point in the model and for every result type (moment, shear, etc.) the
combination of uniform, vehicle and knife-edge loads that give the maximum and minimum result at the
point. The calculation is carried out according to user specified parameters, such as the number of lanes
that may be loaded simultaneously, the uniform load intensity for various lengths of load , etc.
• The user can then append load cases to the STRAP results file containing maximum/minimum results at
each point.
• In addition, the user can select any point on the bridge and generate an influence line at that point for any
result type. Both the influence lines and the corresponding load arrangement may be displayed graphically.

The basis of the calculation is the division of each lane into a series of strips. The width of each strip
(perpendicular to the axis of the lane) is equal to the width of the lane and the length of the strip (parallel to the
axis of the lane) is specified by the user. The program loads and solves each strip with a uniform unit load and
calculates the influence lines and the critical load arrangements from the results. Similar to finite element
analysis, the accuracy will increase as the lanes are divided into smaller strips, but so will the solution time and
the disk space required.

Refer also to:

• How to use the Bridge Module - 9.1.2
• Results - General - 9.9.1
• Lanes/Strips - General - 9.2.1

9.1.1.2 Solution Method and Program Assumptions

The program divides each lane into strips; the width of each strip is equal to the width of the lane at that point
while the length of the strip (parallel to the axis of the lane) is defined by the user at the time the lane is defined.

The program calculates the deflections in the entire model for a unit uniform load applied to each strip, e.g. for
a model with 500 strips, the program solves 500 unit load cases.

At every beam end (and at every 1/10 span) and for every result type (moment, shear, etc.), the program
searches for the strips in every loaded lane where the corresponding result for the unit load on that strip has
the same sign as the result being calculated. The number of strips used corresponds to the load length defined.
The program then multiplies the results from the unit loads by the load intensity.

Version 12.0 9-1 12/05

STRAP
A similar method is used for elements; the program calculates the results at the element centre and the corners.
The maximum deflection is calculated at nodes, except at nodes that were defined as supports, where the
max/min reactions are calculated.

When calculating maximum/minimum results, the program applies the loads to the strips according to the
influence line results; loads are applied only on the strips where the applied load gives a result with the proper
sign. Note that the maximum load length (i.e. sum of loaded strip widths) may be limited by the user.

9.1.2 How to use the Bridge Module

STRAP
• Create a model of the bridge in the STRAP geometry module.
• Define all loads other than the bridge loads in the STRAP loading module.
• Solve the model (optional at this stage, but before STRAP results are displayed, design postprocessors are
accessed, etc.)
• Return to the STRAP Main menu. Select Design in the menu bar and Bridge module in the pull-down
menu.

Bridge Module
• Define lanes:
Set lanes in side menu and click the Define icon.
Define the start and end nodes of each segment, the lane width and the number of strips per segment.
• Select the method of distributing the loads to the model:
- select Options in the menu bar
- select Load direction to specify the Global direction in which all loads are applied.
- select Load distribution in the pull-down menu and specify the element types that the loads are applied
to (beams, specific beams, elements)
• Solve the model:
Select Files in the menu bar and Solve in the pull-down menu. The program will return to the bridge module
after completing the solution.
• Display influence lines:
Select Results in the menu bar and
- graphic display:select Draw influence lines in the pull-down menu
- tabular display: select Display influence lines table in the pull-down menu
• Define lane loads:
set lane loads in side menu and click the Define icon.
The following load types may be defined:
- Uniform load:
Specify the uniform lane load (units are t/m, kip/ft, etc. - not load/area), the maximum length of the sum
of the loaded strip widths and the load length reduction factor table.
- Vehicle load:
Select a vehicle load or vehicle group from the list box, define a factor to increase/decrease the load and
the direction of travel (most vehicle loads are not symmetric). Note that the program can check both
directions and use the worst.
- Knife edge load (also used to define concentrated loads).
• Define load cases:
Load cases are defined by assigning lane loads to specific lanes.
Set load case in side menu and click the Define icon.
- assign the defined lane load to the defined lanes
- define permutations; the program will create additional load cases by interchanging the lanes the lane
loads are assigned to.
Note that load cases may be deactivated/activated.

Version 12.0 9-2 12/05

STRAP
Refer also to 9.5.4 - Lane loads & Load cases - Example

• Display a specific result for any node/beam/element or specific point. The results are the value of the
maximum/minimum result and the corresponding loaded strips, location of vehicle loads and location of knife
edge loads.
- select Results in the menu bar
- select Draw applied loads for selected result in the pull-down menu
- specify max or min; select result type, specify location.
• Transfer results to STRAP:
The program appends ‘transfer’ load cases to the STRAP result files.
- Maximum or minimum results may be selected.
- For the same transfer load case, select either:
maximum/minimum value for each result type,
maximum/minimum for a specific result type and corresponding results from same calculated load case.
Note that the transfer for very large models with many lanes, strips and calculated load cases may require
several hours (the progress is displayed on the screen).

9.1.3 Bridge Module data files

File name: Description:

VEHICLE.DAT A file containing load and dimension data for standard vehicles. This file
is copied to BRDGnnn.DAT (see below) when the bridge module is run
Program for the first time for each model and is not modified by the program. Refer
files to 9.3.4.
LOADFCT.DAT A file containing the uniform load vs load length factors. Refer to 9.4.1.1.
BRIDGnnn.DAT Vehicles (copied from VEHICLES.DAT and those defined by user in the
current model) and vehicle groups. "Revise/delete vehicles" options
revise this file only (not VEHICLES.DAT) and so do not affect other
Model models.
files NDLDnnn.DAT For each strip: applied loads when loads distributed as joint loads
BMLDnnn.DAT For each strip: applied loads when loads distributed as beam loads
RESDBnnn.DAT Results for load applied to each strip separately.

Version 12.0 9-3 12/05

STRAP
9.1.4 Bridge - Main menu

From the menu bar:

and the general display options:

Refer to:
• Lanes - 9.2
• Vehicle - 9.3
• Lane load - 9.4
• Load case - 9.5
• File - 9.6
• Options - 9.7
• Output - 9.8
• Results - 9.9
• Display - 9.10

Refer also to:

• Bridge postprocessor - general - 9.1

• How to use the bridge module - 9.1.2
• Results - General - 9.9.1

Version 12.0 9-4 12/05

STRAP
9.2 Lanes
A lane is defined as a line joining nodes. Each lane may consist of a number of segments, where the start node
of any segment is the end node of the previous segment.

9.2.1 Lanes - general

A lane is defined as a line joining nodes. Each lane may consist of a number of segments, where the start node
of any segment is the end node of the previous segment.

For each segment, the user specifies:

• the lane width
• the offset of the lane centre line from the line connecting the start and end nodes. A positive offset is to the
left of the line from node n to node n+1
• the division of the lane segment into strips. Uniform strips may be defined for all lane segments, or both
the length and width of the strips may vary from segment to segment.

Version 12.0 9-5 12/05

STRAP
9.2.1.1 Strips

Lane strips are the basic geometry unit of the bridge module; lanes are divided into segments along their
longitudinal axis and segments are divided into equal strips. The number of strips per segment is specified by
the user.

When specifying the number of strips per segment, please note the following:
• When the Solve option is selected, the program creates a uniform unit load case for each strip in the model,
i.e. for a model with 500 strips, the program must create and solve 500 load cases. The accuracy will
increase as the lanes are divided into smaller strips, but so will the solution time and disk space required.
• All loads, including vehicle and knife-edge loads are applied as uniform loads on strips; accuracy will be
reduced as the number of strips is decreased. For example, if the strip width in a lane is 1.0 m and the
distance between axle 1 and axle 2 is 1.5 m, then the two axle loads will be applied at 1.0 or 2.0 m spacing.

9.2.1.2 Vertical tolerance

The loads applied by the program are distributed to beams, elements or nodes. The distribution method and
the load direction are specified by the user (refer to Options).

For each lane segment, the program draws an imaginary plane through the end nodes of the segment and
perpendicular to the load direction. The program determines the distance from all nodes to this plane and will
apply loads to nodes/beam/elements only if they are located within a user defined distance from the plane. This
distance is referred to as the vertical tolerance.

Limit the vertical tolerance to prevent the load from being applied to more than one level or enlarge the
tolerance if the surface is not perpendicular to the load plane.

For example, the following drawing shows a section through a banked bridge deck:

Loads will not be applied to the nodes if a zero vertical tolerance is specified. To apply loads to the entire deck,
define the vertical tolerance as shown in the drawing.

Note that the tolerance dimension is applied both above and below the plane, i.e a defined tolerance of 1 unit
creates a strip 2 units thick.

Version 12.0 9-6 12/05

STRAP
9.2.2 Lanes - define

A lane is defined as a line joining nodes:

• Each lane may consist of a number of segments, where the start node of any segment is the end node of
the previous segment.
• Each segment has properties (width, offset, number of strips)

Select one of the following options:

Note:
• Defining a new lane will influence the distribution of the loads to the model and hence all results must be
recalculated). The program displays a warning when this option is selected:

9.2.2.1 Simple line

To define a lane:
• select the lane start node using the standard node selection option.
• select the end node of the first segment
• define the segment properties (width, offset, number of strips)
• If there are no more segments in the lane, click the End definition button.
If there are more segments:
• click the button
• select the end node of the next segment
• define the segment properties (width, offset, number of strips). Note that all properties may be different for
each segment. Refer to 9.2.1 - Lanes - general
• Repeat for additional segments.
To end, click the button.

Version 12.0 9-7 12/05

STRAP
9.2.2.2 Polyline

To define a lane:
• select the lane start node using the standard node selection option.
• select the end node of the first segment
• select the end nodes of the next and all following segments
• If there are no more segments in the lane, click the last node again or click the End definition button.
• define the segment properties (width, offset, number of strips)

If there are more segments (with different properties):

Another segment
• click the button
• select the end node of the next and following segments
• continue as explained above.

Note:
• the "Divide segments in __ strips" option in the Lane- properties menu refers to the entire polyline.

9.2.2.3 Automatic

Define a lane along a curve formed by a chain of nodes by selecting:

• the start node
• the second node
• the end node

For example:

The program selects node 'n+1' that is closest to the extension of the line connected nodes 'n' and 'n-1'.

The lane is not created if the program is unable to connect the last node with the first one.

9.2.3 Lanes - revise

Version 12.0 9-8 12/05

STRAP
Note:
• Revising a lane (width, properties, strips) will influence the distribution of the loads to the model and hence
all results must be recalculated). The program displays a warning when this option is selected:

9.2.3.1 Revise segment properties

Refer to 9.2.2.1 - Segment properties - define

9.2.3.2 Add segments at start

• Identify the lane by selecting any of its segment end nodes

• Specify the start node of the new beginning of the lane
• Specify the end node of the first new segment and define the segment properties
• Continue defining segments; the option will terminate when the end node specified for new segment is the
existing start node of the lane.

9.2.3.3 Delete segments at start

Specify the new start node of the lane (you may select only end nodes of existing segments); the program will
delete all segments preceding this node.

9.2.3.4 Add segments at end

• Identify the lane by selecting any of its segment end nodes

• Specify the end node of the first new segment and define the segment properties
• Continue defining segments; the option will terminate when you click the End definition button in the Lane
properties menu.

9.2.3.5 Delete segments at end

Specify the new end node of the lane (you may select only end nodes of existing segments); the program will
delete all segments following this node.

9.2.3.6 Split/join segments

Redefine the division of an existing lane into segments by:

• joining an interval of consecutive segments
• dividing an interval of consecutive segments

For example, an interval of four existing segments may "joined" to 2 new segments or "split" to 6 new
segments.

Procedure:
• Select the start node of the first segment in the interval to be redivided
• Select the end node of the last segment in the interval
• Specify the new end nodes of each of the new segments in the interval and define the properties of each
of the segments

Version 12.0 9-9 12/05

STRAP
9.2.3.7 Revise lane numbers

Renumber the defined lanes.

Note that the maximum lane number cannot be revised; the program can only interchange the numbers.

For example, a model with 7 lanes: Only 1 to 7 can be assigned to a lane; if lane 2 is renumbered to lane 6,
then lane 6 will automatically be renumbered to lane 2.

9.2.4 Lanes - delete

Note:
Revising a lane (width, properties, strips) will influence the distribution of the loads to the model and hence all
results must be recalculated). The program displays a warning when this option is selected:

To delete a lane completely, select any of the segment end nodes.

Refer also to delete segments - 9.2.3.3 and 9.2.3.5.

Version 12.0 9-10 12/05

STRAP
9.3 Vehicles

Note the following terminology:

• Vehicles:
The program contains a file with the standard vehicle loads and patterns specified by the various design
Codes. In addition, the program allows the user to create his own vehicle load by defining the number of
wheels, the distance between them and the concentrated load applied by each wheel.

An optional associated uniform load may also be defined as part of the vehicle load.

• Vehicle groups:
Most Codes require that the several types of vehicles be checked, each having a different arrangement of
wheels and/or a different distribution of the load. The user may define vehicle “groups” containing more than
one vehicle type. The program then checks each vehicle in the group when calculating the max/min results
at each point (note that different vehicles may be used for different points).

Refer also to 9.2.1 - Lanes - General (Strips)

9.3.1 Vehicles - define

Define a new vehicle type or vehicle group.

Version 12.0 9-11 12/05

STRAP
9.3.1.1 Vehicle - define

A vehicle consist of a series of axles and an optimal associated uniform load.

Up to 100 axles may be defined for each vehicle.

• Axle loads
Define the axle spacing and weight applied:

Note:
- "width" is not used by the program; the total load per axle is applied as a uniform load to the entire
strip.
- The distance between axles displayed in the results will be the distance between the centres of the strips
to which the axle is applied. For example, if the strip width in a lane is 1.0 m and the distance between
axle 1 and axle 2 is 1.5 m, then the two axle loads will be applied at 1.0 or 2.0 m spacing.

Up to 100 axles may be defined per vehicle.

- click the Next button to display the next 5 axles
- click the Previous button to display the previous 5 axles

"Total weight" = sum of weights per axle.

Weight per axle = "weight of wheel n" x "Wheels per axle"

Version 12.0 9-12 12/05

STRAP
For example, 2 axles:
- Weight of wheel 1 = 6.25
- Weight of wheel 2 = 7.50
- Wheels per axle = 4
Total weight = (4x6.25) + (4x7.50) = 55.0

• Vehicle load - uniform load

Define a uniform load associated with the vehicle load. The uniform load can represent:
- an additional uniform load that is always applied with the vehicle
- a length along the lane adjacent to the vehicle load where the uniform lane load is not applied.

Load
Specify one of the following options:
Cancels lane uniform load
The uniform lane load will not be applied on the length specified in this option.
Value
A uniform load - in addition to the uniform lane load - will be applied on the length specified in this option.

Specify the uniform load value; a value opposite to the sign of the uniform lane load will reduce the uniform
lane load in the specified length.

Load Length
Specify the distance from the first axle to the start of the uniform load:
- a positive distance is in the direction of travel
- the first axle is the most forward axle in the direction of travel

Distance to first axle

Define the length of the uniform load:
- a positive length is opposite to the direction of travel of the vehicle

Version 12.0 9-13 12/05

STRAP
Apply only
Select one of the following options:
The uniform vehicle load will always be applied along with the vehicle, even if it reduces the value of the
maximum result.
The uniform vehicle load will be applied only to those strips under the length that contribute to the
maximum result.

Note:
This is always the case when Cancels lane uniform load is selected or when Value is selected
with a load of opposite sign to the uniform lane load.

Warning:
The program only checks the sign of the influence line in each strip and does not check whether each strip is
actually loaded with a uniform lane load. Therefore, the vehicle uniform load may be subtracted from strips
where the uniform lane load is not applied because of the maximum length limitation.

9.3.1.2 Vehicle group - define

A vehicle group consists of several defined vehicle loads. If a group is applied as a lane load, then the program
will check each of the vehicle loads in the group and use the one that gives the maximum (minimum) result at
the specified location.

The program displays a list of all defined vehicles. Click a vehicle name to highlight it or to remove the
highlight. Only highlighted vehicles are included in the vehicle group. For example:

Three vehicles are included in Group #3: "HA (one wheel", "HB (A=8 m)" and "HB (A=18 m)"

9.3.2 Vehicles - revise

To revise a vehicle or vehicle group:

• select a vehicle or group from the list box displayed on the screen.
• for a vehicle - refer to Vehicle loads - define (10.30.1.1)
for a vehicle group - refer to Vehicle group - define. (10.30.1.2)

9.3.3 Vehicles - delete

Delete any of the vehicles or vehicle groups displayed in the list box.

Note:
• deleted vehicles will automatically be deleted from all groups
• deleting vehicles or vehicle groups will not affect other models.

Version 12.0 9-14 12/05

STRAP

9.3.4 Vehicles.DAT

The file VEHICLES.DAT (in the program directory) contains the data for all standard vehicle loads and may be
edited by the user to revise existing vehicles or to add new vehicles.

Note that vehicles defined by the Define a new vehicle type option in the program are available only for the
model for which they are defined and will not be displayed in the list box of vehicle loads for other models.

Each vehicle is defined by the following lines (must be in the following order):

• Line 1- title - vehicle name (displayed in the list box of vehicle loads)

• Line 2- associated uniform load data (Optional)

format: UNIFORM ic ia load dist length
where: ic = 1 : the uniform lane load will not be applied on length
= 0 : load will be added to uniform lane load
ia = 1 : applied only when result is increased
= 0 : always applied
load = pressure value (relevant when ic = 0)
dist = distance from 1st axle to start of load
length = length of load

• Line 3- Axle data

format: na nw ulf uwf wid
where: na = no. of axles
nw = no. of wheel per axle
ulf = length factor (converts all length dimensions to meters)
uwf = weight factor (converts all weight dimensions to tons)
wid = width between wheels

• Line 4- list of distances; if more than one line is required then terminate lines with a / or \

• Line 5- list of weights; if more than one line is required then terminate lines with a / or \

Note:
• all data is entered in 'free-format' (the location in the line is not important)
• the following commands may be defined prior to line 1
WEIGHT wt_unit
LENGTH len_unit
where: wt_unit = ton, kN, kip, kg, pound, gram
len_unit = mm, cm, meter, inch, foot
These commands override the ulf, uwf factors in line 3 and remain in effect for all following vehicles until
a new command is encountered.

Version 12.0 9-15 12/05

STRAP
9.4 Lane loads

The following loads may be applied to a lane:

• Uniform load:
Specify the load value, the maximum length of the sum of the loaded strip widths and the load length
reduction factor table.

Note: units are t/m, kip/ft, etc - not load/area

loads are applied only to strips that contribute to the requested result

• Vehicle load:
Specifies the vehicle or vehicle group, a factor for multiplying the loads in the file and the direction of travel
along the lane. A single vehicle/group may be defined on each lane (a different vehicle/group may be
applied to each lane).

Note that a vehicle is applied to a lane only when it contributes to the requested result.

• Knife-edge load:
The user specifies the load intensity. A single knife-edge load may be applied on each lane.

Refer also to 9.5.4 - Lane loads & Load cases - Example

Version 12.0 9-16 12/05

STRAP
9.4.1 Lane loads - define

Lane loads are a combination of uniform loads, vehicle loads and knife-edge loads.

9.4.1.1 Uniform load

Value (W=)
Specify the uniform load value per length of lane, i.e.

Units are load/length (t/m, kip/ft, etc.) - NOT load/area

Maximum length
Specify the maximum total length of uniform load that may be applied in a lane:

The program will load only those strips that contribute to the requested result. Use this option to limit the total
width of the strips that are used. If the sum of the strip widths that contribute is greater than the length defined
here, then the program will use the strips that contribute the most.

For example: maximum length = 10 m, i.e. the program can use only 5 strips:

The program will use strips 1,7,8,12 and 14.

Load factor table

Many codes stipulate that the intensity of the uniform load applied to the lane is inversely proportional to the
total length of the load (i.e. the sum of the loaded strips).

Version 12.0 9-17 12/05

STRAP
For example: BS5400: Part 2: 1978: Table 13
Loaded Load
length (m) (kN/m)
Up to 30 30.0
32 29.1
34 28.3
etc. ....

Select the appropriate load factor table from the list box or select "None" if this option is not applicable.

Note that the load applied is "W" x factor (in table).

Note:
• The load factor tables are stored in file LOADFCT.DAT. For more information on this file, refer to “Factor
table file format” below.
• A "SA" load factor table must be specified in order to design according to the South African TMH7 Code;
refer to Load factor tables for below more details. Refer to 10.110.1.
• A "BD" load factor table must be specified in order to design according to the BD37/88 Code; refer to Load
factor tables below for more details. Refer to 10.110.2

Factor table file format:

Load factor tables are stored in file LOADFCT.DAT. Several tables may be stored in this file.

File format: Description:

1 table_1_title - Title rows must start in column 1
dist1 fact1 - data rows must start in column
dist2 fact2 2+;
| | 1+ space between "dist" and
distn factn "fact"
2 table_2_title - "dist": read as "up to dist"
dist1 fact1 - program interpolates values
dist2 fact2 - Load applied = W x fact
| |
distn factn
| |
END - File must terminate with "END"

The default units for distn are meters. To define a table with other units, add the command
UNITS n
before the table title, where:
n = 1 - mm
= 2 - cm
= 3 - meters
= 4 - inch
= 5 - feet

The units will be in effect until another UNIT command is encountered in the file.

The program will automatically convert the table to the current model default units.

Version 12.0 9-18 12/05

STRAP
Example for BS5400:
There are two alternatives:
• define W=1.0; the table should be
1 BS5400 - Table 13
30 30
32...29.1
34 28.3
|
END

• define W=30.0; the table should be

1 BS5400 - Table 13
30 1.00
32...0.97
34 0.943
|
END

• To designate a table as a South African Code (TMH7) table, add (S) to the end of the title (when a table with
(S) at the end of the title is selected, the program will automatically apply the lane loads according to the
South African Code). Refer to 10.110.1.
• To designate a table as a BD37/88 table, add (BD) to the end of the title (when a table with (BD) at the end
of the title is selected, the program will automatically display the dialog box that requests the data required
to calculate the Table 14 factors). Refer to 10.110.2

9.4.1.2 Vehicle load

Vehicle/group
Click this item to display a list box containing the titles of all defined vehicle loads and vehicle groups; select
one.

Vehicle factor
The defined vehicle load may be increased or decreased by a factor.

Vehicle direction
Vehicle loads are generally not symmetric about the axis perpendicular to the lane. Therefore, it is important
to define the direction of travel of the vehicle.

Select one of the following options:

• Start to end
• End to start
Only one direction of travel will be checked by the program. The direction refers to the order of the nodes
selected to define the lane.

• Both directions
The program will assume that the vehicle may travel in either direction and will test both possibilities.

Version 12.0 9-19 12/05

STRAP
9.4.1.3 Knife-edge load

Specify the load value in weight units (total load)

Note:
• A single knife-edge load may be applied on each lane.
• Different load values may be defined for the moment calculation and the shear calculation (refer to AASHTO
- Figure 3.7.6B).
• The program applies the knife-edge load as a uniform load to a strip.

9.4.2 Lane loads - revise/delete

Select an existing lane load from the list box:

For "Revise" - modify the existing lane load data (9.4.1).

Version 12.0 9-20 12/05

STRAP
9.5 Load case

A load case is defined by assigning lane loads to specific lanes.

The user may define a series of load cases. Note that the term "cases" refers only to a general framework for
the actual load arrangement:
• the program applies the loads to each of the strips along the length of the lanes; only those loads that
contribute to the requested maximum/minimum result are used
• the program can generate "permutations" of the defined load case by rotating the lane loads amongst the
selected lanes. For example, the model contains four lanes and the user defines the loads on one lane only.
The program will then generate three additional load cases by applying the same load to each of the three
other lanes.

Some Codes allow load reduction, where the amount of reduction is a function of the number of loaded lanes.
The user can define several load cases, where in each case the number of loaded lanes and hence the load
intensity are different.

The user may deactivate load cases and reactivate them at any time.

Refer also to 9.5.4 - Lane loads & Load cases - Example

9.5.1 Load case - define

To define a load case, assign a lane load to each lane:

Refer also to 9.5.4 - Lane loads & Load cases - Example.

Version 12.0 9-21 12/05

STRAP
9.5.1.1 Assignment of loads to lanes

To define a load case, assign lane loads to lanes:

For example, assign "lane load type A" to " lane 2":

The list box at the right will be revised to:

9.5.1.2 Permutations

Load cases are defined by assigning lane loads to specific lanes. The user may instruct the program to
generate all possible permutations of the lane loads on the selected lanes. The program will create load cases
by interchanging the lane loads.

Two options are available:

from lane m to lane n

For example: a bridge with 6 lanes and the lane load must be applied simultaneously on any two lanes, i.e.
15 load cases must be created. To create them automatically, assign the lane load to lanes 1 and 2 (or any
2 of the 6 lanes), check the Permute box and specify lanes 1 to 6:

By lane groups
For example: “lane load 1" is to be applied to lanes 1 or 6 while “lane load 2" is to be applied to any two of
lanes 2 to 5:
- assign “lane load 1" to lane 1 (or 6)
- assign “lane load 2" to any two lanes of 2 to 5
- set this option to and click

Version 12.0 9-22 12/05

STRAP
- set the list box to:

A total of 6x2 = 12 load cases will be generated.

9.5.1.3 Load case activation/deactivation

Load cases may be activated/deactivated at any time. All permutations of the load case will be
activated/deactivated. Note that several load cases may be activated/deactivated at the same time using the
Deactivate option (9.5.3),

9.5.2 Load case - revise/delete

Select an existing load case from the list displayed:

When revising a load case, modify the defined data.

9.5.3 Load case - deactivate

Load cases may be activated/deactivated at any time. All permutations of the load case will be
activated/deactivated.

Click on any line to toggle the status:

Note that this option is equivalent to the Load case is active option in the dialog box.

Version 12.0 9-23 12/05

STRAP
9.5.4 Lane loads & Load cases - Example

The following example outlines the procedure for defining the lane loads and the load cases for a multispan,
multilane bridge

AASHTO.
Referring to AASHTO, Section 3.11:
• 3.11.4.2 - For continuous spans, the lane loading shall be continuous or discontinuous; only one standard
H or HS truck per lane shall be considered on the structure
• 3.12.1 - Where maximum stresses are produced ... by loading a number of lanes simultaneously, the
following percentages of live loads shall be used:
9.5.4.0.2.0.0.1 one or two lanes: 100%
9.5.4.0.2.0.0.2 three lanes: 90%
9.5.4.0.2.0.0.3 four lanes or more: 75%

For a four-lane bridge:

• Define three lane loads, each with a uniform and concentrated load according to Figure 3.7.6B:
lane load 1 - full load
lane load 2 - 90% of full load
lane load 3 - 75% of full load

• Define another three lane loads, each with vehicle loads according to Figure 3.7.7A:
lane load 4 - full load
lane load 5 - 90% of full load
lane load 6 - 75% of full load

• Define six load cases, as follows:

1. lane load 1 on lanes 1,2 ; permutations on lanes 1 to 4
2. lane load 2 on lanes 1,2,3 ; permutations on lanes 1 to 4
3. lane load 3 on lanes 1,2,3,4;permutations on lanes 1 to 4
4. lane load 4 on lanes 1,2 ; permutations on lanes 1 to 4
5. lane load 5 on lanes 1,2,3 ; permutations on lanes 1 to 4
6. lane load 6 on lanes 1,2,3,4;permutations on lanes 1 to 4

Version 12.0 9-24 12/05

STRAP
9.6 File

9.6.1 Solve

To solve the model for the defined bridge data (the program solves each of the strip unit load cases - refer to
Bridge - general).

Note:
• the model cannot be solved until the Load distribution method has been specified. (refer to 10.70.1)

9.6.2 STRAP results

To display the results for the current model. Both the regular static results as well as the generated bridge load
cases (refer to Update STRAP results) will be available.

All defined bridge data will be saved.

9.6.3 Geometry

To return to the STRAP geometry module for the current model. All defined bridge data will be saved.

9.6.4 STRAP models list

Return to the STRAP main menu. All bridge data will be saved.

9.6.5 Exit

Quit the program and return to the Windows program manager. All data will be saved.

Version 12.0 9-25 12/05

STRAP
9.7 Options

9.7.1 Load distribution method

The uniform/vehicle/knife-edge loads may be applied to the model in one of the following ways

Select one of the following options:

Beams "parallel" to lanes
Loads are applied as beam loads, but only to beams parallel to the lane axis (angle between the lane axis
and the beam x1 local axis < 10°)
Beams "perpendicular" to lanes
Loads are applied as beam loads, but only to beams perpendicular to the lane axis (angle between the
perpendicular to the lane axis and the beam x1 local axis < 10°)
All beams
Loads are applied as beam loads to all beams
Beams selected by the user
Loads are applied as beam loads only to beams specified by the user using the standard beam selection
option.
Nodes
Loads are applied as joint loads
Elements
Loads are applied to elements only

Note:
• Loads are applied to only those nodes/beams/elements lying within the "vertical tolerance" of the lane
segment.
• Beam and element loads are applied as "Global" loads and not as "Global projected" loads.
• The loads are applied to the nodes/beams/elements according to the same methods used for applying
Global loads. Refer to Global loads - Method of Application.
• When a strip width is less than the element dimension, the location of the strip on the element is ignored.
The load on the strip is divided equally to the corner nodes; therefore the influence of all strips on the
element is identical and the influence line will be stepped.

Version 12.0 9-26 12/05

STRAP
9.7.2 Load direction

For space models, select the global direction to apply the loads:

9.7.3 Drawing of influence lines - parameters

9.7.3.1 Display only values greater than:

For clarity, part of the numerical values may be deleted from screen (the entire geometry and influence line will
be plotted).

All values less than a given fraction (default = 0.5) of the maximum value on the line will not be displayed.

Move the into the text box, click the mouse, type a new percentage and press [Enter].

Example:
Maximum result on moment influence line = 12 kN m and fraction = 0.5 : Only numbers greater than 6 kN m
will be displayed on the screen.

9.7.3.2 Maximum result will be scaled as:

The influence line diagrams are displayed relative to a scale chosen as follows:

The program searches for the maximum result in the plot area and plots it on the screen as the dimension listed
above - the default value is 1.5 cm (0.6 in.). All other results are plotted in proportion to this value.

Move the into the text box, type a new dimension in cm. and press [Enter].

Example: bending moment diagram

• Maximum moment = 12 kN m is drawn as 1.5 cm. on plotted diagram;
• Moment = 4 kN m will be drawn as 0.5 cm.

Version 12.0 9-27 12/05

STRAP
9.8 Output

9.8.1 Display lanes

Display lanes segments details : segment no., start and end nodes, width, no. of rectangles (strips), rectangle
size (length), total length of segment, vertical tolerance.

9.8.2 Display vehicles

Display list of available vehicles (copied from general file and defined in the current model): axle loads,
distances between axles.

9.8.3 Display vehicle groups

Display a list of the vehicles in each defined vehicle group.

9.8.4 Display load factor tables

Display the defined load factor vs. applied length tables.

9.8.5 Display lane loads

For each lane load display: uniform load (force, maximum length, factor table), knife-edge load (load for
moment calculation, load for shear calculation), vehicle load (vehicle/group name. load factor, direction of
travel).

9.8.6 Display load cases

Display a table listing of the lane loads applied in each load case.

9.8.7 Print input data tables

Print all the above tables.

9.8.8 Print drawing

Print current display directly to the printer or to a file.

Version 12.0 9-28 12/05

STRAP
9.9 Results

9.9.1 Results - General

The user may select two different result types for any node/beam/element:
• Influence line:
The program displays the influence line for unit loads applied to each strip in each lane, i.e. the contribution
of a unit load on each strip to the specified result for the selected node/beam/element. A separate diagram
is drawn for each lane in the model.
The most important information on the influence lines are the regions of positive and negative values. Strips
with positive values will contribute to the maximum result when loaded; Refer to the example below.
• Applied loads:
The program displays the loads applied to the various strips that are required to generate the max/min result
specified by the user. The display always corresponds to the influence line diagram for the same result and
location, i.e. for maximum results, strips with positive values in the influence line diagrams will be loaded
(unless the loaded length is limited by the user). This is illustrated in the following example.

Example: Mx element results -

Note that all loads, including vehicle and knife-edge loads, are applied as uniform loads on strips; accuracy will
be reduced as the number of strips is decreased because the program will apply these loads to the closest strip
and will not maintain the exact location.

In the example above, the axle spacing for all vehicles is 1.5 m. The strip width in lane 1 is 1.0 m and 0.83 m
in lane 2. The axle loads are applied at 1.0 and 2.0 m spacing in lane 1 and at 1.67 m spacing in lane 2.

Version 12.0 9-29 12/05

STRAP
9.9.2 Influence lines (draw, display, print table)

Display influence line values in graphic or tabular form.

• Select the result type and location. E.g. for supports and reactions:

• Select a node/beam/element.

Example (beam results):

Refer also to 9.9.1 - Results - General.

Version 12.0 9-30 12/05

STRAP
9.9.3 Applied loads (draw, display, print table)

Display to loads that must be applied to the model to generate the max/min result at the specified location.
Refer to 9.9.1 - Results - General

Specify maximum or minimum results and location:

For each node/beam/element, the program will calculate separately one of the following envelope results:
Maximum
The largest positive result or the smallest negative result
Minimum
The largest negative result or the smallest positive result
Absolute value maximum
The largest absolute value, with the correct sign. For example, 3 load cases, results = 1.4, 5.5, and -7.7:
The program will write -7.7 in the results file.

The program will draw the applied loads on the graphic display. Refer to 10.90.1 for an example.

9.9.4 Erase displayed result

Erase the current influence line diagram or the current applied loads diagram from the display

Version 12.0 9-31 12/05

STRAP
9.9.5 Update STRAP result files

Maximum
The largest positive result or the smallest negative
result
Minimum
The largest negative result or the smallest positive
result
Absolute value maximum
The largest absolute value, with the correct sign.
For example, 3 load cases, results = 1.4, 5.5, and -
7.7: The program will write -7.7 in the results file.

9.9.5.1 Beam results

The program writes P, M2, M3, MT, V2, V3 values for each beam in the results files.

Select one of the following options:

• None
Beam results are not written to the file; only element results, reactions and displacements are written (if
selected)
• Envelope for each result type
The program searches separately for the max/min/abs result for each result type, i.e. the results written for
each type (e.g. M2 and V3) may be from different load cases.
• Envelope of ___ and corresponding results
The program identifies the load case that gives the max/min/abs result for the specified result type and
writes the results from that case for all result types.

Version 12.0 9-32 12/05

STRAP
9.9.5.2 Element results

The program writes Mx, My, Mxy, Fx, Fy, Fxy, ±Sx, ±Sy, ±Sxy values for each element in the results files.

Select one of the following options:

• None
Element results are not written to the file; only beam results, reactions and displacements are written (if
selected)
• Envelope for each result type
The program searches separately for the max/min/abs result for each result type, i.e. the results written for
each type (e.g. Mx, My, etc.) may be from different load cases. Note that the Sx,Sy,Sxy may be calculated
incorrectly if this option is selected as the values of moment and force used to calculate the stress may also
be from different case. It is recommended that one of the following options be used to transfer the min/max
stress results.
• Envelope of ___ and corresponding results
The program identifies the load case that gives the max/min/abs result for the specified result type and
writes the results from that case for all result types.

9.9.5.3 Deflections

The program will write deflections in the generated load case.

The program will write zero deflection values in the result file.
Note:
• the reaction values are either Maximum, Minimum, or Absolute value maximum
• the values are calculated separately for each global direction, i.e. the deflections for each direction may be
from a different load case.

9.9.5.4 Reactions

The program will write reactions in the generated load case. Note that the calculation of the reactions
requires a lot of time (relative to the calculation of node/beam/element results) and this may be significant
for models with many supports.

The program will write zero reaction values in the result file.
Note:
• the reaction values are either Maximum, Minimum, or Absolute value maximum
• the values are calculated separately for each global direction, i.e. the reactions for each direction may be
from a different load case.

Version 12.0 9-33 12/05

STRAP
9.9.5.5 Element not on screen

Select one of the following options:

The results for the entire model will be updated.

Only the results for the elements displayed on the screen will be updated, i.e, use the Zoom and Remove
options to update selected elements only. Results for all other elements will be written as zero.

9.9.5.6 Delete all existing “Bridge “ results

Select one of the following options:

All load cases in the result file from the first bridge load to the end of the file are erased and the new load
cases are written (if you solved static loads after generating bridge results, the static load case results will
be lost!)
The program checks whether a load case with the same title was written previously to the results file for the
model. If such a load case exists, the program automatically overwrites the case. If the load case does not
exist, it is appended to the end of the result file.

9.9.5.7 Load case no. n

Define a series of load cases to write simultaneously to the results file.

Note that Load no. 1 appears at the bottom of the box:

• specify all of the options in the dialog box
• enter a title for the load case (the default title corresponds to the Maximum/Minimum/Absolute value
maximum option selected)

To define the next load case:

• click the button; load no. 2 appears at the bottom of the box
• specify the options for the new load case and enter a title
• repeat for additional load cases
• click to update the result files

Note:
• will decrease the load case counter by 1.

Version 12.0 9-34 12/05

STRAP
9.10 Display options

Lanes
Check this option to add the lane numbers to the display

Selected lanes
Display graphic results (influence lines and applied loads) for selected lanes only. This option is handy when
overlapping lanes are defined.

Highlight the lanes to be displayed:

In the above example, results will be displayed for lanes 1 and 3 only.

Version 12.0 9-35 12/05

STRAP
9.11 Design codes

9.11.1 South African Code - TMH7

To design a bridge according to the South African TMH7 Code:

• ensure that an appropriate load factor table is included in the load factor file; factor tables designated as
South African must have (S) appended to the end of the table title.
• when defining lane loads, select a factor table that has (S) appended to the table title; when a table with (S)
at the end of the title is selected, the program will automatically apply the lane loads according to the South
African Code).

Design method:
The method used corresponds to TMH7 - Section 2.6.3 - Type NA loading.
• the program first calculates the contribution to the requested result of each of the strips in all the lanes .
• the program then identifies "blocks" of contiguous strips that have a positive contribution.
• the "blocks" (in all lanes) are ranked in the descending order of their contribution.
• the load on the first block is applied to the lane using the load factor corresponding to its length.

The following procedure is then carried out for each of the subsequent blocks:
• the program adds the length of the next block (block 'n') to the sum of the lengths of the previous blocks,
determines the load factor corresponding to this new length from the table and calculates the total load
applied to blocks 1 to n.
• the program subtracts from this value the load applied to blocks 1 to n-1 and applies the remainder uniformly
to block n.
• if the remainder is less than zero, the program stops the calculation. If the remainder is positive, the
program adds block n and repeats the calculation.

Example: Basic load = 36

Block Length ÓLen Factor Load Remain Applied
1 30 30 1 1080 1080 1080/30=36
2 30 60 0.812 1754 674 674/30=22
3 35 95 0.68 2324 570 570/35=16
4 40 136 0.6 2901 577 577/40=14
5 .. etc ..

Note:
• If different factor tables are specified for different lane loads, the entire calculation will be according to the
South African Code if at least one of the factors tables is designated as South African (S).
• Because the above calculation method considers loads on all of the lanes, a single load factor table must
be used; if different (S) tables are specified for different lane loads, the program will use the table specified
for the lowest lane number in the current load case.
• The "Max. length" specified refers to the sum of the lengths of the blocks that are used in all lanes. If
different "Max. length" values are specified for different lane loads, the program will use the minimum length.

Version 12.0 9-36 12/05

STRAP
9.11.2 BD 37/88

Type HA uniformly distributed loads are stored in the BD 37/88 load factor table according to Code Table 13.
These loads must be modified by the factors in Code Table 14 before being applied to the notional lanes.

The program automatically prompts for the parameters required to calculate these factors if a BD load factor
table is specified.

To design a bridge according to BD 37/88:

• define a different lane load for up to 4 lanes, where "1st lane factor" is specified for the first lane, "2nd lane
factor" is specified for the second, etc.
• define load cases as permutations of the above lane loads; the program will arrange the lane loads (reduced
by the Table 14 factors) in all possible permutations across the width of the bridge.

The following data must be specified to calculate the Table 14 factors:

• lane factor priority - to determine the column in Table 14

• lane width bL - to calculate factors a1 and a2

Version 12.0 9-37 12/05

STRAP

** Blank page **

Version 12.0 9-38 12/05

STRAP

10 POSTTEN
10.1 Main menu

POSTTEN is a STRAP postprocessor program that designs post-tensioned beams and slabs in solved STRAP
models. For general information refer to:
• 10.2 - General
• 10.2.1- How to use the program
• A.10 - Design assumptions

Note that the design procedure and parameters are different for beams and slabs; specify the element type
before starting the design procedure.

Select one of the following options:

Create beams to be post-tensioned by selecting one or more continuous STRAP beam members.
Add/delete supports at node locations and modify the top/bottom beam levels in individual spans.
Refer to 10.3.

Select cables and define their trajectory in the beam; specify loss parameters for the current beam;
display/print all output tables (stresses, ultimate moment, shear, etc.). Refer to 10.4.

Create a new beam and copy the cables and parameters from an existing beam to the new one.
Refer to 10.5.

Define the default parameters for all beams in the model, including parameters for cables,
reinforcement, losses, time steps, etc. Note that different loss parameters may be assigned to
specific beams using the Design - losses option. Refer to 10.6.

Create a "stage table" when all cables are not prestressed at the same time or all loads are not
applied at the same time. Each stage is defined by the number of days from the start of construction
and may be linked to a different STRAP model. Refer to 10.7.

Solve the model for the cable force loads, including losses, at each of the stages; secondary
moments are calculated. Refer to 10.8.

Display all result or data tables on the screen. Refer to 10.9.

Print the result or data tables. Refer to 10.9.

The following options are available from the toolbar:

Version 12.0 10-1 12/05

STRAP
10.2 General

POSTTEN is a STRAP postprocessor program that designs post-tensioned beams and slabs in solved STRAP
models. The design may be carried out according to one of the following codes:
• Eurocode 2
• BS 8110
• BS 5400
• ACI 318
• AASHTO
• CSA A23.3
• IRC 18

The STRAP model must either be a plane frame or a space frame; grids will not be accepted by the program
(axial forces from prestressing cannot be added to load cases).

The program uses the following terminology:

• strand - the basic prestressing unit, a single wire or a group of wires
• cable - a group of strands
For example:

The following STRAP beam sections are accepted by the program:

• all sections defined by "Dimensions", except round sections
• all solid sections defined in CROSEC and imported into STRAP geometry
• All sections defined by "Properties" (A,I, etc). The program creates an equivalent rectangular section, as
follows:
- H2 and H3 are defined: D2 = H2 and D2 = H3
- I3 and A are defined: D2 = √(I3*12/A) and D3 = A/D2
- I2 and A are defined: D3= √(I2*12/A) and D2 = A/D3

Note that the program does not check whether the defined cables actually lie within the section.

Calculation of losses and deflections are calculated at various times stages for each beam measured from the
day the beam is cast. All dates (casting and stages) are measured from an arbitrary zero date referred to as
the 'start of construction'. For a specific beam:

Refer also to:

• 10.2.1- How to use the program
• A10 - Design assumptions

Version 12.0 10-2 12/05

STRAP
10.2.1 How to use the program

POSTTEN is a STRAP postprocessor program that designs post-tensioned beams and slabs in solved STRAP
models. The STRAP model must be defined as follows:
• Define load cases with all loads, but without prestressing loads
• Solve the model
• Define load combinations in the results module
• Select the Files - Post-tension option

To design post-tensioned beams and slabs:

• Specify the design parameters, e.g. concrete type, prestress loss parameters, etc.
• Define a "Stage table" for models where not all of the cables or beams are prestressed at the same time.
The stages are named and defined by the number of days from the start of construction.
• Define all of the beams to be prestressed by selecting the start and end STRAP member.
• Define all of the slabs to be prestressed by specifying the start and end nodes of prestressing "lines" that
pass through the relevant elements. Each "line" is designed similarly to a beam, i.e. all cables are parallel
to the line. Note that the lines do not have to be parallel to element boundaries.
• Expand the combination table:
- specify the "Permanent" loads in the combinations (for the calculation of deflections and time losses).
- assign each load case to specified stage, if relevant. Note that a load case may either be applied or
removed at a stage.
• For each beam:
- specify the type and number of cables and the prestressing force. The program displays a "Magnel
diagram" as a design aid for the selection of the prestressing. (refer to 10.2.2 - How to define cables)
- specify the trajectory of the cables. The program displays the upper and lower permissible cable
boundary lines superimposed on the beam elevation.
- assign selected cables to different stages, if relevant.
• select "Solve"; the program creates cable force load cases at each of the defined stages and time steps,
including losses at each step, and solves the model for these cases. The new load cases and their results
may be viewed in STRAP.
• Revise the cable details and trajectory, if necessary.
• Display/print tables of stresses, deflections, shear and ultimate moments for each beam.

If the prestressing is done on several distinct model stages that represent intermediate stages of construction,
the stages must be defined in STRAP geometry. These 'STRAP stages' are then assigned to the relevant
design stages in the POSTTEN module. For example:

STRAP:
• Create the separate stages, then define the loads for each stage (without prestressing loads) in a separate
load case and assign it to the relevant stage; solve the model. Note that each load is defined only once, at
the stage where it is first applied. This is illustrated by the self-weight loads in the example above; the self-
wt of the cantilevers are applied only in Stage 1 and 2, even though they continue to act in Stage 3.
• Define load combinations in the STRAP results module. These combinations should represent the loads
acting at each stage. for example: C1=L1, C2=L2, C3=L1+L2+L3

Version 12.0 10-3 12/05

STRAP

POSTTEN:
• Assign the relevant 'STRAP stage' to each POSTTEN stage in the Stages - stages option.
• Assign the combinations to the relevant stages in the Stages - Load table option.
• Define the cable; assign each cable to the relevant stage in the Design - losses - jacking sequence option,
as shown above.

Refer also to:

• 10.2 - General
• A10 - Design assumptions

10.2.2 How to define cables

• select
• define cables (each may contain more than one strand) so the total force lies within the Magnel diagrams.
For example:

• select
• double-click one of the cables in the table; the program superimposes the minimum/maximum eccentricity
range for this cable. For example:

• the cables may be defined with a straight or parabolic trajectory; select one of the options and define the
trajectory interactively on the screen; click when finished.

• select again and choose another cable. The allowable eccentricity range displayed will again be only
for the selected, i.e. it will reflect the prestressing and eccentricity of all other cables with defined geometry.
Placing this cable within the range insures that the total force/eccentricity of all cables provides a satisfactory
solution.

Version 12.0 10-4 12/05

STRAP
10.2.3 Magnel diagrams

The prestress force P and the eccentricity of the force e must be selected by the user;
any number of combinations of P and e provide an acceptable solution.

The stresses at the extreme fibres are limited to the Code values and are checked at every stage for maximum
and minimum moments with the actual prestressing force (after losses) . This gives four limiting stress
conditions:
• minimum moment - top fibre
• minimum moment - bottom fibre
• maximum moment - top fibre
• maximum moment - bottom fibre

The equations are in the form:

where σe is the relevant stress from the external loads.

Plotting all of the possible solutions for each of the four conditions gives four
intersecting lines: 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-1 in the adjacent diagram; any combination
of P and e within the enclosed area will result in acceptable stresses in the
specific cross-section.

Version 12.0 10-5 12/05

STRAP
10.3 Define

• Beams
Create beams to be post-tensioned by selecting one or more continuous STRAP beam members.
Add/delete supports at node locations and modify the top/beam beam levels in individual spans.
• Slabs
Define the centre-line of a slab strip by selecting the start and end nodes of the strip.

Select one of the following options:

Note:
• Specify the Parameters and Stages prior to defining the beams.

10.3.1 Define

10.3.1.1 Beams

Define a post-tension beam consisting of a chain of STRAP members. Select one of the following options:

New beam - select start/end

Select the 'start' and 'end' beams in a continuous line of STRAP members. For example:

New beam - select one by one

Similar to the option above, except that all of the beams in the chain must be selected (in the correct order).

Version 12.0 10-6 12/05

STRAP
10.3.1.2 Slabs

Define a slab strip by selecting start and end nodes on a plane of elements in the model. The resulting line
defines the slab strip centre line. for example:

Note:
• the centre line does not have to coincide with a line of element edges.
• the slab 'influence width' is defined in Parameters (default) or Design - cable geometry (for specific slabs).

The program calculates the result diagrams along the defined line similarly to the "Results along a line" option
in the STRAP results module, i.e. the results are per unit width, e.g. ton-meter/meter, ft-kip/ft, etc. Therefore,
the influence width value does not affect the displayed results. The program treats the influence width as the
beam width and uses it to calculate the stresses, etc, resulting from the prestressing.

10.3.2 Revise

Add/remove supports at the node locations or change the vertical location of individual spans.
• Select one of the beams by highlighting one of the component members; click the mouse.
• The program displays the beam elevation:

• Select one of the following options:

Add/Delete support
Move the until the relevant node is highlighted with the ; click the mouse. The support is
deleted/added to the node.

Version 12.0 10-7 12/05

STRAP
Define/Revise vertical drop
Move the until the node at the left of the drop is highlighted with the (all beams to the right of the
node will be moved vertically); click the mouse:

Select the drop type and enter the drop dimension (in the same units as the span length)

The program displays the revised beam. For example:

10.3.3 Delete

• Beams
Select existing POSTTEN beams using the standard beam selection method. Note that it is sufficient to
select only one of the STRAP members that comprise the beam.
• Slabs
Highlight and click on the slab centre-lines using the standard beam selection method.

Version 12.0 10-8 12/05

STRAP
10.4 Design

Select cables and define their trajectory in the beam; specify loss parameters for the current beam; display/print
all output tables (stresses, ultimate moment, shear, etc.). Note that all parameters defined here supersede the
default parameters in the main menu.

Select one of the following options:

Specify the number and type of cables in the beam. Refer to 10.4.1.

Define the trajectory for all cables (start/end points, height, parabola/straight, etc.). Refer to 10.4.2.

Define loss parameters for individual cables. Loss parameters defined here supersede the default
parameters. Refer to 10.4.3.

Select the design direction (M2 or M3) and/or invert the section. Refer to 10.4.4.

Display all result tables on the screen. Refer to 10.9.

Print the result tables. Refer to 10.9.

Specify the casting day for each span and the regular longitudinal reinforcement for the current
beam. Area/cover defined here supersede the default values. Refer to 10.4.5.

10.4.1 Define cables

Define the number and type of cables in the beam (refer to 10.2.2 - How to define cables - for general
information):

Version 12.0 10-9 12/05

STRAP
Cables
For each cable, specify:
• number of individual strands
• the strand type; select a type from the listbox displayed by clicking on the .
• the start and end coordinates (these may be revised when defining the cable geometry)
• jacking percentage, i.e. jacking force calculated as a percentage of maximum allowable stress (defined in
Parameters - strand type).
• The program calculates the jacking force for the cable and displays below the table the total force for all
cables.

Magnel diagrams - change

The Magnel diagrams are an envelope of the allowable cable force and locations calculated for various stages
and selected locations (refer to 10.2.3 ). The program initially displays three Magnel diagrams - at the start,
middle, and end of the beam - that include the stresses at all loading stages. Note that the "middle" diagram
is a composite of the diagrams at all sections in the middle half of the beam.

Select the stages and the locations:

• From x =
Select the 'from' and 'to' coordinates from the beam start. Note that the Magnel diagrams are calculated at
1/20 intervals along the span.
• Stage:
- Include: click on the cell - the program displays ; click on the checkbox to include/exclude
the stage from the diagram.
- Estimated loss: Enter the estimated total loss for each stage (%).

After the cables are selected, the beam elevation is redrawn with the minimum and maximum allowable
eccentricity at each section.

Version 12.0 10-10 12/05

STRAP
10.4.2 Cable geometry

Define the cable geometry; each cable may consist of a series of straight or parabolic segments:
• select the cables: highlight the relevant row in the table and click the mouse.
For slabs, specify the slab influence width, if different from the default value.

10.4.2.1 Define the cable segments

Parabola
Select one of the following options:

Notes:
• The program tries to draw a parabola that connects smoothly with the existing segments. If it is not possible,
it creates two different parabolas in the interval connected at the mid-point.
• The segments defined by the "points" option are created as follows:
Start segment
- No constraint:
The segment is defined by points 1,2,3 (similar to "3 pt.")
- Angle = :
The segment is defined by points 1,2 and the defined angle, (similar to "α+2 pt.")
- Connect to an existing segment:
The first segment is defined using to "seg.+ pt" method.

Version 12.0 10-11 12/05

STRAP
Intermediate segment
Always created using the "seg.+pt." method.
End segment
- No constraint:
The segment is created as displayed on the screen.
- Angle = :
The displayed segment is replaced by 2 new segments, where the second one ends at the specified
angle. The option is ignored if only a single segment is defined.
- Connect to an existing segment:
The option is ignored if only a single segment is defined.

Straight segments
Select one of the following options:

10.4.2.2 Edit cable segments

Click in the previous side menu and select one of the following options:
Modify any part of an existing cable:
• select the start and end points of the part to be modified (1),(2). Note that the points may be in
two different segments.
• move the to a new point (3) that defines the geometry of the part:

The program creates one or more new segments

between the selected points.

Extend the end point of a cable:

• select one of the end points of the cable (1)
• move the to the new end point (2); note
that the program extends the existing end
parabolic segment without modifying the
existing part.

Version 12.0 10-12 12/05

STRAP

Delete selected segments or parts of segments from the cable. Segments are selected using the
Segment selection options.

Copy cable segments to any location in the beam:

• select the cable segments using the Segment selection options

• select a reference point; this point is used to define the new location of the copied segments:

the reference point (both locations) can be either at a

cable end point, either end of the beam or at any
coordinate:
- cable end: move the to the end point so that it
is highlighted with the ; click the
mouse.
- beam end: move the to adjacent to the beam end a is displayed; click the mouse.
- coordinate: click By coordinate at the bottom of the screen and move the to the correct
location; click the mouse.
• select the new location of the reference point using any of the above methods.
The program draws the copied segments in their new location.

Create a mirror image of selected cable segments at any location in the beam:

• select the cable segments using the Segment selection options

• select a reference point; the horizontal coordinate of this point is used to define the new location of the
mirrored segments (the segments are mirrored about the vertical axis but their height coordinate is
unchanged):

the reference point (both locations) can be

either at a cable end point, either end of the
beam or at any coordinate:
- cable end: move the to the end point
so that it is highlighted with the ; click the mouse.
- beam end: move the to adjacent to the beam end a is displayed; click the mouse.
- coordinate: click By coordinate at the bottom of the screen and move the to the correct
location; click the mouse.
• select the new location of the reference point using any of the above methods.
The program draws the mirrored segments in their new location.

Return to the previous menu.

Version 12.0 10-13 12/05

STRAP
10.4.3 Losses

10.4.3.1 Creep & shrinkage

E of concrete
Specify the concrete modulus of elasticity (E) according to the stress units displayed adjacent to the option.

Concrete strength
Specify the nominal concrete strength

Casting at day
Specify the day that the beam is cast (from the start of construction).
Note:
• the beam calculation 'stages' are also defined from the
start of construction; the creep/shrinkage equations require
the “Casting at day’ value in order to determine the time
from casting to the calculation date.

Humidity
Specify the average relative humidity (%)

Cement type
Select a cement type from the options displayed (required in some Codes only)

Temperature
Specify the average temperature value (ºC).

Estimated creep & shrinkage loss

Enter the estimated total creep + shrinkage loss; the program uses this value where required until the exact
losses are calculated.

To suppress the exact calculation and to use the estimate throughout the program, set Always use
estimate for creep and shrinkage losses

Version 12.0 10-14 12/05

STRAP
Shrinkage loss
Select one of the following methods for calculating the shrinkage loss:

Compute according to code

The program will calculate the shrinkage loss according to the current Code. Refer to A10 - Design
assumptions for more details. Note that the shrinkage loss may be modified by a user-defined factor.

Use given strain * (1. - exp(-kt))

The shrinkage strain is a user-defined strain modified by a factor in the form . The program requires
the date of 'half total shrinkage' in order to calculate the value of 'k'.

User given strain * (t/(Cst+t))

The shrinkage strain is a user-defined strain modified by a factor in the form , where Cst is also
defined by the user.

Creep loss
Select one of the following methods for calculating the creep loss:

Compute according to code

The program will calculate the creep loss according to the current Code. Refer to A10 - Design
assumptions for more details. Note that the creep loss may be modified by a user-defined factor.

Use creep factor * (1. - exp(-kt))

The creep factor is in the form and may be modified by a user-defined factor. The program requires
the date of 'half total creep' in order to calculate the value of 'k'.

Use creep factor * (t^0.6/10+t^0.6)

The creep factor is in the form } and may be modified by a user-defined factor.

10.4.3.2 Cable losses

E - cables
Specify the value of the modulus of elasticity of the prestressing cables.

Version 12.0 10-15 12/05

STRAP
Cable type
Specify the default model cable type as bonded or unbonded. The type for individual beams can be modified
using the Design - Losses - Cable losses option

For unbonded cables, the program calculates the average stress in the cables as the effective stress (after
losses) plus an additional stress. Specify the value of the additional stress.

Draw-in losses
Draw-in (or anchorage seating) losses occur in post-tensioned members due to the seating of wedges in the
anchors when the jacking force is transferred to the anchors. Enter the draw-in (slip) distance according to the
units displayed.

The program initially uses the estimated loss specified by the user and then calculates the exact loss based
on the defined cable profile, if requested by the user

• Estimated losses
Enter the estimated % loss for draw-in. To use these estimates throughout the design and suppress the
exact calculation, set the Always use estimate ... checkbox.

• Draw-in losses - by cable

Click and highlight a cable, then modify the parameters:

To use the draw-in loss estimate throughout the design and suppress the exact calculation, set the

checkbox to ; "If data incomplete" will be revised to "Always".

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions

Friction losses
Loss of prestress occurs due to friction between the strands and the surrounding ducts. There are two
components:
• curvature effect
• wobble effect
The program initially uses the estimated loss specified by the user and then calculates the exact loss based
on the defined cable profile, if requested by the user

• Estimated losses
Enter the estimated % loss for wobble and curvature. To use these estimates throughout the design and
suppress the exact calculation, set the Always use estimate ... checkboxes

Version 12.0 10-16 12/05

STRAP
• Exact losses
- curvature effect:
The equation in all codes is in the form:

Define the value K.

To define different values for selected cables, click By cable

- wobble effect:
The equation in all codes is in the form:

Define the value µ.

To define different values for selected cables, click By cable

• Loss by cable:
Click and highlight a cable, then modify the parameters:

To use the wobble and/or curvature estimates throughout the design and suppress the exact calculation,

set the checkboxes to ; "No" will be revised to "Always".

Note:
• the symbols vary according to the Code.
• the maximum friction loss is at the far end if the jacking is from one end. The friction loss varies along the
span and the program calculates the value at all locations along the beam.
• refer also to A10 - Design assumptions

Relaxation losses
Stress-relieved strands are subject to prestressing loss due to constant elongation with time. Select one of the
following methods to calculate the relaxation loss:

Compute according to the Code

The program calculates the relaxation loss according to the Code.

After 1000 hours relaxation =

Enter the relaxation loss after 1000 hours; the program will calculate the loss at any stage from the Code
equations based on this value.

Assume total relaxation =

Enter the total relaxation loss (50,000) hours; the program will calculate the loss at any stage from the Code
equations based on this value.

Version 12.0 10-17 12/05

STRAP
For low-relaxation strands, check the Low relaxation tendons parameter.
Refer to A10 - Design assumptions for more details.

• Relaxation - by cable
Click and highlight a cable, then modify the parameters:

Elastic shortening losses

In post-tensioned beams, the elastic shortening loss varies from zero if all of the cables are jacked
simultaneously to one-half the value for an equivalent prestressed beam if several sequential jacking steps are
used.

The program initially uses the estimated loss specified by the user and then calculates the exact loss based
on the defined cable profile, if requested by the user

Note that the jacking sequence is defined in the Jacking sequence tab in Design - Losses option.

• Estimated losses
Enter the estimated % loss for elastic shortening. To use these estimates throughout the design and
suppress the exact calculation, set the Always use estimate ... checkbox.

• Elastic shortening - by cable

Click and highlight a cable, then modify the parameters:

To use the elastic shortening estimate throughout the design and suppress the exact calculation, set the

checkbox to ; "If data incomplete" will be revised to "Always".

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions

Version 12.0 10-18 12/05

STRAP
10.4.3.3 Jacking sequence

Specify the jacking sequence and side for each cable. There are two options:
• Add a jacking stage for all strands in a cable, i.e. jack all strands at two or more stages.
• Split the cables into two or more strand groups, each group jacked at a different stage or from a different
end.

• click and highlight a line, then click Add

Specify whether to add a jacking stage or to split a group:

Add a jacking stage

Add a jacking stage for all strands in a cable, i.e. jack all strands at two or more stages.

Version 12.0 10-19 12/05

STRAP
Split strands
Split the cables into two or more strand groups, each group jacked at a different stage or from a different end.

Note:
• Cable no. 1 is jacked in 2 stages: to 30% and then to 100% of the prestress force (all of the strands are
jacked together at the same side in both stages).
• Cable no. 2 is jacked in 2 substages of the same stage, i.e. both substages are at the same time (day), but
the second substage causes elastic shortening of the strands jacked in the first substage.

10.4.4 Properties

Two options are available:

• For non-symmetric sections, the beam may be inverted without changing the design moments. The STRAP
geometry section orientation is used by default.
• For space models only, the beams can be designed for either the M2 or M3 moments (but not biaxial). The
default design direction is set in the Parameters - general option by specifying the 'height axis'; use this
option to revise the design direction for a specific beam.

The following example shows the default design direction/top of beam and the effect of changing either of the
options:

Version 12.0 10-20 12/05

STRAP
10.4.5 By span

Specify parameters per span:

• Casting time:
Enter the casting time for each span, measured from the 'start of construction' date (time=0 days)
• Regular longitudinal reinforcement:
Regular reinforcement may be added to the prestressed beam. Specify the area and cover according to
the units displayed in the table column headers.

Note:
• the cover value indicates gross cover, from the surface to the centre-of-gravity of the reinforcement
• the program assumes that the area is constant along the entire length of the beam.
• the table initially displays the default values defined in the Parameters - Reinforcement parameters option.

Version 12.0 10-21 12/05

STRAP
10.5 Copy

Create a new beam and copy the cables and parameters from an existing beam to the new one.

Select one of the following options:

Note that more than one copy can be created; the distance from the original to the 1st copy and the distance
between any two copies are identical.

10.5.1 Copy a beam

To create beams that are parallel to the original. For example, to copy beam B2 to create new beam B3:

Note:
• to create beam B4 at the same time, set Number of copies = 2

10.5.2 Copy & Rotate

To create beams that are not parallel to the original. For example, to copy beam B1 to create new beam B2:

Note:
• the 3rd reference node is required when the two beams are not located on the same plane.

Version 12.0 10-22 12/05

STRAP
10.5.3 Mirror beams

To create beams that are a mirror of the original. For example, to copy beam B1 to create new beam B2:

Note:
• the program mirrors the selected beam about the plane that bisects the line joining the reference node and
its new location.

Version 12.0 10-23 12/05

STRAP
10.6 Parameters

Select one of the following options:

10.6.1 General

Code
Select a national design code from the list.

Height axis
For space models only:
The beams can be designed for either the M2 or M3 moments (but not biaxial).
Select the moments by specifying a 'height axis' for the model; the program designs
for the moments acting about the axis perpendicular to the plane formed by the
height axis and the beam x1 axis:

The height axis may be revised for specific beams using the Design - properties
option.

Method for computing shear

Select one of the following methods for calculating the shear capacity of the concrete (where allowed by the
relevant Code):

Standard method
Equivalent to the Inclined Struts Method using an angle = 45º.

Inclined struts method

Also referred to as the "Truss method" in certain codes. The program calculates the optimum angle of the
inclined concrete 'struts' that are part of the assumed truss model.

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions

Ultimate moment calculation

Include decompression strain in cable initial strain

The strain in the concrete becomes zero at the level of the prestressing cable at the decompression load.
A corresponding decompression strain is developed in the cables. If the option is set to the program
adds this decompression strain to the total strain when calculating the stress in the cables.

Version 12.0 10-24 12/05

STRAP
Add prestress moment to the ultimate moment
The prestress moment is the moment required to nullify the effect of the prestressing = P(e). The value is
added to the ultimate moment capacity.

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions

Deflections
Specify the method for calculating the deflections (for certain Codes only):

Simplified code method

The program calculates a single 'effective' moment-of-inertia for the entire span, based on the maximum
service moment and the cracking moment at that point.

Compute effective I at each point

The program calculates the 'effective' moment-of-inertia at intervals along the span, the rotation at these
intervals and the maximum deflection by integration of these results.

Note:
• deflections cannot be calculated for slab "lines".

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions for more details.

Slab parameters

The slab centre-line is defined in the option. This option defines the default associated slab width.

The program calculates the result diagrams along the

defined line similarly to the "Results along a line"
option in the STRAP results module, i.e. the results
are per unit width, e.g. ton-meter/meter, ft-kip/ft, etc.
Therefore, the influence width value does not affect
the displayed results. The program treats the
influence width as the beam width and uses it to
calculate the stresses, etc, resulting from the
prestressing.

The influence width for specific slabs may be revised using the Design - option.

Version 12.0 10-25 12/05

STRAP
10.6.2 Reinforcement

Regular longitudinal reinforcement may be added to the prestressed beam. Specify the default parameters for

all beams in the model. Area and cover values may be modified for individual beams using the Design -
option.

Steel properties
• Specify the steel grade for regular longitudinal and transverse reinforcement. Note that the steel grade is
the nominal value.
• Specify the modulus of elasticity (E) according to the stress units displayed adjacent to the option.

Steel area & cover

Specify the area and cover according to the units displayed in the dialog box.

Note:
• the cover value indicates gross cover, from the surface to the centre-of-gravity of the reinforcement
• the program assumes that the area is constant along the entire length of the beam.

Version 12.0 10-26 12/05

STRAP
10.6.3 Creep & Shrinkage

Refer to 10.4.3.1.

10.6.4 Cable losses

Refer to 10.4.3.2.

Version 12.0 10-27 12/05

STRAP
10.6.5 Steel type

Define the stress-strain curves for all of the prestressing steel types. The curves are required when calculating
the ultimate moment capacity of the beams. The Steel types are assigned to the strands in the
option.

• select an existing type from the list box or click Add a new type .
• enter a name for the type and define the value of fpk
• enter the stress and strain values of points along the curve. The program assumes a linear distribution
between the points.
• click Save as default to designate any type as the "program default". To recall the default values into
the table (for the current type), click Load program default .

10.6.6 Strand types

Define/edit strand types; define/revise the data (area, max. stress, etc) and assign a steel type to the strand.

• click Save as default to save the current table as the "user default table".
To restore the original program values into the table, click Load program default .

Note:
• the "User default table" will be the initial strand table for all new models.
• Load program default affects only the current model.

Version 12.0 10-28 12/05

STRAP
10.6.7 Time steps

The program calculates losses, results, etc. at various time intervals:

• stages defined by the user in the option

• at additional time steps specified in this option.

• Enter the step values (days) in any order

• Each step can be subdivided into additional intervals; select no division or 2 to 5 intervals from the list box.
• This table can be reset to the original settings by clicking {button Load program default , }.

Note:
• Note that a separate STRAP load case is created for each time step; solution time may be significantly
increased in large models.

10.7 Stages

Define stages for all beams in the model. The table is required when all beams are not prestressed at the same
time.

Select one of the following options:

Define the date of the stage (days), the allowable tension/compression stress at that stage and the model
associated with it.

Expand the combination table; specify the stage at which the load is applied or removed; designate the
loads as service or factored.

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions.

Version 12.0 10-29 12/05

STRAP
10.7.1 Stages

Define a "Stage table" for models where not all of the cables or beams are prestressed at the same time. The
stages are defined by the number of days from the start of construction, the allowable stresses and the relevant
STRAP model.

• click Add to add another stage to the list. The program adds a new line and adds the parameters from
the previous line; enter a new title and edit the parameters. Note that each stage may be associated with
a STRAP model stage.
• click and highlight a stage, then click Up or Down to rearrange the list.
• click and highlight a stage, then click Delete to remove a stage from the list.
Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions.

10.7.2 Load table

Expand the load combination table defined in the STRAP results module.
• each combination is assigned a 'start' and 'end' time, defined as one of the stages or infinity. The program
uses only the relevant combination results when calculating the stresses at a specific stage.
• each combination may be defined as 'permanent' (sustained) for calculation of deflections and losses.
• each combination may be used for only service load calculations (stresses, deflections), only for factored
load calculations (ultimate moment, shear) or both.

Start/end times
Specify the start and end times of each combination; the program uses only the relevant combination results
when calculating the stresses at a specific stage.
• click on the combination line
• click on to display the list of stages; for example:

• click and highlight the relevant stage (or infinity).

Version 12.0 10-30 12/05

STRAP
Permanent loads
Each combination may be defined as 'permanent' (sustained) for calculation of deflections and losses.
• click on the combination line
• set the checkbox to if the load is permanent. For example:

Service/factored
Each combination may be used for only service load calculations (stresses, deflections), only for factored load
calculations (ultimate moment, shear) or for all calculations:
• Service only:
Combinations must be defined with all factors ~1.00.
• Factored only:
Combinations must be defined with the appropriate factors - 1.4, 1.6, etc.
• Service & factored:
Combinations must be defined with the appropriate factors - 1.4, 1.6, etc. The program changes all factors
to 1.00 when calculating stresses and deflections.
• Load combinations may be 'ignored' by all calculations.

To specify the combination type:

• click on the combination line
• click on to display the list of stages; for example:

• click and highlight the relevant type.

Version 12.0 10-31 12/05

STRAP
10.8 Solve

The program creates cable force load cases at all stages where cables are prestressed and at all time steps,
including calculated losses at each step. For example:

The program applies prestressing loads similar to those that may be defined in STRAP beam loads. However,
the program divides each member into 10 segments because the axial force is generally not equal along the
length of the beam because of the losses.

Note:
• Do not modify the title; if you select "Solve" again, the program identifies the previous pretension load cases
according to the title and erases them before writing the new ones.

Refer also to A10 - Design assumptions.

Version 12.0 10-32 12/05

STRAP
10.9 Output

10.9.1 Display

10.9.1.1 General project data

Display the list of stages, time steps and the load table (defined in the ‘Stage’ option).

10.9.1.2 Shear

Display the shear results . For example:

where:
• Dist = distance from beam start; the results are displayed at every 1/20 of the beam span.
• Comb = combination with maximum As/v.
• V = factored shear calculated from the loads
• Vc = shear capacity of the concrete
• Vcmax = maximum allowable shear force
• M = factored moment calculated from the loads
• Mcr = cracking moment
• Av/s = total area of shear links (stirrups) required (all legs) per unit spacing
•
Note:
• symbols may vary according to Code
• refer to A10 - Design assumptions

Version 12.0 10-33 12/05

STRAP
10.9.1.3 Ultimate moment

Display the ultimate and cracking moments . For example:

where:
Dist = distance from beam start; the results are displayed at every 1/20 of the beam span.
Comb = combination with maximum M/Mult.
M = factored moment calculated from the loads
Mcr = cracking moment
Mult = ultimate moment capacity of the beam
x/d = height of the compression block
Mult/Mcr= ratio of the Ultimate moment capacity to the Cracking moment; for most Codes the values should
be greater than 1.00.
M/Mult = ratio of the factored moment to the Ultimate moment capacity; for most Codes the values should
be less than 1.00.

Note:
• symbols may vary according to Code
• refer to A10 - Design assumptions

Version 12.0 10-34 12/05

STRAP
10.9.1.4 Deflections

Display the deflections . Two tables are available:

• Maximum: maximum downwards deflection
• Minimum : maximum upwards deflection

For example:

where:
• short-term and long-term deflections are calculated separately
• long-term deflections are calculated at each stage and the total long-term deflection is the sum of the
deflections at the stages.

Note:
• symbols may vary according to Code
• refer to A10 - Design assumptions

Version 12.0 10-35 12/05

STRAP
10.9.1.5 Stresses

Specify the following options:

• The levels in the beam cross-section at which the stresses are calculated:

• The times at which the stresses are calculated. Select:

For example:

Note:
• stresses are displayed at every 1/20 of the beam span
• compression = positive ; tension = negative
• for each combination the actual stress is compared to the allowable stress specified in the 'Stage' option;
stresses that exceed the allowable values are displayed in red.

10.9.1.6 Geometry

Display:
• Section dimensions
• regular reinforcement
• cable geometry
• design parameters

Version 12.0 10-36 12/05

STRAP
10.9.1.7 Losses

Display the prestress loss . for a specific cable selected by clicking {button Select cable, }.

Two tables are available:

where:
• x = distance from beam start; the results are displayed at every 1/20 of the beam span
• y = vertical coordinate of the prestressing cable, measured from the beam top
• length = length of cable from the beam start to the point
• angle = cumulative cable angle up to the point

Note:
• symbols may vary according to Code
• refer to A10 - Design assumptions

Version 12.0 10-37 12/05

STRAP

*** Blank page ***

Version 12.0 10-38 12/05

STRAP

A1 Appendix - General

** This page is deliberately blank **

Version 12.0 A2-1 12/05

STRAP

A2 Appendix - Geometry
A2.1 JC Node and Beta Angle

The specification of joint coordinates and member incidences uniquely describes the position of a beam in
space, but not the complete orientation of the section. Coordinates and incidences define only the direction
of the local x1 axis, but not the direction of the cross section axes x2 and x3.

For example, a beam can be oriented in an infinite number of angles about the x1 beam axis.

The properties of all beams in STRAP are defined relative to the local coordinate system. The properties are
known about the major and minor axes of the beam section. Therefore, it is necessary to align the major/minor
axes of the beam with the local x2/x3 axes. This prevents the situation illustrated above from occurring.

The program defines the local coordinate system using the default conventions (refer to 1.2.2). The user may
then modify the x2/x3 axes orientation using the Beam - local axis options (refer to 2.4.12) or by entering JC
and BETA angle commands in the Command Mode box.

Note that all modified axis data is displayed as JC/BETA in the geometry output tables:
• The JC node method points the x2 axis of the beam to a designated node (JC)
• The BETA angle method rotates the x2,x3 axes by a specified angle (β)

Recommendations for Command Mode:

• Use the JC node command to define the local axis orientation for all but very special cases. The BETA angle
method is much more complicated and often leads to errors in the input.
• The JC node may be defined in a separate command or may be added to the beam definition command.
BETA angles must be added to a beam definition command.

Refer to the Command Mode manual.

A2.1.1 JC node

The JC node defines the local coordinate system of a beam as follows:

The local x1 axis lies along the axis of the beam; its positive direction is in the direction of JB. The local x2 axis
is perpendicular to x1 and lies in the direction of a third node, called the JC node (which need not have any
members attached to it). The local x3 axis is perpendicular to the plane formed by x1 and x2 and its direction
is determined by the right-hand rule.

Note that the JC node of a beam should never be located along the extension of its x1 axis.

Version 12.0 A3-1 12/05

STRAP
Example:

Node 29 was defined as the JC node for beams 3,4,5 onhe sloped plane.

A2.1.2 BETA angle

BETA is an angle measured in the plane of the beam cross-section.

• General Case:
Generate an axis +Y which is perpendicular to the plane formed by the beam x1 axis and the global X3 axis.
BETA is measured counterclockwise from +Y to the local x2 axis (when looking along the axis of the beam
from JB to JA).

• Local x1 Axis Parallel to Global X3 Axis:

BETA is the angle measured from the global X2 axis to the desired beam local x2 axis. Rotation is
considered positive when counter-clockwise about the beam +x1 axis.

Note: If the angle between the local x1 and the global X3 is greater than 0.006°, the axes are assumed
to be not parallel.

Version 12.0 A3-2 12/05

STRAP
A2.2 Model Wizards

A2.2.1 Model Wizard - Plane Frame:

Select one of the following models:

A2.2.1.1 Plane Frame

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Bays 1 = Beams
No. of Storeys 2 = Columns
Typical Bay Width
Typical Storey Height

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead load
Live load
Self-weight factor
Uniform wind loads Wind on left column
Wind on right column
Combination factors Factors for:
- Dead+Live
- Dead+Live+Wind
- Dead + Wind

Version 12.0 A3-3 12/05

STRAP
A2.2.1.2 Vierendael

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Panels 1 = Chords
Typical Panel Length 2 = Verticals
Height of Vierendeel
Camber*
* - may be defined only after the structure has been created.

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on top/bottom chords
Self-weight factor
Dead/live combination factors

Load cases generated:

No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Dead + LIve Dead*factor + Live*factor

A2.2.1.3 Truss on Columns

Geometry parameters Property groups

Total Column Height 1 = Bottom Chord
Truss Height 2 = Top Chord
No. of Panels at Left 3 = Verticals in Truss
Typical Panel Length 4 = Diagonals
Camber at Centre (initial top and bottom) 5 = Columns
Top Camber *
No. of Panels at Right *
* - may be defined only after the structure has been created.

Version 12.0 A3-4 12/05

STRAP
Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on top/bottom chords
Self-weight factor
Dead/live combination factors
Wind loads Wind parallel to frame: Wind on left/right ridge/column
Wind parallel to ridge: Wind on ridge/column
Combination factors Factors for:
- Dead+Live
- Dead+Live+Wind
- Dead + Wind

Load cases generated:

No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Wind load (parallel to frame) Wind load 1 X 1.0
4 Wind load (parallel to ridge) Wind load 2 X 1.0
5 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor
6 Dead + live + wind 1 Loads x 2nd set of factors (above
7 Dead + live + wind 2 Loads x 2nd set of factors (above)
8 Dead + wind 1 1.0*Dead + Wind * 3rd set factor
9 Dead + wind 2 1.0*Dead + wind * 3rd set factor

A2.2.1.4 North light truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

no. of bays 1 = Bottom chord
no. of dividing nodes 2 = Top Chord
bay width 3 = Diagonals
column height 4 =Columns
roof height

Version 12.0 A3-5 12/05

STRAP

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on sloped roof/window
Self-weight factor
Wind loads Wind from left: wind on sloped roof/window/leftcolumn/right column
Wind from right:wind on sloped roof/window
Wind parallel to ridge: wind on roof/columns
Combination factors: Factors for:
- Dead+Live
- Dead+Live+Wind
- Dead + Wind

Load cases generated:

No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Wind from left Wind load 1 X 1.0
4 Wind from right Wind load 2 X 1.0
5 Wind along ridge Wind3 load X 1.0
6 Dead+live Dead*max. factor + Live* factor
7 Dead+live+wind1 Loads * 2nd set of factors above
8 Dead+live+wind2 Loads * 2nd set of factors above
9 Dead+live+wind3 Loads * 2nd set of factors above
10 Dead+wind1 1.0*Dead + Wind1*3rd set of factors
11 Dead+wind2 1.0*Dead + Wind2*3rd set of factors
12 Dead+wind3 1.0*Dead + Wind3*3rd set of factors

A2.2.1.5 Continuous beam

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of spans 1 = all spans
Typical span length

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load
Self-weight factor
Dead/live combination factors

Version 12.0 A3-6 12/05

STRAP
Load cases generated:
No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor
4 Alternate dead + live - 1 Staggered loads on alternate spans:
- Dead*max. factor + Live *factor
- Dead * min. factor
5 Alternate dead + live - 2 Similar to 4

A2.2.2 Model Wizard - Plane Grid:

A2.2.2.1 Grid (beams only)

Gird with angle (beams only)
Grid with elements

Version 12.0 A3-7 12/05

STRAP
Property groups
Geometry parameters
No. of Horizontal Bays 1 = All beams/elements
No. of Vertical Bays
Typical Horizontal Bay Width
Typical Vertical Bay Width
Horizontal Skew *
Vertical Skew **
* - may be defined only after the structure has been created.
** - “Grid” “Grid elements” only – may be defined only after the structure has been created

A2.2.2.2 Grid with diagonals (beams only)

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Horizontal Bays 1 = All beams
No. of Vertical Bays
Typical Horizontal Bay Width
Typical Vertical Bay Width
Horizontal Skew *
Vertical Skew *
* - may be defined only after the structure has been created.

A2.2.2.3 Continuous beam

Refer to A2.2.1.5.

A2.2.2.4 Grid / joist bay

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of joist bays 1 = girders
Joist bay width 2 = joists
Joist length

Version 12.0 A3-8 12/05

STRAP
A2.2.3 Model Wizard - Truss

A2.2.3.1 Truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Panels - Left 1 = Bottom
Typical Panel Length Chord
Truss Height at Exterior 2 = Top Chord
Truss Height at Centre 3 = Verticals
No. of Panels - Right * 4 = Diagonals
* - may be defined only after the structure has
been created.

Version 12.0 A3-9 12/05

STRAP
Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on top/bottom chords
Self-weight factor
Wind loads Wind parallel to frame: wind on left/right
Wind parallel to ridge: wind on roof
Combination factors Factors for:
- Dead+Live
- Dead+Live+Wind
- Dead + Wind

Load cases generated:

No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Wind load (parallel to frame) Wind load 1 X 1.0
4 Wind load (parallel to ridge) Wind load 2 X 1.0
5 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor
6 Dead + live + wind 1 Loads x 2nd set of factors (above
7 Dead + live + wind 2 Loads x 2nd set of factors (above)
8 Dead + wind 1 1.0*Dead + Wind * 3rd set factor
9 Dead + wind 2 1.0*Dead + wind * 3rd set factor

A2.2.3.2 Triangular truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Panels - Left 1 = Bottom chord
Typical Panel Length 2 = Top chord
Truss Height at Centre 3 = Verticals
No. of Panels - Right * 4 = Diagonals
* - may be defined only after the structure has
been created.
Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.3.3 Parallelogram truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Panels 1 = Bottom Chord
Typical Panel Length 2 = Top Chord
Truss height 3 = Verticals
Camber * 4 = Diagonals
* - may be defined only after the structure has been
created.

Version 12.0 A3-10 12/05

STRAP
Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on top/bottom chords
Self-weight factor
Combination factors Factors for:
- Dead+Live

Load cases generated:

No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor

A2.2.3.4 Trapezoidal truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Panels - Left Sloped Section 1 = Bottom Chord
No. of Panels - Centre Flat Section 2 = Top Chord
Typical Panel Length 3 = Verticals
Height of Truss - Exterior 4 = Diagonals
Height of Truss - Centre
No. of Panels - Right Sloped Section *
* - may be defined only after the structure has been created.

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

Version 12.0 A3-11 12/05

STRAP

A2.2.3.5 Frame truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

Total No. of Panels in Left Column ** 1 = Top chord - truss
No. of Panels in Left Side of Truss ** 2 = Bottom Chord - Truss
Typical Column Panel Length 3 = Verticals in truss; Horizontals in columns
Typical Truss Panel Length 4 = Diagonals - Truss and Column
Spacing between Column Chords at Base 5 = Exterior column verticals
Total Height of Truss 6 = Interior column verticals
Camber of Truss
Total No. of Panels in Right Column *
No. of Panels in Right Side of Truss *
* - may be defined only after the structure has been created.
** one panel is located in both the truss and the column

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.3.6 Triangular rafter

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Panels 1 = Top Chords
Typical Panel Length 2 = Bottom Chord
Truss Width 3 = \/_ bracing
Truss Height 4 = X - bracing in top panel
5 = > , < diagonals from top to bottom chord

Version 12.0 A3-12 12/05

STRAP
Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on top/bottom chords
Self-weight factor
Wind loads Wind on top chords
Combination factors Factors for:
- Dead+Live
- Dead+Live+Wind
- Dead + Wind

Load cases generated:

No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Wind load Wind load X 1.0
4 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor
5 Dead + live + wind Loads x 2nd set of factors (above)
6 Dead + wind 1.0*Dead + Wind * 3rd set factor

A2.2.3.7 Double-deck

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Modules - X direction 1 = top and bottom chords - Y direction
No. of Modules - Y direction 2 = bottom chords - X direction
Module Dimension - X direction 3 = top chords - X direction
Module Dimension - Y direction 4 = exterior top chords - X direction
Height of Truss 5 = all diagonals

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform area loads Top deck area load (global area load)
Bottom deck area load (global area load)
Self wt. factor

Version 12.0 A3-13 12/05

STRAP
A2.2.3.8 Triple-deck

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of Modules - X direction 1 = top, bottom and middle chords - Y direction
No. of Modules - Y direction 2 = top and bottom chords - X direction
Module Dimension - X direction 3 = middle chord - X direction
Module Dimension - Y direction 4 = exterior middle chords - X direction
Height of Truss 5 = all diagonals

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform area loads Top deck area load (global area load)
Bottom deck area load (global area load)
Self wt. factor

A2.2.3.9 Cross diagonal truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of panels 1 = Bottom chord
Panel length 2 = Top Chord
Truss height 3 = Verticals
4 = Diagonals
Loads
Identical to “Parallelogram Truss” (2.2.3.3).

Version 12.0 A3-14 12/05

STRAP
A2.2.3.10 Fink truss - 3 bays

Geometry parameters Property groups

Total truss width 1 = Bottom chord
Truss height 2 = Top Chord
Truss camber 3 = Diagonals

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.3.11 Fink truss - 5 bays

Geometry parameters Property groups

Total truss width 1 = Bottom chord
Truss height 2 = Top Chord
Truss camber 3 = Diagonals

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.3.12 Bowstring truss (a)

Version 12.0 A3-15 12/05

STRAP
Geometry parameters Property groups
Total truss span 1 = Top chord
Truss height 2 = Bottom Chord
No. of bays 3 = Diagonals and verticals

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.3.13 Bowstring truss (b)

Geometry parameters Property groups

Total truss span 1 = Top chord
Truss height 2 = Bottom Chord
No. of bays 3 = Diagonals and verticals

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.3.14 Flat Warren truss (a), (b)

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of panels 1 = Bottom chord
Truss length 2 = Top Chord
Truss height 3 = Verticals and Diagonals

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Uniform vertical loads Dead/live load on top/bottom
chords
Self-weight factor
Combination factors Factors for:
- Dead+Live

Version 12.0 A3-16 12/05

STRAP
Load cases generated:
No. Title Description
1 Dead load Dead load X 1.0
2 Live load Live load X 1.0
3 Dead + live Dead* max. factor + Live* factor

A2.2.3.15 Howe truss

Geometry parameters Property groups

No. of panels, left side 1 = Bottom chord
Panel length 2 = Top Chord
Truss height at centre 3 = Verticals
4 = Diagonals

Loads
Identical to “Truss” (2.2.3.1).

A2.2.4 Preprocessor - Space Frame

Plane frame models - refer to A2.2.1

Plane grid models - refer to A2.2.2
Truss models - refer to A2.2.3

Version 12.0 A3-17 12/05

STRAP
A2.2.4.1 Circular Tanks

Geometry parameters Property groups

radius 1 = bottom
height 2 = walls
no. of segments on circle
no. of segments on radius
no. of segments on height

Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
linear pressure load (horizontal) pressure at tank bottom
(horizontal) pressure at top of load
Height at top of load
Vertical pressure at bottom
Self wt. Factor

A2.2.4.2 Rectangular Tanks

Geometry parameters Property groups

length (in X1 direction) 1 = bottom
length (in X2 direction) 2 = walls
height (in X3 direction)
no. of segments on length
no. of segments on width
no. of segments on height

Version 12.0 A3-18 12/05

STRAP
Loads:
Dialog box title: Data requested
Linear pressure load (horizontal) pressure at tank bottom
(horizontal) pressure at top of load
Height at top of load
Vertical pressure at bottom
Self wt. factor

A2.2.5 Model Wizard - Adding New Models

The model wizard allows you to define the geometry and loads for standard structures by inputting a limited
number of parameters.

For example, the four parameters required to define the nodes and beams for a simple plane frame are:
number of bays, number of storeys, typical bay width and typical storey height.

Users familiar with STRAP are aware that the model geometry may be defined using the "command mode"
where commands are typed in the box at the bottom of the screen. The model wizard file contains these
commands but with parameters instead of numbers.

For example, a plane grid of nodes is defined by specifying three node points using the following format:

where:
n1 = node number of the first node on the base line n1-n2
n2 = node number of the last node on the base line n1-n2
n3 = node number of the last node on the height line n2-n3
x1,x2 = node coordinates
d1 = distances between adjacent nodes along n1-n2
d2 = distances between adjacent nodes along n2-n3

The corresponding node generation command for the plane frame model in the wizard file is:
1 0 0 TO #end1 @total_w 0 DIST @distx TO #end2 @total_w @total_h DIST @disty
Obviously, "#end1" represents a parameter indicating the number of the node at the end of the base line and
must be related to the "Number of bays" parameter entered by the user, i.e. End node number = number of
bays + 1.

Therefore, the wizard file contains a series of "wizard commands" that define the variables required for the
STRAP node, beam/element, property, property group, support and load commands.

The following sections describe how to build the wizard commands, create prompts for the parameters, write
equations to calculate the variables in the STRAP commands, check for errors in the input and display warning
and error messages.

The wizard file must be in the following format:

Model title list (refer to A2.2.5.1)

/ END

Version 12.0 A3-19 12/05

STRAP
For each model:

Model title
/ INIT
"INIT" block commands. Refer to A2.2.5.2.
The commands in this block assign initial default values to the input parameters and define the variables
required for the model definition.
/ MENU
"MENU" block commands. Refer to A2.2.5.3.
The commands in this block define the variables that are displayed in the dialog box at the bottom of the
screen after the model is created.
/ DIMENSIONS
"DIMENSION" block commands. Refer to A2.2.5.4.
The commands in this block define the dimension lines that are automatically drawn by the program when
the model is displayed.
/ CHECK
"CHECK" block commands. Refer to A2.2.5.5.
The commands in this block define checks carried out automatically by the program to test the validity of
the parameter values, either when defined or after they are revised in the bottom dialog box.
/ PROP
"PROP" block commands (optional). Refer to A2.2.5.6
The commands in this block specify the number of property groups that the wizard must prompt for.
/ LOADS MENU
"LOADS MENU" block commands (optional). Refer to A2.2.5.9.
The commands in this block provide the program with instructions for prompting for loading data..
/ COMMANDS
"COMMAND" block commands. Refer to A2.2.5.8.
This block contains the geometry definition commands in the "Command mode" format, but with variables
(defined in the INIT block) in place of numerical values.
/ LOAD COMMANDS
"LOAD COMMAND" block commands (optional). Refer to A2.2.5.7.
This block contains the load case definition commands in the "Command mode" format, but with variables
(defined in the LOADS MENU and INIT block) in place of numerical values.
/ END

Refer to the Plane frame model for an example. (A2.2.5.10)

A2.2.5.1 Model title lines

The preprocessor file must begin with a list of the models included in the file.

Each line contains data for one model. The format is as follows:
• column 1-30: model title
• column 61-68: name of bitmap file with small picture of typical model. The bitmap file cannot be defined
for new models added by the user.

The list of models must terminate with a / END line.

Version 12.0 A3-20 12/05

STRAP
For example, the plane frame file (PREFR1.DAT) begins with:
Plane frame FRAMEA
Vierendeel FRAMEB
Truss on columns FRAMEC
/ END

Refer also to General syntax rules (A2.2.5.11).

A2.2.5.2 "INIT" block commands

The INIT block must be the first block in the file and always starts with a "/ INIT" .command.

The commands in the block assign initial default values to the input parameters and define the variables
required for the model definition.

There are four command formats available:

• variable = expression
This command assigns default values to the model parameters or defines new model variables. For
example, in the plane frame model:
bays = 5
num_dist = bays - 1

Note that all length values should be multiplied by "UNITSFCT" to convert the values to the default length
units. In such cases the program will assume that the default length values were defined in meters (the
program will round off values after converting units).
• variable = I "string"
This command adds a prompt with "string" to the dialog box that requests the model parameters. The
parameter is defined as an integer value. For example, in the plane frame model:
bays I "Number of bays ="

variable = R "string"
This command adds a prompt with "string" to the dialog box that requests the model parameters. The
parameter is defined as a real value. For example, in the plane frame model:
width R "Typical bay width ="

LIST variable(size_variable)
This command defines an array "variable" containing "size_variable" numbers. This command is used to
define the list of distances for node generation commands. For example, if there are "n" bays in the plane
frame model, "n-1" distances are required for the node GRID command. The variable "num_dist" was
defined to represent the "n-1" distances. The distance values are assigned to the array "distx" with the
following command:
LIST distx(num_dist)

Note that all terms in the array will be assigned with the same value; there is no method in the INIT block

to assign different values to different terms in the array. Individual distances may be revised by clicking the
button in the bottom dialog box after the initial model is displayed.

Refer also to A2.2.5.11 - General syntax rules.

Program constants are variables defined by the program; they may not be revised by the user:

Version 12.0 A3-21 12/05

STRAP
The program constants are:
• MAXNODES - the maximum node number allowed
• UNITSFCT - a factor that identifies program default length unit. All default length values defined
in the INIT block must be multiplied by this program variable in order to be
converted to the default length unit

A2.2.5.3 "MENU" block commands

The MENU block must be the second block in the file and always starts with a "/ MENU" .command.
The commands in the block define the variables that are displayed in the dialog box at the bottom of the screen
after the model is created (i.e. after the user types in values for the model parameters). For example, the
following dialog box is displayed for the plane frame model:

The command format is:

variable type "string"
where:
• "variable" must be a variable defined in the "INIT" block.
• "type" must be one of the following (according to the variable):
I - integer value
R - real value
IW - integer value, but do not allow value to be revised
RW - real value, but do not allow value to be revised
• "string" = the prompt for the variable in the dialog box

In the plane frame model, the commands for "Number of bays" and "Total width" are:
bays I "No. of bays ="
total_w..RW "Total width ="

Note:
• The dialog box can contain 1 or two lines. The command "LINE 2" must be inserted in the file before the
commands defining the variables in the second line.
Refer also to A2.2.5.11 - General syntax rules.

A2.2.5.4 "DIMENSION" block commands

The DIMENSION block must be the third block in the file and always starts with a "/ DIMENSION" .command.

The commands in the block define the dimension lines that are automatically drawn by the program when the
model is displayed.

The command format is:

side variable list
where:
• "side" indicates the side of the model where the dimension line is drawn:
D - below the model
U - above the model
L - to the left of the model

Version 12.0 A3-22 12/05

STRAP
R - to the right of the model
• "variable_list" includes a list of defined variables (may include LIST variables) that are to be included in the
dimension line.

For example, the horizontal dimension line in the plane frame model is defined by the command:
D distx last_distx
where
• "distx" is the LIST variable with "n-1" bay dimensions
• "last_distx" is the "nth" bay dimension

Note:
• a maximum of 3 dimension lines may be defined on each "side"
• all dimension lines start at the (0,0) coordinate
• a maximum of 10 variable names may be included in "variable_list"
• all of the variables must be defined in the "INIT" block.

Refer also to A2.2.5.11 - General syntax rules.

A2.2.5.5 "CHECK" block commands

The CHECK block must be the fourth block in the file and always starts with a "/ CHECK" .command.

The commands in the block define checks carried out automatically by the program to test the validity of the
parameter values, either when defined or after they are revised in the bottom dialog box.

The commands are defined in pairs:

1st line:
2nd line: "string"

where:
• "variable" is the variable (defined in the INIT block) to be checked
• "<" ">" defines the mathematical relationship
• "expression" is a numerical value or a program constant
• "string" is the error message that is displayed if the check fails.

Note that if "variable" was not defined in the INIT block, it may be defined before "1st line" with the command:
variable = expression
For example, in the plane frame model the program must check that the total number of nodes does not exceed
the program maximum (the total number of nodes must first be calculated). The commands are:
totn = ((bays +1 ) * (storeys + 1))
totn < MAXNODES
No. of nodes exceeds maximum

Refer also to A2.2.5.11 - General syntax rules.

A2.2.5.6 "PROP" block commands

The PROP block, if defined, must follow the CHECK block and always starts with a "/ PROP" .command.

The commands in the block instruct the program to display the standard property dialog boxes for the property
groups in the model.

Version 12.0 A3-23 12/05

STRAP
The command format is:
n (E) "prompt"
where:
• n is the property group number
• E indicates an element property (default = beams)
• "string" = the dialog box header for the property group

Example:
Property group 7 is assigned to the corbel beams. Enter:
7 "Define the section for the corbel beams"
Note:
• this option always prompts for beam properties and cannot be used for elements.
• the user may "skip" over the property menus, however the "undefined" property groups will still be assigned
to the beams as instructed in the / PROPERTY NUMBERS commands.

A2.2.5.7 "LOAD COMMANDS" block commands

The LOAD COMMAND block, if defined, must be the last block in the file and always starts with a "/ LOAD
COMMAND" .command.

The block contains the load definition commands in the "Command mode" format, but with variables (defined
in the LOADS MENU block) in place of numerical values.

The program calculates values for the variables, inserts them into the command and writes the command in
the STATnnn.DAT file.

Each load case must start with the following commands:

* LOAD (nm) (var_1 ... var_n)
load_case_title

where:
nm: do not generate the load case if the user "skipped" over load menu no. "nm" (only 1 menu may
be specified)
var_n : do not generate the load case if any of var_1, .., var_n is less than or equal to zero.

The load commands then follow:

The variables in the command must be written with one of the following prefixes:
# - indicates that the variable is an integer value
@ - indicates that the variable is a real value

Expressions must be enclosed in parentheses.

For example, the dead load is applied to all beams in the plane frame model with the command:
DIST FX2 @deadlm B #(bays+1) TO #beams
The command may be conditional on a variable being greater than zero; add to the start of the command:
? var

Version 12.0 A3-24 12/05

STRAP
For example, the above command should be written only if there are more than 2 bays. The commands should
read:
bay = bays - 2
? bay DIST FX2 @deadlm B #(bays+1) TO #beams

Refer also to the A2.2.5.11 - General syntax rules.

A2.2.5.8 "COMMAND" block commands

The COMMAND block must be the fifth block in the file and always starts with a "/ COMMAND" .command.

The block contains the geometry definition commands in the "Command mode" format, but with variables
(defined in the INIT block) in place of numerical values.

The program calculates values for the variables, inserts them into the command and writes the command in
the GEOINnnn.DAT file.

The variables in the command must be written with one of the following prefixes:
# - indicates that the variable is an integer value
@ - indicates that the variable is a real value

Expressions must be enclosed in parentheses.

For example, the beam GRID command in the plane frame model is written as:
GRID #bays #storeys B 1 N 1 BY #(bays + 1) DEL 1 TO #bays

Refer also to the A2.2.5.11 - General syntax rules.

Note:
The program writes the commands to the file when the user clicks in the bottom dialog box. However,
the user may have changed the value of the some of the variables by editing the values in the dialog box !

Therefore, all INIT commands defining variables that may be revised in the dialog box must be written
again in the COMMAND block; the program will recalculate the variable values before writing the command.

For example, in the plane frame model the user can revise the "Number of bays", represented by the "bays"
variable. Therefore, the following commands are located at the start of the COMMAND block:
num_distx = bays - 1
num_disty = storeys - 1
total_w = distx + last_distx
total_h = disty + last_disty

This text in this line must be identical to the text in the corresponding title line at the start of the file

A2.2.5.9 "LOADS MENU" block commands

The LOADS MENU block, if defined, must follow the last geometry block - PROP or CHECK and always starts
with a "/ LOADS MENU" .command.

The commands in the block instruct the program how to prompt for load case information and define other
variables required for load case generation.

Version 12.0 A3-25 12/05

STRAP
Any number of menus may be created for convenience, i.e, the number of menus does not have to correspond
to the number of load cases. There are three menus in the plane frame model: the first prompts for all vertical
load data, the second prompts for all horizontal (wind) load data and the third prompts for combination data;
eight load cases are created in the / LOAD COMMANDS section.

Each menu must start with the following header line:

* MENU
There are two command formats available:
• variable = expression
This command assigns default values to the load parameters or defines new load variables. For example,
in the plane frame model:
selfl = 1
bay_min = bays - 1

• variable = R "string"
This command adds a prompt with "string" to the dialog box that requests the load parameters. The
parameter is defined as a real value. For example, in the plane frame model:
deadl R "Dead load ="

Bitmaps cannot be displayed in user-define models.

Version 12.0 A3-26 12/05

STRAP
A2.2.5.10 Plane frame example

Explanation File Data

Model titles: Model #1: Plane frame FRAMEA
Model #2: Vierendeel FRAMEB
Model #3: Truss on columns FRAMEC
End of model list: / END
Model #1 title: Plane frame
comment line: ;--------------------------------------------
INIT block: / INIT
- model parameters: bays = 5
default values storeys = 4
width = 5 * UNITSFCT
height = 3 * UNITSFCT
- model parameters: bays I "Number of bays="
menu prompts: storeys I "Number of storeys="
width R "Typical bay width="
height R "Typical storey height="
- size of node DIST arrays: num_distx = bays - 1
" " " num_disty = storeys - 1
- define DIST arrays: LIST distx(num_distx)
" " LIST disty(num_disty)
- assign input values to ALL distx = width
array terms: disty = height
- define variables for last last_distx = width
spacing (for Dim lines): last_disty = height
- define variables for Dialog total_w = distx + last_distx
Box: total_h = disty + last_disty
MENU block: / MENU
1st line box: bays I "No. of bays="
" " storeys I "No. of storeys="
LINE 2
2nd line box: total_w RW "Total width="
" " total_h RW "Total height="
DIMENSION block: / DIMENSIONS
Horizontal dimension line: D distx last_distx
Vertical dimension line: L disty last_disty
CHECK block: / CHECK
- max no, of bays: bays < 100
warning: Number of bays should not exceed 100
- max. no. of storeys: storeys < 100
warning: Number of storeys should not exceed 100
- Calc no. of nodes in model: totn = ((bays + 1) * (storeys + 1))
Check if < program variable: totn < MAXNODES
warning (if not): no. of nodes exceeds maximum

Version 12.0 A3-27 12/05

STRAP

Explanation File Data

PROP block: / PROP
Prompt for properties of 2 1 "Define the beam section"
groups - beams and columns 2 "Define the column section"
( / PROP GRP commands
below)
LOADS MENU block: / LOADS MENU
First menu: all vertical loads * MENU
* No bitmaps in user models * BITMAP PLD11
- Prompt for dead load deadl R "Dead load ="
- Prompt for live load livel R "Live load ="
- Default self-weight factor selfl = 1
- Prompt for self-weight selfl R "self weight factor ="
- Initialize menu 2,3 variables wind_t = 0
in 1st menu because other bay_min = bays - 1
menus may be "skipped"
* MENU
Second menu: .....
...
COMMAND block: / COMMANDS
- Recalculate these variables num_distx = bays - 1
as user may have revised num_disty = storeys - 1
values in bottom Dialog total_w = distx + last_distx
box: total_h = disty + last_disty
NODE commands: / JOINT COORDINATES
- plane model (2 coord only): COORD 2
- define variables: node nos end1 = bays + 1
at end of base line & ht line: end2 = end1 * (storeys + 1)
- #= integer var; @= real var: 1 0 0 TO #end1 @total_w 0 DIST @distx TO #end2 @total_w @total_h
SUPPORT commands: DIST @disty
- pinned supports: / RESTRAINTS
PROP GROUP commands: X1 X2 1 TO #end1
- calc no. of beams in model: / PROPERTY NUMBERS
- Prop. group 1 = beams beams = bays * (storeys + 1)
- calc total no. of members: 1 1 TO #beams
- Prop. group 2 = columns: col_end = beams + storeys * (bays + 1)
BEAM commands: 2 #(beams + 1) TO #col_end
- define grid / MEMBER INCIDENCES
GRID #bays #storeys B 1 N 1 BY 1 BY #(bays + 1) DEL 1 TO #bays
LOAD COMMANDS block / LOAD COMMANDS
- 1st load case: * LOAD
- load case title DEAD LOAD
- define beam loads /BEAM LOAD
- reverse sign of dead load deadlm = 0 - deadl
- uniform bm load command DIST FX2 @deadlm B #(bays + 1) TO #beams
- 'self2' always => 0. self2 = selfl * selfl
- apply s-w only if factor ? self2 SELF X2 @selfl B #(bays + 1) TO #col_end
defined .....
* LOAD 2 wind_t
3rd case: create only if menu .....
2 not skipped and wind_t>0

Version 12.0 A3-28 12/05

STRAP

Explanation File Data

End of model: / END
Model #2 Virendeel
;----------------------------------------------
/ INIT
.
etc ...

A2.2.5.11 General syntax rules

• lines starting with a ";" are comment lines and are ignored by the program
• All header lines must have at least one space between the '/' and the following text, e.g. '/ INIT'
• text must not be written after column 80. In cases where a command exceeds 80 characters, write a "&"
at the end of the first line (leave at least one space before the '&') and continue the command on the
following line.
• Variable names may have any length and must not include any of the following symbols:
( ) + - * / ; @ # > < & ,<space>
• Expressions that include the following mathematical operators may be used:
^ (exponent) / * - +
(the above list also indicates the order of calculation)
At least one blank must be entered on each side of the above operators.
• Parentheses ( ) may also be used
• The following functions may be used:
SIN( ) COS( ) TAN( ) LN( ) ASIN( ) ACOS( ) ATAN( ) INT( )
• Loops may be created and must be in the format:
! DO
... commands ...
! UNTIL condition
The loop is continued until "condition" is true, where "condition" must be in the form:
variable | = | expression
|>|
|<|

Note:
• the program does not differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters in the variable names, e.g.
NODE and Node refer to the same variable.

Version 12.0 A3-29 12/05

STRAP
A2.3 Nodes - Equations

A2.3.1 Ellipse - Grid

Ellipse grid equation:

X15/(A/2)5 + X25/(B/2)5 = V5

Program formulae:
X1 = 0.5 A V cos(πU)
X2 = 0.5 B V sin(πU)

Example:

A = 15.0 B = 5.0
U: Start = 0.333 End = 1.0 Intervals = 8
V: Start = 0.5 End = 1.0 Intervals = 4

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node definition by equations.

A2.3.2 Sphere

Sphere equation: X15 + X25 + X35 = R5

Program formulae:
X1 = R cos(π/2 V) cos(πU)
X2 = R cos(π/2 V) sin(πU)
X3 = R sin(π/2 V)

Example:

R = 10.
U: Start = 0.1667 End = 1.8333 Intervals = 16
V: Start = 0.1667 End = 0.8333 Intervals = 4

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node definition by equations.

Version 12.0 A3-30 12/05

STRAP
A2.3.3 Ellipsoid

Equation: X1²/A² + X2²/B² + X3²/C² = 1

Program formulae:
X1 = A cos(π/2 V) cos(πU)
X2 = B cos(π/2 V) sin(πU)
X3 = C sin(π/2 V)

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed

example of node definition by equations.

A2.3.4 Cone

Cone equation: X15 + X25 = (R X3/C)5

Program formulae:
X1 = R V cos(πU)
X2 = R V sin(πU)
X3 = C V

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node

definition by equations.

A2.3.5 Spiral

Program equations:
X1 = R cos[π/180 {A+U (B-A)}]
X2 = R sin[π/180 {A+U (B-A)}]
X3 = U C

• Each complete turn of the spiral is equivalent to

360°, i.e. for 2 complete turns, A = 0°, B = 720°.
• Always define the range of U from 0. to 1.
• C is the total height of the spiral, not the height
of a turn.

Example:
Angle at N2 = 360+270 = 630
No. of intervals = (630-90)/15 = 42

Enter:
A = 90 B = 630 C = 6.3 R = 3.8
U: Start = 0. End = 1. Intervals = 42

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node definition by equations.

Version 12.0 A3-31 12/05

STRAP
A2.3.6 Clothoid from straight line to radius R
Clothoid - Grid

The clothoid represents a gradual transition from a curve with a specified

radius to a straight line (radius = infinity). The program formulae are:

Example:

Radius = 100. Assumed clothoid constant = 64.

Enter:
A = 64. B = 6.0 R = 100.
U: Start = 0.0 End = 1.0 Intervals = 20
V: Start = 0.0 End = 1.0 Intervals = 6

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of

node definition by equations.

A2.3.7 Hyperbolic Paraboloid - Straight Generatrices

The program formulae are:

X1 = A U X2 = B V X3 = V D + [C+V (E-C-D)]

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node

definition by equations.

Version 12.0 A3-32 12/05

STRAP
A2.3.8 Hyperbolic Paraboloid - Parabolic Generatrices

The program formulae are:

X1 = C U X2 = D V X3 = U5 C5/A5 - V5 D5/A5

Note that the model is drawn from U = -1 to 1; V = -1 to 1 for clarity.

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node definition by equations.

A2.3.9 Parabola

The program formulae are:

X1 = U X2 = A U5 + B U + C

Refer to 2.2.5.2 - Ellipse for a detailed example of node definition by equations.

Version 12.0 A3-33 12/05

STRAP

*** This page is blank ***

Version 12.0 A3-34 12/05

STRAP

A3 Appendix - Loads
A3.1 Global loads - Method of Application

Global loads may be applied to the model as joint loads, beam loads or element pressure loads.

A3.1.1 Global Loads Applied as Joint Loads

Global Point Loads Applied as Joint Loads

The figure below shows a point load applied at O located on the surface of the model.

The program creates two imaginary beams (B1,B2) running

through O and lying parallel to the global X1 and X2 axes.

The program then searches for the node closest to O in each of the
four quadrants created by B1,B2 and creates four imaginary
support beams (JA-JB,JB-JD,JA-JC,JC-JD) lying between these
nodes.

The program calculates the reactions of beams B1,B2 from the

point load at O and applies them to the four support beams. The
reactions of these beams at the nodes JA,JB,JC and JD are
calculated and applied as joint loads to the model. All six beams
are assumed to have fixed ends, i.e moments will be applied
to the support nodes in addition to forces.
The program ignores loads which lie outside the boundaries of the model, i.e. which are not surrounded by
at least three nodes (nodes not connected to the model are ignored).

The figure below shows a pattern of wheel loads recalled from a file and applied as global loads. Loads at
points 1,2,5,6,8,9 are within the model boundaries and will be applied to the model. The loads at points 7
and 10 will not be applied. The loads at points 3 and 4 are outside the boundaries, but are surrounded by
nodes, and so will be applied to the model as explained above.

Version 12.0 A4-1 12/05

STRAP
Global Area Loads Applied as Joint Loads:
The program divides the load area into small quads and calculates an equivalent point load applied at the
center of each quad. These point loads are then applied to the structure as explained in Concentrated global
loads applied as joint loads. The density of the load quads may be defined by the user in the Command Mode
only.

Note:
• If the load area boundary does not coincide exactly with the edges of the model, small discrepancies will
result in the equivalent point load calculations.

A3.1.2 Global Loads Applied as Beam Loads

Global Point Loads Applied as Beam Loads:

Referring to figure (a) below, a concentrated global load P1 is applied to the surrounding beams inversely
proportional to the lengths of the perpendiculars drawn from the load to these beams.

In the example shown in figure (b) below, a perpendicular cannot be drawn to beam 22 and so none of load
P1 will be applied to this beam, even if beam 22 is included in the "BEAM list" in the global load command.

Loads falling outside the model boundary will be treated in a similar fashion. For example, in figure (b), all of
load P2 is applied to beam 33, while load P3 is ignored by the program.

In the example of figure (a), the entire load P1 will be applied to beam 44 if only beam 44 is included in the
"Beam list".

Global Area Loads Applied as Beam Loads:

The program translates the global area load to linear beam loads as follows:

Referring to figure (a) below, the program bisects the angle between each beam and the surrounding beams
to create areas to be allocated to each beam. If a beam is not included in the "LIST", then the program will
ignore that beam, as in the example of figure (b) below, where beams 1 and 2 are not in the list.

Note:
The entire global area load will always be applied to the model:
• Loads not completely covering a space and loads lying outside the model boundary are treated according
to the rules explained above.

Version 12.0 A4-2 12/05

STRAP
• Loads on areas that are closer to a node than to any of the adjacent beams are applied as joint loads. For
example:

A3.1.3 Global Loads Applied as Element Loads

Global Point Loads Applied as Element Loads

Concentrated global loads applied as element loads will actually be applied as Joint Loads as described in
Global point loads applied as joint loads, but without the additional applied moments at the nodes.

Only concentrated loads falling within an element boundary will be applied.

Global Area Loads Applied as Element Loads

The program will apply the area load as element pressure on all elements lying under the area load boundary.
Loads on elements not included in the "ELEM list" will be ignored. See the figure below for a typical example.

If the area load only covers part of a specific element, the total load on the element will be applied uniformly
to the entire element surface, thereby reducing the element pressure. Loads lying outside the model boundary
will be ignored.

For example:

The total load of 12 tons is allocated as follows:

• elements 28,29 : 1.00 t/m5 = 4.00 t
• elements 27,38,39 : 0.50 t/m5 = 3.00 t
• element 37 : 0.25 t/m5 = 0.50 t
• ignored: (2.0 + 3.0 - 0.5) = 4.50 m5 = 4.50 t

Version 12.0 A4-3 12/05

STRAP

A4 Appendix - Solution

** This page is deliberately blank **

Version 12.0 A5-1 12/05

STRAP

A5 Appendix - Results
A5.1 BCF.DAT

The allowable compression stress factors for all effective buckling lengths in axially loaded beams are
contained in file BCF.DAT.

The file contains the data for 13 different types of structural steel. The user may update the file or may add
additional steel types using the computer's editor.

The file format is:

13
ST37 1 16000.0 -14000.0
ST52 1 16000.0 -14000.0
PIPE37 1 16000.0 -14000.0
PIPE52 1 16000.0 -14000.0
G43 2 15500.0 -15500.0
G50 2 21500.0 -21500.0
G55 2 26500.0 -26500.0
MAIN36 2 15200.2 -15200.2
BRAC36 2 15200.2 -15200.2
MAIN42 2 17733.6 -17733.6
BRAC42 2 17733.6 -17733.6
MAIN50 2 21111.5 -21111.5
BRAC50 2 21111.5 -21111.5
ST37
100 100 101 101 101 101 102 102 102 102
103 103 103 104 104 104 104 105 105 105
106 106 106 106 107 107 107 108 108 108
.
863 870 878 885 892 900 907 915 922 930
937 945 953 960 968 976 984 991 999 1007
1015
PIPE37
.
.
where:
line 1:
The number of steel type tables contained in the file. Format: I4
lines 2 - 14:
For each steel type:
• The steel type name.
• Type of code calculation:
1: indicates that the code increases the actual axial stress by the factor in the table to take into account the
buckling effect. (German code)
2: indicates that the code decreases the allowable stress. (American, British codes)
• The allowable tension stress (units = ton/m5)
• The allowable compression stress when kl/r = 0.

Format: A6,I2,F9.1,1X,F9.1

Version 12.0 A6-1 12/05

STRAP
line 15:
Steel type name of first table. Format: A6

lines 16 - 39:
Stress factors (*100) for all kl/r from 0 to 250.
Format (for each row): 10I5

Lines 15 to 39 are repeated for each steel type.

Examples:

• Code Type 1 (German code):

The program calculates the effective stress for any kl/r as follows:
Feff = Factual * K / 100
where K = number in table corresponding to kl/r of member.

Example: kl/r = 26 ; corresponding no. in table = 107

Steel type ST37
Actual compression stress = 10750 t/m5

Feff = 10750 * 107 /100 = 11503 t/m5

• Code Type 2 (British and American Codes):

The program calculates the allowable compression stress for any kl/r as follows:
Fall = F’all / ( K / 100)
where: F'all = Fall when kl/r = 0
K = number in table corresponding to kl/r of member.

Example: kl/r = 26 ; corresponding no. in table = 107

F'all = 5500.

Fall = 15500.0 / (107/100) = 14486 t/m5

Version 12.0 A6-2 12/05

STRAP
A5.2 Reinforcement - Method of Calculation

A5.2.1 ACI 318-02

A5.2.1.1 Moments

Md = M/φ = M, where M = design moment in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP
moment or the Wood & Armer moment

For pure bending, φ = 0.9

Section dimensions and stress block:

where: β1= 0.85 for f'c < 4000 psi

β1= 0.65 for f'c > 8000 psi
and linear when 4000 < f’c < 8000
Mcd = the moment corresponding to the case where the compression block height is the maximum allowed
by the Code in pure bending.
= 0.638 β 1 k2 (1.0 - 0.375 β 1 k2) bd55 f'c
where k2 = 87000/(87000 + fy)

A5.2.1.2 Axial force

Nd = N/N where N = design axial force in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP force
or the Wood & Armer force.

For pure axial force:

tension: φ = 0.9
compression φ = 0.9 - 2N/(f'c Ag) > 0.7

where Ag = gross area of section

Version 12.0 A6-3 12/05

STRAP
A5.2.1.3 Combined moment and axial force

bending and tension: φ = 0.9

bending and compression φ = 0.9 - 2N/(f'c Ag) > 0.7

Transposing the axial force to the tension steel level:

A5.2.1.4 Reinforcement

There are three design cases:

• Section in tension and compression:

Msd > Mcd
∆M= Msd - Mcd
A's = ∆M/(d - d') fy
As = A's + Mcd/(zminqfy) - Nd/fy
where: zmin = d ( 1 - 0.375β 1k2)

Msd < Mcd

As = Msd / (1 - 0.5ϖ) d fy - Nd/fy

• Entire section in tension:

where: e = Md/Nd

Version 12.0 A6-4 12/05

STRAP
• Entire section in compression:

∆M = Msd - Mcd
∆M <0
As, A's not required
∆M >0
∆M' = M'sd - Mcd
M'sd = Md - Nd (h/2 - d')
A's = ∆M/(d - d') fy
As = ∆M'/(d - d') fy if ∆M' > 0
= 0.0 if ∆M' < 0

Note: the program does not calculate minimum reinforcement

A5.2.2 BS8110

A5.2.2.1 Moments

Md = design moment in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP moment or the
Wood & Armer moment

Section dimensions and stress block:

Mcd = the moment corresponding to the case where the compression block height is the maximum allowed
by the Code in pure bending.
= 0.156 bd² fcu

A5.2.2.2 Axial force

Nd = Design axial force in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP force or the Wood
& Armer force.

Version 12.0 A6-5 12/05

STRAP
A5.2.2.3 Combined moment and axial force

Transposing the axial force to the tension steel level:

A5.2.2.4 Reinforcement

There are three design cases:

• Section in tension and compression:

Msd > Mcd

∆M= Msd - Mcd
A's = ∆M/(d - d') 0.95 fy
As = A's + Mcd/(0.775d 0.95 fy) - Nd/0.95 fy
Msd < Mcd

As = Msd / (1 - 0.5ϖ) d 0.95 fy - Nd/0.95 fy

• Entire section in tension:

where: e = Md/Nd

• Entire section in compression:

)M = Msd - Mcd

Version 12.0 A6-6 12/05

STRAP
∆M <0
As, A's not required
∆M >0
∆M' = M'sd - Mcd
M'sd = Md - Nd (h/2 - d')
A's = ∆M/(d - d') 0.95 fy
As = ∆M'/(d - d') 0.95 fy if ∆M' > 0
= 0.0 if ∆M' < 0

Note: the program does not calculate minimum reinforcement

A5.2.3 Eurocode 2

A5.2.3.1 Moments

Md = design moment in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP moment or the
Wood & Armer moment

Section dimensions and stress block:

Mcd = the moment corresponding to the case where the compression block height is the maximum allowed
by the Code in pure bending.
• for C12/15 to C35/45: [(x/d)max = 0.45]
Mcd = 0.167 bd55 fck
• for C40/50 and greater: [(x/d)max = 0.35]
Mcd = 0.136 bd55 fck

A5.2.3.2 Axial force

Nd = design axial force in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP force or the Wood
& Armer force.

Version 12.0 A6-7 12/05

STRAP
A5.2.3.3 Combined moment and axial force

Transposing the axial force to the tension steel level:

A5.2.3.4 Reinforcement

There are three design cases:

• Section in tension and compression:

Msd > Mcd
∆M = Msd - Mcd
A's = ∆M/(d - d') 0.87 fy
As = A's + Mcd/(zmin q0.87 fy) - Nd/0.87 fy
C12/15 to C35/45: zmin = 0.82d
C40/50 and greater: zmin = 0.86d

Msd < Mcd

As = Msd / (1 - 0.5ϖ) d 5 0.87 fy - Nd/0.87 fy

• Entire section in tension:

where: e = Md/Nd

• Entire section in compression:

Version 12.0 A6-8 12/05

STRAP

∆M = Msd - Mcd
∆M <0
As, A's not required
∆M >0
∆M' = M'sd - Mcd
M'sd = Md - Nd(h/2 - d')
A's = ∆M/(d - d') 0.87 fy
As = ∆M'/(d - d') 0.87 fy if ∆M' > 0
= 0.0 if ∆M' < 0

Note: the program does not calculate minimum reinforcement

Version 12.0 A6-9 12/05

STRAP
A5.2.4 CSA A.23.3

A5.2.4.1 Moments:

Md = design moment in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP moment or the
Wood & Armer moment

Section dimensions and stress block:

where:
α1 = 0.85 - 0.0015 f'c > 0.67 (10-1)
β 1 = 0.97 - 0.0025 f'c > 0.67 (10-2)
φc = 0.60 (§ 8.4.2)
φs = 0.85

Mcd = the moment corresponding to the case where the compression block height is the maximum allowed
by the Code in pure bending.
= (α1 φc) (β 1 k2) (1.0 - 0.5 β 1 k2) bd55 f'c

where k2 = 700/(700 + fy) N/mm55

A5.2.4.2 Axial force

Nd = N where N = design axial force in the direction being considered. The value may be the STRAP
force or the Wood & Armer force.

A5.2.4.3 Combined moment and axial force

Transposing the axial force to the tension steel level:

Version 12.0 A6-10 12/05

STRAP
A5.2.4.4 Reinforcement

There are three design cases:

• Section in tension and compression:
Msd > Mcd
∆M = Msd - Mcd
A's = ∆M/(d - d') Ns fy
As = A's + Mcd/(zmin q fy) - Nd/Ns fy
where: zmin = d (1 - 0.5 β 1 k2)

Msd < Mcd

As = Msd/{φs fy (d - 0.5a)} - Nd/φs fy
where:

• Entire section in tension:

where: e = Md/Nd

• Entire section in compression:

M = Msd - Mcd
∆M <0
As, A's not required
∆M >0
)M' = M'sd - Mcd
M'sd = Md - Ndq(h/2 - d')
A's = ∆M/(d - d') φs fy
As = ∆M'/(d - d') φs fyif ∆M' > 0
= 0.0 if ∆M' < 0
Note: the program does not calculate minimum reinforcement.

Version 12.0 A6-11 12/05

STRAP
A5.3 Punching - Calculation method

A5.3.1 BS8110

The program calculates the punching stress and reinforcement according to Code Section 3.7 - "Flat Slabs".

The program calculates the area of single- or multiple-leg stirrup type

slab shear reinforcement as explained in Section 3.7.7.5 and 3.7.7.6
of the Code:
The reinforcement is calculated from the following equations:

where:
• vc, the design concrete shear stress, is calculated from the equations in Table 3.8.
• v = Veff/ud (eq. 28)
• Asv = the cross sectional area of all legs on one peripheral line , i.e. the sum of the vertical legs of links
1,2,3 and 4 in the figure above.
• the 0.5 factor has been added because the Code equations calculate the area for two adjacent
reinforcement perimeters; refer to Figure 3.17
• Veff is calculated as explained below

Note:
• the shear capacity is initially calculated at 1.5d from the face of the column
• the shear stress is checked at successive perimeters at 0.75d until a perimeter is reached where v < vc.
Note that the program assumes that Asv is identical for all reinforcement perimeters
• the program checks that {bmct D:\FOREHELP\v110\PU_EQ_7B.BMP} at the face of the column and that
v < 2vc at 1.5d from the face of the column

A portion of the unbalanced moment Mt at the column-slab connection is assumed to be transferred by shear.
The program calculates an equivalent shear Veff.
• centre columns:

the program calculates the value in both directions and uses the maximum
• corner columns and edge columns where the moment acts about the axis parallel to the edge:
Veff = 1.25 V (3.7.6.3)
• edge columns where the moment acts about the axis perpendicular to the edge:

where x is the length of the side of the perimeter parallel to the axis of bending:

Version 12.0 A6-12 12/05

STRAP
A5.3.2 Eurocode 2

The program calculates the punching stress and reinforcement according to EC2 (2002) Section 6.4 -
"Punching"

The program calculates the area of single- or multiple-leg stirrup type

slab shear reinforcement:
The program assumes that the distance between the radial lines of
shear reinforcement at the control perimeter is always less than 2d.

vRd,c, the punching shear resistance provided by the concrete in slabs

without reinforcement, is calculated as follows:

The shear is checked at the basic control perimeter at 2d from the face of the column, as follows:
• Centre column: u1, according to Section 6.4.2.
• Edge column: u1*, according to Figure 6.20a
• Corner column: u1*, according to Figure 6.20b

When vEd > vRd,c , shear reinforcement is calculated from the equation:

where:
• s is always assumed = d/2
• Av = the cross sectional area of all legs on one peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the perimeter
of the column section, i.e. the sum of the vertical legs of stirrups 1,2,3 and 4 in the figure above.
• β represents the portion of the unbalanced moment at the column-slab connection assumed to be
transferred by shear:
- Centre column:

- Edge column, moment only about axis parallel to edge (towards interior):
β =1.0 (6.4.3-4)
- Edge column, moment about both axes (towards interior):

- Corner column (moments towards interior):

β = u1/u1* (6.48)
- Edge/corner column, moment towards exterior:

uout, the 'control perimeter' at which shear reinforcement is no longer required, is calculated from:

The program also checks that adjacent to the column:

Version 12.0 A6-13 12/05

STRAP
A5.3.3 ACI 318

The program calculates the punching stress and reinforcement according to Section 11.12 in the Code -
"Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings"

The program calculates the area of "single- or multiple-leg stirrup type slab
shear reinforcement" as shown in Fig. R11.12.3 of the Code:

The reinforcement is calculated from the following equations:

φ Vn > Vu (11-1)
Vn = Vc + Vs (11-2)

Vc, the nominal shear strength provided by the concrete in slabs without
reinforcement, is calculated as the minimum of:

bo is initially calculated at d/2 from the face of the column

When φ Vc < Vu , shear reinforcement is calculated from the equation:

where:
• (11.12.3.1)
• {s is always assumed = d/2
• Av = the cross sectional area of all legs on one peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the perimeter
of the column section (11.12.3.1), i.e. the sum of the vertical legs of stirrups 1,2,3 and 4 in the figure
above.
• the 'critical perimeter' is located where .

The program also checks that at d/2 from the face of the column

A portion of the unbalanced moment at the column-slab connection = γvMf is assumed to be transferred by
shear. The program calculates an equivalent shear Veff = vu bod
where:
•
•
• Mx1, Mx2 are the unbalanced moments
• cx1,cx2 are the distances from the centre-of-gravity of the critical
perimeter to the perimeter, in the direction being considered
• J = polar moment-of-inertia of the perimeter. For edge
columns where the slab edge is at an angle, the program
averages the length of the two unequal parallel sides of
the perimeter.

Version 12.0 A6-14 12/05

STRAP
A5.3.4 CSA A23.3

The program calculates the punching stress and reinforcement according to Section 13.4 in the Code - "Design
Procedures for Slabs Without Beams".

The program calculates the area of single- or multiple-leg stirrup type slab
shear reinforcement:

The reinforcement is calculated from the following equations:

• Vr > Vf (11-3)
• Vr = Vc + Vs (11-4)

Vc, the nominal shear strength provided by the concrete in slabs without
reinforcement, is calculated as the minimum of:

bo is initially calculated at d/2 from the face of the column

When Vc < Vf , shear reinforcement is calculated from the equation:

where:
•
• s is always assumed = d/2
• Av = the cross sectional area of all legs on one peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the perimeter
of the column section, i.e. the sum of the vertical legs of stirrups 1,2,3 and 4 in the figure above.
• the 'critical perimeter' is located where

The program also checks that at d/2 from the face of the column (13.4.9.2)
A portion of the unbalanced moment at the column-slab connection = γvMf is assumed to be transferred by
shear. The program calculates an equivalent shear Veff = vu bod
where:
•
•
• Mf,x1, Mf,y1 are the unbalanced moments
• e,x1,e,y1 are the distances from the centre-of-gravity of the critical perimeter to the perimeter, in the direction
being considered

• J = polar moment-of-inertia of the perimeter. For edge columns where the slab edge is at an angle, the
program averages the length of the two unequal parallel sides of the perimeter.

Version 12.0 A6-15 12/05

STRAP
A5.3.5 IS:456

The program calculates the punching stress and reinforcement according to Code Section 31 - "Flat Slabs".

The program calculates the area of single- or multiple-leg stirrup type slab
shear reinforcement

The shear stress is calculated from the equation:

bo is initially calculated at d/2 from the face of the column.

The nominal shear stress provided by the concrete in slabs without reinforcement = ksτc, where:

When τv > ksτc, the reinforcement is calculated from the following equation:
where:
• s is always assumed = d/2
• Av = the cross sectional area of all legs on one peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the perimeter
of the column section, i.e. the sum of the vertical legs of stirrups 1,2,3 and 4 in the figure above.
• the 'critical perimeter' is located where τv < 0.5τc

The program also checks that τv < 1.5τc at d/2 from the face of the column
A portion of the unbalanced moment at the column-slab connection = γvMf is assumed to be transferred by
shear. The program calculates an equivalent shear Veff = vu bod
where:
•
•
• Mx1, Mx2 are the unbalanced moments
• cx1,cx2 are the distances from the centre-of-gravity of the critical perimeter to the perimeter, in the direction
being considered

• J = polar moment-of-inertia of the perimeter. For edge columns where the slab edge is at an angle, the
program averages the length of the two unequal parallel sides of the perimeter.

Version 12.0 A6-16 12/05

STRAP

A6 Appendix - Dynamic
A6.1 IS 1893 (1984)

The program, by default, calculates the seismic response according to the IS 1893 (2000). To calculate the
response according to IS:1893-1984, please contact your STRAP dealer..

The program calculates the lateral loads according to the Modal Analysis method in Section 4.2.2, based on
the Average Acceleration Spectra in Fig.2.. The fundamental period, T, is taken from the Mode Shapes
analysis results and the other factors - soil type (â), importance(I), seismic zone (Fo), etc, are defined by the
user.

Codes
Select one of the design codes displayed in the pull-down menu.

No. of mode shapes

Specify the minimum number of mode shapes to be used in the seismic analysis. (Higher mode shapes usually
influence the results only slightly in standard models).

The code does not specify the minimum number of mode shapes to be used. The program uses the limit
specified in Eurocode 8, Section 3.3.2.3, Paragraph (6) - "the effective modal masses for the modes
considered amount to at least 90% of the total mass of the structure".

The program uses the maximum of the 'significant' no. of modes and the value entered here.

Soil coefficient
Specify the Soil coefficient according to Table 3 in the Code.

Importance factor

Version 12.0 A7-1 12/05

STRAP

Specify the Importance factor according to Table 4 in the Code.

Seismic zone factor

Specify the Seismic zone factor according to Table 2 in the Code.

Performance factor
Specify the Performance factor according to Table 5 in the Code.

Damping
Specify the percent damping of the structure required to calculate Sa/g = average acceleration coefficient
according to Figure 2 in the Code.

Scaling
Referring to other design codes (e.g. UBC), when the base shear calculated from the modal shape analysis
is different than the base shear calculated according to the approximate method, i.e. Section 4.2.2.1, all
corresponding responses, including moments and forces may be adjusted accordingly.

IS:1893 does not include any provisions for such scaling. The program allows the user to scale the results,
based solely on his engineering judgment and familiarity with methods of seismic analysis. The use of this
option to modify results is entirely the responsibility of the engineer.

The adjustment factor, v, is calculated as

v = Vb/Vl
where:
• Vb is calculated (by the user) according to the equation in Section 4.2.1.1
• Vl is the base shear calculated by the program according to the Modal Analysis method

Select:
No scaling
The program will use the base shear Vl that it calculated
Scaling
The program will scale all results by the factor v = Vb/Vl (≥ 1.0) where the value of Vb is entered by the user
in the dialog box.

Version 12.0 A7-2 12/05

STRAP

A7 Appendix - Steel Design

A7.1 Torsion

The calculation of torsion for hot-rolled structural steel sections is based on the following publication:
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction
Steel Design Guide Series - 9
"Torsional Analysis of Structural Steel Members"
by P.A. Seaburg and C.J. Carter
1997

Torsional moments applied to open sections generate rotation and warping of the section.

Pure torsion generates shear stresses in the section, while warping generates shear and normal stresses. For
example, an I-section:

The program carries out the following design checks:

• Shear stresses:
Jbx + Jby + Jt + Jw # Jallowable
where:
Jbx, Jby = major/minor axis bending shear stresses. The exact shear stress is calculated at all levels from
the equation Jb = VQ/It (the average shear stress V/Av is used for the shear design check)
Jt, Jw = pure torsion and warping shear stresses, as shown above.
Jallowable = the allowable stress for bending shear.

• Normal stresses:

where:
Fa = axial stress
Fbx, Fby = major/minor axis bending stresses
Fw = warping normal stress, as shown above.
Fall = allowable stresses for axial, bending and warping. Note that the program calculates both the
'local' and 'overall' (second order effects) values for axial and bending and uses the worst value

Version 12.0 A8-1 12/05

STRAP
For example, AISC-LRFD:

The program carries at the design checks at every 0.10L, i.e. 11 equidistant points along the span length (or
each component member of a combined beam).

The stresses are also checked at several points on the cross section:
• I - sections

• [ - sections

Note:
- Normal: pt.2 will always govern if "worst case" is specified for flange orientation.
- Torsion: pt.3 is at point of maximum torsion shear stress

• RHS
- Plane sections remain plane, i.e. no warping is present.
- The program assumes that torsional stresses are uniformly distributed over the face of the section; the
stresses are checked at the point of maximum τbx, τby

• T-sections
- Warping stresses in T-sections are usually negligible and are ignored by the program.
- shear stresses are checked at the point of maximum τbx, τby

• Angles
- Warping stresses in angles are usually negligible and are ignored by the program.
- shear stresses are checked at the point of maximum τbx, τby

• Pipes
- Plane sections remain plane, i.e. no warping is present.
- Torsional stresses are uniformly distributed over the face of the section; the stresses are checked at the
point of maximum τbx, τby.

• I+[

Version 12.0 A8-2 12/05

STRAP
• Cold-formed and user-defined sections
The program checks the stresses at both ends of all segments and at any point of maximum τb or τw along
the length of any segment. Torsion and warping are not calculated for sections with a closed portion.

Note:
• Tapered beam / combined beam composed of different sections:
The calculation of warping and torsion is not exact. When calculating the rotation function q at any point
along the length of the beam, the program assumes that the entire beam has the section properties found
at that point.

Refer also to Design assumptions for each Code.

A7.2 Steel Joists

The steel postprocessor checks and selects the standard open-web steel joists listed in the Steel Joist Institute
(SJI) Tables (1994).

All of the Steel postprocessor options are available for Joists, including min/max height, same section, etc.
Note that the program will not select a joist having a maximum fabrication span length (listed in the Tables) less
than the actual beam length.

The following joist types are available:

• K-series
• LH/DLH
• KCS

K-series, LH/DLH:
The tables list the safe uniform load carrying capacities. In order to check the adequacy of a joist for a
particular load case, the program calculates the following equivalent loads and compares them to the values
in the SJI tables:

• black figures in table (moments, shear):

w1= 8 Mmax / l55
w2= 2 Vmax / l
max(w1,w2) < W black

• red figures in table (deflections):

w1 < w red (360/k)

where:
- L/k is the allowable deflection value specified by the user (may be different for every combination).

For Limit States (LRFD) design codes, the program increases the uniform load values in the tables by the factor
N x 1.65 = 0.9 x 1.65 = 1.485

KCS:
• the maximum moments and shears in the joist are compared directly to the values in the table
• the actual deflection is calculated using the Gross moment of inertia values in the Table, using unfactored
loads.
• for Limit States (LRFD) design codes, the program increases the moment and shear values in the tables
by the factor Nx 1.65 = 0.9 x 1.65 = 1.485

Version 12.0 A8-3 12/05

STRAP

Hot-rolled steel codes: - Print file:

A7.11 BS5950 - CODES_UK.PDF

A7.12 Eurocode 3 - CODES_EURO.PDF

A7.13 AISC - LRFD - 1993 - CODES_USA.PDF

A7.14 AISC - ASD 1989 - CODES_USA.PDF

A7.15 AASHTO - LRFD - CODES_USA.PDF

A7.16 AASHTO - ASD - CODES_USA.PDF

A7.17 CSA A23.3 - CODES_CDN.PDF

A7.18 IS:800 (1984) - CODES_INDIA.PDF

A7.19 IS:800 (2003) - CODES_INDIA.PDF

A7.21 AISC 2005 - LRFD & ASD - CODES_USA.PDF

A7.22 IS:802 - CODES_INDIA.PDF

Cold-formed steel codes:

A7.31 AISI - LRFD & ASD - CODES_USA.PDF

A7.32 CSA - S136-94 - CODES_CDN.PDF

Version 12.0 A8-4 12/05

STRAP

A8 Concrete
Design code: Print file:

A8.1 BS8110 - CODES_UK.PDF

A8.2 Eurocode 2 - CODES_EURO.PDF

A8.3 ACI 318 - CODES_USA.PDF

A8.4 CSA A23.3 - CODES_CDN.PDF

A8.5 IS:456 - CODES_INDIA.PDF

Version 12.0 A9-1 12/05

STRAP

A9 Bridge Design

*** Blank page ***

Version 12.0 A10-1 12/05

STRAP

A10 POSTTEN

Design code: Print file:

A10.1 BS8110 - CODES_UK.PDF

A10.2 BS5400 - CODES_UK.PDF

A10.3 Eurocode 2 - CODES_EUR.PDF

A10.4 ACI 318 -

A10.5 AASHTO -

A10.6 CSA A23.3 -

A10.7 IS:456 -

Version 12.0 A11-1 12/05